Skip to main content

Conference on Aircraft Operating Problems

19650021499 · NASA · 1965

Public domain · NASATechnical Reports

Overview

Conference on aircraft operational problems of general, supersonic, V/STOL and STOL aircraft

Publisher
NASA
Document
19650021499
Year
1965
Pages
315

Document

NASA

SP-83

f_irhhNTl_Ir D IP NTf-_I[Z_ _

AIRCRAFT

OPERATING

PROBLEM,S

LANGLEY RESEARCH CENTER

MAY 10-12, 1965

m

NATIONAL AERONAUTICS AND SPACE ADMINISTRATION

NASA SP-83

CONFERENCE ON

AIRCRAFT OPERATING

PROBLEMS

Langley Research Center

May 10-12, 1965

Scientific and Technical Information Division 1 9 6 5 NATIONAL AERONAUTICS AND SPACE ADMINISTRATION Washington, D.C.

For sale by the Clearinghouse for Federal Scientific and Technical Information Springfield, Virginia 22151 - Price $3.00 PREFACE This compilation includes papers presented at the NASA Conference on Aircraft Operating Problems held at the Langley Research Center on May lO-12, 1965. Contributions were made by representatives of the Ames Research Center, the Flight Research Center, and the Langley Research Center of NASA, as well as by representatives of the Federal Aviation Agency.

CONTENTS PREFACE .................................. i GENERAL STUDIES i. RECENT STUDIES OF RUNWAY ROUGHNESS ................. .. 1 By Garland J. Morris and Albert W. Hall_ NASA Langley Research Center By Walter B. Horne and Upshur T. Joyner, NASA Langley Research Center By Roy Steiner, NASA Langley Research Center .

PRELIMINARY STUDY OF STEEP INSTRUMENT APPROACH OF THREE CONVENTIONAL AIRCRAFT ......................

By Albert W. Hall 3 Robert A. Champine 3 and Donald J. McGinley, Jr., NASA Langley Research Center SOME FACTORS AFFECTING FATIGUE OF AIRCRAF_ STRUCTURES ........

5. 37 By Herbert F. Hardrath, NASA Langley Research Center , USE OF VERY WEAK RADIATION SOURCES TO DETERMINE AYRCRAF_ By Fred J. Drinkwater III and Bernard R. Kibort, NASA Ames Research Center A LABORATORY INVESTIGATION OF TURBULENCE DETECTION USING A LASER , 53 By Kent Bourquin and Fred H. Shigemotoj NASA Ames Research Center , 61 SIMULATOR EVALUATION OF A DISPLAY FOR MANUAL ZER0-ZERO LANDINGS .

By Joseph G. Douvillier, Jr., NASA Ames Research Center , FACTORS RELATING TO THE AIRPORT-COMMUNITY NOISE PROBL_M .......

By Harvey H. Hubbard, Jimmy M. Cawthorn, and W. Latham Copeland, NASA Langley Research Center 10.

PRELIMINARY MEAS_S OF TAKE-0FF AND LANDING NOISE FROM A By Carole S. Tanner and Norman J. McLeod, NASA Flight Research Center iii SUBSONIC AIRCRAFT OPERATIONAL EXPERIENCES OF TURBINE-POWERED COMMERCIAL ll.

TRANSPORT AIRPLANES .......................

By Paul A. Hunter and Walter G. Walker, NASA Langley Research Center SIMULATOR STUDIES OF THE DEEP STALL ................

12.

. By Maurice D. White and George E. Cooper, NASA Ames Research Center i13 DEEP-STALL AERODYNAMIC CHARACTERISTICS OF T-TAIL AIRCRAFT ......

13: By Robert T. Taylor and Edward J. Ray, NASA Langley Research Center FLIGHT TESTS RELATED TO JET-TRANSPORT UPSET AND TURBULENT-AIR 14.

PENETRATION ...........................

By William H. Andrews_ Stanley P. Butchart_ Thomas R. Sisk, and Donald L. Hughes, NASA Flight Research Center SIMULATOR INVESTIGATIONS OF THE PROBLEMS OF FLYING A SWEPT-WING 15.

TRANSPORT AIRCRAFT IN HEAVY TURBULENCE .............

By Richard S. Bray and William E. Larsen, NASA Ames Research Center SUPERSONIC AIRCRAFT 16. A SIMULATOR STUDY OF TAKE-OFF CHARACTERISTICS OF PROPOSED SUPERSONIC TRANSPORTS ......................

BY Charles T. Jackson, Jr., and C. Thomas Snyder, NASA Ames Research Center By Thomas A. Toll, NASA Langley Research Center 18. EFFECTS OF THE SUPERSONIC TRANSPORT ON THE AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL SYSTEM ..........................

By Joseph P. 0'Brien and Andrew L. Sluka, Federal Aviation Agency EFFECTS OF THE AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL SYSTIM ON THE 19.

By Norman S. Silsby, Milton D. McLaughlin, and Michael C. Fischer, NASA Langley Research Center iv By Thomas R. Sisk, Kirk S. Irwin, and James M. McKay, NASA Flight Research Center 21.

CONSIDERATION 0FFUEL REQUIREMENTS FOR SUPERSONIC TRANSPORT By Joseph W. Stickle, NASA Langley Research Center 22.

THE EFFECT OF YAW COUPLING IN TUENING MANEUVERS OF LARGE By Walter E. McNeill and Robert C. Innis, NASA Ames Research Center 23. AN ASSESSMENT OF A TITANIUM ALLOY FOR SUPERSONIC TRANSPORT BY George J. Heimerl and Herbert F. Hardrath, NASA Langley Research Center e4.

IMPLICATIONS OF THE EFFECTS OF SURFACE T_MPE_AND By John B. Peterson, Jr., and Albert L. Braslow_ NASA Langley Research Center eS.

By Harry W. Carlson, F. Edward McLean, and Wilbur D. Middleton, NASA Langley Research Center e6.

SIGNIFICANCE OF THE ATMOSPHERE AND AIRCRASVf OPERATIONS By Domenic J. Maglieri and David A. Hilton, NASA Langley Research Center /'_. 1_1_T'1_ A T AXTT A mTf'_'kT .... _,_-_., _. J-_11_,I_ AIRCRAFT eT.

OPERATIONAL EXPERIENCES OF GENERAL AVIATION AIRCRAFT ......... " 257 By Joseph W. Jewel, Jr., and Walter G. Walker, NASA Langley Research Center 28.

BY James S. Bowman, NASA Langley Research Center V/STOL AND _ STOL AIRCRAFT eg.

By John P. Campbell, NASA Langley Research Center 50.

V/STOL AIRCRAFT OPERATION IN THE TERMINAL AREA ............. e81 By John P. Reeder, NASA Langley Research Center V 31. 287 GROUND EFFECTS ON V/STOL AND STOL AIRCRA_ ..............

By Richard E. Kuhn 3 NASA Langley Research Center OPERATIONAL EXPERIENCES WITH TEE X-14A DEFLECTED-JET 32.

VTOL AIRCRAP_ ..........................

_99 By L. Stewart Rolls, NASA Ames Research Center 33. SOME PERFORMANCE AND HANDLING-QUALITIES CONSIDERATIONS FOR OPERATION OF STOL AIRCRAFT ....................

3o9 . By Seth B. Anderson, Hervey C. Quigley, and Robert C. Innis, NASA Ames Research Center 34: LOW-SPEED FLIGHT CHARACTERISTICS OF A POWERED-LI_ JET TRANSPORT By Robert 0. Schade and Harold L. Crane, NASA Langley Research Center vi

1. RECENT STUDIES OF RUNWAY ROUGHNESS

By Garland J. Morris and Albert W. Hall

NASALangley Research Center

SU_WARY

rough runways are presented. Someof these investigations were conducted coop-

eratively with the airport operators, with the Federal Aviation Agency, and.

with the U.S. Air Force. The studies showthat criteria based on power spec-

tral levels of runway-profile data are not sufficient to define acceptable

levels of runway roughness from the piloting viewpoint. Because of the large

variation in response characteristics between various types of aircraft, a run-

way may be acceptable for someaircraft and unacceptable for others. A crite-

rion for roughness, therefore, should be expressed in terms of aircraft

response - preferably, cockpit acceleration. A criterion suggested is that

the maximum vertical acceleration in the cockpit should not exceed _+0.4gfor

sections of the runway where precise aircraft control is required.

INTRODUCTION

For several years, the National Aeronautics and SpaceAdministration has

conducted research related to aircraft operating problems on rough runways.

Most of the past research efforts have been concerned with the loads problems.

These problems are of concern during all phases of ground operations - taxiing,

take-off, and landing. Recently, the research efforts have been directed more

to the piloting difficulties resulting from rough runways. These problems have

generally occurred during the high-speed portion of the take-off run a_d, occasionally, during the high-speed portion of the landing.

On a rough runway, the cockpit environment is one of decreased instrument

readability, pronounced pitching or plunging of the aircraft, and excessive

accelerations. Such an environment seriously degrades the pilot's ability to

control the airplane precisely during critical phases of the take-off or

landing.

This paper presents a progress report on recent NASA research pertainlng

to the piloting difficulties caused by rough runways. Someof these investiga-

tions were conducted cooperatively with airport operators, with the Federal

Aviation Agency, and with the U.S. Air Force.

DISCUSSION

RoughnessCriteria Based on Profile Data

A considerable amount of work has been done in past years to define the

characteristics of runway roughness. For this purpose, detailed runway eleva-

tion profiles were obtained for many runways. Short-section profiles, typical

of the profiles that have been measured, are presented in figure 1. The three

sections shown(designated runways A, B, and C) cover a range of roughness from

smooth to rough. Each profile contains, in somewhata randommanner, waves of

different wavelengths with the amplitudes generally becoming larger as the

wavelengths increase. The order of magnitude of runway-profile deviations that

can cause appreclableaircraft response is illustrated by the section from run-

way C, which has caused complaints of roughness. One rather well-defined

depression has a distance of about 100 feet from peak to peak with a profile

depression between peaks slightly greater than 0.1 foot.

Past work indicated that a more concise and convenient representation of

the roughness characteristics could be obtained by converting the elevation-

profile measurementsto power spectral plots as shown in figure 2. The ordi-

nate is the power spectral density, which indicates the relative amplitudes of

the roughness corresponding to the wavelengths shownon the abscissa. The

higher a curve is in the figure, the higher the indicated roughness level.

A study of the power spectral curves for a number of runways led to a pro-

posal for power spectral criteria for runway roughness (ref. 1). The criteria

included two power spectral levels, one for "new construction" and one for

"needs repair." The spectral level for the new-constructlon criterion was

established by the power spectral density of runway B which has caused no com-

plaints of roughness. (See figs. 1 and 2.) It was felt that newly constructed

runways would be satisfactory if their power spectrum fell below the line for

new construction. Similarly, repairs were thought to be necessary if the spec-

trum of an existing runway exceeded the needs-repair criterion. Meeting the

new-construction criterion apparently is not an unreasonable task, inasmuch as

recently constructed runway A is much smoother than the new-construction

criterion.

Shortly after attention was directed toward problems involving piloting

difficulties, it becameapparent that the power spectral criterion was not com-

pletely satisfactory to define an acceptable level of roughness for all oper-

atlng problems (ref. 2). This concluslonwas indicated, in one instance, where

two runways having nearly identical power spectral levels caused complaints of

roughness by pilots in one case and caused no complaints in the other case.

The inability of the power spectra to determine the relative level of

roughness in all cases, particularly from the piloting viewpoint, is not too

surprising when the characteristics of a power spectrum are considered to be as

follows: The runway power-spectral-densityvariatlon with wavelength repre-

sents an average roughness over the entire runway length for various wave-

lengths, does not distinguish between manybumpsof small amplitude and a few

bumpsof large amplitude at a given wavelength, and places no importance on

location of roughness along the runway. Because of the averaging and loss-of-

roughness-location information, the power spectral representation does not have

the ability to detect profile defects which might cause piloting problems.

However 3 as originally intended, the runway spectral level is an indication of

average roughness and for this purpose the spectra are still considered to be

useful in analysis of loads and fatigue problems where a large number of run=

ways are to be considered.

Aircraft ResponseCharacteristics

Shortly after the Jet transports were placed in service, it was found that

runways which had been satisfactory for piston-englne aircraft were causing_ complaints by the Jet pilots. Thus, the pilot's impression of the roughness of a given runway Is dependent upon airplane type. Inasmuch as the pilot's impres- sion of runway roughness comes from the manner in which a particular airplane responds to the runway, it is believed that for piloting problems 3 roughness criteria should be expressed in terms of aircraft response in the cockpit.

Figure 3 shows the spread in response characteristics of various types of aircraft ranging from a light Jet trainer to a heavy Jet transport. Each response curve _as obtained by a power spectral analysis of the cockpit accel- eration measured during a constant speed run along a runway. Each response curve presented in this figure was normalized to its own maximum value; there- fore, these curves serve only to illustrate the difference in the low-frequency response modes for the aircraft types shown.

Several years ago, the available data on airplane response to runway and taxiway roughness indicated that practically all significant aircraft response occurred in a rather narrow frequency range of l_to 2 cycles per second. The aircraft types shown in figure 5 have extended this frequency range. The most significant point to note is the trend toward lower frequencies for the larger aircraft. T--hetrend to low response frequencies has been accompanied b_y an increase in runway speeds. These two factors have increased the range of roughness wavelengths of importance.

The relation between speed, frequency, and roughness wavelength is shoe in figure 4 as the variation of wavelength with speed for several frequencies.

At a given frequency, the wavelength increases with increasing speed and, at a given speed, the wavelength increases with decreasing frequency. The lowest resonant frequency for each aircraft and the highest runway speed (take-off speed) determines the maxlmumwavelength which would be expected to exclte any" significant response for that aircraft. For each aircraft, the shaded area encloses wavelengths capable of exciting aircraft response within the frgquency spectrum of the particular aircraft. For example, the Jet tralnerwould ride over 200- or 300-foot-wavelength bumps wlth little or no response. However, these same bumps would be expected to excite considerable response for a jet transport since these wavelengths are within the area shoe for this airplane.

It is this difference in response characteristics for various aircraft types which accounts for the fact that a runway can be satisfactory for some air- craft but cause trouble for others.

The wavelength, speed, and frequency relations are illustrated in figure 5 by actual measurements which were obtained during an investigation with a medium Jet bomber. The small-amplitude bumps shown on the runway profile have about 100-foot wavelengths and amplitudes between O.1 and 0.2 foot. At 75 knots, the lO0-foot wavelengths result in a frequency of 1.2 cps which corresponds to the lowest resonant frequency for this airplane. (See fig. 6.) At lO0 knots, the lO0-foot wavelengths result in a frequency of 1.7 cps. The large difference in acceleration response measured at the two speeds shows the effect of a small frequency change near the resonant frequency (fig. 6). Thus, small changes in aircraf_t response characteristics, or small changes in operating conditions, can have a large effect on the resulting aircraft response.

Runway Repair The problem facing the airport operators when they receive complaints of roughness from pilots is to determine whether the runway actually needs repair and, if so, where the particular areas are that need repair.

At the present time, it is thought that the most direct and practical method of establishing the repair requirements is to relate the magnitude of the cockpit acceleration to the runway profile and to note those sections of the runway which produce excessive accelerations. This approach is illustrated in figure 7- The lower plot shows the runway elevation for a 4000-foot section of the runway. The upper plot shows the maximum cockpit accelerations recorded at various runway locations and at three speeds during tests of a medium Jet bomber.

In order to determine which areas are in need of repair, it is necessary to establish an acceleration level as a basis for separating the satisfactory from the unsatisfactory sections of the runway. Based on correlations of meas- ured accelerations with pilot complaints during a _umber of investigations, it appears that an acceleration level of _+0.4g is approximately the dividing llne between satisfactory and unsatisfactory runways from the pilot's viewpoint.

Consequently, a maxlmumvertical acceleration in the cockpit of -+0.4g is sug- gested as a criterion for assessing whether a runway needs repair and also as a basis for locating the areas in need of repair. This criterion would be most applicable for portions of the runway where precision of control is most crit- ical, such as during the high-speed portion of the take-off run.

"In figure 73 all five of the runway locations identified by the accelera- tion measurements were considered to be in need of repair. This section of the runway is located near the middle of a military runway with the medium Jet bombers generally lifting off in the region between 6500 and 7000 feet; there- fore, the roughness is critical in this section. This investigation was ini- tiated by complaints of a large pitching oscillation near llft-off causing the airplane to become prematurely airborne. During one of the take-offs made for this investigation, a rather severe pitching oscillation of 2½ v double ampli- tude was measured. The areas that caused this oscillation were the same as those located by the ±O.4g criterion during the constant-speed tests. (See fig. 7 at distances along runway of 550% 6000, and 6600 feet.) Repairs to reduce the acceleration level for these three areas would also be expected to eliminate the pitching problem.

CONCLUDINGR_ This paper has presented a report of recent NASA research related to piloting problems caused by runway roughness.

It has been shown that criteria based on power spectral levels of runwaM_ profile data are not sufficient to define acceptable levels of runway roughness from the piloting viewpolnt.

Because of the large variation in response characteristics between various types of aircraft, a runway may be acceptable for some aircraft and unaccept- able for others. A criterion for roughness, therefore, should be expressed in terms of aircraft response - preferably, cockpit acceleration.

A criterion suggested is that the maximum vertical acceleration in the cockpit should not exceed ±0.4g for sections of the runway where precise air- craft control is required.

REFERENCES i. Milwitzky, Benjamin: Study of Taxiing Problems Associated With _nway Roughness. NASA MEM0 2-21-59L, 1959.

2. Coleman 3 Thomas L.; and Hall, Albert W.: Implications of Recent Investiga- tions on Runway Roughness Criteria. AGAED Rept. 416, Jan. 1963.

MEASURED PROFILES TYPICAL SPECTRA OF RUNWAY ELEVATION RUNWAY ELEVATIONp RUNWAY A FT .I /?UNWAY .,_ _SMOOTH) E"\ I I V'l L I I i .oJ _... _._ COMPLAINTS) I POWER • 2_RUNff,"AY B SPECTRAL "1 t I I I I DENSIT_ FT 2 RAD/FT .0001 NEW __.,/_ ,"_ "S F RUNWAY C CONSTRUCTION _,_ _,_ .00001 _'_ "I , I i I i / 0 I00 200 SO0 400 500 "00000500 I00 50 I0 5 OISTANCE ALONG RUNWAY, FT WAVELENGTH, FT Figure i Figure 2 AIRCRAFT RESPONSE TO RUNWAY ROUGHNESS VARIATION OF WAVELENGTH WITH SPEED FOR VARIOUS FREQUENCIES /-JET TRANSPORT / /-MEDIUM JET BOMBER JET TRANSPORT JET TRAINER FREOUENCY, CPS 400 _75 .8 I.C _ .,_,j i_V/--JET TRAINER NORMALIZED -6 _A_KE/OFF SPEED COCKPIT / I ACCELERATION i / I RESPONSE WAVELENGTH.

i _ / .4 FEET 200 I _2 j / _E-OFF SPEED .2 I II ' , I I00 ._..-----_5 ' l • _ • . , "_'_----'_ ""-7 -_ _---_ - - j 0 50 I00 150 200 0 9. 3 4 5 6 7 SPEEO, KNOTS FREQUENCY, CP$ Figure 4 Figure 3 RESPONSE OF A MEDIUM JET BOMBER TO RUNWAY ROUGHNESS VARIATION OF AIRCRAFT RESPONSE WITH RUNWAY DISTANCE AT TWO TEST SPEEDS I.C MEOIUM JET BOMBE.R .. I00 KNOTS COCKPIT

---I=

.E NORMALIZED ACCELERATION, j , COCKPIT 9 UNITS 'E I I _. 75KNOTS ACCELERATION oF.,v_ A =A I1_. /"k RESPONgE F-.- "" ""t" "-i" v" x .4 .I

RUNWAY _, ,, _/_

ELEVATION, O_ _ / \ I v \ jw_ I

FT ..,I ° ,_, V, , ,_

I 2 3 FREQUENC_ CPS

OISTA.CE ALO._ RUNWAY, _

Figure 6 Figure MAXIMUM RESPONSE CAUSED BY PARTICULAR SECTIONS OF RUNWAY SPEED, KNOTS 0 50 [] 75 0 100 COCKPIT NEEDS REPAIR ACCEL., +,4 / g UNITS SATISFACTORY I I I i I I i I0 I !

I i t RUNWAY I ELEVATION, FEET 2 __ I I I I I J I t 0 5,000 6,000 7,000 8,000 9,000 DISTANCE ALONG RUNWAY, FT Fisure 7 _a TRACTION OF PNEUMATIC TIRES ON WET RUNWAYS By Walter B. Horne and Upshur T. Joyner NASA Langley Research Center SUMMARY Recent work on the traction of pneumatic tires on wet runways is discussed, and it is shoe that a loss of tire traction adversely affects cross-wind landings. The effect of runway surface texture is discussed, and a simple method for measuring surface texture is described. A preliminary correlation of tire traction with surface texture is shown. Results of work at Langley Research Center on the use of air jets to improve tire traction on wet or flooded runways indicate that this is a promising approach for alleviating the large losses in tire braking and sideways traction that occur when tire hydro- planing occurs on a flooded runway.

INTRODUCTION The subject of traction of pneumatic tires on wet runways is important because of its effects on the landing, taxiing, and ground handling of air- planes. For example, when the phenomenon of hydroplaning occurs for an aircraft during landing on a flooded runway, tire-ground traction can drop to negligible values, and the pilot is confronted with the more difficult task of keeping the aircraft within the confines of the runway. From figure 1 the results can be seen of a case in which a cross wind caused an airplane to drift off the center of the runway, as shown by the light streaks proceeding from the foreground to the edge of the runway; in this instance, the airplane went off the side of the runway with a number of thousands of feet of runway left for stopping purposes.

The white streaks are caused by high-velocity water, in the tire footprint areas, that scours the runway surface and cleans it of previously deposited , dirt and other contaminants. This type of white streak has been noted for some years and was identified with water action in the footprint region at the Langley landing-loads track several years ago. It should be pointed out that for the incident referred to in figure l, the pilot touched down near the runway center line. He did try the usual procedures but could not control the right- ward drift of the aircraft. Figure 2 indicates why the pilot could not control the direction of the aircraft. At the top of the figure is shoe an airplane making a cross-%Nlnd landing on a flooded runway with the side wind from the left, as indicated at the right side of the figure. The airplane touches doe at a speed above the hydroplaning speed, and tire-ground traction is practically nil. Under this condition of very low traction, the airplane reacts like a sailboat without a keel, tends to weathercock into the wind, and drifts off the right side of the runway because of the cross wind. When an effort is made to slow the aircraft by use of reverse thrust_ the vector diagram shown in figure 2 has to be considered. In this case the side component of reverse thrust is in a direction which tends to augment the side force of the wind and to increase the airplane drift to the right side of the runway.

A cross-wlnd take-off on a flooded runway is not so severe a problem as a cross-wind landing. (See fig. 2.) The aircraft starts from rest with good tlre-ground traction. The traction decreases as speed increases until hydro- planing speed is reached. At this point, traction again is nil and, if the pilot maintains heading as shown by the middle sketch, the cross wind will tend to drift the airplane off the right side of the runway. Drifting during take- off is normally controllable, as shown in the lowest sketch of the figure; the pilot simply yaws the airplane into the wind so that the side component of for- ward thrust, as shown by the lower vector diagram, cancels the cross-wind force, andlthe airplane then travels along the center line of the runway during take -off • This example of the consequences of traction loss points out the need for some method or methods to improve tire traction on wet runways. Recent research on traction at Langley Research Center is so aimed, and several possi- bilities in this area are discussed in this paper.

SYMBOLS calculated hydroplaning speed, knots Vp average friction coefficient WAV locked-wheel friction coefficient WSKID RESULTS ANDDISCUSSION Effect of Runway Surface Texture on Tire Traction Loss of traction is a phenomenon which occurs both in the sideways and braking directions nearly simultaneously and has been studied for several years by investigators to determine the best tire tread for traction on a wet runway.

It has become increasingly obvious to investigators, however, that the runway surface itself is an important factor in determining the wet-runway traction which can be developedby any tire. (See refs. 1 to 3.) In a series of tests, which NASA is now conducting at the Langley landing-loads track in collabora- tionwith the U.S. Air Force to develop a standard groove width and depth for Air Force tires, several different runway surfaces have been installed, all in a single llne, so that every braking test is conducted over each of these surfaces and so that a braking cycle is initiated on each surface. The test- surface arrangement at the track is as follows: The first test surface, sur- face A_ is a steel-troweled concrete surface lO0 feet long that provided a very smooth surface finish similar to a table top. The second, surface B, is a lO

200-foot concrete section that was given a broomed finish to provide a moder-

ately textured surface. The third surface, surface C, is a 300-foot-long sec-

tion of small-aggregate asphalt which provides a medium-textured surface.

Fourth, surface D, is a 300-foot-long section of large-aggregate asphalt that

provides a very coarse-textured surface. Finally, a 200-foot-long refrigerated

section was installed in the track; this section can be flooded and frozen so

that wet ice can be obtained.

Figure 3 showsthe braking friction results obtained on a smooth-tread

32 × 8.8, type VII, aircraft tire during braking runs performed on these test

surfaces when in a water-flooded condition (water depth = 0.1 to 0.2 inch).

The data shownwere obtained for a vertical load of 22 000 pounds and an infla-

tion pressure, acting on the tire, of 290 pounds per square inch. It should_be

pointed out that only the two concrete and the two asphalt surfaces were

flooded; the ice surface during the tests was barely covered by a thin water

film. It can be seen in figure 3 that as ground speed increases, the average

friction coefficients on all surfaces tend toward minimal values at the hydro-

planing speed indicated at 1_4 knots; this is the classic type of traction loss

due to hydroplaning from fluid-denslty effects. At the lower speeds, however,

for which fluld-density effects are negligible, the surface texture becomesall

important. As can be seen from this figure, a surface must be textured in order

to break through the viscous film separating the tire from the pavement even at

speeds as low as 20 knots. In an effort to study the surface texture on a

quantitative basis rather than resort to definition of the surfaces in terms of

words, a method has been devised at the Langley landing-loads track in which a

given quantity of material is worked into the runway voids to determine the

average depth of texture; a known volume of stiff grease is worked into the

runway voids, with a rubber squeegee, within an area of run,ray between two

lines of masking tape. (See fig. 4.) (The rubber in the squeegee is of about

the hardness of tire-tread material. ) After the grease is worked into the run-

way voids over a certain length, between the lines, the area that has been

covered is determined by simply measuring the distance along the lines, which

are a known distance apart. Dividing thls area into the known volume of grease

gives an average depth of texture s which is given in millimeters. Admittedly

this is not an exact basis for determining runway texture, but it is a simple

method and showssome promise. Work along this line has been done by Kummer

and Meyer (ref. l) at the Pennsylvania State University and is being contem-

plated by R. W. Sugg at the Ministry of Aviation in England. The correlation

obtained by using the grease technique for determining runway-surface average

texture depth with wet-braking traction is shoe in figure _. Here, average

friction coefficients obtained on the four flooded surfaces are plotted against

average depth of texture (as determined by the grease technique) for velocities

of 30, 60, and 90 knots. It can be seen that the friction coefficient on the

wet surface coefficient improves at all velocities as the texture is increased

in roughness. Above a certain texture depth, however, as from surface C to sur-

face D, there seemsto be little effect on friction coefficient of increasing

harshness of the texture. This method of measuring runway texture and corre-

lating it with friction coefficient will be pursued at Langley Research Center

by using other surfaces with different tires. Also, it is planned to make

measurements of various runways and roads, both new and used, to determine if,

in fact, this simple method of measuring runway texture can be utilized to

ll

infer from the texture alone, along with previously correlated data between

friction coefficient and texture, whether a given runway-texture depth is below

somevalue which would be considered satisfactory for wet-runway operations.

Use of Air Jets to Improve Tire Traction on Wet Runways

Air-jet research to improve tire traction was first performed at the

Langley Research Center by E. N. Harrin in 1958. The results of this initial

work, performed on a small wheel and belt arrangement_ are reported in refer-

ence 4. Air-jet research at Langley was resumed at the l_nding-loads track

during the summer of 1964 , and someof the results obtained during this inves-

tigation are described.

Figure 6 showsa view of the test fixture and air Jets used in the current

test program. The test tire was a regular 6.50-13 automobile tire inflated to

a pressure of 27 pounds per square inch. Both a smooth-tread and a 4-groove

ribbed-tread tire were tested. Essentially, the air-jet arrangement, as shown

here, was a tandem-nozzle arrangement with the trailing nozzle located about

7_ inches behind the front nozzle and about l0 inches in front of the tire. The

tire in this figure is resting on a glass plate which was located flush with the

concrete surface in the test runway. From beneath this glass plate, pictures

of the tire footprint were taken as the tire traveled across the plate. The

water over the glass plate was colored with a green sea-marker dye to give

better picture contrast. These pictures showedthe very beneficial effect which

can be obtained by completely clearing water from the footprint at speeds well

above the hydroplaning speed. (For example, see fig. 7.) The left portion of

figure 7 showsthe tire in a completely hydroplaning condition when traveling

at a speed of 62.7 mph. The right portion of figure 7 showsthe good contact

of the tire with the runway when the tire is traveling at a speed of 100.9 mph; this beneficial effect was obtained with the use of air jets. In this case,

hydroplaning has been alleviated. In addition, quantitative measurementswere

madeof friction coefficient and hydrodynamic pressure developed between the

tire and test runway surfaces.

The surface of the test runway shown schematically in figure 8 was very

smooth, except for a 52-foot section in the middle which was sandblasted in

order to have a surface texture somewhatmore representative of highways and

runways in use today. For example, the beginning of the sandblasted concrete

surface had an average texture depth of 0.104 millimeter. This value is about

half the texture depth of the broom-finished concrete surface described earlier.

Figure 9 presents values of locked-wheel friction coefficient and hydro-

dynamic pressure plotted against runway distance for one run. These values

were obtained at a carriage speed of 90 knots, almost twice the hydroplaning

speed of 47knots, with the ribbed-tread tire and a runway water depth of

0.3 inch. The runway surface condition is as noted in figure 8; that is, there

were three sections, a smooth concrete section, a sandblasted concrete portion_

and another smooth concrete section. With the air Jet off, it can be seen that

hydrodynamic pressures above 40 pounds per square inch were developed on the

tire footprint and that very low values of _SKID were obtained. But with the

air jet on, there is a reduction in hydrodynamic pressure to near zero on the

tire surface. Note also the great improvement of values of _SKID3especially

on the textured concrete section where the friction coefficient is greater than

0.4. The gradual decrease in WSKID shownhere as the tire traveled over the

sandblasted runway section is due to a nonuniform texture achieved in using the

sandblasting technique.

Figure i0 presents wet-runway cornering-force data as a percent of dry-

runway values plotted against the samerunway distance as in figure 9. The yaw

angle was 5° , the water depth was 0.3 inch_ and the speed was 77 knots, which

was once again greater than the critical hydroplaning speed. Note that with

the air jet off, less than 5 percent of the dry-runway cornering force is

achieved at this water depth; but, with the air jet on, more than 50 percent of

the smooth-tire dry-runway cornering force is obtained in the textured concrete

section, Figure ll summarizesresults, such as those illustrated in figure 9,

obtained with the locked wheel_ the 4-groove ribbed-tread tire, and 0.3 inch of

runway surface water. Here, the values of _SKID of both smooth and textured

runway surfaces are plotted against forward speed in knots. It can be seen that

on the smooth concrete surface there is not muchdifference between the curves

obtained with the air jet off and the air jet on because of the inability of

the air jet to remove the very thin fluid film which adheres to the smooth sur-

face. On the roughened or textured surface_ however, the many and minute sur-

face irregularities puncture this thin surface film_ and the result on friction

coefficient is shownby the curves obtained on the sandblasted concrete. On

this textured runway surface, which is more representative of actual runway

surfaces in use today, much greater values of WSKID are obtained with the air

jet on than with the air jet off.

CONCLUDING R_RKS

Someof the recent work on the traction of pneumatic tires on wet runways

has been discussed and ways in which the loss of tire traction adversely affects

aircraft cross-wind performance have been shown. Runwaysurface texture plays a

most important role in determining the slipperiness of a pavement when wet. A

simple method for determining the average depth of texture of pavements has

been described, and measurementsobtained on four test runway surfaces at the

Langley landing-loads track by using this grease technique give a promising

correlation with tire traction on a wet runway. Preliminary work at Langley

Research Center on the use of air jets to improve traction on wet or flooded

runways has been described and showspromise as a means of alleviating the

large losses in tire braking and sideways traction that develop when hydro-

planing occurs on flooded pavements.

REFERENCES i. K ummer, H. W.; and Meyer, W. E. : Rubber and Tire Friction. Eng. Res. Bull.

B-80, Pennsylvania State Univ., Dec. 1960.

2. Joyner, Upshur T.} Home, Walter B.; and Leland, Trafford J. W. : Investiga- tions on the Ground Performance of Aircraft Relating to Wet Runway Braking and Slush Drag. AGARD Rept. 429, Jan. 1963.

3. Gray, W. E.: Aquaplaning on Runways. J. Roy. Aeron. Soc. (Tech. Notes), VO1. 67, no. 629, May 1%3, pp. 302-304.

4. Karrin, Ezlaslav N. : Investigation of Tandem-Wheel and Air-Jet Arrangements for Improving Braking Friction on Wet Surfaces. NASA TN D-409, 1960.

AIRCRAFT ACCIDENT DUE TO H

YDROPLANING CROSS-WINO LANDINO EFFECT OF CROSS WIND ON LANDING AND TAKE-OFF ON FLOODED RUNWAYS LANDING (TOUCHDOWN ABOVE HYDROPLANING SPEED) WIND WIND

REVERSE THRUST +A

J

Figure 1 L-2411-2 Figure 2

METHOD OF MEASURING RUNWAY SURFACE TEXTURE EFFECT OF SPEED ON BRAKING TRACTION WATER DEPTH=OI TO 0 2 IN W W A Y s"RmcE HYDROPLANING AVERAGE FRICTION COEFFICIENT,

4 - kB

I 'AV I , , 2 -ICE '\ I

--:=----=--

I I ? - - , 1 1 , 0 2 0 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 GROUND SPEED, KNOTS

Figure 3

ARRANGEMENT OF AIR JETS EFFECT OF SURFACE TEXTURE ON AVERAGE

AIRFLOW I 2 7 LWSEC; NOZZLE PRESSURE 3 390 LEIIN *

FRICTION COEFFICIENT GROUND SPEED, D KNOTS C 3 0 AVERAGE FRICTION €0 COEFFICIEN ‘ n v

Figure 6

Figure 5

PATH-CLEARING EFFECTIVENESS OF TANDEM AIR JETS

WATER DEPTH = 0.3 IN.

W I T H O U T AIR JETS WITH AIR JETS (GROUND SPEED = 62.7 MPH’) (GROUND SPEED = 100.9 MPH)

Figure 7 L- 65 -110

EFFECT OF AIR JETS ON BRAKING TRACTION WATER DEPTH =0:5 IN ; GROUND SPEED = 90 KNOTS TEXTURED SMOOTH CONCRETE SMOOTH CONCRETE : I I- CONCRETE SCHEMATIC OF LEVEL RUNWAY SURFACES FRICTION COEFFICIENT, _ " LOCKED-WHEEL SKID "6I A 2 _ 0 _- .... _ ....... I -- AIR JET ON AVERAGE TEXTURE DEPTH, MM ---AIR JET OFF ( _ "_ .o62 .03;" i"_ ,"- ...........

SMOOTH . TEXTUR_ SMOOTH PRESSURE, 2 LB/SQ IN ,¢_.,_-._;]_ -_-CONCRETE RUNWAY ,J/_,_- _L,._

i 'o

0 40 80 120 RUNWAY DISTANCE, FT Figure 8 Figure 9 EFFECT OF GROUND SPEED ON AIR-JET PERFORMANCE IN IMPROVING BRAKING TRACTION EFFECT OF AIR JETS ON CORNERING FORCE WATER DEPTH=0.3 IN WATER DEPTH=0.5 IN; GROUND SPEED = 77 KNOTS TEXTURED CONCRETE I00 ,6[A T ON PERCENT OF _r LOCKED-WHEEL .2 IR JET OFFJ"t:_. ______ __ _- FRICTION COEFFICIENT, DRY CORNERING _" FORCE AT 5 ° I I ! I I

c OOE% o%T# E ----

YAW ANGLE '_SK ID 0 SMOOTH CONCRETE 4C "3 F _/-- AIR JET _X._JET ON .2: I- -. 0 _AIR JET OFF • I IAIR JE ---- I I J

o 2b

0 30 60 90 120 40 60 80 I00 120 140 160 RUNWAY DISTANCE, FT GROUND SPEED, KNOTS Figure lO Figure ll

i?

o SUMMARY OF ATMOSPHERIC TURBULENCE DATA By Roy Steiner NASA Langley Research Center SUMMARY Turbulence data obtained from recent flights of the U-2 airplanes and from the National Severe Storms Project agree in general with the results obtained in previous investigations. The data show that nonstorm turbulence decreases in intensity and amount with increasing altitude. Less than 2 percent of the flight distance was in turbulence at altitudes above 503000 feet. It also appears that the root-mean-square gust velocities of the composite turbulence patches may be 15 to 20 percent lower than previous estimates.

INTRODUCTION In addition to the regular collection of turbulence data from routine air- line operations 3 the NASA collects turbulence information through the use of special flight programs. From long experience in the study of the loads on air- craft in turbulence, it has been found that the airplane responses may be ade- quately defined if the turbulence is represented by two types: nonstormand storm. It has become customary, therefore 3 to classify special flight programs in a similar manner. In this paper, two specialized sampling programs will be discussed. The first concerns nonstorm data obtained with the U-2 airplane at altitudes up to 75,000 feet; the second concerns measurements made in severe storms in Southwestern United States at altitudes up to 403000 feet.

SYMBOLS A airplane response parameter relating rms input and output values an normal acceleration, g units L scale of turbulence, ft N average number of peaks per unit distance which exceed given level of response average number of zero crossings per unit distance with positive slope percent of total flight distance spent in turbulence Wg vertical component of true gust velocity, ft/sec x general response quantity _c composite rms value of gust velocity Sub s c ript s : 1 nonstorm 2 storm SAMPLE SIZES The scope of the nonstorm turbulence data obtained from the U-2 airplane (ref. l) and the B-36 airplane is given in table l(a). The scope of the storm turbulence data (ref. 2) is given in table l(b).

TABLE 1 SCOPE OF TURBULENCE MEASUREMENTS (a) Nonstorm Flight miles Altitude ft To 1953 To 1960 To 1965

(B-36) (u-2) (u-2)

18,900 20,000 to 30,000 66,500 11,800 30,000 to 40,000 24,500 16,200 26,500 40,000 to 50,000 21,500 38,100 49,500 141,700 50,000 to 60,000 105,500 136,400 576,900 60,000 to 70,000 7,000 7,000 70,000 to 75,000 112,500 315,000 Total ..... 820,500 (b) Storm Flight miles Altitude, ft To 1953 To 1965 20,000 to 25,000 2,740 2,950 25,000 to 30,000 2,180 2,400 50 410 30,000 to 35,000 35,000 to 40,000 56O Total .....

4,970 6,320 2O

By 1953, 112,500 miles of flight samples had been obtained with the B-36

airplane at altitudes up to 50,000 feet. Flight operations with the U-2 air-

plane started in 1956, and 315,000 flight miles had been accumulated by 1960.

Since 1960, the high-altitude U-2 sample has more than doubled in size and now

covers 8203500 miles. More than 700,000 miles, or 85 percent, of this distance

is above 50,000 feet. Emphasis is being placed on the higher altitude programs,

since they cover the expected cruising altitudes of the proposed supersonic

transport.

The storm turbulence data obtained by 1953 covered about 5,000 flight

miles, with only 50 miles above altitudes of 30,000 feet. The more recent sam-

ples have increased the sample size to more than 6,000 miles, with approximately

1,000 miles above 30,000 feet.

BASICGUST RELATION

In order to establish a framework for discussing the results of the flight

measurements, it might be well to consider a general relation between the gust

characteristics and the airplane response. (See ref. 3-) This relation, based

on power spectral techniques, is

N = PIN0 e + P2N0 e

This general equation is based on the concept of the response to nonstorm and

storm turbulences as given by the first and second terms, respectively.

Together, the two terms represent the total experience in atmospheric turbu-

lence - the experience for both repeated and limit loads.

The relation is applicable to a given flight condition and yields the

average number of peaks N which exceed a given level of airplane response x.

The given number of peaks is a function of the percent of total flight distance

in nonstorm and storm turbulences (P1 and P2), the corresponding root-mean-

square gust velocities (ac, I and gc,2), and the airplane response parameters

(A and NO).

The center-of-gravity acceleration is a commonlymeasuredresponse param-

eter. Since the derived gust velocity is proportional to the center-of-gravity

acceleration, it may be considered as an airplane response function as well as

a description of the intensity of the atmospheric turbulence. In the following

sections of the paper, the derived gust velocities (a response, x) and the

percent of turbulence for the nonstorm condition will be considered. Also, some

information on the derived gust velocities for the storm condition and an eval-

uation of the root-mean-square gust velocities for the two turbulence conditions

will be considered.

NONSTORMTURIKrLENCE

Intensity of NonstormTurbulence

In figure 13 the distributions of derived gust velocities are presented

for flight of U-2 airplanes at altitudes above 203000 feet. These data are for

routine operations. Routine operations - in contrast to flights that seek out

turbulent conditions - normally use turbulence avoidance procedures to reduce

the flight distance in turbulence. The gust frequency per mile of flight is

plotted against the values of gust velocity. The five distributions correspond

to 103000-foot-altitude brackets from 20,000 to 703000 feet. The larger sam-

p1_ represent approximately 142,000 and 9.77.,000 flight miles for the two high- est altitude brackets.

The curves indicate that the frequency and velocity of the gusts generally decrease in an orderly manner with increasing altitude. The distributions for the two lower altitude brackets are nearly coincident. This correspondence in the turbulence at these altitudes is probably due to flights through the jet stream and the tropopause3 which may vary from 29,000 feet to possibly 403000 feet during the different seasons in the Northern Hemisphere.

In terms of the intensity of the turbulence, the results indicate that the maximum gust velocity experienced per mile of flight for higher altitude brack- ets is on the order of 1/3 or 1/2 that experienced per mile of flight for lower altitudes. The gust velocities 3 however3 are quite low; for example 3 in 13000 miles at an altitude of 903000 feet, a gust velocity of only 4 ft/sec will be exceeded, as compared with 8 ft/sec at the lower altitudes. On the basis of airline data, a comparable value for an altitude of 193000 feet would be 15 ft/sec. Current design values for airplanes are 90 and 66 ft/sec on this scale and would plot far to the right of the figure.

Eighty percent of the total flight distance represented in figure 1 was over the United States. The remaining 20 percent consisted of flights over Western Europe 3 Turkey, and Japan. The sample from Japan was not included in the altitude bracket of 503000 to 603000 feet3 because of two unique patches of turbulence. Figure 2 shows the effect on the distribution of gust veloc- ities if the Japanese sample is included. The distributions for the altitude brackets from 503000 to 60,000 feet and from 203000 to 303000 feet have been included for comparison. The addition of the Japanese sample has shifted the frequency curve upward so that it is more nearly the same as that for the lower altitudes. It is believed that the interaction of moderately severe surface storms 3 the mountainous terrain, and strong Jet streams at an altitude of 353000 feet caused the unique patches of turbulence (ref. 1). The frequency of this unusual combination of conditions, probably over a rather localized area3 and the method of integrating these data into the data for average conditions have not been determined.

Amount of NonstormTurbulence

The percent of the flight distance in nonstorm turbulence is presented in

figure 3 as a function of altitude. The airplane was considered to be in turbu-

lence whenever the accelerometer trace was disturbed and exhibited gust veloc-

ities greater than 2 ft/sec. The solid llne represents a previous estimate

(ref. 4) based on earlier data. The circled data points represent the present

U-2 data. For altitudes between 50,000 and 75,000 feet, the U-2 airplane

encountered turbulence less than 2 percent of the flight distance.

All sets of U-2 data show a peak in percent of turbulence at altitudes

near 35,000 feet. The points for the present sample show a greater percentage

of turbulence than given by previous estimates. Tae prevalence of turbulence

at this altitude is probably due to the high winds and wind shears associated

with Jet streams. However, a note of warning is needed. The flights in the

altitude range from 20,000 feet to the cruise altitude of the U-2 airplane

represent, to someextent, a vertical sounding during climb and descent over

rather localized areas, and the data may not indicate average conditions at

these altitudes over the Northern Hemisphere.

COMPARISON OF DATA WITHPREVIOUS ESTIMATES

Figure 4 summarizes the nonstorm data previously discussed, the data from

the National Severe Storms Project, and earlier estimates for nonstorm and

storm conditions 3 which are shownas the shaded areas for altitudes of 20,000

to 603000 feet. The gust frequency per mile of turbulence is plotted against

the gust velocity. Again, a logarithmic scale is used on the ordinate. The

range of the nonstormU-2 data is shownfor the five altitude brackets ranging

from 203000 to 70,000 feet. Note that a much compressedgust-velocity scale

is used on the abscissa in order to cover both storm and nonstorm gust inten-

sities. The turbulence data from the U-2 airplane flights are generally less

severe than previously obtained data, but not to such an extent as to warrant

a revision of the earlier estimates.

The solid square symbols represent the data for flight at an altitude of

approximately 403000 feet in storms. First impressions might lead to the con-

clusion that the earlier estimates are low. However, the storms in Southwestern

United States are considered to be the most severe storms in the States. Of

these storms, only the ones with sufficient energy to build to altitudes of at

least 403000 feet were investigated. Therefore, the severe-storm data would be

expected to lle above the previously estimated curves. There is not sufficient

Justification, therefore, for revising the estimate at this time.

SPECTRAL REPRESENTATION OFATMOSPKERIC _CE

In recent years considerable effort has been expended in describing atmos-

pheric turbulence in terms of power spectra and in applying power-spectral

techniques to design problems. Typical spectra are presented in figure 5 for a severe-storm condition and for a nonstorm condition. The power spectral density is plotted against reduced frequency, which is given in radians per foot, and against wavelength which is given in feet. Each scale used in this plot is logarithmic. Each spectrum represents a given turbulent area. The spectra are similar in shape but vary in intensity. The square root of the area under the spectrum is the root-mean-square gust velocity given in the figure.

Note that these rms gust velocities vary from about 14 to 4.5 ft/sec for the different meteorological conditions. The spectra for many turbulent patches in each condition would also cover a wide range. For example, in ii storm trav- erses, the rms values varied from 6 to 16 ft/sec. A similar range of rms val- ues would be expected for the nonstorm conditions. The values which describe this vs_r_atlon in the spectra for the nonstorm and storm turbulences are shown in figure 6 as a function of altitude. Earlier estimates of the rms gust veloc- ities of storm and nonstorm turbulences are shown by the solid curves (ref. 4).

These velocities were determined from airplane center-of-gravity response data by use of a rough approximation of the airplane response parameters. Only one degree of freedom was considered in the evaluation. More precise values of the airplane parameters have become available for a few types of airplanes and flight conditions (obtained from Lockheed-California Co.). The reevaluation of a few rms values by use of these revised airplane parameters indicates that the rms true gust velocities for the nonstorm and storm turbulences as shown by the dashed lines may range from 15 to 20 percent lower than the previous estimates.

For consistency, the reevaluation was based on the assumption that the scale of turbulence L is 1,000 feet. Should the scale value be larger, say 2,500 feet, as more recent investigations have indicated, both of the sets of curves would be shifted to the right.

MEASURED AIRPLANE MOTIONS DUE TO SEVERE TURBULENCE The physical behavior of an airplane during flights through two storms is shown in figures 7 and 8. The vertical component of true gust velocity, the normal acceleration 3 and the altitude change of the airplane during flight are given in the figures. These traverses are flights of a fighter-type airplane.

The pilot was instructed to correct only for the major changes in attitude.

Figure 7 indicates that the airplane encountered an updraft with a long gradient distance. The gust velocity changed from 0 to 170 ft/sec in 2,100 feet. The maximum veloeity is approximately 210 ft/sec. Although the velocities are large, the airplane experienced only small acceleration. An altitude change of 1,600 feet, however, was experienced in 3 nautical miles.

At the time the maximum gust velocity was encountered, the pilot had pitched the airplane down 13 ° in an effort to maintain the desired altitude. The ver- tical velocity of the airplane at this time was 80 ft/sec up.

Figure 8 indicates that the airplane was flying in an updraft which reached 70 ft/sec, and then suddenly encountered a downdraft of 90 ft/sec. This change in velocity of 160 ft/sec occurred over a horizontal distance of about 800 feet in contrast to the 2,100 feet shown in figure 7- The airplane normal accelera- tion changed from about 0.Sg to -2g. The change in altitude in this rather severe turbulence was only about 100 feet.

The pilot may believe that he is experiencing large altitude changes in turbulence of this nature. This impression would probably be caused by both the large accelerations and possible instrument response due to the changing angle of airflow over the static source. The large change in altitude illus- trated in figure 7 maY be undetected for a longer period because of the more quiescent flight conditions.

CONCLUDING_ In summary, turbulence data obtainedfrom recent flights agree in general with the results obtained during previous investigations. Nonstorm turbulence decreases both in intensity and amount with increasing altitude. Less than 2 percent of the flight distance was in turbulence at altitudes above 50,000 feet. It now appears that the root-mean-square gust velocities of the composite turbulence patches may be 15 to 20 percent lower than previous publications.

REFERENCES i. Coleman_ Thomas L._ and Steiner, Roy: Atmospheric Turbulence Measurements Obtained From Airplane Operations at Altitudes Between 2%000 and 75,000 Feet for Several Areas in the Northern Hemisphere. NASA TND-548, 1960.

2. Rhyne, Richard H.; and Steiner, Roy: Power Spectral Measurement of Atmos- pheric Turbulence in Severe Storms and Cumulus Clouds. NASA TN D-24693 1964.

3. Houbolt, John C.; Steiner, Roy; and Pratt, Kermit G.: Dynamic Response of Airplanes to Atmospheric Turbulence Including Flight Data on Input and Response. NASA TR R-199, 1964.

4. Press, Harry_ and Steiner, Roy: An Approach to the Problem of Estimating Severe and Repeated Gust Loads for Missile Operations. NACATN 4332, 1958.

INTENSITY OF NONSTORM TURBULENCE INCLUDNG SAMPLE FROM JAPAN INTENSITY OF NONSTORM TURBULENCE i0-1 FLIGHT MILES i0 -I _ ALTITUDE, FT ALTITUDE, FT 18,900 _, _ 20,000 TO 30,000 20,000 TO 30,000 26,500 t:_ --[]--50,000 TO 40,00O

49,500 -_-- #:__ _:_°(,NC,U_NO s_

0 _ ---0- 4O, OOO TO 5O, OOO t41,700 \ "% --_-- 50,00o TO 60,000 !0 -2 576,900 FROM JAPAN) .......... '0-2 _ _ --_-- 60,000 TO 70,000 FREQUENCY PER MILE OF FLIGHT OF FLIGHT 10-3 10-3 0-4 g MR b'l-L,

'°-' t

10-5 4 8 12 16 25 24 O 2,; DERIVED GUST VELOCITY, FT/SEC OER,VEO GUST VELOC,TY, FT,'SEC Figure I Figure 2 NONSTORM AND STORM TURBULENCE PERCENT NONSTORM TURBULENCE

,°'f

80 - X I03 -- PREVIOUS ESTIMATE IoO I _ _i:::_,':_4:i:!:_: U-2 DATA l 1 NSSP DATA o U-2 DATA "tO- O PER MILE OF TURBULENCE 10-2 ALTITUDE, FT 5( 4( 20000 60 OOO FT _.

Io " AZI:,TUDE S_O._ :. NONSTORM lO-50----I0 "2'0 30- 4'0 .50 6(3 2C DERIVED GUST VELOCITY, FT/SEC PERCENT OF FLIGHT DISTANCE IN TURBULENCE Figure Figure 3 INTENSITY OF TURBULENCE WITH ALTITUDE TYPICAL SPECTRA OF TURBULENCE L = 1,000 FT rms GUST VELOCITY, 60 -x 103 FT/SEC / / 1.3.77 104 I_ ['15% TO 20%'] / / STORM 50 '16_--1 REDUCTION ]'_/ / 4.48 POWER 103 ALTITUDE, FT SPECTRAL DENSITY, NON STORM 3O (FT/SEC) 2 ,I RADIANS/FT i02

iI I/

IO I I , I , I J I io / 104 I03 I02 I0 I WAVELENGTH, FT ',7 , / /' ' 4 4 6 8 I0 12 rrns GUST VELOCITY, o- c, FT/SEC REDUCED FREOUENCY. RAD,A.S,FT Figure 6 Figure THUNDERSTORM TURBULENCE DATA THUNDERSTORM TURBULENCE DATA THUNDERSTORM A THUNDERSTORM B TRUE GUST 8C TRUE GUST 80, j 4_¸ _'J'_'_ i VELOCITY, Wg, VELOCITY, wg, FT/SEC FT/SEC O 0 -80 -80 f',, NORMAL ACCEL., 0 NORMAL ACCEL, 0 -,-' '," _' I _" '_ _ _ "_' _ V an, g UNITS a n , g UNITS -2 -2 1,600 1,600[

F

ALTITUDE CHANGE, FT ALTITUDEFTCHANGE, 800L_ 800ri- ,,r_-----t I-- + . L i i o .s ,.o ,.; 21o 215 3b _'_ O 5 1.0 [5 2.0 _._ _O _,S DISTANCE, NAUTICAL MILES °,STANCE, NAUT,CAL M,LES Figure 7 Figure 8 .

PRELIM_ARY STUDY OF STEEP INSTRUMENT APPROACH OF THREE CONVENTIONAL AIRCRAFT By Albert W. Hall, Robert A. Champine, and Donald J. McGinley, Jr.

NASA Langley Research Center SUMMARY Preliminary studies of steep instrument approaches have been conducted with three conventional aircraft. Six-degree approach paths were found to be accept- able. A margin of 3 ° to 4 ° in maximum glide slope was available to allow for flight-path corrections. Control of the lateral-directional axis was the most difficult problem for pilots making either steep or conventional approaches; split-axis control reduced the pilot workload during this operation.

INTRODUCTION The NASA Langley Research Center has recently completed a preliminary study on several aircraft to determine the capability of both aircraft and pilots to make steeper-than-normal instrument approaches. Steep approaches are attractive in that they offer the possibilities of reduced engine noise and reduced air- space requirements.

This paper reports the initial phase of a continuing program and covers studies made with C-47, T-33 (refs. 1 and 2), and DC-8F aircraft. The tests were conducted by making instrument approaches at increasing glide slopes until the maximum glide slope considered suitable for day-to-day operations was estab- lished on the basis of aircraft characteristics and pilot opinion. The scope of the initial studies is indicated in table I which shows for each of the aircraft the total number of approaches, the number of approaches at the maximum opera- tional glide slope, and the number of pilots participating.

SYMBOLS V a approach speed, knots W weight of airplane, lb glide-path angle, deg increment in flight-path angle, deg TEST PROCEDURE AND EQUIPMENT The approaches were flown with the evaluation pilot flying on instruments (simulated IFR, pilot under hood) while a safety pilot maintained visual contact and took control whenever conditions required a termination of the test. The instrument approach started in level flight about 5 to 8 miles from the runway threshold as shown in figure i. The glide slope was intercepted about 4 miles from the runway for all tests. This approach distance was fixed by varying the initial altitude for each glide angle; for example, the 2.5 ° tests were started at an altitude of 900 feet and the 6 ° tests were started at an altitude of 2200 feet.

Special guidance equipment was used which allowed the glide slope to be adjusted to the desired angle by a simple adjustment. This equipment provided straight glide slopes (no bends) with conventional ILS sensitivity (±0.7o). In addition, this equipment could provide curved paths to give flare-path guidance from any desired altitude to touchdown.

The flight-path (glide-slope, flare, and localizer) information was dis- played in the cockpit on the conventional ILS cross-pointer indicator for the C-47 and T-33 aircraft and on a flight director for the DC-8F. The DC-8F was fitted with a split-axis autopilot with which approaches could be made with the lateral-directional axis under autopilot control and with the glide slope under manual control.

DISCUSSION Maximum Operational Glide Slope All approaches were flown at the approach speeds recommended for conven- tional angles except the 9 ° approach for the T-33.

For a constant-speed approach with the airplane in the maximum-drag config- uration, the maximum glide angle occurs with the lowest obtainable thrust_ A qualitative representation of the thrust-required curves is shown in figure 2 for the C-47. As shown in figure 2, the maximum angle obtained with the C-47 was I0 ° with throttles closed and the propellers windmilling. The i0 ° angle is not usable for a constant-speed instrument approach because the pilot cannot get the airplane back to the glide slope from an inadvertent high posi- tion without diving and gaining speed.

For the C-47 airplane, a 6 ° glide slope was determined to be the maximum glide slope suitable for day-to-day use in an instrument approach. At this glide slope, by reducing power, the pilot has a 4° margin available to steepen the flight path without gaining speed. The pilots believed that this margin would be sufficient to take care of gusty conditions, windshear, and other inad- vertent flight-path deviations.

3O

The thrust-required curves for the T-33 are shown in figure 3. Maximum

angles of 9° were flown with the approach speed increased about l0 knots and

with the engines about 57 percent of design rpm. Here again, the pilots picked

6° as the maximum angle suitable for operational use. At the 6° angle, the

engine speed was about 65 percent of design rpm. Because of the poor acceler-

ation characteristics of this engine, the pilots did not want to operate con-

tinuously below this rpm. However, power could be reduced below this level for

short intervals, as needed for flight-path control, so that there was a capa-

bility of steepening the flight-path angle as much as 3° with only a small

increase in aircraft speed.

A maximum operational glide slope for the DC-8F transport was also found to

be 6°. At this angle, the engine speed was about 75 percent of design rpm.

This airplane had turbofan engines and the pilots did not like to reduce the

engine speed below this value_ in fact, they tended to accept a slight airspeed

increase during flight-path corrections rather than reduce power. It should be

pointed out here (as is described subsequently) that the flare path started

at an altitude of 260 feet and, from this point, the pilot had to add power so

that the engine speed was increased as the airplane camenearer the ground.

Flare Paths

Part of the C-47 and T-33 investigation was to determine flare paths suit-

able for transition from the steep slopes to a shallow angle at touchdown.

Early in the C-47 and T-33 programs, it was evident that good approaches could

be flown down to 200 feet; therefore, a more demandingtask of attempting an

instrument landing was initiated. The guidance equipment provided flare paths

as shown in figure 4. The flare path was started at 6000 feet from the touch-

down point for both slopes shown. It should be noted that these flare paths are

long and change slope rather gradually, and thus, allow considerable distance

and time to accomplish the transitions from the glide slope to the landing.

There were only a few cases where the approaches were flown with enough

accuracy that the safety pilot would allow the hooded pilot to complete the

approach to touchdown. However, the safety pilots felt that the approaches,

both at 6° and 2.5 °, were flown with sufficient accuracy to allow visual

landings to be madefrom altitudes as low as 100 feet under good visibility con-

ditions. It should be pointed out that at lO0-foot altitude the glide slopes

and flare paths used in these tests place the airplane in a better position

relative to the desired touchdown than the conventional ILS glide slope shown in

figure 4.

Flare-path geometry was determined for the DC-8Fby extending the 3° flare-

path curvature upward to a point where the 6° slope was tangent to the path.

(See fig. 5-) Instrument touchdownswere not attempted with the DC-8F. The

pilots' task was to simulate instrument flight to lO0-foot altitude and touch

down visually from this position. Here again, the 6° flight-path geometry

ILS path. In this case, the airplane is in almost the sameposition at lO0-foot

altitude for both the 3° and 6° path. Basedon the conditions of the tests,

clear weather, good visibility, and with flare-path guidance, the pilots felt

that 6° approaches could be flown consistently down to lO0-foot altitudes. The

qualifying conditions of good visibility and special guidance equipment are to

be noted.

Lateral-Directional Control

Another important aspect of this steep approach study was the effect of

lateral-directional control of these aircraft on the steep-approach problem.

The lift, drag, and engine characteristics determined the maximum opera-

tional glide slope for each airplane investigated. Lateral-directional charac-

teristics did not limit the steep-approach capability for any of these aircraft.

However, the instrument approach is a very demandingpilot task, and good lat-

eral handling qualities reduce the pilot workload and result in more precise

flight-path control. This condition is equally true for both the steep and con-

ventional slopes.

The C-47 had the poorest handling qualities of any of the airplanes inves-

tigated. The high lateral-control forces and large wheel displacements made

small heading corrections difficult. It took considerable effort to start the

airplane in the desired direction, and the sameeffort was required to stop it; thus, overshoots were commonplace. Whenapproaches were flown in gusty air, the heading correction becamea very difficult task.

An example of the deterioration of the smooth flight path along the glide

slope after the pilot had to concentrate on a lateral deviation is shown in fig-

ure 6. By using the ordinary ILS cross-pointer display, the pilot had to decide

how muchbank was needed, when to take it out, and then repeat this procedure in

the opposite direction in order to comeout on course with the proper heading.

In this case, rather than ending up on course, he overshot to a greater local-

izer deflection in the opposite direction. The concentration and effort

required to makethese corrections detracted from the glide-path control and

resulted in larger gllde-slope deviations during this time.

The T-33 and DC-8Fhad more desirable handling qualities than the C-47 and

generally the time histories of localizer variation did not show the oscillatory

variations which were found to be typical of the C-47 aircraft.

However, even with good lateral-directional characteristics, the pilots'

workload was still too great to allow both glide-slope and localizer needles to

be flown with the precision required for consistent touehdownswhile under the

hood. It is recognized that a zero-zero touchdown is not a realistic opera-

tional task, particularly with only basic ILS cross-pointer guidance display;

but the extreme difficulty of this task tends to emphasize the differences in

flight-test results, such as those given in table II.

Table II illustrates the improvement in touchdown capability achieved by

eliminating the lateral-directional task. During someof the approaches with

the T-33, the safety pilot controlled the lateral-directional path while the

hooded pilot only had to follow the glide slope and flare path. 0nly one touch-

downwas madeout of 16 approaches with complete control by the hooded pilot.

Six touchdowns were madeout of seven approaches with split-axis control.

The DC-8 had the capability of split-axis autopilot control_ that is, cou-

pled approaches could be madewith autopilot control of the lateral-directional

axis and manual control of the glide slope.

The pilots found this modeof operation to be very effective in giving bet-

ter localizer tracking and in reducing the pilot workload and, thereby, allowing

more effort to be put on glide-path control. Very good approaches were flown

downto lO0 feet. For several years various groups have indicated the desira-

bility of using someform of split-axis autopilot. Someairlines are presently

using this split-axis operation in their fleet as part of the overall program

to reduce ILS minimums.

CONCLUDINGREMARKS

An investigation of steep instrument approaches has indicated the following

results for the C-47, T-33, and DC-8Faircraft:

i. Six-degree glide slopes can be flown with reasonable precision. Under

conditions of good visibility and with special flare-path guidance, these

approaches can be flown to 100-foot altitudes.

2. The maximum glide slope suitable for operational use was 3° to 4° less

than the maximum glide slope attainable. This margin is needed to allow flight-

path corrections to be madewithout increasing speed.

3. Control of the lateral-directional axis was the most difficult problem

for either conventional or steep approaches. Split-axis autopilot control of

this axis relieved the pilot workload considerably and resulted in better

flight-path control of all axes.

REFERENCES

i. Hall, Albert W.; and McGinley, Donald J., Jr.: Flight Investigation of Steep

Instrument Approach Capabilities of a C-47 Airplane Under Manual Control.

_ASA _ _2559, 1965.

2. Hall, Albert W._ and McGinley, Donald J., Jr.: Flight Investigation of Steep Instrument Approach Capabilities of a T-33 Airplane Under Manual Control.

NASA TN D-2775, 1965.

_3 TABLE I INSTRUMENT APPROACHES USED IN EVALUATION NUMBER OF RUNS pER OF AT MAXIMUM OPERATIONAL SLOPE C-47 85 54 5 NASA T-33 107 ,49 5 NASA 2 AIRLINE DC-8F 47 30 TABLE II IMPROVEMENT IN ZERO-ZERO TOUCHDOWN CAPABILITY BY ELIMINATION OF LATERAL-DIRECTIONAL CONTROL TASK T-33 AIRPLANE; GLIDE SLOPES, 2.5 ° AND 6 ° FLIGHT-PATH NUMBER OF NUMBER OF CONTROL APPROACHES TOUCHDOWNS FULL CONTROL BY 16 I HOODED PLLOT SPLIT-AXIS CONTROL 7 6 THRUST REQUIRED FOR C-47 AIRPLANE PATH USED TO INTERCEPT GLIDE SLOPE l r = 0 o Va END OF INTERCEPT ( 3,000 RUNWAY GLIDE SLOPE I I I " """" I THRUST

LT,TUOE ,O00 r-

REQUIRED 1,000

FT %""

I THRUST MARGIN"_ I _ NEEDED FOR \A7._4 o o_- b-'--" _2 5 ] -,o. , ...../%_,H j - "-- I ',= I- _-_--'-t - pROPELLER -_--- 4. MILES } TO 4 MILES OF LEVEL FLIGHT W4NDMILLING SPEED Figure i Figure 2 THRUST REQUIRED FOR T-33 GEAR DOWN; SPEED BRAKES OUT; W=12,000 LB %0OO 7 =0 V__/ 2DO0 THRUST -3_ I / - BO REQUIRED, /q ENGinE SPEED, LB _60 , _i PERCENT OF ipoo _ __._70 MAX. DESIGN -"-_IN_US-ABLE_6n RPM t I _ I I 0 8O I00 120 140 160 SPEED, KNOTS Figure .5 FLARE-PATH GEOMETRY FOR DC-8F FT FLARE-PATH GEOMETRY FOR C-47 AND T-33 ALTITUDE ALTITUDE FT 4O0 50O ITOUCHDOWN ///_o SLOPE FL_E ,y SLOPE I END OF RUNWAY / TOUCHDOWN _// ILS 4O0 ' I / . _LS I I 5 ° FLARE / / END OF ._'" i 2OO 300 I I 6 ° F LAREI //" /'_o SLOP E_ • II .5 SLOPE RUNWAY / _j_//_,_j2 I I I I / iO0 2O0 /// I i I 0 d l _/L....I_ ,''_ T SIMULATED I_FR I00 0 I 2 3 4 5 6 7xlO 3 DISTANCE FROM TOUCHDOWN, FT _ I I 11 L I I I 2 3 4 5 6 7 8xlO 3 DISTANCE FROM TOUCHDOWN, FT Figure 4 Figure 9 EFFECT OF LATERAL DEVIATIONS ON GLIDE-PATH CONTROL C-47_ GLIDE SLOPE =6 ° LOCALIZER DEV IATI ON, DEG TOUCHDOWN 7 FLY LEFT O --_FLARE-"_/ 2.5 _..._ TIME TO FLY RIGHT _ _1 2.5'- GLIDE-SLOPE I DEVIATION, , DEG FLY DOWN _L, ___v , TIME, SEC Figure 6 SOME FACTORS AFFECTING FATIGUE OF AIRCRAft2 STRUCTURES By Herbert F. Hardrath NASA Langley Research Center SUMMARY Several points of interest to the operator of aircraft are reviewed.

Rates of crack propagation tend to increase and residual static strength tends to decrease as the strength of the materials increases. Ground-air-ground and other negative loadings accelerate the damage to certain critical sections so that in first approximation, the fatigue life in these areas should be estimated on the basis of the number of flights, rather than the flight miles or flight hours. Regular inspection for cracks is necessary to assure safe operation of existing flight structures.

I INTRODUCTION The belief that a well-designed aircraft may be operated with no concern about fatigue difficulties is gradually becoming recognized as the myth it is.

The review of some recently developed information may help to place fatigue in proper perspective, particularly for operators; for it is they who_ more than anyone else, must live with the problem.

SOME PARAMETERS OF THE FATIGUE PROBI_4 Several important factors influence the fatigue life of aircraft structures.

Rather obviously, the behavior of the material of which the structure is made, the details of design and manufacture, and the chemical, thermal, fretting, and load environments are the commonly recognized primary factors. Much of the fatigue research carried out over t_e past 100 years has been devoted to estab- lishing methods for anticipating the influence of these factors analytically.

In spite of this effort, current design procedures cannot depend completely on analytical predictions, and considerable testing is used to evaluate particular configurations. Recently, more attention has been devoted to the study of the accumulation of damage under the complex loadings encountered in service, the rate of fatigue-crack propagation, and residual static strength. The present paper deals mainly with these topics.

The observed scatter in fatigue life data under identical loading condi- tions and the varied loads experienced by individual aircraft of a given type raise considerable doubt regarding the predictability of the fatigue llfe of a given aircraft even after full-scale tests have been performed. For example, recent examination of military aircraft of a certain type led to the discovery of cracks which had developed in one-fourth to one-tenth of the time estimated from a full-scale test. The application of a sufficiently high scatter factor to insure against such failures in service would lead to prohibitive weight penalties under present design methods.

How then, can the operator proceed to operate an aircraft with reasonable safety? It is the purpose in the following discussion to consider the steps that can be taken to insure safer operation. The remarks are intended espe- cially for users of aircraft that have parts designed for so-called "safe life" in contrast to the "fail safe" concept.

As indicated previously, the emphasis is on the rate of fatigue-crack propagation and residual static strength; thus, the need for diligent inspec- tion is developed. The way in which fatigue life is affected by the number and severity of loads is discussed.

FATIGUE OF SIMPLE SPECIMENS AND STRUCTURES Fatigue behavior is generally characterized by S-N curves of the type shown in the left side of figure I. Such curves have occupied the attention of a host of investigators over the years and have become the yardstick by which the influence of any of a dozen or more parameters is evaluated. The parameter illustrated in figure i is the effect of stress concentrations.

Many papers have been written to develop empirical or semiempirical relations to relate the S-N curves of unnotched specimens with those of notched or simulated structural specimens.

If one considers the observable propagation of a fatigue crack in a simple unnotched specimen, he will find a behavior such as is indicated by the lower curve on the plot on the right in figure i. However, for the same overall life of a notched specimen, the applied stress is lower, the effective rate of crack propagation is slower, and the critical crack length is longer for these struc- tural parts than for simple specimens. Thus, the crack is present for a larger proportion of the total life in structural parts. In practical situations, cracks are frequently present for well over one-half of the total life. On the one hand, this is fortunate, in that damage may be found by inspection and cor- rected. This fact makes feasible the incorporation of fail-safe characteristics in the design of a structure. On the other hand, such cracks reduce the resid- ual static strength so that the structure becomes more vulnerable to sudden failure under high loads.

CRACK GROWTH The rate of propagation of cracks and their effects on residual strength are getting more attention in recent years and this trend is likely to lead to more satisfactory methods for producing reliable structures. An example of how a systematic study of crack growth and residual strength may lead to an im- proved understanding of fatigue behavior is illustrated in figure 2.

The failures of three sheet panels, each made of a different aluminum alloy, are compared. The panels are all the same width but the thicknesses are proportioned in such a way that the original tensile failing load PU is the same in each case. Each panel contains an initial hole in the center. Each curve in the figure was calculated to illustrate the progress of a fatigue crack P during tests in which each panel is loaded in fatigue at the same proportion --

Pu

of its ultimate tensile strength. The end of the curve represents failure when the panel is subjected to a high static load (60 percent PU) at which time that static load is just sufficient to produce failure. It is quite obvious that the weakest of the three alloys (2024-T3) has the lowest rate of fatigue-crack propagation and tolerates the longest Crack at failure; the strongest material (7178-T6) is at the other end of the scale. With this sort of insight, one can readily understand why structures made of some of the new high strength mate- rials appear much more vulnerable to failure than do those made of moderate strength materials.

The picture is even more dramatic in steels where heat treating to high strength levels S U has become quite common in recent years, particularly for landing gears and actuating mechanisms. The same kind of crack growth as shown in figure 2 is shown in figure 3 for two pieces of steel heat treated to two different strength levels. The lower strength material again exhibits a lower rate of crack growth and tolerates a much longer crack before failure. Note that even this longer crack is only one-fifth as long as that tolerated by the 2024-T3 aluminum alloy in figure 2. The curves represent the behavior that might be observed in tests conducted in a clean laboratory at room temperature.

However, the situation is much worse in the environment encountered in service.

A crack as short as 1/16 inch may propagate to failure under low static loads in just a few hours on a wet day.

The same kind of phenomenon has been responsible for the failure of landing gears that become "cold-soaked" during flight and become wet or even frosty from condensation during descent or landing.

Obviously, the variations of behavior just discussed are partly attribu- table to choice of material and that choice is up to the designer. However, the operator should be aware of the size of crack that may be serious if he owns a structure made of one of these materials.

Perhaps some examples of cracks that have caused difficulties would be of interest. Figure 4 shows a crack in the skin of an aircraft wing. The mate- rial was 7075-T6 aluminum alloy about 1/2 inch thick. Failure occurred at approximately 90 percent of limit load with a crack less than 1 inch long. The disconcerting feature of this crack was that it was not detectable from the out- side and an internal doubler plate covered the inside surface to within 1/4 inch of the tip of the fatigue crack.

Had this wing been made of 2024-T3 aluminum alloy the crack would have grown at a slower rate for at least 2 more inches before failure and thus would have enhanced its chances of being observed before final failure occurred.

This particular crack was observed in a full-scale fatigue test and subsequent inspections in the fleet led to installation of a reinforcement of this loca- tion. Thus, the full-scale test can be a most informative means for identi- fying potential crack locations. It also provides information regarding the rate of fatigue-crack propagation and serves as a test bed for the development of specific crack-detection apparatus and techniques for a given structure.

An example of a manufacturing defect that can lead to fatigue difficulties is given in figure 5. The part shown was taken from the corner of an access cutout in the s_me wing st__Icture in which the previous crack was found. The designer wisely called for a radius of about 3 inches, all rough edges were carefully beveled, but the machinist permitted his milling cutter to dwell, leaving a small indentation. It was from that small defect that the fatigue crack grew. This is probably not representative of failure locations in this particular type of aircraft. Rather, it illustrates the need for thorough repeated inspection of every aircraft to discover cracks starting from manu- facturing or service-induced flaws. Obviously, not every such blemish can be polished out of every aircraft, but inspection must be thorough and regular to prevent trouble. 0nly the operator is in a position to conduct such inspections.

EFFECTS OF GROUND-AIR-GROUND CYCLE ON FATIGUE LIFE It was pointed out previously that fatigue life was related to the number and severity of loads encountered. A few points of interest to the operator should be discussed.

The influence of the so-called ground-air-ground (GAG) cycle has been studied in some detail in recent years. This is the average load cycle that occurs once per flight when the aircraft is lifted off its landing gear during take-off and is then returned to the gear upon landing. The bar graph in fig- ure 6 shows the result of a systematic series of tests in which identical spec- imens were subjected to programs of fatigue loads simulating, in one case_ the gust-load cycles alone and, in the other, the gusts and ground-air-ground cycles. The ground-air-ground cycles caused a decrease in life to less than one-fourth of that for gust-load cycles alone. The influence of the GAG cycle was found to be more severe when it was simulated at appropriate intervals; that is, once per flight, rather than in groups as is often done in simulated service tests.

From these observations one may conclude appropriately that, at least for certain critical sections_ ground-air-ground cycles can produce more damage that all other normal operating loads experienced by transport aircraft. This obser- vation may be rationalized in a qualitative sense by considering that the nega- tive phase of the load cycles systematically removes beneficial residual stresses. The more frequently this happens, as in each flight, the more serious is the effect.

4O

EFFECTS OF FREQUENCY OF OCCURRENCE

Figure 7 is a comparison of the numberof times a given load is encoun-

tered in transport aircraft. In the left plot in the figure the data are

normalized on a per-mile basis and in the right plot, on a per-flight basis.

It should be emphasized that, for this purpose, a flight includes only one

take-off and one landing. The data were accumulated on scheduled airlines

ranging from feeder-line transports to transcontinental jets. The samedata

are used for both plots. Quite obviously the variation in the data is much

smaller when comparedon a per-flight basis.

The trend observed is easily understood when one considers that most maneu-

vers are performed and most turbulence is found at low altitudes. Once the air-

craft reaches cruise altitude, turbulence is much reduced, maneuvers are usually

gentle, and the pilot has freedom to select a route that avoids storms. If one

considers, in addition, the predominant effect of the ground-air-ground cycle,

the variation in the damageproduced per flight is even less than indicated in

figure 7-

Thus, the operator should be aware that, in first approximation, fatigue

life is determined by the number of flights, rather than by flight miles or

flight hours. This fact is of real interest inasmuch as the trend in the air-

line operations seemsto be to use aircraft designed for mediumrange for ever

shorter routes.

Obviously, if the speed_ gross weight_ altitude, or other mission charac-

teristics are changed, as is frequently the case for military aircraft, the

fatigue life will be influenced directly. Probably no factor has been so

potent in this respect as the current trend toward low-level operations. In

somecases, such operation has resulted in an increase of two orders of magni-

tude in the frequency of occurrence of a given load-level per flight. Fatigue

difficulties under such conditions should comeas no surprise.

CONCLUDING REMARKS

The information presented in this paper emphasizes the following points of

interest to the operator of aircraft_

Rates of crack propagation tend to be higher and residual static strength

lower in higher strength materials than in lower strength materials.

Ground-air-ground and other negative phases of the loadings produce more

average damagethan ordinary gust loadings.

In first approximation, fatigue life in somecritical sections is deter-

mined by the number of flights, rather than by the flight miles or flight hours.

Regular inspection for cracks is necessary to insure safer operation of

flight structures.

CRACK GROWTH IN TYPICAL ALUMINUM-ALLOY SHEETS CRACK LENGTH, IN.

P PU FATIGUE BEHAVIOR OF SIMPLE SPECIMENS AND STRUCTURES .2 - LENGTH 7075-T6

l

Oq I I .5 I.OXlO 5 10 3 10 5 iO 7 0 310 410xlO 3 I0 20 CYCLES TO FAILURE CYCLES APPLIED CYCLES OF LOAD Figure i Figure 2 CRACK GROWTH IN HEAT-TREATED AIRCRAFT STEEL CRACK LENGTH, IN. p HEAT TREATED TO 1,2 _ _ SU= 180 TO 200 kSi_T ,.o :2 .8 0 .6 T_HEAT TREATED TO / A FAILURE / SU = 220 TO 240 ksi / ON A COLD / / I I I I 0 25 50 75 lOO X 10 3 CYCLES OF LOAD Figure 3 FATIGUE CRACK AT TOOL MARK FATIGUE CRACK IN 7 0 7 5 - T 6 PLATE

Figure 5 L-59-2980

Figure 4 L-2416-6

IN-FLIGHT ACCELERATIONS EFFECTS O F GROUND-AIR-GROUND CYCLE ON FATIGUE LIFE GUSTS ONLY GUSTS PLUS GAG I L ACCELERATION, UNITS Ax103 L I F E . EQUIVALENT FLIGHTS

Figure 7

Figure 6

, USE OF VERY WEAK RADIATION SOURCES TO DETERMINE AIRCRAFT RUNWAY POSITION By Fred J. Drinkwater III and Bernard R. Kibort NASA Ames Research Center SUMMARY Various methods of providing runway information in the cockpit during the take-off and landing roll have been proposed. The most reliable method has been to use runway distance markers when visible.

Flight tests were used to evaluate the feasibility of using weak radio- active sources to trigger a runway distance counter in the cockpit. The results of these tests indicate that a weak radioactive source would provide a reliable signal by which this indicator could be operated.

INTRODUCTION An investigation was conducted to determine the feasibility of using weak radioactive transmitters to provide position information to the crew during take-off and landing. The transmitters were spaced along the runway and detected by equipment in the aircraft. This information is similar to that which is provided by runway distance markers except that the transmitters are not affected by outside visibility. The need for more precise runway distance information becomes apparent when the basic four-engine jet take-off condition is examined. The airspeed-distance relationship during a take-off is shown in figure i. When all four engines are operating, the acceleration proceeds as shown by the solid curve. There is one point at which, should an engine failure occur, the distances required to come to a complete stop or to continue accel- erating to take-off speed (V2) on three engines are equal. This point on the runway is the critical engine failure point and the associated airspeed reached at this position under normal acceleration conditions is called the critical engine failure speed or basic V 1.

Although the concept of a critical engine failure speed is supposed to account for the sudden loss of an engine, there is no effective way, presently, using speed alone to detect reduced performance resulting from an underthrust engine condition, a dragging brake, drag due to slush or puddles on the runway, or a miscalculation of gross weight for a critical runway length. Under these conditions the critical engine failure speed is reached at a point further along the runway than was expected; thus, speed alone is hazardous to use as a deci- sion point. However, several factors have permitted this lack of information to exist. First, unless the airplane is loaded to the maximum allowable weight for the runway to be used, the refusal condition given the crew is conservative L-4612 45

since this condition is based on the maximum allowable weight for the partic-

ular runway. Secondly, the reliability of jet engines is extremely good, and

lastly, the stopping distances are demonstrated without reverse thrust which

provides an additional margin of safety in an actual emergency.

Obviously, a measurementof aircraft acceleration would provide a satis-

factory solution. The measurementcould be madeeither directly with acceler-

ometers or indirectly by noting the time or distance required to reach a chosen

airspeed. Direct measurementsof acceleration have been used in experimental

take-off monitor systems as noted in references l, 2, and 3- However, none of

these methods are in general use. Time checks of acceleration to a reference

airspeed have been used but the technique is not considered accurate enough by

the pilots; thus, few operators have retained it. Airspeed and distance checks

of take-off acceleration are _ _ the military because _o+ _1_÷o_y runways

have distance markers spaced 1000 feet apart. These markers are useful in day-

light to provide an airspeed-distance decision point even for single-engine

aircraft. However, few civil runways are equipped with distance markers. Since

distance information is an important part of a complete take-off performance

monitor system, several types of wheel rotation pick-offs are being developed

for this purpose, for example, the systems described in references 4, 5, and 6.

The purpose of a take-off monitor system is to provide an indication of

unsatisfactory performance as early as possible. The attendant problems are

several. For example, too early a prediction raises the possibility of unnec-

essary refused take-offs. In addition, the accuracy and reliability of accel-

erometers and wheel pick-offs in this environment are still not adequate and

these systems usually require the inclusion of aircraft gross weight, runway

temperature, runway slope, and altitude into a computation which adds to the

possibility of error. Since these developmental problems have delayed the

introduction of a true take-off performance monitor system, a less ambitious

system is to provide the pilot with runway distance information under all con-

ditions of visibility. Take-off performance is then checked by using airspeed

and distance Just as performance is checked on a runway which has distance

markers. The decision to refuse a take-off can then be madewith the knowledge

that sufficient distance is available for stopping. The reference reports dis-

cuss several ways of obtaining distance during the take-off and this paper pre-

sents still another method.

Preliminary studies indicated that weak radioactive sources spaced along

the runway as distance markers could be readily detected by simple airborne

equipment. The runway installation of sources has advantages such as low ini-

tial cost, simple installation, negligible maintenance, and high reliability

since the runway units required no power and would not be affected by runway

surface conditions. Subsequent to these studies, NASA negotiated a contract

for the design and fabrication of a two-transmitter runway installation and the

airborne components.

RUNWAY POSITION MONITOR EQUIPMENT Runway Installation Gamma radiation transmitters, each of which consisted of a lO-millicurie source of Cesium 137 (Csl37), were installed in containers which shaped the radiation pattern (fig. 2) and were located along the center llne of the run- way. The Cs 137 in the container has a half-life of 30 years, no electrical power or periodic maintenance is required, and the transmitter units are not a source of radio or magnetic interference. The containers were designed to pro- vide security for the small radioactive source and to allow de-activation by the insertion of a lead plug. For this investigation two transmitters were embedded along the center line of the runway on the dry lakebed at Edwards Air Force Base (fig. 3). The transmitters were spaced 200 feet apart, since it had been determined from earlier tests that for the source strength used, 200 feet would be the minimum spacing for separate detection of each source; the spacing could, of course, be greater. For example, lO00-foot spacing would still allow adequate acceleration checks and provide braking distance information. The hardened dry 18_ke surface has radiation shielding characteristics similar to those of concrete. However, the natural background radiation present over the lakebed was several times greater than would be present on a conventional runway.

Airborne Equipment A correlation between the actual aircraft position and the position indi- cated by the radiation sources was determined photographically. The essential airborne components are shown in figure 4. The scintillating probe is a 3-inch thallium-activated sodium iodide crystal, coupled to a 3-inch photomultiplier tube. The largest unit contains the amplifier discriminator, binary counter, timer circuit, logic gates, and an indicator driver. A conventional impulse counter, shown in the figure, was the only component required in the cockpit.

The power used was ll5 VAC 60 cps. Since the large unit was a prototype, no effort was made to reduce its size. In fact, the only units which could not readily be reduced in size were the scintillating probe and photomultiplier tube.

A symbolic diagram showing the complete installation of the airborne equip- ment is shown in figure 5. There was no external probe or antenna. The only requirement was to minimize the mass of aircraft material or structure inter- posed between the scintillating probe and the runway. The recorders indicated in figure 5 were part of the test instrumentation used to obtain a continuous record of the radiation level. The runway distance meter or counter was located between the pilots for coordinated use.

RESULTS AND DISCUSSION The aircraft was flown over the sources in addition to the normal take-off tests. This was done to obtain the higher speed and altitudes required to determine the limiting conditions. A recording made during a typical pass is shown in figure 6. The upper trace is from a count rate meter in counts per minute. The lower signal corresponds to the upper trace but is in a form to operate the cockpit indicator. Each vertical step is 8 counts which are totaled approximately each 1/3 second as indicated by the return to zero on the trace.

The background level is seen to provide 24 to 52 counts before resetting. When a transmitter is approached, it is seen that the count rate increases and when the total exceeds 64, 8 steps up, before the reset time, a signal is passed to the indicator driver. Successive co_uts in excess of 64 are blocked by the and-or gates until the total count drops below 64 during the i/3-second time interval. This return to zero indicates that the beam has been passed and another step is sent to the cockpit indicator by the driver. In this way the mechanical counter is stepped two times for each radiation source, once on entering and once on leaving the beam. The scale on the indicator mounted in the cockpit in the case of this test registered i00 feet for each pulse sent by the indicator driver. However, only the odd lO0-foot indicator pulses were found to measure an accurate distance between the sources. (That is, the dis- tance between the pulses, at the points where the 64 count gate was entered, was proportional to the 200-foot spacing between the sources.) The run shown in figure 6 was made at a measured 155 knots ground speed 35 feet above the center line. As can be seen in figure 6, the signal over each source is readily detect- able and the probability of receiving an inadvertent count or of not counting when over the source at signal levels such as shown in this figure can be esti- mated to be less than one chance in one million. During these tests reliable detections of the sources were achieved at distances of 50 feet and speeds of over 150 knots. If the sources were spaced further apart the speed of passage would have a less significant effect. The source detection at heights of 50 feet was evaluated for possible consideration of the use of this signal to indicate to the pilot his touchdown point after landing.

The radiation level of the source installed in the container was lower than the predicted value because of excessive shielding by the container. This value indicates that improvements can be made in the container design. In addi- tion the hazards associated with the radiation sources can be further reduced by a design which distributes the sources more uniformly across the runway.

The ultimate in distribution would be obtained by painting stripes of an epoxy-type base containing the radiating material. The radiation level of such a stripe could be less than 1 mR per hr at a distance 4 inches from the surface.

This rate can be compared with the radiation level of a luminous dial watch which has a rate between 1.O and 2.0 mR per hr at a distance of 1/2 inch.

Another method would be to install aluminum tubing in slots in the runway. The tubing would contain a homogeneous mixture of the source material and an inac- tive filler which would again reduce the local concentration of radioactive material.

Under the present rules of the Atomic Energy Commission, upon application permission may be obtained to install sources in unrestricted areas if the radiation levels are such that an individual is not likely to receive a radia- tion exposure in excess of 500 mR per yr. A person would have to remain within l-l/2 feet of the source used in this experiment for more than 40 hours per year in order to exceed this exposure. By using the improved installation the distance would have to be in the order of several inches for several hundred hours per year. Since this is unlikely, especially on an active runway, it is considered probable that the U.S. Atomic Energy Commission or the applicable State regulating agencies would approve the use of radioactive sources for the purposes set forth in this report 3 provided satisfactory precautions are taken to secure the sources from accidental or malicious removal from the site.

CONCLUDING REMARKS Operational tests have shown that aircraft distance traveled during the take-off roll can be determined by using relatively simple airborne equipment to count nonhazardous radiation sources located in the runway. The detection of the sources was reliable at heights of up to 50 feet above the runway. With this information provided in the cockpit under all runway conditions, the pilot can not only determine whether his take-off acceleration is satisfactory by using an airspeed-distance check, but also make the decision to continue or refuse the take-off at a point which assures sufficient stopping distance.

REFERENCES i. Kolnick, Joseph J.; and Rind, Emauuel: Investigation of the Characteristics of an Acceleration-Type Take-0ff Indicator in a Large Jet Airplane.

NASA MEM0 4-21-59L, 1959.

2. Morris, Garland J.; and Lina, Lindsay J.: Description and Preliminary Flight Investigation of an Instrument for Detecting Subnormal Acceleration During Take-0ff. NACA TN 3252, 1954.

3. Swindl% Elro M.: Flight Test of Sperry Gyroscope Company Takeoff Monitor in a B-47 Airplane. WADC TN 59-360, U.S. Air Force, Jan. 1960.

4. Various contributors: Towards Safer Take-Offs. Flight Intern. (Letters), vol. 86, no. 2899, Oct. I, 1964, pp. 600-602.

5. Fearnside, K.: Instrument Aids for Take-off. J. Roy. Aeron. Soc., vol. 67, no. 633, Sept. 1963, pp. 544-551.

6. Rush, D. A.: Ground Run Prediction. AGARD Rept. 422, Jan. 1963.

TYPlCAL SOURCE CONTAINER INSTALLATION BASIC ENGINE FAILURE DECISION SPEED SEALED SOURCE, ,LOCK TAKE-OFF SPEED w AL-MlNUM

m

0 0

w 0 LEAD

a w MAXIMUM I n BRAKING P

a COhCRETE

5 4 ENGINE

\ 4 DISTANCE

Figure 1 Figure 2

TEST INSTALLATION AND POSSIBLE OPERATIONAL INSTALLATION

Figure 3

Figure 4 A-33993

AIRBORNE RADIATION DETECTION EQUIPMENT COUNTER RECORDERS \ SCINTILLATING PROBE RADIOACTIVE SOURCE (Os 137) Figure 5 TAKE-OFF RADIATION MEASUREMENTS GROUND SPEED 155 kts ALTITUDE 34.8 ft OFFSET +3ft -- _ _% _-- SOURCE I 2 ° LouNo ; _ ,20- j : F- R i _z _ 72 _- 64 COUNT GATE ...... ..... ' ......

_ 4B- j _ 24 0 r_,L2_.--_-__--J,_;,-'.'_'.C_-Z.-_:Lr'_:'_'LL----;_.q_:-.---JZLC_d.£, I sec TIME, sec Figure 6 A LABORATORY INVESTIGATION OF TURBULENCE DETECTION e USING A lASER By Kent Bourquin and Fred H. Shigemoto NASA Ames Research Center SUMMARY Calculations and experiments have been undertaken to determine the property of the backscattered laser-return signal that undergoes the most significant change in a turbulent region as compared with a nonturbulent region. If the turbulent region is composed mainly of air molecules, the detection of a shift in the frequency property appears to be the most promising. Therefore at this time the main effort at the Ames Research Center is focused on the implementa- tion and laboratory evaluation of a clear-air turbulence detector utilizing a laser source and observing the frequency change.

INTRODUCTION The unexpected penetration of clear-air turbulence has increased greatly in recent years because of the increased number of flights and the lack of any reliable detection methods. Clear-air turbulence presents itself in different forms and has been reported at altitudes from sea level to 100,000 feet where it has been encountered by U-2 and X-15 flights. Turbulence, however, has most often been encountered near the jet stream at altitudes of 20,000 to 40,000 feet.

The region of turbulence is small compared with the overall air volume; it is usually less than 3,000 feet in vertical depth, 20 miles in width, and 50 or more miles in length along the direction of the wind. This localized nature of clear-air turbulence makes it very difficult to predict from normal meteoro- logical observations. Still it would be extremely valuable to be able to detect clear-air turbulence regions and, as yet, there are no suitable devices avail- able. Several different approaches to the detection of turbulence are pres- ently being pursued. Some of these devices rely on the detection of tempera- ture or electric-field gradients in the vicinity of turbulence. Since these effects occur near clear-air turbulence, there exists a limit to the maximum advance warning time available to the pilot to execute a maneuver to avoid the area. A fundamental requirement of a clear-air turbulence detector is that the device must give the pilot enough warning to make avoidance possible.

The success of a conventional radar in detecting storms has led to con- siderations of its use in detecting turbulence. However, the extreme ratio of wavelength to particle size makes its effective use appear extremely doubtful.

An optical radar using a laser appears more promising owing to its much shorter wavelength. Ames Research Center is conducting laboratory experiments in order to determine the feasibility of using an onboard laser as a probe to detect clear-air turbulence.

An investigation is being carried out to determine whether the laser light backscattered from a turbulent region will be modified as compared with light backscattered from a nonturbulent region. Laboratory experiments_ rather than actual onboard experiments_ were chosen in order to correlate the results with a controlled atmosphere.

DISCUSSION The backscatter consists of three phenomena: Rayleigh scattering from gas molecules and microscopic particles that are small compared with the wave- !e_th of light_ Mie scattering from dust particles that are comparable in size to the wavelength of ligh% and refractive scattering due to inhomogeneities of the refractive index. An analytical study of the latter phenomena has revealed it to be insignificant compared with the first two.

Before discussing the results of the experimen% some background material is presented that justifies the choice of a laser system as a possible clear- air turbulence detector. The background material will also include the prop- erties of the laser source and a description of the experimental setup. A laser detection system would be similar to a conventional microwave radar_ except that it would operate at a much higher frequency_ one that is in the visible region. A comparison of the two systems_ Rayleigh scattering being assumed_ shows that there is a 1020 increase in scattered return and a 10 -5 reduction in beam angle owing to the 105 difference in frequency. In order to make a preliminary determination of the feasibility of an optical radar, cal- culations were made of the received signal-noise rati% a region free of high particle content being assumed and, as a result of this assumption 3 the air molecule scattering is predominant. The calculations show that the cur- rently available pulsed lasers are feasible but that the currently available continuous-wave lasers at their best are borderline.

For use of either a pulsed or a continuous-wave laser_ consideration would have to be given to the effect of the laser beam on the eye of occupants in other aircraft that might be located along the laser line of sight. The high- power pulsed laser would certainly require special safety precautions_ whereas the continuous gas laser might be tolerated for short exposures. This area will require further investigation.

A study of the effects of turbulence on the characteristics of backscat- tered radiation requires an understanding of the properties of the laser light contained in the backscattered signal. Important properties to be considered are amplitude_ polarization_ coherence_ and frequency. The amplitude is an indication of the power in the beam. Polarization of the wave refers to the orientation of the electric-field vector in a plane perpendicular to the direction of propagation. The path described by the tip of the electric- field vector in the plane defines the polarization. For example3 a straight- line path would be called linear polarization.

One of the most important laser characteristics is coherence. It is this property which allows the laser to be radiated in a narrow beam and focused into an intense spot. It also causes a granular appearance when the light is incident on a surface. There are two kinds of coherence. One is spatial coherence, the other is temporal coherence (or monochromaticity). These two coherence characteristics in reality form a three-dimensional coherence func- tion where temporal coherence describes phase correlation of the radiation in the direction of propagation, and spatial coherence describes phase correla- tion across the wavefront.

The frequency is of the order of lO 14 cycles per second. The frequency determines the color of the laser light. The laser output can be composed of one or several discrete frequencies 3 depending on the optical cavity length and laser power input.

Laboratory experiments have been designed to determine which properties of the scattered laser-return signal have the most significant change in a turbu- lent region as compared with a nonturbulent region. The experimental equipment is not designed to simulate actual clear-air turbulence phenomena, but only to provide a gross air motion and to introduce aerosol particle concentrations.

This experimental technique provides a means for evaluating the properties of the return signal under controlled conditions. One of the main reasons for not attempting to simulate clear-alr turbulence is that the actual phenomena is not thoroughly known. In particular, the particle content is not known.

Some meteorologists speculate that silt and clay are distributed in the eddies around the jet stream.

Figure 1 shows a photograph of the laboratory setup. The laser output passes through a fused-quartz window and into the test section. The portable enclosure is sealed and bolted to the bulkhead and allows the test section to be evacuated for initial calibration. The ports located on the side of the enclosure allow air flow to be introduced through the ports by an external clean-alr source with a 0.3-micron filter.

Figure 2 shows more detail of the system. A continuous-wave gas laser is located on one end of a 17-foot aluminum T-beam. The output of the laser passes through a fused-quartz window at Brewster's angle, the collimating aper- tures, and the test section, and is finally absorbed. The absorber consists of a cone lined with a smooth gelatin filter material that absorbs or diverts the wide-angle rays into the main section containing a filter. The filter, set at Brewster's angle, causes maximum transmission and minimum reflection of the polarized light; therefore the laser light is transmitted through the filter and rapidly absorbed. The collimator and absorber are required to prevent the laser light from being scattered off the walls of the chamber and into the optical receiver.

The test section is determined by the intersection of the laser beam and the receiver field of view. Figure 3 shows the geometry involved. The detector is a photomultiplier tube which has an S-20 surface.

It should be noted that most of the experimental equipment would not be used in an actual detection system. The main equipment needed in an actual clear-air turbulence detection system would be a laser and an optical receiver.

The other equipment shown in the figures merely permits evaluation of the previously discussed properties in a laboratory environment. The most diffi- cult design requirement was complete absorbance of the laser light at the end of the chamber since the received light at the detector from molecular scat- tering is only i0 -I0 times the initial light power of the laser. Any light reflected from the chamber must be kept well below this value.

The initial experiments verify that when the atmosphere is removed from the chamber, stray light signal is negligible. Under vacuum condition the photomultiplier output is essentially only the noise current of the photo- multiplier. The magnitude of the detected signal is 6.00 millivolts because of the photomultiplier noise curren% 8 miliivoits with the chamber under vacuum_ 350 millivolts with normal room air in the chamber, and i00 volts when a high concentration of water vapor is passed through the test section.

Preliminary experiments and calculations based on Rayleigh scattering have shown that the amplitude property of the returned signal is not signif- icantly modified in a turbulent region. On the other hand_ calculations show that if the turbulent region contained significantly larger particle concentra- tions than the surrounding nonturbulent region_ a change of amplitude could be detected. However_ even in this case_ the amplitude property might not be a reliable property to detec% since absorption and scattering, from clouds and other phenomena other than clear-alr turbulence would affect the amplitude during transmission.

The results_ as expected, have indicated no first-order effects on polar- ization due to turbulence. The effect of polarization was examined by rotating a linear sheet of polaroid in front of the receiver optics. The results showed the return to have polarization identical to that transmitted. However 3 further investigations using different particle sizes with different indices of refraction will be considered wi_h various laser output polarizations.

The spatial coherence of the return wave can be studied by use of an experiment similar to Young's double-slit experiment. If the phase difference between the waves entering the two slits changes, the interference fringe pat- tern will shift according to this change. Investigation of this property has no% as yet, been undertaken by the Ames Research Center.

One of the more promising properties for detection, which calculations show changes significantly in a turbulent region as opposed to a nonturbulent region, is that of frequency shift due to velocity gradients. This frequency shift is an effect analogous to the change in pitch of a moving train whistle as it passes a stationary observer. Detection of this property is complicated by the Brownian motion of molecules due to temperature. The effect of Brownian motion is to spread the frequency spectrum of the return signal from air mole- cules. In a turbulent region 3 the air mass is moving in a random fashion and thus the frequency spectrum is spread still further_ or the whole spectrum is displaced. Most particles are not affected by Brownian motion and backscatter from them will only display a spread in the frequency spectrum due to turbu- lence. If the air mass were moving in only one direction, a shift in frequency _6 would result. Detection is limited to velocity components parallel to the direction of travel. One method for detecting a frequency shift is by photo- mixing a local laser oscillator and the scattered return signal. The use of a local reference oscillator imposes the problem of critical alinement of the reference oscillator and the return signal. Photomixing also required both signals to have essentially the same polarization and spatial coherence. The velocity of the aircraft also causes the Doppler frequency shift to be outside the bandwidth of conventional photomultipliers and the types of photomultlpliers now being developed for laser photomixing would be required.

Another detection method recently proposed uses a laser in an operating mode which contains two frequencies in the output. By photomixing the return scattered signal_ which still contains the two frequencies 3 a frequency shift should be detected. This frequency shift would be proportional to the differ- ence between the two frequencies which is about 1.5 × lO 8 cycles per second instead of being proportional to the single laser frequency of lO i4 cycles per second. The advantage of this technique is that the signal bandwidth is within that of conventional photomultipliers and the bandwidth of the electronics can be narrow; hence, the noise in the system is reduced. Another advantage is there should be no critical alinement or spatial coherence problems, such as I matching with a local oscillator. However 3 there is still the main practical disadvantage of the inadequate power of current gas lasers.

Both methods of Doppler frequency-shift detection are being investigated at the Ames Research Center. Optical equipment is being assembled and elec- tronic spectrum-analysis-amplifier-filter combinations are being designed in order to carry out an experimental program in the test chamber.

CONCLUDING REMARKS Calculations and experiments have been undertaken to determine the property of the backscattered laser-return signal that undergoes the most significant change in a turbulent region as compared with a nonturbulent region. If the turbulent region is composed mainly of air molecules, the detection of a shift in the frequency property appears to be the most promising. Therefore, at this time the main effort at the Ames Research Center is focused on the implementa- tion and laboratory evaluation of a clear-air turbulence detector utilizing a laser source and observing the Doppler frequency change.

Figure 1 A-34386- 4

DETAILED SYSTEM DIAGRAM /BULKHEAD CONTI NUOUS-WAVE GAS LASER L A S E R COLLIMATOR LASER BEAM F I L T E R ENTRANCE WINDOW’

Figure 2

GEOMETRY OF EXPERIMENTAL SETUP AI R FLOW % /TEST SECTION LASER _1/8 in \_\ / _ ........

50 #-_oov RBr..R RECEIVER Figure 3 .

SIMULATOR EVALUATION OF A DISPLAY FOR MANUAL ZER0-ZERO LANDINGS By Joseph G. Douvillier, Jr.

NASA Ames Research Center SUMMARY A research program to study in flight the display, sensor, and computer requirements for airborne, manually piloted zero-zero landing systems is being undertaken at the Ames Research Center. An evaluation has been made, on a flight simulator, of the display which will be used in the flight tests.

Results show that on the simulator the pilots performed at least as well when they used the display for zero-zero approaches and landings as they did when they made simulated ILS approaches followed by simulated VFR breakouts and landings. In some aspects, particularly in the presence of crosswind, perform- ance for the zero-zero display landings was somewhat better than for the ILS-V_R landings.

Eight configurations of the display were studied in an attempt to evaluate the several elements in the display. There was no evident difference among the eight display configurations. The pilots who participated in the simulator program doubt that this result will carry over into flight.

INTRODUCTION The Ames Research Center is conducting a research program on the concept of manually piloted zero-zero landing systems. This paper is a report of some results of the evaluation on a flight simulator of the pilot's display which will be used in the flight program. The particular concept which will be explored is that of an airborne, manually piloted system: airborne, because to be independent of ground installations would allow zero-zero capability to air- plane operators using small, relatively unequipped airports - for examplej to short-haul, commuter airlines or to general aviation operators; manually piloted, because a manual system would likely be simpler than an automatic one and, therefore, probably lighter and more reliable - always two important con- siderations. Furthermore 3 even with an automatic system, provision for manual landings would be desirable as a safety measure. Manual capability, therefore_ is fundamental.

The objectives of the program are: First, to document quantitatively the performance of pilots in making manual zero-zero landings by using a synthesized landing display, compared with their performance in making landings in VFR con- ditions and, second, to determine the degree of accuracy which must be provided in the sensors and the computers as well as in the display. This paper per- tains only to the first objective.

Concurrently with the preparations for the in-flight research, a ground-

based flight simulator was used to develop and make a preliminary evaluation

of a display.

DISCUSSION

The basic display which will be used in the flight tests is shown in

figure 1. Basedon what had been learned in previous display research, the

approach taken was to make the display as VFR-like as possible - in other words,

such that the pilot could use it much as he does the outside world when making

_r_v_ua_1 landings. There would be no numbers explicit in the display and no

director information. The elements of this basic display are shown in figure 1.

There is a horizon line which behaves the sameas the horizon in the conven-

tional attitude gyro. There is a runway, depicted by four lines - like tar

strips across the real runway. The symbolic runway movesabout in the display

and has the sameperspective as would the real runway viewed from the pilot's

position. The velocity circle encloses the point on the ground toward which

the airplane is flying. It is the point of intersection of the total velocity

vector and the ground. There is also the fixed vertical index representing the

nose of the airplane.

It was reasoned that these elements contained all the information a pilot

needs to land his airplane, presented in a way that could be interpreted as

VFR-like as a symbolic display can be. He can discern from it his position in

relation to the runway by the asymmetry of the runway symbol; his path by the

location of the velocity circle; his altitude by the amount of separation

between the horizon line and the runway lines; and his attitude by the dis-

placement and the angle of the horizon line.

However, an early subjective evaluation suggested the need for more infor-

mation. The pilots wanted better lateral-displacement information when rela-

tively far out on the approach and better height and height-rate information

when close to the ground.

For better lateral-displacement information a centerline indicator was

added, as shownin figure 2. It behaves essentially as would the fuselage of

another airplane in front of and slightly below the pilot's own airplane, but

this other airplane is always lined up with the runway centerllne. It has been

nameda "ghost" airplane. Essentially, it gives the pilot a magnified indica-

tion of lateral displacement. It behaves like a lead airplane as seen from the

pilot's position. For example, in figure 2 the airplane is far out on the

approach; the runway symbol is too small for the pilot to perceive any asym-

metry. But he can tell from the ghost airplane that he is off to the left a

bit. He can also tell, from the velocity circle, that he is correcting the

error. He is flying toward a point to the right of the runway. He has to fly

toward the right of the runway if he wants to get lined up. Whenhe is lined

up, he will be right behind the ghost airplane; that is, the ghost airplane will

be between his own airplane and the runway. But the pilot does not want to fly

past the ghost airplane_ so, as he closes on being lined up - as the ghost air-

plane drifts in front of his own airplane - the pilot makes a turn into position

behind the ghost airplane. In other words, he flies toward the ghost airplane

and the runway.

For better height and height-rate information another symbol, a small dash,

was added. This altitude indicator is shown in figure 3. The displacement of

the dash below the velocity circle is proportional to airplane height above the

runway, scaled at 1 inch per lO feet. It does not appear in the display until

the airplane is down to an altitude of about 50 feet. The position and the rate

of change of position of the altitude indicator give the pilot a more compelling

signal than does the perspective of the runway. The dash is somewhatlike the

airplane shadowon the ground. Whenthe airplane is descending, the shadow

comesup to meet the airplane; if the airplane balloons upward, the shadowsinks

away. Whenthe shadowcoincides with the point toward which the airplane is

flying (the velocity circle), the airplane is on the ground.

The scaling of the display is one to one with the real world. That is,

the visual angles associated with a particular element of the display are the

sameas the corresponding visual angles associated with the object in the real

world which the particular element of the display represents. For example, the

visual angle between the horizon line and the runway threshold line in the dis-

play is the sameas the visual angle between the actual horizon and the actual

runway threshold. As a result, the sensitivity of the display changes as the

airplane gets closer to the ground, Just as the effective sensitivity of the

real world changes. The pilot has information to larger scale as he gets close

to the ground - with the display Just as with the real world.

The pilot can, as he chooses, make shallow approaches or steep approaches.

Figure 4 shows a comparison of the display for two angles of approach. In each,

the airplane is at the samedistance from the threshold. In each, it is flying

toward the samepoint on the runway. But in the left display the pilot is

making a more shallow approach than in the right. The different runway per-

spectives show this; but the primary indication is in the velocity circle. Its

distance below the horizon in the display subtends a visual angle equal to the

flight-path angle and is about three times greater in the right display than in

the left.

The experiment was madein such a way that pilots' performance in landing

when they used the display could be comparedwith their performance in landing

when they used a televised facsimile of the visual landing scene in conjunction

with an ILS approach - all on a flight simulator. Not only was the complete

display, as shown in figures 3 and 4, studied but, in order to get a measurement

of the values of the several elements, the display _as tested without the veloc-

ity circle, without the altitude indicator, and without the ghost airplane, each

removed singly and in combination with the other two. In this way the separate

and the interacting effects of these elements on the pilots' performance could

be measured relative to the complete display and to the visual picture. There-

fore, eight configurations were tested of this display, which varied in com-

pleteness from the one in figures 3 and 4 to one containing just the horizon

and the runway lines.

In addition, runs were madeboth with and without crosswlnd so that the

effect of this variable on each of the displays could be examined. The flight

characteristics simulated were those of a Breguet 941 STOL airplane in the landing configuration.

The flight-simulator configuration is such that a televised picture of the simulated visual landing is projected on an 8- by 6-foot screen attached to the front of the simulator cockpit and about 8 feet in front of the pilot as shown in figure 5. The simulator can be rolled, pitched, and translated vertically.

This simulator has been used in several Ames research programs, so the Ames pilots are "well-calibrate_' to its similarities and its dissimilarities to flight.

Figure 6 is a drawing of the view from inside the cab during an oscilloscope-display run. The pilot can see nothing outside the cab. Shown in the figure are the oscilloscope on which the display was generated, and the viewing mirror with the image of the display. During the ILS-VFR runs the dis- play was off. The pilot made an ILS approach down to an altitude of about 550 feet, at which time the projected televised picture of the simulated runway appeared on the screen outside the cockpit, and the pilot made a simulated visual landing by using the picture.

The simulator is fitted with a complete set of cockpit instruments, typi- cal of a large transport airplane. All panel instruments were operating during all runs, so that the pilots could gather whatever information they wanted from them, as they would in an actual airplane.

Although the analysis of the data is not yet complete, enough has been done to discover the trends. The preliminary analysis indicated that, on the average, the pilots did at least equally well at touchdown with any of the dis- plays as they did with the visual simulation. According to significance tests the differences which did appear at touchdown were scatter in the data and not due to any real difference among the displays and the visual simulation.

Not only were data recorded at touchdown but throughout the entire approach. The next three figures (figs. 7, 8, and 9) show average time his- tories during the 30 seconds before touchdown for three of the parameters measured. In these figures the results associated with the eight configurations of the scope display are presented in a shaded band, and the results associated with the ILS-visual runs are shown by a solid line. The results for the scope displays are presented this way not only because the measured differences among them are not large enough to be due, probably, to anything other than experi- mental variation but also because there was no discernible tendency for one scope display to be different from the other scope displays (to be at the high end or the low end of the band). However, on some of the curves there is a tendency for the performance with the visual simulation to be different from performance with the scope displays.

Figure 7 shows rates of descent. The upper curves show rates of descent averaged over all the runs with no crosswind; the lower curves, with crosswind.

As can be seen, there is virtually no difference between the visual runs and the scope-display runs, either with or without crosswind. Moreover_ the crosswind curves are almost the same as the no-crosswind curves; therefore, there appears to be no effect of crosswind on the rate of descent for either the visual sim- ulation or the scope displays.

All this indicates that the pilots controlled their rate of descent in the same way with any of the scope displays as with the ILS-visual simulation, under both no-crosswind and crosswind conditions. The rate of descent was about 13 ft/sec during the approach; they started to break the glide at about lO sec- onds before touchdown, and the rate of sink was about 5 or 6 ft/sec at touch- down. All these values are typical of actual landings with the Breguet 941.

Figure 8 shows time histories of average drift angle. Averages of the runs with no crosswind, the upper curves, show essentially zero drift angle - as might reasonably be expected with no crosswind. However, the averages of the runs with crosswind, the lower curves, show that the pilot flew differently when he used the visual simulation from the way he did when he used any of the scope displays, for which averages tend to group. On the ILS-visual runs, breakout occurred at about 28 seconds before touchdown, so the curve is for the visual portion of the ILS-visual runs. (Of course, the curves for the displays represent only zero-zero conditions.) Obviously, the effect of crosswind tends, during the approach, to be greater when the pilot used the visual simulation than when he used any of the scope displays. This result was not surprising because, in a crosswind, the pilots used a technique with the scope displays that was different from the one they used with the ILS-visual simulation.

This different technique, although it resulted in slightly better perform- ance, was actually necessary because of a shortcoming in the display. The horizontal visual range of the scope display was from i0 ° to -i0 °. The crab angle necessary to correct for the crosswind used was 9 °. Therefore, if the crosswind were corrected for by crabbing, the runway (and the ghost airplane and the velocity circle when they were in the display) would be well over on one edge of the display, almost out of sight. Any small deviation would drive it off the scope. So, with the scope displays, as soon as the approach began the pilots held the heading of the airplane so that the runway stayed essentially in the center of the scope and compensated for the crosswind by holding a wing down. The airplane was more nearly decrabbed throughout the approach with the scope displays than with the visual simulation, and no large last-second correc- tions had to be made.

On the ILS-visual runs the pilots would crab the airplane to compensate for crosswind, until breakout, and then gradually feed in some sideslip. In fact, on the average, they let the drift build up again beginning at about lO seconds before touchdown and then decrabbed during the last 3 seconds. However, at the instant of touchdown, the amount of drift was not large in any case; and the spread is, in fact, statistically not significant.

It is interesting to note that none of the curves indicate a tendency for the pilots to overcompensate for drift. All the end results are on the under- compensating side of zero.

Figure 9 shows a time history of lateral displacement from the runway centerline. The upper curves, the averages over the runs with no crosswind, again show almost no difference, either among scope displays or between scope displays and visual simulation. There is an average error of about 35 feet at breakout on the ILS-visual runs, but the spread at touchdown is about 8 feet.

The lower curves show the effect of crosswind on lateral displacement.

Obviously, the pilots flew differently with the ILS-visual simulation from the way they did with the scope displays. On the ILS-vlsual runs, breakout occurred at about 28 seconds. It appears that the average error at the end of the ILS portion of the approach was about 80 feet, in the direction the crosswind tended to carry the airplane away from the centerllne. At breakout, the pilot detected the misalinement and was able to correct it easily enough by using the televised picture. On the other hand, with the scope displays the pilot was able to stay more nearly alined through most of the approach and did not have to make any appreciable correction. Again, the differences at touchdown were insignificant.

Several other parameters were measured during the experiment, but these have yet to be examined in detail. The brief analysis which has been made suggests that the same trends which were apparent in the rate of descent, the drift angle, and the lateral displacement can be expected: essentially no average difference among the scope displays, and little practical average dif- ference between scope displays and ILS-visual simulation.

It is surprising that there was no difference among the eight configura- tions of the scope displays. One would expect that, as the explicit information provided by the velocity circle, the altitude indicator, and the ghost airplane was removed, the pilots' performance would deteriorate. On the other hand, all the information provided by those three elements is still in the display when it contains only the horizon llne and the four runway lines. It is apparent, from the results and also from the pilots' comments during the experiment, that they learned to use this implicit information. Also, while using the complete dis- play they learned to recognize the behavior of the runway symbol, relative to the horizon and to the scope frame, in successful landings. They could success- fully reproduce that behavior, on the average, even with the three elements missing. However, the pilots do not believe that this would carry over into even the most mildly stressful situation in flight - and perhaps not even into an unfamiliar simulation.

Remember that all the results shown here are averages. It may well be that even though pilots can, on the average, do as well with the minimum scope display as with the most complete, perhaps their performance is less consistent from run to run. Therefore, the data will also be analyzed to show the varia- bility from run to run, with the eight display configurations and the ILS-visual simulation.

The conclusions reached here are tentative, both because they are the results of simulator tests and because the data analysis is not yet complete.

Whether or not they hold up in flight will be finally determined in the research airplane.

The display described in this paper is not hnique. Other similar displays are described in references l, 2, and 3. Reference 3 is a comprehensive dis- cussion of the kinds of information which must be contained in a landing display and the way in which this information should be presented. It contains a com- parison in particular of five existing and proposed displays and makes recom- mendations for flight and simulator test programs. Reference 3 is recommended reading for anyone interested in flight displays in general, and landing dis- plays in particular.

EQUIPMENT FOR FUTURE FLIGHT RESEARCH The flight research part of the program will be conducted in a Convair 340 airplane. This airplane is being prepared as a general-utillty flying labora- tory, especially for conducting research on the required characteristics of sensors, computers, and displays for airborne zero-zero landing systems.

Figure l0 shows briefly how this research airplane is being equipped. The system is basically a distance-measuring system (EMS). Because current state of the art does not permit a completely airborne system, there will be three DMS transponders on the ground at known positions relative to the runway. The air- borne DMS components interrogate the transponders; and the airborne computer, using the DMS signals, calculates the position and rate of change of position of the airplane relative to the runway. These data, together with airplane attitude information fed to the computer from onboard sensors, are used to com- pute the display. The display is generated on a cathode-ray tube (CRT), and the reflection of it in a mirror is viewed by the pilot. When the airplane is near touchdown, the position information from the DMS is augmented with height information from a radar altimeter. References 4 and 5 contain detailed descriptions of this research equipment and its operation.

At present the DMS, the computer, and the display-generating equipment are being tested on the ground and prepared for installation in the airplane. The support equipment has already been installed and checked in flight. When this flying laboratory is completed, Ames will have a flexible research facility for in-flight studies of display concepts as well as of the attendant sensing and generating equipment. The first program to be undertaken on this flying labor- atory is the one which has been described in this paper.

REFERENCES i. Noxon, Paul A.: Microvision. Eclipse-Pioneer Div., Bendix Corp., July 1964.

2. Snodgrass, Reuben P.: Head-Up Display - A New Form of Avionics. Sperry Eng.

Rev., vol. 17, no. 3, Fall 1964, pp. 10-19.

3. Baxter, J. R.; and Workman, J. D.: Review of Projected Displays of Flight Information and Recommendations for Further Development. Human Eng.

Rept. 2, Aeron. Res. Lab., Australian Defense Sci. Service, Aug. 1962.

4. Robinson, Gilbert G.; and Johnson, Norman S.: An Airborne Zero-Zero Landing Laboratm_j. Presented at Inst. Navigation, Low-Cost Navigation Symposium (Los Angeles, Calif.), Nov. 6-7, 1963.

5. Robinson, Gilbert G.; and Johnson, Norman S.: Subsystem Requirements for an Airborne Laboratory To Study Zero-Zero Landing Systems. Presented to 25th Meeting of Flight Mechanics Panel of AGARD (Munich, Germany), Oct. 12-14, 1964.

BASIC ELEMENTS OF THE DISPLAY DISPLAY WITH CENTERLINE INDICATOR CENTERLINE INDICATOR ("GHOST" CIRCLE AIRPLANE) VERTICAL INDEX Figure i Figure 2 THE COMPLETE DISPLAY INCLUDING ALTITUDE INDICATOR TWO VIEWS OF DISPLAY SHOWING DIFFERENT ANGLES OF APPROACH SAME DISTANCE OUT LTITUDE INDICATOR SHALLOW ANGLE STEEP ANGLE Figure 3 Figure 4 THE INTERIOR OF THE SIMULATOR CAB THE AMES TRANSPORT LANDING SIMULATOR 9SCOPE PICTURE /_._ PROJ ECTE D "_ SIMULATOR "_ _ CAB TV Figure 6 Figure 5 TIME HISTORIES OF AVERAGE DRIFT ANGLE DURING TIME HISTORIES OF AVERAGE RATE OF DESCENT DURING LAST 5Osec BEFORE TOUCHDOWN LAST 50 sec BEFORE TOUCHDOWN OF RUNS AVERAGES WITH NO OF RUNS (o I0 CROSSWtND _ - CROSSWlND u.2 WITHNO _ _ --VISUAL SIMUL AT_N AVERAGES ,F- " OF RUNS _ AVERAGES (_ 12 WtTH 4 CROSSWlND OF RUNS _ IO CROSSWIND WITH _ 2 -2 25 20 15 I0 5 0 30 25 20 15 I0 5 0 TIME BEFORE TOUCHOOWN, sec TIME BEFORE TOUCHDOWN, sec Figure 8 Figure 7 7O TIME HISTORIES OF AVERAGE LATERAL DISPLACEMENT FROM RUNWAY CENTERLINE DURING LAST 5Osec BEFORE TOUCHDOWN 4O AVERAGES OF RUNS zW v ...... _ ........ r ........ T , W_TH NO w, 40 _ , CROSSWlND w&c --v,soAL S,.0LAT_ J _= OSSWIND '_ z 80 AVERAGES _m w_ OF RUNS WITH CROSS'WIND °L ' ' '_ 4 -40 ! I L I I L / 30 25 _0 IS I0 5 0 TiME BEFORE TOUCHDOWN, ,SeC Figure 9 AIRBORNE SYSTEM FOR ZERO-ZERO LANDING RESEARCH DMS LINKS DMS RUNWAY DMS RAOAR ALTIMETER i Figure lO FACTORS RELATING TO THE AIRPORT-COMMUNITY NOISE PROBLEM .

By Harvey H. Hubbard, Jimmy M. Cawthorn, and W. LathamCopeland NASA Langley Research Center SUMMARY Factors relating to the airport-community noise problem are discussed herein. The noise problems are associated with aircraft landing approaches, take-offs, and climbouts in communities near commercial airports. The main objectives are to identify the significant factors involved in the problem, to define some of their interrelationships, and to present recent related research information from NASA in-house and contract studies. Changes in the types of aircraft power plants, the aircraft operating procedures, and the community itself are all judged to be important; however, these changes should not be made without understanding the associated human-response implications.

INTRODUCTION Factors relating to the airport-community noise problem which are discussed herein are illustrated in figure 1. These factors relate to noise associated with landing approaches_ take-offs (ground operations), and climbouts in com- munities near commercial airports. The main objectives of this paper are to identify the significant factors involved in the problem, to define some of their interrelationships, and to present recent research information from NASA in-house and contract studies.

The significant factors in the airport-community noise situation are pre- sented in figure 2. At the heart of the problem, as indicated in the center of the figure, is the fact that humans respond unfavorably to noise. Since there is very little possibility of such human responses changing markedly in the near future_ it is important that aircraft operators understand these adverse responses and, particularly, what features of the noise are most objectionable.

There are several means of obtaining an overall solution, all of which fall into the three categories identified by the shaded areas in figure 2. (See also refs. 1 and 2.) Noise sources refer_ of course, to aircraft power plants and involve both the type of engine cycle and its operating conditions. Aircraft operations include such factors as aircraft gross weight_ flight path_ fre- quency of operations, preferential runways, and time of day. Community consid- erations involve such items as size and location of the areas affected, type of activity existing in the community, the social structure, background noise level, and types of construction of the buildings.

The main objective is, of course, to obtain a more favorable human response to the noise. This objective might be achieved by means of any one of the fac- tors in figure 2, or preferably by some combination of them. It should be noted that no physical changes should be made_ however, without an understanding of the associated human-response implications.

There is first a review of some of the recent results of subjective response studies performed under contract by Bolt_ Beranek & Newmanj Inc.

(refs. 3and 4). Then there is a brief discussion relating to each of the physical factors represented by the shaded areas of figure 2.

HUMAN RESPONSE The perceived noise level which is a measure of human response to noise (see refs. 3 and 4) is at present widely used, both in this country and abroad.

One of the basic concepts of this response rating procedure is that high- frequency noise is generally more objectionable than low-frequency noise.

Spectrum shape is thus an important influence in human reaction to noise. This is especially important where discrete frequencies are involved, as illustrated in figure 3 which is taken from unpublished work done under contract to Bolt, Beranek & Newman, Inc. The basic spectrum at the bottom of the figure has a dlscrete-frequency component superposed on the broad-band random noise. Such a discrete frequency might be produced by the compressor of a jet engine and, for the case of the illustration, extends about lOdB above the background (basic) noise level of the octave band in which it resides. The net effect of such a pure tone is to increase the percelved-noise-level value noticeably. For the example shown, the net effect of the single pure tone is the equivalent of a 6 dB across-the-board increase in all octave bands of the basic spectrum, as illustrated in the curve at the top of the figure. Since pure tones have an adverse effect on acceptance, much research effort is being directed toward eliminating such noise components during aircraft operations near airports.

(Decibels are referred to 0.0002 dynes/cm2.)

There has recently become available some information on the effect of time duration of the noise on its acceptability. (See ref. 3.) This effect is illustrated in figure 4 for the flyover-noise situation. The two noise-level time history plots at the bottom of the figure might represent the noise expo- sures at a community observation point for two different flyover conditions, as illustrated in the sketch at the top of the figure. On the left, path A is shown as an example for which the time t (measured between the points that are lO dB down from Zhe maximum levels) is relatively short (about l0 seconds), but the peak noise levels are higher than those for path B on the right where the time is 2t. Laboratory experiments under controlled conditions suggest that the longer exposure time is detrimental. For path B to be equally accept- able, it would be necessary to reduce the peak noise level by about 4. 5 dB to compensate for doubling the time exposure. The two noise-exposure time his- tories shown in the figure are thus Judged to be about equally acceptable.

NOISE REDUCTION AT THE SOURCE Jet Exhaust Noise One of the main objectives of research on exhaust-noise reduction is to find acceptable methods of producing less noise per unit thrust. The fan 3 or bypass, engine offers the possibilities for lower exit velocities and hence lower noise levels. (See ref. 5.) The data of figure 5 are included to show the ranges of perceived noise levels associated with both current and proposed engines. Maximum perceived noise levels at a sideline distance of 200 feet have been estimated for all engines by the methods of references 6 and 7. These levels have been arbitrarily normalized to a thrust of 21_000 pounds for com- parison and, for convenience, have been plotted as a function of bypass flow ratio.

Data for current turbojets are plotted at the zero location on the abscissa scale and fall in the narrow hatched region. Current turbofans are represented by the larger hatched region and are seen to have somewhat lower perceived noise levels. Some,proposed high-bypass-ratio engines are represented by the stippled region at the right, and it is seen that by this means, substantially lower perceived noise levels may be realized. It should be noted that this lower boundary is well defined, but the upper boundary is not well defined.

The vertical extent of the stippled region represents some of the uncertainties regarding the importance of Jet-stream turbulence, combustion noise, compressor noise, and turbine noise for these proposed engines. Research effort is being focused on minimizing the noise from these sources so that the full potential of these engines can be realized.

Compressor Noise Several recent research studies (refs. 8 to 14) have been directed toward ways of minimizing the discrete-frequency compressor noise radiation from inlets. Samples of the results obtained are shown in figure 6. These studies have involved changes to the inlet geometry, the compressor geometry, and the inlet flow conditions. Noise-level reductions (i.e., the differences bet_en those for the modified compared with those for the unmodified configuration in each case) are shown for various azimuth angles in one of the front quadrants.

The use of resonators arranged in a peripheral array around the inlet provided the results shown on the left. For the case where the spacing between the rotor and stator of the front stage was changed, a rather complex pattern of noise reduction was obtained, as indicated by the center diagram. On an inlet for which it was possible to establish choked-flow conditions, the greatest noise reductions were obtained as shown in the right-hand diagram.

The results are summarized briefly in figure 7 by means of a bar graph which illustrates the maximumnoise reductions obtained for each of four dif- ferent approaches. The first three of these approaches represent the results obtained in NASA research studies# whereas the last item represents the results achieved with configurations suitable for application to current aircraft designs. The ranges of noise reductions obtained with resonators, spacing changes_ and inlet flow choking are generally consistent with the results of other known experience. Results have varied from one particular investigation to another, and thus the conclusion is drawn that such results are sensitive to configuration details. The experience with absorptive treatment is also believed to be strongly influenced by the configuration for which the work was done_ since there is reason to believe that configurations having longer duct lengths available for treatment would produce larger noise reductions than those illustrated in the figure.

It is not known whether or not some of these modifications may be success- ftully used in combination. Contract research studies are under way for the purpose of optimizing compressor-noise-reduction procedures for a full-scale engine nacelle.

AIRCRAFT OPERATIONS Landing Approach With regard to aircraft operations, one of the most difficult aspects is related to the landing approach, during which time the airplane flight path is shallow and the aircraft is quite close to the observers on the ground. One obvious scheme to improve this situation would be to use a steeper approach-path angle as shown in figure 8. Some related performance studies are described in paper no. 4 by Hall 3 Champine, and McGinley, and some of the noise-level time histories for a fan-powered transport aircraft are shown in figure 8. The solid curve represents a conventional approach at a 3 ° geometric angle_ whereas the dashed curve applies to a 6 ° approach. The data were obtained at a measuring station about 6900 feet from the end of the runway. An obvious beneficial result of the steep approach is that the maximum noise levels are lower because of the increased distance of the aircraft and the somewhat lower power setting.

There is a trend noted, however, that the aircraft is audible for a somewhat longer total time during approach at the higher angle probably because of the more favorable sound-propagation-path conditions at this higher altitude.

Take-off and Initial Climb There has been much discussion also about the use of steeper initial climb rates in order to increase the distance to the aircraft and thus reduce the noise on the ground. In the plot at the top of figure 9 are shown schemati- cally two altitude-distance profiles. The lower profile is representative of the operation of a current, long-range, fan-powered aircraft. The upper pro- file, on the other hand, represents a hypothetical high-performance aircraft of about the same gross weight but with twice the installed thrust and with advanced-design fan engines.

At the bottom of the figure the plot shows the estimated i00 PNdB contours on the ground for the associated take-off operations. These contours are plotted at appropriate longitudinal and lateral distances with reference to the runway. The reference rectangle of dashed lines is drawn at a 1/2-mile distance in all directions from the runway, and therefore is representative of the size of some commercial airports.

The current airplane 3 because of its lower thrust-to-weight ratio 3 has a longer take-off run_ a slower climb rate 3 and thus an associated ground-noise contour that is relatively long and slender. The hypothetical high-performance aircraf% on the other hand, has a shorter take-off run 3 a more rapid climbout_ and an associated ground-noise pattern that is relatively short in the take-off direction as indicated by the shaded area. A shaded area is included to show the range of results obtainable, depending on the exhaust conditions of the proposed engine. For a high-velocity exit (duct heating), the outer extremes of the area apply, whereas for a high-bypass-ratio engine without duct heating, the inner extremes apply. For this latter condition_ the perceived noise levels above i00 PNdB all occur within the airport boundaries.

COMMUNITY COMPATIBILITY CONSIDERATIONS It is obvious that normal activities in many communities near airports are not, for one reason or another, compatible with the noise exposures from air- port operations. (See ref. 15.) Some changes in the noise characteristics of the power plants or in the manner of aircraft operation, as have been discussed, might be beneficial in reducing noise. Of equal importance to the overall com- patibility problem are possible changes in the community itself to better adapt itself to its environment. Some of the possible considerations in such a com- munity undertaking could be: zoning, tax incentives, financial assistance, building and housing codes, land acquisition, eminent domain, and urban renewal.

Each of these considerations is not discussed, but it should be pointed out that they have already been used successfully to bring about desired changes in some specific situations. A contract study is currently under way for the purpose of gathering together the latest information relative to the application of these procedures to communities with airport noise problems. The use of such instruments by the proper authorities as part of a sound overall plan for com- munity development could be very beneficial and would complement other efforts to minimize noise exposures.

CONCLUDING REMA_I_S Three types of approaches to solving the airport-community noise problem which are closely interrelated with the phenomena of human responses are dis- cussed. These approaches include changes in the types of aircraft power plants, the aircraft operating procedures, and the conmnmity itself. Because there are many facets to this problem 3 a coordinated, multipronged approach to a solution is required.

_CES 1. Tyler, John M. : A New Look at the Aircraft Noise Problem.

EPreprint_ 9]-IB, Soc. Automotive Engrs. 3 Oct. 1964.

2. March, Alan H.; and McPike, A. L.: Noise Levels of Turbojet- and Turbofan- Powered Aircraft. Sound, vol. 2, no. 5, Sept.-Oct. 1963, PP. 8-13.

3. Kryter3 Karl D.; and Pearsons 3 Karl S.: Some Effects of Spectral Content and Duration on Perceived Noise Level. NASA TN D-18733 1963.

4. Kryter, K. D._ and Pearsons, K. S.: Modification of Noy Tables. J. Acous.

Soc. Am. (Letters to Ed.), vol. 363 no. 2, Feb. 19643 pp. 394-397.

5. Kantarges3 George T._ and CawthOrn 3 Jimmy M.: Effects of Temperature on Noise of Bypass Jets as Measured in the Langley Noise Research Facility.

NASA TN D-2378, 1964.

6. Anon.: Definitions and Procedures for Computing the Perceived Noise Level of Aircraft Noise. ARP 8653 Soc. Automotive Engrs. 3 Oct. 153 1964.

7. McPike, A. L. : Recommended Practices for Use in the Measurement and Evalu- ation of Aircraft Neighborhood Noise Levels. FPreprint_ 650216, Soc.

Automotive Engrs., Apr. 1965.

8. Tyler, J.M. and Sofrin, T. G. : Axial Flow Compressor Noise Studies.

_reprint_ _345D, Soc. Automotive Engrs., 1961.

9- Copeland, W. Latham: Inlet Noise Studies for an Axial-Flow Single-Stage Compressor. NASA TN D-2615, 1965.

i0. Bateman 3 David A.; Chang 3 Stephen C.; Hulse, Bruce T.; and Large, John B.: Compressor Noise Research. Tech. Rept. ADS-S1, FAA, Jan. 1965.

ii. Carmichael, R. F.: Analyses of Dynamic Measurements Obtained During the J79-13 Engine Installation Test for the NB-66D Laminar Flow Control Air- craft. Rept. NOR-62-163, Norair Div., Northrop Corp. 3 July 1962.

12. Copeland, William L._ and Crigler, John L.: Rotor-Stator Interaction Noise Studies of a Single-Stage Axial-Flow Research Compressor. NASA paper presented at Sixty-Eighth Meeting of the Acoustical Society of America (Austin 3 Texas), Oct. 21-243 1964.

13. Bragg, S. L.; and Bridge, R.: Noise From Turbojet Compressors. J. Roy.

Aeron. Soc., vol. 683 no. 637, Jan. 1964, pp. 1-10.

14. Advanced Eng. and Technol. Dept., Gen. Elec. Co.: Research Investigation Into Fan Noise Prediction and Alleviation. Contract No. DA 44-177- AMC-72 (T), U.S. Army Transportation Res. Command, Sept. 1964.

15. Anon.: Land Use Planning Relating to Aircraft Noise. Tech. Rept., Bolt, Beranek & Newman, Inc. _ambridge, Mass.l, Oct. 1964.

SIGNIFICANT FACTORS AIRPORT-COMMUNITY NOISE GROUND LANDING APPROACH OPERATIONS CLIMBOUT

L

HUMAN RESPONSES ./ COMMUNITY Figure i Figure 2 EFFECT OF DISCRETE TONE NOISE LEVEL, dB

',ii f

6dB BASICJ T 80 L -- I I I I I I PURE-TONE COM_

iii f

BASIC ,,-_ 80 _ I I I I I I I I 75 300 1200 4800 TO TO TO TO 150 600 2400 9600 FREQUENCY BANDS, CPS Figure 3 EFFECT OF ENGINE BYPASS RATIO ON PERCEIVED NOISE LEVEL ESTIMATED FOR 21,O00-LB THRUST EFFECT OF TIME DURATION 200 FT /B / MAXIMUM OBSERVER PNdB OBSERVER PROPOSED NOISE 140 1 CURRENT LEVEL PATH B PATH A

I N

1201- II0 t ,0% I SECONDARY FLOW RATE i I I I i I I I I I I I PRIMARY FLOW RATE TIME OF EXPOSURE Figure Figure 4 COMPRESSOR NOISE REDUCTION MEASUREMENTS 0 o 0 ° 0 o 1 1 1 (30 0 ° 0 ° 0 I0 20 0 I0 20 0 I0 20 NOISE LEVEL REDUCTION, dB Figure 6 8O LANDING-APPROACH NOISE MEASUREMENTS COMPRESSOR NOISE REDUCTION RESONATORS MEASURING STATI_ /--RUNWAY ///llll/i//,.,y/i///////////////////////////1 -- NOISE LEVEL, J-'_6,900 FT_ dB ROTOR-STATOR SPACING :_oAPPROACH ANGLE INLET CHOKING

,oo[

'.U''OH --"

ABSORPTIVE TREATMENT OI I I I _,1 I I o _ 6 i; 24 16 8 0 8 16 24 TIME, SEC NOISE LEVEL REDUCTION, dB Figure 7 Flgure 8 GROUND NOISE PATTERNS AIRCRAFT GROSS WEIGHT = CONSTANT ALTITUDE - DISTANCE PROFILE 4,000 F "HHHHN_H_/_N/HHHN_.H_H_H_HHH_/HHNHN_/H_H_HHH_/_ IOO PNdB CONTOURS I [- / ,_/_HYPOTH E TICAL LATERAL DISTANCE, ST MILES _-t ..... _ "-CURRENT F / DISTANCE FROM START OF TAKE-OFF ROLL, ST. MILES Figure 9 10. PRELIMINARY MEASUREMENTS OF TAKE-OFF AND LANDING NOISE FROM A NEW INSTRUMENTED RANGE By Carole S. Tanner and Norman J. McLeod NASA Flight Research Center SUMMARY This paper describes the NASA noise-survey instrumentation system pres- ently in use at Edwards Air Force Base, California, and presents preliminary noise data from an F-104 airplane. Also presented are noise measurements of the XB-70 and 707-131B airplanes obtained with essentially the same equipment at another location. The difference between measured noise levels for the XB-70 and 707 is illustrated and comparisons of perceived noise levels are made. The adequacy of noise predictions is discussed briefly.

INTRODUCTION Excessive noise in and near airports has become an increasing problem with the development of commercial jet airplanes. Considerable research on this noise problem has been undertaken in the past but the results have been less than conclusive. Some factors compounding the problem are differences in engine installations, engine types, wind, temperature, humidity, and airplane operating parameters such as flight path and velocity.

The relationship between these factors and noise from advanced engine/airframe configurations presents the airplane designer and operator with serious difficulties since safe and economically feasible operating con- ditions must be combined to obtain acceptable noise levels. In view of the availability of the most advanced airplanes at Edwards Air Force Base, a noise study under actual operational conditions has been undertaken by the NASA Flight Research Center with the assistance of the Air Force Flight Test Cen_er.

This paper describes an acoustic measuring system installed along the main run- way at Edwards Air Force Base and presents some of the initial data obtained from this facility. In addition, XB-70 and 707 noise data obtained with essen- tially the same equipment temporarily installed at Palmdale, California, are presented.

DESCRIPTION OF TEST INSTRUMENTATION Noise data for the F-104 were obtained at Edwards Air Force Base, California; XB-70 and 707 data were obtained at Palmdale, California. The Edwards instrumentation layout is shown in figure 1. Twelve microphone stations are positioned sy_metrically in pairs at 5000-foot intervals along and beyond the runway. Total distance between microphone pairs varies from 310 feet to i000 feet. Each microphone station consists of a i/4-inch microphone/cathode follower unit_ an integrated microphone power supply and line-driving amplifier unit, and a battery operated ac power supply. The noise measured by each microphone is amplified and transmitted via an underground cable system to a tape recorder in the van.

_ne i_strtunentation layout at PaLmdale 3 shown in figure 23 consists of eight NASA microphone stations (circles with numbers) and three microphone sta- tions (circles with letters) provided by North American Aviation. The NASA microphone stations, the same as those used at Edwards, were installed along the 200-foot-wide, 12,000-foot-long runway. The three North American micro- phones were located 3 miles from airplane brake release. Two separate cable systems and recording vans were used.

The Edwards instrumentation for data acquisition and reduction and the Palmdale system were completely electrically and acoustically calibrated. The only deviation was the extrapolation of system response to 31.5 cps. Typical response characteristics shown in figure 3 indicate that system frequency response is flat within 1.8 dB and 2.5 dB for the Edwards and Palmdale systems, respectively. Corrections applied to data obtained with the Edwards instrumen- tation and the eight NASA microphones at Palmdale are for system response and the energy acceptance of the data-reduction filters. Evaluation of these cor- rections indicates that these data are accurate to ±1.5 dB. Unfortunately, complete system and data-reduction corrections are not available for the three North American microphones used at Palmdale; however, the data are considered accurate to within ±3 dB. (Decibels are referenced to 0.0002 dyne/cm2.)

SYSTEM TESTS The Edwards system was placed in operation in December 1964. Initial operation consisted of repeated test flights using a single-engine F-I04 air- plane to determine the extent and effect of space-positioning accuracy and data repeatability. Noise data from the test flights were time correlated with air- plane location which was obtained by using Air Force radar. Evaluation of the test results indicates that the location of the aircraft in relation to the microphones could be determined within the limits of a box having a base of 14 feet, a height of 16 feet, and a length of 50 feet. Since skin tracking was used, larger airplanes may have a larger position error.

The F-104 noise-data repeatability is shown in figure 4. The data are from four consecutive flybys having the minimum ranges between airplane and microphone for the weather conditions shown.

To minimize near-field effects, data from microphone 3 (fig. i) were selected for presentation. The octave band sound pressure levels show excellent repeatability up to 500 cps except for the one point at 250 cps. Data repeata- bility is not as good at the higher frequencies where a scatter of ±3 dB occurs.

Since higher frequencies would be affected by slight changes in engine thrust, the larger variation of those frequencies is attributed in part to changes in engine thrust as gross weight decreased from one flyby to the next. However, the variation in noise at the higher frequencies is not believed to be signif- icant, and since the overall sound pressure levels agree quite well, data repeatability is considered satisfactory for all octave bands.

XB-7OAND 707 NOISE In an effort to provide take-off noise data from the largest supersonic airplane available, preliminary data were obtained from the XB-70.

The data presented were obtained on one of the earlier flights which origi- nated from Palmdale, California. In order to obtain the data at the earliest possible time the Palmdale layout (fig. 2) was used.

In order to help place XB-70 noise in proper perspective, arrangements were made with the Air Transport Association for a 707 fan-jet airliner to operate from the Palmdale runway approximately i hour after the XB-70 take-off.

Noise data presented for these two airplanes are for the take-off profiles and weather conditions shown in figure 5. lllustrated are the actual take-off pro- files of the XB-70 and 707 and representative take-off profiles of the super- sonic transport (SST) obtained from NASA Technical Note D-423 which is an early summary report.

The XB-70 take-off was made with all engines at maximum afterburner thrust, but the programed rate of climb was rather low. The 707 take-off is typical of operation from a commercial airport. It should be noted that the SST will have different engines and higher climb profiles resulting in noise levels lower than those of the XB-70.

The magnitude of the noise levels measured from the XB-70 and 707 for these take-off profiles is illustrated in figures 6 and 7- Figure 6 shows the noise spectra along the runway for the XB-70 and the 707. Data from microphones 3 and 8 (fig. 2) are shown.

The XB-70 maximum spectrum levels occur in the 125 cps band. The spectrum from microphone position 3 had a higher noise level than the spectrum from microphone 8. This difference is between 20 and 2_ dB over all frequencies.

The inverse-square-law attenuation for the difference between the microphone locations is approximately 9 dB; therefore, it is concluded that microphone 3 is in the near field of the XB-70 engines.

The 707 data at the bottom of figure 6 show that the maximum spectrum levels occur in the 12_ cps band. The spectrum level at microphone 3 is higher than the level at microphone 8 and the difference is approximately lO dB. This noise-level difference approaches the inverse-square-law attenuation, which leads to the conclusion that both microphones were in the far field of the 707 fan-jet engines. Far-field noise data are more consistent than near-field data, therefore the difference between noise along the runway is best determined by comparing the spectra from microphone 8 for each airplane.

The XB-70 spectrum is, on the average, i} dB noisier than that for the 707.

This difference is due to the larger number of engines as well as the higher thrust of the XB-70. The remarkable similarity between the spectrum shapes was not expected and more research is needed before the exact reasons for this sim- ilarity can be determined.

The airplane noise at the 3-mile point is also of interest from the stand- point of community response to noise. A direct comparison of the noise spectra of the XB-70 and 707 airplanes at the 3-mile point is shown in figure 7. Spec- tra for both airplanes at similar slant ranges show that the XB-70 noise levels are considerably higher than those of the 707. It is significant that the difference between these two spectra is an average of 25 dB for all fre- quencies, whereas the difference in spectra along the runway was 15 dB (fig. 6).

The larger difference in spectra at the 3-mile point indicates that further research is needed to ascertain the effects of airplane attitude, source size, and airplane motion on the noise produced.

PERCEIVED NOISE LEVELS The noise spectra at the 3-mile point, as well as the spectra along the runway_ can be used to calculate perceived noise levels. The perceived noise level is a judgment of the noisiness or annoyance of a sound and is obtained by weighing the octave band levels with factors determined from the response of the human ear. Perceived-noise-level calculations were made by using the conversion tables in reference 1 and the following formula: where total noisiness_ noys noisiness in noisiest band_ noys sum of noisiness of all bands_ noys ZN N Perceived noise levels for the XB-70 and the 7o7 are shown in figure 8.

The circles represent the positions for which perceived noise levels were cal- culated.

The perceived noise levels for the XB-70 are higher in all cases than are those for the 7o7. The point of interest is the comparison of the magnitude of perceived noise levels from a commercial airliner operated to be quiet with a military airplane whose design and operation did not consider the alleviation of noise as a prime factor. The question of whether or not the XB-70 could be operated in a manner resulting in perceived noise levels comparable with those of the 707 is at present unknown.

NOISE PREDICTIONS The peTceived noise levels shown are calculated from data obtained by a frequency analysis of the measured overall sound pressure levels. However, if no measured data were available, a designer would have to use the methods pre- sented in reference 2 or 3, for example, to predict the overall sound pressure levels. The following table shows a comparison between the predicted and measured overall sound pressure levels for the XB-70: Predicted noise Predicted noise from proposed from Handbook Measured Slant range, Maneuver SAE method, of Noise Control noise, ft (ref. 3), (ref. 2), dB dB dB Take-off roll 141o 121.5 118.5 (1-mile point) Climbout i19.5 (3-mile point) The XB-70 noise prediction is based on a single static turbojet engine with afterburning.

The predicted overall sound pressure level was corrected for six engines and divergence. The results from the table indicate that there are small dif- ferences between the predicted noise levels for both airplane positions. The measured levels are lower than the predicted ones. It should be noted that the predicted results, in this case, were based on effective nozzle area and its associated flow velocity. It would seem that in the final analysis, the designer or operator must presently resort to flight-testing to obtain a true indication of aircraft noise levels and to check on the noise predictions.

CONCLUDING REMARKS The data presented in this paper illustrate some of the problems involved in accurately determining engine noise for flight conditions. The acoustic- noise measuring system operated by the NASA Flight Research Center has been developed to acquire data useful in ascertaining the relative importance of the various parameters involved. Present program plans involve the measurement of noise from advanced aircraft and engine configurations. Data from these studies will aid in the establishment of better prediction methods and will help in fur- ther assessing the relationship between airplane operating parameters and the noise produced.

REFERENCES i. Kryter, K. D.; and Pearsons, K. S.: Modification of Noy Tables. J. Acoust.

Soc. Am., vol. 36_ no. 2_ Feb. 1964, pp. 394-397.

2. Von Gierke, Henning E.: Aircraft Noise Sources. Handbook of Noise Control_ ch. 33, Cyril M. Harris, ed., McGraw-Kill Book Co., Inc., 1957, PP. 33-56.

3. McPike, A. L.: Recommended Practice for Use in the Measurement and Evalua- tion of Aircraft Neighborhood Noise Levels. EPreprint] 650216, Soc. of Automotive Engrs., Apr. 1965.

NOISE-SURVEY INSTRUMENTATION LAYOUT NOISE-SURVEY INSTRUMENTATION LAYOUT EDWARDS MAIN RUNWAY - ELEVATION 2300 FT PALMDALE, CALIF.-ELEVATION 2200 FT OFF NDING "5000 F (TYPIc_ J _ I_ IO00FT

/ \--.OORD,°°+A.S

IOOO FT FROM RUNWAY CENTERLINE jN jN Figure 2 Figure i F-104 DATA REPEATABILITY TYPICAL SYSTEM RESPONSE MICROPHONE 3 EDWARDS SYSTEM MINIMUM RANGE, WEATHER FLYBY SYSTEM RESPONSE, dB 0 I E65 RELATIVE HUMIOITY = 21 PERCENT (ZERO AT 4000 CPS) _...O...._ O 2 585 TEMPERATURE : 57 D F 12OI- O 3 540 WIND VELOCITY = 3 KNOTS 4 600 I I I MAXIMUM 110 • OCTAVE RAND LEVEL, dB . o 6 SOUND PRESSURE I_ L 80 _ @ 1_ o (ZERO AT 1,000 CPS) _ _'--_'_--C_(3_

SYSTE__c il __sYE

[ / OVERALL 31.5 63 125 250 500 10OO 2000 4000 I I I I I I I I I I FREQUENCY, CPS r 31.5 63 125 250 500 I 000 2,00D 4,000 8,0D0 16,O00 FREQUENCY, CRS Figure Figure 3 TAKEOFF NOISE SPECTRA ALONG RUNWAY TAKEOFF PROFILES M'C_OPHONt 3 MAXIMUM 130 _s IRELATIVE HUMIDITy = 30 P_RCENI IEMPERATURE = 45 _ F OCTAVE BAND 120 • _M_CIOPHONE e 1001401 • _'7° SOUND PRESSURE 110 WLNO VELOCITY = S KNOTS LEVEL, dB HEIGHT ABOVE NASA IN D.423 T PROFIL E RUNWAY, FT 1000 1707 FAN JET MAXIMUM 70;'

f OCTAVE SAND 110 • MlCltOP_Ot,/E 3

SOUND PRESSURE 100 • O I _ 2 3 LEVEL, dB 90 DISTANCE FROM BRAKE RELEASE, MILE 80 OVERALL _ 31.5 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 FREQUENCY, CPS Figure Figure 6 PERCEIVED NOISE LEVELS COMPARISON OF Xfi-70 AND 70Z NOISE AT 3-MILE POINT X6-70 I10 MAXIMUM OCTAVE BAND 100 SOUND PRESSURE LEVEL, dB 90 707 107 PNdB _ _ 60 SLANT R_E 1230 FT TO , z _ I I I f r f e_. XB-70 130 PNdB OVERALL 53 106 212 425 850 1700 3400 6800 FREQUENCY, CPS _X 707 101 PNdB B-Z0 125 PNdB 707 100 PNcIB Figure 7 Figure 8 9o ll.

OPERATIONAL EXPERIENCES OF TURBINE-POWERED COMMERCIAL TRANSPORT AIRPLANES By Paul A. Hunter and Walter G. Walker NASA Langley Research Center SUMMARY Recent results obtained from NASA V-G and VGH recorders installed on com- mercial turbine-powered transports have indicated that exceedances of placard speeds appear to have been significantly reduced since the placard speeds have been redefined and changes made in the aural warning. Oscillatory accelera- tions and unusual events_ such as large or rapid departures from the planned flight profile_ occur less frequently. Landing-impact accelerations are higher for turbine transports than for piston transports and vary with operator. The total in-flight acceleration experiences for turbine transports, however_ are not significantly different from those for four-engine piston transports.

INTRODUCTION The NASA V-G/VGH program was initiated on turbine-powered transports con- currently with their introduction into commercial service. A summary of pre- liminary results of the program was presented at meetings with various segments of the aviation industry in 1961. At that time, some concern was expressed in regard to airspeed practices relative to placard speeds, aircraft oscillations, landing impact accelerations, andunusual events. These preliminary results, including information on in-flight accelerations and gust velocities_ were pub- lished in 1962. (See ref. 1.) The purpose of this paper is to present infor- mation obtained since that time.

INSTRUMENTATION AND SCOPE In the program_ information on operational experiences of turbine aircraft is obtained by means of NASA V-G and VGH flight recorders. The V-G recorder (ref. 2) provides an envelope of airspeed and normal acceleration experience, whereas the VGH recorder (ref. 3) provides time histories of airspeed_ normal acceleration_ and altitude.

The scope of the program is indicated in table I which shows the number of turbojet and turboprop airplanes on which VGH and V-G recorders were installed and the number of airlines involved. The turbojet airplanes were the Boeing 707_ Douglas DC-8_ and Convair 880, and the turboprop airplanes were the Lockheed Electra, Vickers Viscount, and Fairchild F-27A. In terms of the accumulated flight time of U.S. commercial turbojet and turboprop aircraft

corresponding to the closing of the various recording programs, the VGHand

V-G samples are rather small, as is indicated by the percentage values shown.

In terms of numberof aircraft, the recorded samples vary from about 4 to

6 percent of the domestic fleet. Despite the small samples in terms of the

fleet, it is believed that the careful selection of the operations sampled

result in data representative of general airline operations.

Most of the programs on the first line of turbine aircraft have been com-

pleted. However, other programs are underway or will be initiated in the near

future on the Sud Caravelle, Boeing 727_ Douglas DC-9, and BAC-111transports.

A total VGHprogram involving about 30 aircraft from both domestic and foreign

airlines is contemplated.

DISCUSSION

Placard Speed Exceedances

Early samples of VGHdata indicated that the turbine-powered transports

were exceeding certain limit speeds more frequently than the piston trans-

ports. (See ref. 4.) The particular limit speeds were: the normal operating

limit speed VNO and the never-exceed speed VNE at which an aural warning

was provided. As a result of continued overspeeds, the VNO speed was rede-

fined as a maximum operating limit speed VMO and an aural warning was pro-

vided within a 6-knot margin above this speed rather than at the higher never-

exceed speed. (See ref. 5.)

Table II showsa comparison of turbojet overspeed experience before and

after the changein aural warning. Before the change, Airline A averaged

61 flights between exceedancesof VNO , whereas Airline B averaged only

2.7 flights between exceedances. For this comparison, a flight is defined as

extending from take-off to landing. The percent of total time spent over VNO

was two one-hundreths and eighteen one-hundreths for Airlines A and B, respec-

tively. Both of these samples showbetter limit speed observance than did some

earlier samples. Most of the overspeeds occurred in descent at the lower alti-

tudes where the limit speeds are determined by dynamlc-pressure considerations

rather than by Mach number.

After the change in aural warning was made, however, no speeds over VMO ,

the maximum operating limit speed, were recorded for either airline. The

sample sizes for these overspeed analyses varied from 200 to 450 hours but for

both airlines the second sample was the larger by about 50 percent. The results

from the samples taken after the change in aural warning are highly encouraging.

Although sampling of speed practices on the older turbine-powered transports is

being phased out, the sampling will be continued on new turbojets in the short-

and medium-rangecategories.

Oscillatory Accelerations

Aircraft oscillations in the longitudinal-lateral modeproved to be one of

the unanticipated aspects of turbine operations. Oscillations seldom occurred

on piston-engine transports but apparently occur on turbine transports because

of decreased damping at the higher speeds and altitudes being flown and because

of increased sophistication of equipment. Figure i showsexamples of two types

of oscillations - one, a constant-amplitude oscillation and the other, a diver-

gent oscillation. The constant-amplitude type of oscillation was found to con-

tinue from several minutes to as muchas several hours. The divergent type of

oscillation generally lasted less than 2 minutes. The acceleration oscillations

shown in these examples have peak-to-peak values of 0.4g for the constant-

amplitude type and 0.8g for the divergent type. Other VGHsamples are available

which showeven greater variations. For example, peak-to-peak oscillatory

accelerations as high as 0.8g for the constant-amplitude type and 1.8g for the

divergent type have been recorded. Variations in the airspeed and altitude were

negligible for the constant-amplitude type of oscillation but reached values of

17 knots and 900 feet, respectively, for the divergent oscillation shownhere.

Every turbine aircraft from which VGHdata have been collected showedoscilla-

tions to exist, the frequency of occurrence varying from about 0.2 to 26 percent

of total flight time. Inasmuch as most of the occurrences of oscillations were

traced to control-system or autopilot components, they were a source of concern

regardless of amplitude. Oscillations showedup in the initial year of opera-

tion of the turbine aircraft but, as a result of a cooperative effort by air-

lines, and airframe and autopilot companiesto improve maintenance procedures

and equipment, recent data samples indicate that the amplitudes and frequency of

occurrence have been considerably reduced. Newairplanes nowbeing phased into

the recording program also experience someoscillations_ but the amplitudes and

frequency of occurrence seen thus far are fairly low.

Landing-Impact Accelerations

Turbine-powered transports have, in general, showna trend towards higher

landing-impact accelerations than the piston transports. This trend has been

confirmed by measurementof sinking speeds madefrom motion pictures of trans-

port landings. In addition, large differences have also been noted between

someoperators of turbine aircraft of the sametype. These differences are

illustrated in figure 2 which showsthe probability of exceeding given values

of landing-impact accelerations for two different operators of the sametype of

turbojet transport. The landing-impact accelerations experienced by Airline K

were about 40 percent higher than those of Airline E. This difference, which

is greater than differences generally found between airplane types, is attrib-

uted to differences in techniques and crew training between the two airlines.

Unusual Events

Routine examinations of VGHrecords in the past have, on occasions, shown

events not normally associated with passenger-airline operations. Examples of

such unusual events, which were reported to the airlines and the aircraft

industry several years agoj were: pltch-up when the aircraft flew at too high an altitude for its weight, collislon-avoldance maneuvers, large acceleration oscillations during landing approach, and an upset in which the aircraft recovered from a spiral dive with 4.4g maximum normal acceleration at an air- speed of about 405 knots.

Figure 3 shows one such unusual event recorded during a routine passenger- carrying flight. The nonlinear airspeed scale results from the nonlinear vari- ation between dynamic pressure and airspeed. The salient point of this time history is the indicated airspeed of lO0 knots reached at an altitude of about 23_000 feet. The pilot apparently reduced altitude and airspeed in order to reduce the airplane response to the turbulence shown by the acceleration trace.

Based on take-off weight and estimated fuel consumption, it appears that the airplane was very near the stall.

The frequency of appearance of such events on VGH records from the older turbine transports has dropped considerably during the past 18 months. During this perlod 3 however# the program on these transports was being largely phased out and it is not known how much this reduced frequency of unusual events is associated with the diminishing number of aircraft in the program.

In-Fllght Accelerations Figure 4 compares the gust, operational maneuver, and check-fllght maneu- ver accelerations for turbojet, four-engine turboprop, and four-englne piston aircraft in the form of cumulative frequency per nautical mile to exceed various values of incremental accelerations. Each curve represents the average of the experience of a number of individual airplanes. Relative to the four-englne piston airplanes, gust accelerations were experienced less often by the turbo- jets and slightly more often by the turboprop aircraft. The operational maneu- ver experience of the three types of transports is essentially the same. Over most of the acceleration range, turbojet and turboprop airplanes show more fre- quent check-flight maneuver accelerations than the piston aircraft.

Figure 5 shows a comparison of total gust and maneuver accelerations for the three types of aircraft. The distributions shown here are a combination of distributions obtained from VGH and from V-G records. As may be seen, the total in-flight accelerations for turbojet, four-engine turboprop, and four- engine piston aircraft are not significantly different.

The relative contributions of acceleration sources to the total number of accelerations equal to or greater than 0.6g for each aircraft type are shown in figure 6. For the piston and turboprop aircraft, the gust accelerations pre- dominate, check-flight maneuver accelerations being a secondary source. For the turbojet aircraft, however, the order is reversed and check-flight maneuver accelerations provide the largest portion of the total accelerations. For all three types, operational maneuver accelerations contribute a relatively small number of accelerations equal to or greater than O.6g. As was indicated earlier, oscillatory accelerations are an additional source for turbine aircraft, but this contribution is negligible at the larger values of incremental acceleration.

Gust Velocities In figure 7, distributions of derived gust velocity (that is, derived from acceleration, airspeed_ altltude_ and weight as indicated in ref. 6) in 10#000-foot altitude intervals for turbine transports are compared with estl- mated distributions (ref. 7) based on past investigations. The estimated dis- tributions represent a model atmosphere widely used to estimate gust-velocity experience. A reduction in gust velocity by a factor of 20 percent had been made in the estimates of reference 7 to account for airplane flexibility. In order that the comparison between the present data and the estimates of refer- ence 7 be more compatible, this 20 percent has been restored to the estimates.

The data are in reasonably good agreement with the estimates made about 7 or 8 years ago.

CONCLUDING REMARKS Recent results from NASA V-G and VGH recorders installed on commercial turblne-powered transports have indicated the following conclusions: Exceedances of placard speeds, considered to be a serious problem in the early period of turbine transport operation_ appear to have been significantly reduced by the redefining of the placard speeds and the changes in the aural warning.

Oscillatory accelerations, which were one of the unanticipated aspects of turbine transport operations_ have become much less frequent but have not been eliminated.

The landing-impact accelerations for turbine transports are, in general, higher than for piston transports and vary substantially between operators.

Unusual events_ such as large departures from the planned flight profile, appear to occur less frequently than in the earlier period of turbine transport operation.

Although the relative contributions of gust and maneuver accelerations to the total in-flight accelerations have changed somewhat from those of piston transports_ the total In-flight acceleration experiences for turbine transports are not significantly different from those for four-englne piston transports.

REFERENCES i. Staff of Langley Airworthiness Branch: Operational Experiences of Turbine- Powered Commercial Transport Airplanes. NASA TN D-1392, 1962.

2. Taback, Israel: The NACA Oil-Damped V-G Recorder. NACA TN 2194, 1950.

3. Richardson, Norman R.: NACA VGH Recorder. NACA TN 2265, 1951.

4. Coleman, Thomas L.; Copp, Martin R.; and Walker, Walter G.: Airspeed Operating Practices of Turbine-Powered Commercial Transport Airplanes.

NASA TN D-744, 1961.

5. Anon.: Airworthiness Standards: Transport Category Airplanes. Federal Aviation Regulation Part 253 Rules Service Co. (Washington, D.C.)3 Feb. l, 1965.

6. Pratt, Kermit G.; and Walker, Walter G.: A Revised Gust-Load Formula and a Re-Evaluation of V-G Data Taken on Civil Transport Airplanes From 1933 to 1950. NACA Rep. 1206, 1954. (Supersedes NACA TN's 2964 by Kermit G.

Pratt and 3041by Walter G. Walker.)

7. Press, Harry; and Steiner, Roy: An Approach to the Problem of Estimating Severe and Repeated Gust Loads for Missile Operations. NACA TN4332, 1958.

T.A3_ I SCOPE OF PROGRAM TURBOJET TURBOPROP VGH NUMBER OF AIRPLANES 22 9 NUMBER OF AIRLINES 8 5 DATA SAMPLE, HR 47,058 12,484 PERCENT OF U.S. AIRLINES FLIGHT TIME 0.88 0.41 V-__GG NUMBER OF AIRPL/_IES 24 I0 NUMBER OF AIRLINES 7 3 DATA SAMPLE, HR 127,796 48,506 PERCENT OF U.S AIRLINES FLIGHT TIME 3.41 1.60 TABLE II SPEED LIMIT EXCEEDANCES FLIGHTS TO EXCEED VNO [ PERCENT TIME OVER VNO AURALWARNING AT VNE 61 / 0.02

=.7 L o.,8

AURAL WARNING AT VMO (VNo) m o -- o LANDING IMPACTS OSCILLATIONS NUMBER OF FLIGHTS ALTITUDE I0°1_'_ AIRLINE O49 ;:'19 ACCELERATION AIRSPEED TIME,MIN ALTITUDE

I '", \

Q 8 Q_'_ ACCELERATION _ AIRSPEED : : : '_F, . .

._. ;, _ _ ,i_ 48 50 52 54 56 58 INCREMENTAL ACCELERATION, g UNITS TIME, MiN Figure 2 Figure i TIME HISTORY OF AN UNUSUAL EVENT ACCELERATION, g UNITS 01 I I _ q I i I q ALTITUDE, 30_C1_ /_ FT 20 L I I I I I I I I I AIRSPEED, 30

_NOTS _oo I- _'--.._

IOOL o' _ _ ; _ ,_ ,!, ,_. ,_ T_ME, M,NOTES Figure 3 ACCELERATION SOURCES TOTAL IN-FLIGHT LOADS AIRPLANE -- TURBOJET 1(3-1 ----- TURBOPROP AIRPLANE ..... RSTON 10-2 OPERATIONAL CHECK FLIGHT 10-3 GUSTS MANEUVERS MANEUVERS _O-I CUMULATIVE I0 -4 FREQUENCY PER NAUTICAL 10-5 10-3 MILE CUMULATIVE FREQUENCY .,'-,-4 1(3-6 PER NAUTICAL IO-2 __ io-7 MILE I0 -_ IO-E _ I0-8 IO-7 I0-9 o i ,._ ,._ o INCREMENTAL ACCELERATION, g UNITS INCREMENTAL ACCELERATION, gUNITS Figure 4 Figure 5 RELATIVE CONTRIBUTIONS TO TOTAL IN-FLIGHT GUST VELOCITY ACCELERATIONS 0 TURBINE INCREMENTAL ACCELERATION _ O.6g I0 TO 20 xlO3FT I/W//_ CHECKFL,GHT MANEWERS I001%0 TO IOxIO3FT i OPER_IONAL MANEUVERS ,o-4_ °o _GUSTS PISTON TURBOPROP TURBOJET CUMULATIVE I q q I I0- I I I I FREQUENCY PER NAUTICAL MILE IOO I 20 TO :30 x IO 3 FT 30 TO 40xlO3FT

.C.T I/

IO-2 OF TOTAL /[_ ACCELERATIONS 401_ 10-6 F Io -8 I i i O 40 810 DERIVED GUST VELOCITY, FT/SEC Figure 6 Figure 7 12. SIMULATOR STUDIES OF THE DEEP STALL By Maurice D. White and George E. Cooper NASA Ames Research Center SUMMARY Simulator studies of the deep-stall problem encountered with modern air- planes are discussed. The results indicate that the basic deep-stall tenden- cies produced by aerodynamic characteristics are augmented by operational con- siderations. Because of control difficulties to be anticipated in the deep stall, it is desirable that adequate safeguards be provided against inadvertent penetrations.

INTRODUCTION Renewed concern has recently developed over an aircraft handling-qualities problem that had received extensive treatment about lO years ago, namely, the pitch-up. Because of some differences in the character of the problem, it has come to be identified differently, either as a "deep-stal_' or a "T-tail" prob- lem. The term "deep stall" refers to the very large angles of attack that are developed after the stalling angle has been exceeded. A popular definition of the term "deep stall" associates it with a locked-in condition where recovery is impossible. In this paper the former more general definition is accepted.

The term "T-tail" refers to the tail arrangement that tends to produce pitching- moment variations that would encourage deep stalls_ the horizontal tail being located high on the vertical tail. The widespread use of this tail arrange- ment on modern airplane designs is one of the factors that prompted the current concern over this problem.

Safeguards against dangerous stall penetrations are included in the requirements of existing civil and military regulations. However, since some testing of these airplanes in the stall is required and since a possibility of inadvertent stall penetration (however remote) doesexist, a further under- standing of the nature of the problem is necessary. Accordingly 3 the National Aeronautics and Space Administration has started a number of investigations to study this problem. The present paper describes some of the results of simu- lator studies that were conducted at the Ames, Langley, and Flight Research Centers.

SYMBOLS lift coefficient C L Cm pitching-moment coefficient

h

altitude, ft

V airspeed, ft/sec

angle of attack, deg e angle of pitch_ deg elevator deflection, deg 5e SIMULATOR STUDIES The variation of the pitching-moment coefficient with angle of attack that is typically identified with deep-stall tendencies is illustrated in figure 1.

On the lower part of the figure is shown a corresponding lift curve. The initiation of unstable slopes is usually identified with the maximum lift coef- ficient. In the stall of an airplane having a pitching-moment curve of this type, the angle of attack tends to increase rapidly as the stall is penetrated as a result of the unstable variation of pitching moments. A further contribu- tion to increased angles of attack results from the accompanying drag increases and lift decreases 3 which produce a descending flight path.

Simulator studies of the deep stall that were performed at the three Centers are indicated in table I and will be described in this paper. As shown in this table, the nature and scope of the various studies were different.

TABLE I.- SIMULATOR STUDIES AT NASA RESEARCH CENTERS Degrees of freedom Mot i on Scope Center Piloted in motion Longitudinal recovery performance with No 3 Flight wide range of variables, including time for initiation of recovery control.

6 Fixed Yes Piloted study of general longitudinal Langley recovery performance with emphasis on control power and pitch-damping effects.

6 Roll Yes General investigation of factors Ames and influencing deep-stall acceptability pitch from pilot's standpoint, longitudi- nal and lateral-dlrectional modes.

In the piloted studies, no consideration was given any stall-warning

effects or stall-prevention effects other than those resulting from the basic

aerodynamic characteristics. Stall tests were conducted as deliberate maneu-

vers from straight, wings-level flight, and no turbulence effects were intro-

duced. However, in the interpretation of the airplane responses, the pilots

would, of course, consider realistic operating conditions.

GENERAL NATURE OFTHEPROBLEM

A great many aerodynamic and operational elements define the deep-stall

problem. Someof the important elements other than the pitching-moment curve

are itemized in table II.

TABLEII.- ELEMENTS OFDEEP-STALL PROBLEM

1. Depth of angle-of-attack penetration

(a) Higher drag

(b) Limited control power

(c) Unsatisfactory lateral-dlrectional characteristics

(d) Delay in recovery control application

2. Steep flight-path angles

(a) Large altitude losses

(b) Steep nose-down attitudes

3. Inadequacy of conventional instrument display

(a) Lack of cues to identify stall entry

(b) Misleading information for timing recovery pull-out

The interrelationships amongthe various elements are complex; somerepresent

causes, someeffects, and someact as both the effect of one element and the

cause of another.

Consider first the depth of angle-of-attack penetration; it has been found

that, with initial entry into the stall, the drag increases and the lift

decreases, and these effects together cause the airplane to descend. This

angle of descent contributes a further increase in angle of attack which fur-

ther accelerates the pitch-up. This effect is illustrated in figure 2 where

the flow-angle relationships before the stall and in the stall are shown.

With penetration to deep-stall angle of attack there frequently occurs a

decrease in longitudinal control power, which compromisesthe ability of the

pilot to arrest the stall penetration and delays recovery. As a result, the

pilot is committed to flight at deep-stall angles of attack for a considerable

time period, during which an altitude loss is suffered, and it may be necessary

lO3 to control unsatisfactory lateral-directional characteristics that occur in many airplanes at these angles of attack.

The depth of stall penetration is also sensitive to delay on the part of the pilot in initiating recovery control, and this problem will be discussed in more detail in a subsequent section.

The remaining elements of the deep-stall problem listed in table II are discussed_rlth the aid of figure 3, which shows two typical deep-stall time histories that were obtained during operations on the Langley simulator. The dashed curves were recorded during the initial experience of a pilot with the deep-stall pitching-moment and control effectiveness characteristics. The solid curves were recorded after the pilot had obtained some familiarity_rlth the problem.

On the first try, as the airplane pitched up, the pilot failed to do more than return the elevator to zero deflection. _ne nose dropped to a horizontal attitude, and the pilot awaited recovery. Recovery seemed to be progressing satisfactorily because the airspeed started to increase. The angle of attack, however, continued to increase to _O ° and thereafter stabilized at about 45 °.

As a result, when the control was pulled back to resume level flight, it served only to maintain the stall.

With practice and understanding of the problem, the pilot applied full nose-down corrective control to initiate recovery, with little effect on the initial attitude changes. This time, however, the pilot held full control, despite the misleading attitude and airspeed indications, and finally recovery was completed.

Note the large altitude losses and the steep nose-down attitudes that were indicated in figure 3 to be required for recovery. Attention has also already been directed to the misleading information that led to a premature pull-out attempt. In the particular case illustrated, the attitude changes at stall entry were large enough to give a strong indication of stall entry. In many cases the attitude change is much smaller, and the cue is correspondingly weaker. In fact, in some cases studied in the Ames investigations, where only minimal pitch-up instabilities existed on the pitching-moment curves, the lack of any warning cue resulted in the airplane drifting into a deep stall unobtru- sively because of only the drag increase.

EFFECTS OF MARGINAL RECOVERY CONTROL One of the most disturbing aspects of the deep stall is the length of time for which the pilot is committed to the stalled region once the stall has been entered. As already discussed a number of different factors contribute to delay in recovery, but one of the most obvious is the fact that, even with full nose-down control, the pitching-moment curve approaches a balance point at deep-stall angles of attack, leaving little pitching-moment margin for recov- ery. This effect is illustrated in figure 4 where, at _ _ 35 ° , a minimal I04

margin of pitching-moment increment is available for recovery. It will be

noted in figure 4 that_ if the curve for full-forward stick crosses into the

region of positive values of Cm, it would be possible for the airplane to

become"locke_' into the stall so that elevator alone cannot effect recovery.

Less extreme cases might still represent serious recovery problems. In order

to define what degree of controllability is required, studies were conducted in

both the Langley and Flight Research Center simulations. The results are indi-

cated in figures 5 and 6.

Figure 5 shows someof the variations in the pitching-moment curves that

were examined in the Flight Research Center studies. These range from curves

for which full-forward stick would be inadequate for recovery if the angle of

attack reached approximately 49° to those for which positive control margin

were available. Figure 6 showsthe results in terms of two parameters, the

maximum angle of attack developed and the altitude lost. For different control

margins these parameters are plotted against another important variable, time

delay in initiating recovery. In the case of curve A, recovery can be accom-

plished by prompt control application but a complete lock-in would occur for a

4-second time delay. For curves B and C, progressively larger stall penetra-

tions and altitude losses with increasing delay in applying recovery control

are evident, but, interestingly, for the data shownthere does not seemto be

much effect of differences in control margin available. It appears to be

important only that somemargin be available.

These specific results were obtained in analog computer studies conducted

at the Flight Research Center. The importance of the second variable, time

delay in initiation of recovery, was also repeatedly emphasizedby pilots who

participated in the studies at Langley and Ames, and these reactions stress the

requirement for adequate cues to identify the stall onset.

STALLPREVENTION BY STABILITYINCREASE PRECEDING PITCH-UP

In operational service it is, of course, basically undesirable to have the

capability of penetrating into a pitch-up that would lead to a deep stall, even

if positive recovery control were provided. This problem is widely recognized,

and attention is being directed to the development of safeguards against such

penetrations. One such safeguard would be the existence of a sharp increase

in static longitudinal stability immediately preceding the pitch-up, and studies

were conducted at Amesto obtain someindication of the stability increase that

would have to be provided.

The first part of the study involved piloted operation for the conditions

represented by the three curves shown in figure 7.

The indications from the tests were that the increase in stability repre-

sentedby the "bump" in curve (b) did not_ of itself, provide a positive enough

indication or warning of the impending pitch-up. It appeared to be partly a

question of the magnitude of the slope changethat occurs in approaching the

bumpfrom lower angles of attack, and partly a question of how deep the bump

was in terms of the amount of control required to pull up through the stable

slope. The condition represented by curve (c) was considered to provide the

minimumamount of warning that would assure no penetration of the pitch-up

region; with the control effectiveness and control-force gradient provided,

this curve required a stick movementfrom 40 to 80 percent of the full aft con-

trol and a control-force change from 20 to 40 pounds to pass the peak of the

bump. One interesting inference of these results was that complete protection

against stall entry may not depend entirely on limiting elevator authority.

This class of stable bumpwas also examined for its ability to protect

against inadvertent deep-stall penetrations due to atmospheric turbulence.

As a part of the analog computer study conducted at the Flight Research Center,

the ai__plane was balanced at the angle of attack corresponding to the knee of

the pitchlng-moment curve (see insert, fig. 8) and then was exposed to turbu-

lence as represented by a vertical-velocity variation measured in flight. This

test was repeated for different levels of turbulence amplitudes and different

shapes of the stable bump, with the results shown in the main part of fig-

ure 8. The ordinate of the main part of figure 8 is an,empirical parameter

(_Cm) X (2k_) that roughly measures the magnitude of the stable bump. (The

increments _C m and _ are identified in the insert in fig. 8.) For a given

turbulence level, the larger values of this parameter should provide more pro-

tection against angle-of-attack reactions that exceed the stable range of

pitching moments. And, of course, with only small values of the parameters

the protection is less, and there is more likelihood of the critical angle of

attack being exceeded to project the airplane into the unstable pitch-up range.

The boundary curve then represents the minimumbumpsize that will prevent

pitch-up into the stall. It is of interest to note that in the analog-computer

studies, the critical part of the turbulence time history that triggered pitch-

ups (of which only a small section is shown) was the sustained updraft that

occurred at the region noted. For the particular curve that had been identi-

fied from the earlier piloted tests as providing adequate protection, the cor-

responding limiting turbulence amplitude would be about 25 percent of the full-

scale turbulence.

FLIGHT-TEST PHILOSOPHY

The simulator studies reported here have provided considerable insight

into the nature of the deep-stall problem but have not provided a schedule for

rating acceptability of a given set of characteristics. On the contrary, it

appears that unless an airplane happens to have unusually mild lateral-

directional and longitudinal problems in the stall, measures are likely to be

required to limit prolonged penetration or exploration of the stall. However,

as noted earlier a certain amount of deliberate stall penetration must be

assumedin development and training, in order to establish and demonstrate

safeguards for operation. To accommodateto this situation somephilosophy of

operation is necessary, and figure 9 illustrates such a philosophy.

The important innovation of this suggested philosophy is that it provide

a positive cue to impending stall, in addition to (and removed from) the usual

stall warning. The locations of the stall warning and positive cue with respect to the angle of attack of deep-stall entry are indicated in the top part of figure 9, with the pitching-moment curve defining the angle-of-attack scale.

Two kinds of airplane operation are of concern, as noted in figure 9. One is standard operational service. For the pilot in this case the stall warning must be demonstrated in training, but positive protection should be provided against deliberate or inadvertent deep-stall entries or penetration. The other kind of operation is test flying for development or certification where the test pilot may explore the deep-stall region.

The stall warnings suggested would be of the same kind for either type of operation - buffeting, perhaps, as a natural form# or a stick shaker as an arti- ficial form. As a positive cue to preclude further angle-of-attack increase, a strong increase in longitudinal stability would be desirable for either oper- ational service or developmental testing. Lacking a natural cue, an artificial positive cue of the nature of a stick pusher is proposed for operational serv- ice. For test flying, the artificial cue could be in the form of an angle-of- attack indicator, so that exploration at higher angles of attack was possible, but under conditions that kept the pilot clearly informed of the status of the stall. Finally, it is fairly obvious that in flight investigations of the deep stall, provision should be made for artificial recovery augmentation if there is any question about the effectiveness of natural methods for recovery.

It should be noted that in the foregoing discussion, the various devices indicated as safeguards are identified as typical and are designated only for illustrative purposes. Other methods or devices could be used and might possibly prove superior to those discussed.

CONCLUSIONS From the simulator studies of the deep-stall problem, the following con- clusions are reached: 1. In airplanes that are identified with deep-stall pitching-moment curves, other aerodynamic and operational factors would tend to prolong the time that the airplane is committed to stalled flight. If the stall is penetrated, the pilot should be given positive cues to recognize it; he should then apply full corrective control promptly and should maintain full control despite misleading information, if the stall duration is to be effectively limited.

2. Adequate safeguards against penetration of the deep stall are needed to avoid the possible severe consequences of prolonged stalled flight. These consequences include large altitude losses, steep nose-down recovery angles, and possible unsatisfactory lateral-directional controlability. It is suggested that these safeguards include an additional positive cue between the stall warning and the actual stall.

i07

3. Attitude and airspeed information were muchless valuable than angle-

of-attack information for detecting stall entry and for completing longitudinal

recovery.

TYPICAL DEEP STALL LONGITUDINAL AERODYNAMICS ANGLES IN A DEEP STALL Cm+ v _ PRESTALL FLIGHT pA_ _._'_,_ !NITIAL STALL V _ i i I / i i PA_ DEEP STAL_L O 10 20 30 40 50 60 FLIGHT ,,,y ANGLE OF ATTACK, deg V _ Figure i Figure 2 AERODYNAMICS OF P,ECOVERY CONTROL TIME HISTORIES OF DEEP STALLS ..... RRST STALL 40F -- AFTER P_CT,CE 201 p, C r J_ _ _//'--_"\\ ...- V / \,\\STICK Art

t_ .......... % _o .--_

\\ STICK FORWARD 6001 20

L I I I I I f\ i _l i_ CL

2oo0 2o 4o 6o 8oloo._"o! .... _ ..... _ TIME, se¢ a;(:J20 i_"/L..._Ji _ ' 0 I0 20 _0 40 50 60 0 20 40 60 80 I00 ANGLE OF ATTACK, deg TIME, sec Figure 4 Figure 3 EFFECT OF CONTROL MARGIN ON RECOVERY STUDIES OF RECOVERY CONTROL MARGIN 4F x io 5 ! A ___.- B / / .tf_C FULL FORWARD CONTROL LOSS, ft 2 ALTITUDE ,_'-_ 01 I I I I o ,,-f-2u.

/ ,-'/P"- \'<',A

c._¢ ,,/y

OF ATTACK, /

ANGLE--'I ' ,'f

/ _ 2D _ t i i t 0 2 4 6 8 RECOVERY DELAY TIME, seC a, d6g Figure 6 Figure INCREASED STABILITY PRECEDING PITCH-UP BOUNDARY FOR PROTECTION AGAINST DEEP STALL IN TURBULENCE VERTICAL '60 [- _, Cm - GUST 8Ok ..... _, ,,4 ^i, U "_..'_ VELOCITY _ ,.p,,It_'_,,_lW'_l j1 1 Irr'_l.l , _ - • v- • - r_ ft/sec eo L _ L-SUSTAINED (FULL SCALE) - | UPDRAFT -16D_ _-- 16 sec + Cm -. 8 STALL HTCH-UP -,6 (,_Cm)(Aa), deg Cm + _.a -.4 -.2 o 2'o ,'o io go 0 I0 20 30 40 50 60 PERCENT FULL-SCALE TURBULENCE AMPLITUDE ANGLE OF ATTACK, deg Figure 8 Figure 7 ii0 SUGGESTED OPERATIONAL PHILOSOPHY FOR AIRPLANES WITH DEEP-STALL TENDENCIES + C m I NORMAL OPERATIONS I WARNING REQ'D POSITIVE(_UE REQ'D RECOVERYAUGMENTOR REQUIRED OPERATION (TYPICAL) (TYPICAL) (TYPICAL) UNMISTAKABLE OPERATIONAL BUFFET STABILITY INCREASE NOT APPLICABLE B SERVICE STICKS H_, K--E'R STICK PUSHER UNMISTAKABLE DEVELOPMENT BUFFET STABILITY INCREASE FLIGHT TAI L PARACHUTE ANGLE OF ATTACK TEST STICK SHAKER INDICATOR Figure 9 iii 13. DEEP-STALL AERODYNAMIC CHARACTERISTICS OF T-TAIL AIRCRAFT By Robert T. Taylor and Edward J. Ray NASA Langley Research Center SUMMARY A wind-tunnel research program has been undertaken by the NASA to study the aerodynamic characteristics of T-tail aircraft at high angles of attack.

The program was designed to show the effects on longitudinal stability and con- trol of several configuration variables.

The results to date do not allow the formulation of general design rules, but the effects of several configuration variables have been noted to have a prime influence on the post-stall characteristics..

An increase in tail size, changes in the location of fuselage-mounted engine nacelles, and reduced fuselage-forebody lift were all found to have a beneficial effect on static longitudinal stability at high angles of attack.

I NTR 0DUCTI ON Recently, both here and abroad, several transport aircraft have appeared in service which employ a horizontal stabilizer mounted on top of the vertical fin. Many others, including executive as well as commercial transports, are in the design or certification stages. Past research on the T-tail problem has given an indication of the general design rules for providing good pitch char- acteristics in the angle-of-attack range prior to wing stall. At angles of attack above the stall angle, however, there is a distinct lack of data on the pitch characteristics of T-tail aircraft.

The NASA has, therefore, undertaken a wind-tunnel research program to investigate the post-stall, or high-angle-of-attack, behavior of transport-type configurations employing the T-tail. Table I shows, in general, the scope of the wind-tunnel tests. The program was designed to study the effects on lon- gitudinal stability and control of many configuration variables, primarily at low speed. The studies have not yet progressed to the point which would allow the formulation of general design rules, but several interesting facts have come to light. It is the purpose of this paper to show the aerodynamic origin of the instabilities at high angles of attack of T-tail airplanes, and this discussion is concerned with only those items and variations which appear underlined in the table.

SYMBOLS

A cross-sectional area

cross-sectional area of basic configuration

ABASIC

b

wing span lift coefficient

CL

pitching-moment coefficient at 0.40_

(cm)

tail contribution to stability Z_Cm,t wing mean aerodynamic chord, in.

tail incidence, deg it change in tail incidence, deg A_ t tail arm, in.

M Mach number S wing reference area tail surface area Z tail height, in.

angle of attack, deg stall angle of attack, deg _STALL DISCUSSION Basic Configuration Figure i shows a line drawing of the model used in the investigation. It was typical of the current T-tail airplanes in that it had a wing with moderate sweepback and aft-mounted engine nacelles. Some pertinent model dimensions are given in terms of the wing mean aerodynamic chord 5 and the wing span b.

The model was constructed so that the configuration changes listed in table I could be readily accomplished. In this discussion the aerodynamic characteris- tics of this model will be used as a standard of comparison and the model will be referred to as the basic configuration.

Effect of Horizontal-Tail Height

Figure 2 shows data for two horizontal-tall heights in terms of the

pitching-moment coefficient as a function of angle of attack. The reference point for pitch data, here and throughout the paper, is 40 percent of the mean aerodynamic chord, which is a typical aft center of gravity for the current T-tail aircraft. The shaded portion of the figure below an angle of attack of 20 ° has received a great deal of attention in the past. The smaller shaded region between l_ ° and 20 ° denotes an angle-of-attack region for which these data are not believed to be applicable tofull-scale aircraft because of the low Reynolds numbers of the tests.

Effect of Tail Incidence At low angles of attack the low horizontal tall contributes much less to stability, because of its position in a region of high downwash behind the wing.

As the angle of attack increases, however, the tail moves below the high down- wash region, becomes more effective, and remains effective to high angles of attack. The high horizontal tail, on the other hand# starts in a region of low downwash at low angles of attack and thus shows greater stability. As the angle of attack approaches the stall angle, the high horizontal tail moves into the high downwash field created by the wing and its contribution to stabil- ity tends to lessen. If the tail location is high enough, this decrease in stability can be delayed until after the stall angle has been exceeded. At very high angles of attack the high horizontal tail becomes even less effective as it penetrates deeper into the alrplane-wake system. The influence of high- angle-of-attack wakes on the airplane pitch-control effectiveness is shown in figure 3. Here pitching-moment coefficient is plotted as a function of angle of attack. The solid curve represents data for the basic configuration trimmed at an angle of attack of lO °. A stable trim point is evident near an angle of attack of 40 °. The dashed curve represents a more positive stabilizer inci- dence (Zkl t = 4.1 o) and serves to illustrate what happens to the control effec- tiveness with increasing angle of attack. If the two curves are compared where the arrows are shown# it can be seen that the amount of control available from a given stabilizer or elevator angle is reduced to a small percentage of its low-llft value due to the wake system at the high angles. The implication is that the amount of control available for recovery from high-angle-of-attack penetrations is seriously limited for some configurations which use the T-tail and that the reduction of control power and stability at high angles of attack is a function of the wake system of the airplane.

Effect of Engine Nacelles In this study of post-stall pltchingproblems the effect of the aft-engine- nacelle placement must be examined. Figure 4 shows the effect of removing the nacelles from the basic configuration. On the left in figure 4 are curves of pitching-moment coefficient against angle of attack for the model with the tall off (upper plot) and with the tail on (lower plot). The nacelles-on curves are solid and the nacelles-off curves are dashed. Notice that the addition of the

nacelles is stabilizing at all angles of attack with the tail off. With the

T-tail on, the addition of the nacelles is destabilizing past an angle of attack

of about 20°. This result suggests the presence of a wake off the nacelles

which masksthe T-tall and reduces its effectiveness; comparison of the tail-

increment curves on the right in the figure showsthis effect more directly.

The tail-increment curves are simply the difference between the tail-on and

tail-off curves and represent a measure of the tail contribution to stability.

There is a break in the nacelles-off curve at the angle of attack at which the

wing-fuselage wake crosses the T-tail. Whenthe nacelles are added, a marked

reduction is seen in the tail contribution. The inference is that at high

angles of attack the T-tall has entered the nacelle wake and the tail contribu-

tion to stability is degraded to the point that the complete configuration

becomesunstable at an angle of attack of about 20° . In addition to this

reduction in stability, the nacelles were found to have a large effect on the

control power available at the higher angles of attack. The effect of the

nacelles appears in the wake system of the aircraft and can affect the tall

only if the tail is mounted high on the vertical fin.

With this information in mind a series of tests was madein which the

nacelles were movedto various locations on the model; results of someof these

tests are shownin figure 5. The small sketches at the top of the figure show

the nacelle locations. The curves again are pitching-moment coefficient as a

function of angle of attack; each complete-configuration (nacelles-on) curve

is solid and each nacelles-off curve, dashed. The difference between the

nacelles-on and the nacelles-off curves is, in general, an indication of the

size of the nacelle wake at the higher angles of attack. The solid curve on

the left showsdata obtained when the nacelles were movedto wing pylons, as

seen in the sketch, at a spanwise location about in line with the tips of the

horizontal stabilizer. A stabilizing influence is apparent prior to stall and

deteriorates between angles of attack of 20° and 30o. This effect at the

higher angles of attack is not fully understood at this point but is presumed

to be due to the nacelle wake, shed forward and above the wing at high angles,

crossing over the tips of the horizontal tail. As a meansof hiding the

nacelles in the aft-fuselage wake they were movedon top of the fuselage close

to the vertical tail. Nacelles added in this location caused essentially no

change in the pitch curve.

The other plots in figure 5 are for nacelle locations which vary only

in longitudinal position; that is_ the nacelle span and vertical position

were unchangedand the nacelles were in a forward_ a basi% and an aft loca-

tion. For the nacelles in the basic location, note again the marked deteri-

oration of the pitch curve past _ = 20° due to the nacelles and a stable

trim point at _ = 40°. With the nacelles in the forward position_ not much

influence is shown on pitch prior to wing stall and a destabilizing trend is

shownafter _ = 20°. However_the nacelle is quickly enveloped in the stalled-

wing wake and near _ = 40° the two curves merge. As the nacelle is moved

aft from the basic location_ notice the heavy stabilizing contribution from

= i0 ° to 20°. The nacelle contribution in this angle range is presumed to

be due to its acting as a low horizontal tail. Beyond _ = 20°, however_ the

pitching-moment-coefficient curve deteriorates as the nacelle wake crosses the

T-tail, and beyond _ = 40° the pitch increment due to the nacelles is even

worse than for the basic configuration. It appears that aft movement of the basic nacelle improves the pitching-moment coefficient at low angles of attack and tends to shed a worse wake at very high angles of attack. Moving the nacelle forward does not appear to have much effect on the data for low angles of attack and improves the pitch curve at very high angles of attack. It should be remembered that no fixed set of criteria exist which will allow the designer to choose_ on the basis of these tests_ the best location for engine nacelles when the T-tail is employed; the data shown are only indicative of some effects which need further exploration. (Wind-tunnel testing at high angles of attack is the only safe way of developing the required stability and control data. ) Effect of Horizontal-Tail Size If the foregoing discussion of nacelle effects may be interpreted as showing the influence of the nacelle-wake size on a fixed size of the horizontal tailj the effect of increasing the size of the T-tail with relation to the basic nacelle wake should be shown. Figure 6 illustrates the effect of increased tail size on the pitching-moment coefficient as a function of angle of attack. On the left in figure 6 data are repeated for the basic configura- tion with the horizontal-tail area of 22 percent of the wing area. The plot on the right in the figure is for the model with the tail size increased to 30 percent of the wing area and the tail span, to 40 percent of the wing span.

The solid curves are for both models trimmed at an angle of attack of lO °. The addition of the larger tall has increased the stability at low angles of attack and has eliminated the stable trim point at _ = 40 ° noted previously for the basic configuration. The dashed curve is added 3 for a fixed incremental inci- dence of 4.1 °, to illustrate the degradation in control effectiveness with increasing angle of attack. Comparing the arrows again shows that increasing tail size has produced a small increase in control power at low angles of attack; at high angles of attack the control power is still reduced to a small percentage of its low-lift value. Whether or not curves such as these are what would be termed acceptable is a subject for further simulator studies.

Effect of Fuselage Size The effect of the fuselage-forebody length and size was also studied during the wind-tunnel program. It has been learned from experience and wind- tunnel tests in the past that the effect of increasing the fuselage-forebody volume willj in general_ decrease the stability. The point in question con- cernlng the T-tail layout has been the influence of the fuselage wake at the T-tail location. Figure 7 shows a line drawing of the basic model and of a version with a small fuselage. The smaller fuselage differed in depth as well as in width and had a cross section which 3 although similar in shape, was only _5 percent as large as that of the basic body. All other dimensions for the two models were identical. Figure 8 shows the effects of fuselage cross- sectional size. Here again are plotted the pitching-moment coefficients for the model with tail off, tail on, and a tail increment, each as a function of the angle of attack. Note that the smaller fuselage, represented by the solid ll7 curve, is more stable with the tail off as well as with the tall on. Note further that the tail-lncrement curves are nearly the same regardless of fuselage size. The reduction of tall contribution at the higher angles of attack is again due to nacelles. Based on the same reasoning as was used pre- viously_ since the tail increment remains relatively constant the fuselage size can be said to have little or no influence at the tall plane. The benefits in pltchlngmoment are primarily due to decreased llft on the fuselage fore- body which in turn is due to decreased cross-sectional size. Fuselage-forebody length has an effect similar to the cross-sectional-size effect shown in this figure - that is, increases in the fuselage-forebody length tend to destabilize the moment curves - and this effect occurs regardless of the location of the horizontal tails.

Effect of Mach Number The data presented thus far were obtained at a Mach number of 0.9_I. Fig- ure 9 shows some results of tests at higher Mach numbers made in the Langley transonic dynamics tunnel. Results are shown as llft and pitching-moment coef- ficients as a function of angle of attack for the basic configuration. It is obvious from the pltchlng-moment-coefflclent curve that the high-angle-of- attack nonlinearities have not disappeared as a result of increased speed; in fact 3 they may be somewhat more severe. The lift coefficient shows the char- acteristic depression in initial stall angle and the associated initial maxi- mum C L. At the higher angles of attack 3 however, an increase of 15 percent in the post-stall maximum llft is noted from a Mach number of 0.21 to 0.86.

CONCLUSION An increase in horizontal-tail size, changes in the location of the fuselage-mounted engine nacelles, and reduced fuselage-forebody lift were all found to have a beneficial effect on static longitudinal stability at high angles of attack.

SCOPE OF THE WIND-TUNNEL RESEARCH PROGRAM • ITEM • VARIATIONS HORIZONTAL TAIL SIZE, VERTICAL POSITION, PLANFORM, AND tNCtDENCE NACELLE SIZE AND LOCATION WING SECTION, STALL CONTROL DEVICES, FLAPS, ASPECT RATIO, AND SWEEP FUSELAGE CROSS-SECTION SIZE, CROSS-SECTION SHAPE, FDREBODY LENGTH MACH NUMBER 0.21 TO 0.90 REYNOLDS NUMBER 0.78 x I0 6 TO 1.8 x I06 EFFECT OF HORIZONTAL-TAIL HEIGHT GENERAL ARRANGEMENT OF BASIC CONFIGURATION i t = O; Z/_ = 378; M = 021 (Cm).40_ .2 4 _'- e STALL NOSE / _ uPo , Y/_/._ .os_I_/-_ \\\

, \

-0 " tO _ 40 50 a, DEG Figure 2 Figure i :]-:]-9 EFFECT OF AFT ENGINE NACELLES EFFECT OF TAIL INCIDENCE i t = O; M = 0.21 _ NACELLES ON M=0.21; BASIC CONFIGURATION f ---- NACELLES OFF '4 [_TA LL/f "2 ITAIL C INCREMENT (Cm).40E .2_-./_',,.._ o .2 LL -.2 Cm) 40"6

(co>,oE-'F/ -°

- .ALTAILON \ _ -.8 I - _0 -I.C a, DEG -" 0 10 20 30 40 50 a, DEG a, DEG Figure 4 Figure 3 EFFECT OF NACELLE LOCATION ON PITCHING-MOMENT COEFFICIENT M=021; it=O --NACELLES ON .... NACELLES OFF BASIC CONFIGURATION -.2 " " a " STALL (Cm) 40_ LL (ISTALL -#, _i ' (t STAL

o

6_3 0 20 40 ' 0 20 40 a, DEG Figure 9 EFFECT OF HORIZONTAL-TAIL SIZE M:021 COMPARISON OF BASIC AND SMALL FUSELAGES -_.55 b _- I F.,,- 40 b_.-_ (Crn).40 _ BASIC .4 St/S_ St/S _===0_ .2 • .- I -,2 \ C_STALL SM_ -A A ABASIC = 055 l -.61 II0 210 3_) 410 . I ilo 210 310 410 5O

.°'°4 t-

a, DEG Figure 6 Figure 7 EFFECT OF FUSELAGE CROSS-SECTIONAL SIZE ---- BASIC FUSELAGE __SMALL FUSELAGE aSTALL_4 TAIL OFF EFFECT OF MACH NUMBER ON LIFT AND PITCH CHARACTERISTICS 40_" z 0 TAIL INCREMENT

< _j47

(Cm) ' -2 F P 1.6 • I I I I I .2 TAIL ON ACm, t 1.2 O / .... ' -.4_- '" _'*_"_ /_ _'_: = 0.21 o l k _= 0.86 .2 CL (Or.) ._ -.2 .8 .4 -.4

_ST,_ : ', i,- _i _

I I I I I I I 61 I I I I / -i'0_) 20 z_) I 0 20 ,40 60 -'60 " 20 40 60 O IO 20 30 40 5u 6O a, DEG a, DEG a, DEG a, DEG Figure 8 Figure 9

ANDTURBULENT-AIR PENETRATION

By William H. Andrews, Stanley P. Butchart,

ThomasR. Sisk, and Donald L. Hughes

NASA Flight Research Center

SUMMARY

A flight program, utilizing a Convair 880 and a Boeing 720 airplane, was

conducted in conjunction with wind-tunnel and simulator programs to study prob-

lems related to jet-transport upsets and operation in a turbulent environment.

During the handling-qualities portion of the program the basic static stability

of the airplanes was considered to be satisfactory and the lateral-directional

dampingwas considered to be marginal without damper augmentation. An evalua-

tion of the longitudinal control system indicated that this system can become

marginal in effectiveness in the high Machnumber and high dynamic-pressure

range of the flight envelope. From the upset and recovery phase of the program

it was apparent that retrimming the stabilizer and spoiler deployment were

valuable tools in effecting a positive recovery; however, if these devices are

to be used safely, it appears that a suitable g-meter should be provided in the

cockpit because the high control forces in recovery tend to N educe the pilot's

sensitivity to the actual acceleration loads. During the turbulence penetra-

tions the pilot noted that the measured vibrations of 4 to 6 cps in the cockpit

considerably disrupted their normal scan pattern and suggested that an improve-

ment should be madein the seat cushion and restraint system. Also it was

observed that the indicator needles on the flight instruments were quite stable

in the turbulent environment.

INTRODUCTION

Within the past few years, the turbine-powered jet-transport airplanes

have experienced a series of incidents which, in the majority of cases, have

been associated with the penetration of a region of turbulent air. The reports

of the flight crews, as well as the analysis of data derived from onboard

crash recorders, have been consistent in that the airplanes were initially

disturbed from stabilized flight to the extent that a period of uncontrolled

flight developed and in several cases the airplanes involved did not recover

stability.

To study this problem, the Flight Research Center of the National

Aeronautics and Space Administration has initiated a flight-test program, in

conjunction with simulator and wind-tunnel studies conducted by other NASA

Research Centers on this subject. The prime objectives of the flight program

were to document the airplane handling characteristics in support of ground-

based simulator studies and to documentthe airplane characteristics and

operational experience during controlled upset maneuvers and flight in a

turbulent environment.

A major portion of the data was derived from flights within the normal

operational boundaries and illustrates someof the salient features related to

the longitudinal control system, longitudinal upset, and lateral-directional

dynamics in turbulence of these airplane types. It is recognized that these

characteristics maybe common knowledge to the majority of those who have a

working relationship with this class of airplane. However, it is believed

that, in consequenceof the series of incidents which have occurred, a

reemphasis of these inherent characteristics, particularly to the operational

pilots, is appropriate.

TESTAIRPLANES

The airplanes used in the investigation were a Convair 880 and a Boeing

720 which were provided by the Federal Aviation Agency Facility at Oklahoma

City, Oklahoma. Both airplanes incorporated standard airline equipment and

were considered to be representative airplanes in the turbine-powered jet-

transport class.

The only deviation from the standard configuration was that related to the

longitudinal control system in the Boeing 720 during the early portion of the

program. At the conclusion of the basic handling-qualities evaluation of this

airplane, several features becameapparent which indicated that the longi-

tudinal control system was not responding as predicted by the manufacturer.

Initially, it was not possible for the pilot to stall the stabilizer jack

screw motor in moving the stabilizer in or out of the trim position except in

the airplane nose-up direction at high dynamic pressure (Mach number, 0.75 at

15000 feet). Furthermore, the data indicated that the predicted maximum ele-

vator deflection was not being obtained during tests which were performed to

establish the maximum elevator available with a critically "mistrimmed" sta-

bilizer (that is, stabilizer at a position other than trim). A detailed

in fig. l) indicated that someof the balance-panel seals had been improperly

installed. Atthe completion of the inspection, it was determined that 5 of

the l0 balance panels shown in figure 2 were outside of the specified tolerance

limits of the cove-gap spacing by as muchas 0.28 inch at certain elevator

settings. (TEUsignifies trailing edge up.) As a result of this condition,

flight tests were repeated after the system was reworked to the specified

tolerances and someof the comparative flight results are presented in the

discussion to follow. It should be stated that although there was a measurable

change in the longitudinal wheel-force characteristics, the system modification

did not reveal an apparent change in the stall characteristics of the stabi-

lizer jack screw motor and, as will be shown, the maximum elevator conditions

were only slightly improved.

INSTRUMENTATION

The Convair 880 instrumentation was limited to provide those measurements

necessary to document responses of the airplane, the flight instruments, and

the pilot in turbulence. The instrumentation consisted of two camerasmounted

in the cockpit and at the center of gravity to record the respective pilot,

flight-instrument, and wing response to turbulence. Also included were a

standard NASAairspeed-altitude recorder, three-component linear accelerometers

at the pilot# center-of-gravity, and tail positions, and angular velocity

recorders and accelerometers at the center of gravity.

The instrumentation included in the Boeing 720 airplane was consistent

with

that required for a complete handling-qualities investigation. The meas-

ured

quantities consisted of the following:

Airspeed/altitude

Three-component linear accelerations (pilot, center of gravity,

and tail position)

Angular displacement (pitch and roll)

Angular velocity and accelerations (pitch, roll, and yaw)

Control forces (longitudinal, lateral, and directional)

Control positions (longitudinal, lateral, and directional)

Cockpit and wing cameras (similar to those used in the Convair 880)

Recording accuracies were consistent with standard NASAinstrumentation.

TESTPROGRAM

The flight program was divided into two phases. In the initial phase, a

Convair 880 airplane was flown for a total of 15 hours to record the pilot and

cockpit flight-instrument response and the associated accelerations along the

fuselage during the penetration of thunderstorm turbulence.

The second phase of the program consisted of flying a Boeing 720 airplane

for a total of 40 hours, during which time the basic handling qualities were

recorded for standard flight-testmaneuvers, for conditions of controlled

upsets, and for flights into regions of turbulence. Most of the data presented

herein was derived from this program. Figure 3 presents the variation of altl-

tude with Mach number covered during this program. Data were obtained from

Mach numbers of 0.25 to 0.79 at 15000 feet# from Mach numbers of 0.53 to 0.91 at

35000 feet, and at a Machnumber of 0.75 at 42000 feet. During the controlled

upset maneuvers, the high-speed boundary was penetrated only slightly during

the recovery portion of the maneuver. A limited amount of data was acquired at

18000 feet for comparison with available manufacturers' information and for an

evaluation of the effects of the stabilizer jack screw stall characteristics.

The weight of the airplane ranged from 190,000 to 140,000 pounds and the center

of gravity varied from 16 to 29 percent of the meanaerodynamic chord.

As the investigation of several of the turbulence-assoclated accidents

indicated that the stabilizer may have been in the setting for airplane full

nose down at impactj a significant part of the program was devoted to investi-

gating the longitudinal control characteristics with this trim setting and the

pilot's ability to recover from a longitudinal upset through elevator alone, stabilizer retrinmLing, and manipulation of the spoilers.

DISCUSSION

Consideration of the basic airplane characteristics and the commentswhich

have been obtained from various pilot reports of upset 3 turbulence penetration,

and the associated recoveries indicates a lack of appreciation of the

longitudinal-control-system limitations, particularly in unfamiliar regions of

the flight envelope. Consequently, the next series of figures are shown to

illustrate the various aspects of the system operation and potential limita-

tions, particularly in the high Machnumber and high dynamic pressure range.

Longitudinal Maneuvering Data

Figure 4 presents a typical variation of the stick force and elevator

position for longitudinal control as a function of normal acceleration at an

altitude of 34500 feet and a Machnumber of 0.84. The data illustrated by the

open symbols were obtained with the previously mentioned out-of-tolerance cove

gaps on the elevator-balance panels 3 and the solid symbols present the stick-

force variation indicative of the reduction of force that was obtained when

the clearances were brought within the specified tolerances. The maximum

apparent force reduction was between 18 and 20 pounds for this flight condition

and ranged to as high as 40 pounds in other conditions tested.

The general trend of the data covering the acceleration range between 0.1g

and 2.25g showsthat at the extreme levels of acceleration_ the stick-force

gradient is considerably reduced and the variation of elevator position appears

to be unfavorable and nonlinear.

These nonlinear characteristics are more pronounced at the higher altitude

and Mach numberswhere cruise flight is normally performed. It is realized

that these characteristics are not unusual for a control system of this type.

However, the inherent characteristics do present problems to the pilot3 par-

ticularlywhen he is subjected to extreme levels of acceleration in either

smooth or turbulent air conditions.

Longitudinal Control Effectiveness

Another feature of this longitudinal control system is that related to

the loss of control effectiveness of the tab-actuated elevator in the tran-

sonic speed range. Figure 5 presents the control tab-elevator relationship

at an indicated Mach number M i of 0.54 and 0.84 at an altitude of 35000 feet.

From the data at M i = 0.543 it may be seen that the variation of the elevator tab with elevator deflection is essentially linear and the ratio is approxi- mately 1 to 1 for the traillng-edge-up (TEU) elevator positions. At the condi- tions shoe for the higher Mach number of 0.84 the tab-to-elevator ratio is still about 1 to 1 between elevator deflections of about 5.0 ° TEU and 8 ° TED (trailing edge doE). However, beyond these limits it may be observed that this tab-to-elevator ratio is reduced by about one-half. This loss in control- tab effectiveness may be associated wlth a shock stall_ which may occur on the control-tab_elevator combination as the tab deflection is increased and the local flow becomes supersonic. It is appreciated that this explanation is not new; however, when the overspeed boundary is inadvertently penetrated, it is believed that the pilots operating the aircraft, in many cases, do not have a full appreciation of this influence.

Elevator Available for Recovery In conjunction with the loss in control effectiveness at the high speed, another item of interest is that related to the maximum elevator available for recovery from an upset with a mistrimmed stabilizer. Figure 6 presents the maximum elevator deflection attained during the flight test over the predicted Mach number range of 0.62 to 0.89 at an altitude of 35000 feet. The estimated boundary curve shoe represents the maximum elevator deflection that should be attained with a maximum deflection of the elevator tab. The flight-test data represented by the open and solid symbols show the actual elevator deflection that was obtained with the stabilizer trimmed in the full airplane-nose-down (A.N.D.) position of 3.5 ° and with the pilot applying a maximumpull force as the airplane decelerated from Mi = 0.89 to M i = 0.62.

The open and solid symbols represent the results before and after the elevator-balance-panel cove gaps were corrected to the specified tolerances.

Initially, it may be seen that the out-of-tolerance cove gap cost about 2.0 ° to 2.5 ° in elevator deflection over the speed range. Furthermore, the solid symbols indicate that under the specified trim conditions at M i = 0.89 approximately 8.5 ° of elevator deflection are available for trim maneuvering.

As the speed is reduced to M i = 0.76 the elevator available increases to approximately 10.5o. A major portion of the test data represented by the solid symbols _s obtained with both pilots pulling on their respective control wheels.

The apparent deviation between the estimated and the maximum elevator attained during the flight tests represents a reduction in longitudinal recov- ery control available for the airplane used in this test. From consideration of the fact that the maximum recovery capability of the airplane is dependent upon the elevator deflection per g relationship and the elevator available, a limitation in the elevator available becomes of primary concern. The signifi- cance of this relationship is further illustrated in the discussion of the controlled upset maneuvers.

Recovery by Elevator and Stabilizer

At the completion of the basic handling-qualities evaluation of the air-

plane, a series of controlled upset maneuvers were performed at the test alti-

tudes of 15000 and 35000 feet. The method employed to upset the airplane was

either to push over to the overspeed warning or to execute a stabilizer

"runaway" in either the full-nose-down or the nose-up direction. At the over-

speed warning, the throttle was reduced to idle and the recovery was initiated.

Figure 7 presents a stabilizer runaway performed at 35000 feet at an

initial Machnumber of 0.78. At time 1 second, the stabilizer was activated

in the full-nose-down direction and at 6 seconds, was driven to 3.5° airplane

nose down. In this period of 5 seconds the airplane went from level flight to

approximately -0.2g. At the time 10.7 seconds the throttle was reduced to idle

and at 12 seconds the pilot initiated recovery through the elevator. At time

18 seconds the full elevator available had been applied and a maximum of 1.3g

was attained. At the time of 20 seconds the stabilizer was activated toward

the trim position and as the normal acceleration increased the elevator input

was reduced until a time of 26 seconds# when the full recovery had been

effected and the airplane had reached an acceleration of 2.3g. The elevator

and acceleration traces between the increment of time of 18 and 20 seconds

indicate a loss in elevator effectiveness. The elevator remains essentially

constant in this region while the acceleration decreases from approximately

1. Sg to 1.Og. Also, at the time 18 seconds it is not apparent that the air-

plane rate of descent is at all reduced. However, after the stabilizer is

returned to the trim position, the acceleration increases, the rate of descent

is reduced, and the airplane returns to a level-flight condition.

Elevator-Stabilizer Trade

For the purpose of illustrating the horizontal-stabilizer power and the

effects of a mistrimmed stabilizer, figure 8 presents a summaryof the trades

in elevator and stabilizer for 1 g flight at altitudes of 15000 and 35000 feet.

The ratio of the elevator deflection to stabilizer deflection and of the stick

force to stabilizer deflection are presented over the Mach number range from

0.38 to about 0.85. The ratio of elevator angle to stabilizer angle indicates

that approximately 2° to 2.5 ° of elevator are required for every degree of mis-

trimmed stabilizer over the speed range tested. The corresponding stick forces

required to maintain level flight vary from approximately 15 to 35 pounds per

degree at 35000feet and 18 to 70 pounds per degree at 15000 feet. From these

data it is apparent that the available elevator for maneuvering is considerably

reduced. Also the increased workload associated with the high stick forces

tends to reduce the pilot's sensitivity to the actual accelerations experienced

in maneuvering.

In general, pilots have been taught to minimize stabilizer manipulation

while maneuvering. As shown in the previous time history, once the airplane

has been upset with a corresponding change in stabilizer setting and a recovery

is initiated, the retrimming of the stabilizer can be a valuable tool in

effecting a positive recovery. However, to use the stabilizer intelligently

under these circumstances, the pilot needs someacceleration reference through

a suitable g-meter to prevent overstressing the airplane.

Recovery by Elevator and Spoiler

Figure 9 presents a stabilizer runaway where the initial recovery is

effected through the elevator control and the final recovery is accomplished

through the deflection of the spoiler system. The general operational proce-

dures used in performing the upset were the sameas those employed in the pre-

vious maneuvers. As noted on the previous upset time history, there is a loss

of elevator effectiveness showing up between time 15 and 19.5 seconds. In this

region the elevator remains fixed at approximately 8° while the acceleration

decreases from 1.Sg to 1.1g. Also it maybe observed, through the airspeed and

altitude traces, that the rate of descent has not been checked until after the

spoilers have reached their maximum deflection of about 50°. In this maneuver

the spoiler handle was movedto the full spoiler position of 60° . Regardless

of the fact that only 50o of spoiler deflection were obtained_ because of the

blowdown effect at high speed 3 this much spoiler, in conjunction with the ele-

vator, allowed complete recovery of the airplane to a level-flight condition

while the stabilizer remained in the full nose-down setting.

In similar maneuversperformed with the stabilizer in the trim setting,

there was no problem in recovery with the elevator alone. However, in the

upsets that were performed with the mistrimmed stabilizer, it is obvious that

supplemental recovery control is required if additional elevator deflection

cannot be provided.

Dynamic Lateral-Directional Stability

During the evaluation of the basic handling qualities, the dynamic,

lateral-dlrectional stability characteristics were measured in smooth air in

order that the influence of the Dutch roll modecould be more intelligently

assessed in the flights where turbulence was penetrated. Figure lO presents a

summaryof the dynamic lateral-directional characteristics measured in terms of

the reciprocal of the time to dampto half amplitude over the speed range at an

altitude of 35000 feet. Results are shownfor conditions both with the damper

on and off.

The general observation in the comparison of these damping characteristics

is that the damping without augmentation is quite low and the engagementof the

yaw damper considerably improves the Dutch roll damping. On the basis of these

data and experience acquired in the turbulence flights, it was apparent that

the low level of Dutch roll damping increases the pilot workload when the air-

plane is upset or disturbed by gusts or turbulence, particularly with the yaw

damper inoperative. Also, as has been shownin reference l_ the utilization

of the yaw damper in turbulence, in general, relieves the tail loads by about

50 percent. Consequently, it is believed that the yaw damper should be con-

sidered an essential operational system on all transport airplanes of this type.

Turbulent-Air Penetrations During the turbulent-air portion of the Boeing 720 program, an attempt was made to penetrate either wave turbulence generated by terrain or high-altitude clear-air turbulence. The initial conditions investigated were at the high altitude during cruising flight. Howeverj very little or no turbulence was experienced at the levels between 33000 and 39000 feet. On the other hand, in the region of Denver and Colorado Springs, mountain-wave turbulence, which was classified by the pilots to be light to moderate, was encountered at 22000 feet.

The technique employed in penetrating the turbulent air was to stabilize at an initial indicated airspeed of 390 knots and_ once the turbulence was encoun- tered, to reduce the power and attempt to maintain a constant attitude and an .... _ _ 300 knots.

a_ro_ _ Figure ll presents a 9-second portion of the time histories acquired during three of these tests. The first test was made with the autopilot and yaw damper on, the second was with the autopilot off and the yaw damper on_ and the final test was made with both the autopilot and yaw damper off. The respective normal accelerations show that the peak value ranges from 0.3 to 2.5g at the pilot's station, 0.3 to 2.0g at the center of gravity and 0.1 to 2.6g at the tail. These peak accelerations are of a magnitude similar to those measured from flight recorders of airplanes involved in turbulence incidents; however, the persistence experienced in the illustrated tests was not as long.

In addition to the acceleration, it may be seen that there is an apparent oscillation measured at the pilot's station of approximately 4 to 6 cps. This superimposed motion was noted by the pilots to be quite disconcerting and disrupted their normal scan pattern. These studies indicate the need for improvements in the seat cushion and restraint system to reduce these motions.

The effects of the yaw damper and autopilot may be observed through motion of the pitch, roll, and yawing velocity traces. The progressive decay in Dutch roll damping is apparent as each of the systems is turned off and with both the yaw damper and autopilot off# the Dutch roll, previously discussed, becomes quite pronounced even though the general level of accelerations is consider- ably reduced.

Convair 880 Turbulence Penetration In the Convair 880 test program a series of turbulence flights were accom- plished at an altitude of about 29000 feet and the penetration was into a thun- -derstorm. The flights made through this region of turbulence were made with the autopilot off and the yaw damper on and off. The pilot's task was essen- tially the same as that required on the Boeing 720 airplane. The overall mag- nitude of turbulence was not much greater than that experienced with the Boeing 720; however, because of the persistence of the disturbance, the pilots at times classified the turbulence as moderate to severe. The transverse accelera- tion experienced during these flights was in the range from iO._g and was con- siderably greater than that evidenced in the Boeing 720 airplane. This result, however, could be due to the nature of the turbulence that the airplane was flown through.

C_CID'D_G_S With regard to the basic airplane characteristics, the analysis of the overall static stability characteristics of the airplanes tested appears to be satisfactory and acceptable to the pilots. Considering the inherent charac- teristics of the longitudinal-control system design and the flight envelope where the airplanes are being operated, the system can become marginal in the high Mach number and high dynamic-pressure range. The operational pilot should be thoroughly acquainted 3 either through simulator or in-flight demonstration, with the effectiveness of the longitudinal control system under adverse flight conditions beyond the normal operational boundary. Regarding the lateral- directional dynamics, the data obtained during the test program serve to reem- phasize the low damping of these airplanes, particularly without the operation of the yaw damper system; and the system should be considered, if it is not currently the practice, to be an operational item.

In the upset and recovery category, it is believed that the stabilizer or spoiler system can be effectively employed to assist the pilot in recovering from an upset attitude in the longitudinal mode. However, the increased pilot workload associated with the high control forces tends to reduce the pilots' sensitivity to the increased accelerations during recovery. Consequently, it is believed that a suitable g-meter should be provided in order that all sys- tems available, such as the stabilizer and spoilers, can be safely employed without overstressing the airplane.

From the turbulence data acquired during the test program it was observed that the pilot is subjected to frequency ranges around _ to 6 cps. Also it appeared that an improvement in the seat cushion and restraint system may be essential to reduce the shaking of the pilot and firmly anchor him in his seat. In this regard_ it is believed that the pilot motion in the seat is obviously the main contributor to the fact that his scan pattern is considez- ably disrupted. Finally an observation of the camera data, which were obtained in the cockpit, indicates that the flight instruments and panel are relatively steady and there is no apparent shaking of the indicator needles.

REFERENCE 1. Funk, Jack; and Cooney, T.V.: Some Effects of Yaw Damping on Airplane Motions and Vertical-Tail Loads in Turbulent Air. NASA M_0 2-17-_9L, 1959.

RESULTANT TOLERANCES FROM MISRIGGED CROSS SECTION OF ELEVATOR BALANCE SYSTEM ELEVATOR BALANCE PANELS _L STABILIZER BALANCE PANEL FORWARD-EDGE_2_ J Is ELEVATOR 10 POSIT_ON, 5 TEU 202S_•

OEO

Io COVE SE_ I_ 3 .2 .I 0 1 2 -s .2 .i 1 2 COVE GAP OUT OF TOLERANCE, IN _COVE SHELL Figure 2 Figure i FLIGHT-TEST LIMITS LONGITUDINAL-CONTROL- SYSTEM MANEUVERING CHARACTERISTICS MACH NUMBER : 0.84, ALTITUDE : 34,500 FT SOxlO 3 GROSS WEIGHT, 40 LB PULL 80 _- STICK JBORCE, 0 35 14o,ooo ELEVATOR 40 I 40 o_ -'o''°' o ou_ OF _OLERANCE 3O • IN TOLERANCE 8O INDICATED ALTITUDE, FT 2O %s_,_,_ °R, o -_ DEG 4 0.2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9 8 ._ ._; i;2 ;;6 21o_.4 NORMAL ACCELERATION, g INDICATED MACH NUMBER Figure 4 Figure 3 LONGITUDINAL-CONTROL EFFECTIVENESS ALTITUDE = 35,000 FT TEU 16 M i = .54 MAXIMUM ELEVATOR AVAILABLE STABILIZER TRIM -- FULL A.N.D.

ELEVATOR O 8 ALTITUDE = 35,000 FT ANGLE, DEG COVE GAP o OUT OF TOLERANCE • IN TOLERANCE 16 ' TEU 24 MAXIMUM CONTROL-TAB TEU 16 2O "_:_C_:_ Mi = .84 ELEVATOR ELEVATOR ANGLE, DEG DEFLECTION DEFLECTION, DEG 1!

1 I I 16 8 D 8 lt6 24 TEU 4 5 .'6 .'7 ._ .; _o ELEVATOR CONTROL TAB, DEG INDICATED MACH NUMBER Figure Figure 6 STABILIZER TRIM RUNAWAY A.N.D.

RECOVERY -- ELEVATOR/STABILIZER IF RECOVERy I STARIUZER _s_zE:__ Fu,,_,_ R i _ ........ v ......

I AND. I I ) APP ED I TO TRIM I I THROTTLELkt I ct4oP _/1 _ I INDICATED 9 t

MACH B_ r_,_[nll ]

NUMBER 17 [ I I I INDICATED 35x103 NORMAL 2 ACCELERATION, 1 g 0 _,,c._LE, lO

AND_ I I J

ELEVATOR TEU 10 POSITION, S DEG S

HOR'ZONTAL AN05_ i I i E I I ! LI__+_ STAB'L,_ER O

POSITION, DEG 5 PULL 150 LONGITUDINAL lOD STICK FORCE, LB SO 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 TIME, SEC Figure ?

LONGITUDINAL TRIM ELEVATOR/STABILIZER TRADE ALTITUDE, FT INCREMENTAL • ELEVATOR INCREMENTAL _3s,ooo STABILIZER I I I I I BO[ STICK FORCE J iS,ODD INCREMENTA'L'40 J.

STABILIZER J INCREMENTAL 60 I- LB/DEG 20 [ 3s,ooo o ._ .:_ .;:, .;_ ,._ INDICATED MACH NUMBER Figure 8 STABILIZER TRIM RUNAWAY A.N.D.

RECOVERY -- ELEVATOR/SPOILER I O_ENE0 INDICATED MACH NUMBER INDICATED ALTITUDE,

t r t

FT NORMAL ACCELERATION, C.G., g ANU PITCH ANGLE, 0 DEG 10 POSITION, 2

SPO,LER TEU"_I_____j___ t t t ! ! !

DEG ELEVATOR TEU I0 POSITION, 5 DEG 0 STABILIZER

HO"ZONTAL-ANUiI____! ! p ! I I I ! I I I I I -_

POSITION, DEG PULL 300 STICK FBORCE, 100 O 8 I 4 TIME, SEC Figure 9 LATERAL-DIRECTIONAL DYNAMICS ALTITUDE = 35,000 FT _.2l,- _ -,Aw DAM,,' oPP o/ YAW DAMPER ON /o 1 .8 [ // TIME TO-DAMP TO - . ONE.HALF AMPLITUDE,.4 j- // I I "_D,CAT_O MAC. N.M_" Figure lO COMPARISON OF AUTOPILOT/YAW DAMPER INFLUENCE IN TURBULENCE AUTOPILOT ON AUTOPILOT OFF AUTOPILOT OFF YAW DAMPER ON YAW DAMPER ON YAW DAMPER OFF ACCELERATION, .e. .

NORMAL _ . --- _ _ ---. _ _ ________ __ ACCELERATION, T_, _" I m.,_J,_ T'_,_ i'-"l C.G., g o _ ='_---_-_------_=_ I I" J I i , --'-_ NORMAL 2 ACCELERATION, _, _ ANU .2_ _ PITCHING VELOCITY, t-----_-I I I J __ ROLL VELOC,Ty, " I--_ _-_-_-_ RAD'AN/_EC. IX___ _ RADIAN/$EC _ _ --V IL---_J • 1 2 3 4 5 O 1 2 3 4 5 O I 2 3 4 5 TIME, 5EC Figure ii 15. SIMULATOR INVESTIGATIONS OF THE PROBLEMS OF FLYING A SWEPT-WING TRANSPORT AIRCP_ IN HEAVY TURBULENCE By Richard S. Bray and William E. Larsen NASA Ames Research Center SUMMARY An investigation of several factors which may contribute to the problem of piloting jet transport aircraft in heavy turbulence was conducted by using a piloted simulator that included the most significant airplane response and cockpit vibrations induced by rough air. Results indicated that the primary fuselage structural frequency contributed significantly to a distracting cock- pit environment, and there was obtained evidence of severely reduced instrument flight proficiency during simulated maneuvering flight in heavy turbulence. It is concluded that the addition of similar rough-air response capabilities to training simulators would be of value in pilot indoctrination in turbulent- flight procedures.

INTRODUCTION During the past 3 or 4 years, jet transport aircraft have been involved in a number of serious incidents resulting from encounters with heavy atmos- pheric turbulence. These experiences fall into two categories: those resulting from encounters with clear-air turbulence that caused structural damage and personal injury, and those that involved encounters with storm turbulence, while in instrument flight, that resulted in partial or complete loss of con- trol of the aircraft. The clear-air turbulence problem indicates the need for meteorological detective work, but the storm turbulence presents a less defined problem and has inspired a review of turbulent-flight procedures among all segments of the airline industry. In response to this general concern, the National Aeronautics and Space Administration instituted a program of investi- gations to examine several factors which might contribute to piloting problems in severe turbulence. Wind-tunnel tests of a transport model at the Langley Research Center and flight tests of a Boeing 720 airplane conducted by personnel of the Flight Research Center were performed for the purpose of augmenting aerodynamic and stability and control data for the swept-wing transport category of airplane. Concurrently, at the Ames Research Center 3 an investigation of rough-air piloting problems was conducted by using a piloted simulator that has unique capabilities regarding creation of the physical environment in the cock- pit during flight in turbulence. This paper summarizes the results and obser- vations obtained in the Ames investigation.

The simulation program was intended to pursue the following objectives:

(a) Examine aircraft response to turbulence

(b) Evaluate handling qualities in turbulence

(c) Study effects of cockpit accelerations on conduct of flight tasks

(d) Evaluate the simulator as a training device

AIRPLANE SIMULATION

Cockpit.- Since manyof the first-hand accounts of incidents in heavy

turbulence stressed the distracting aspects of cockpit accelerations and vibra-

tions, the simulation used in the Amesprogram was designed to utilize a device

known as the height control simulator. The simulator cab is mounted on a ver-

tical track that provides lO0 feet of travel. (See fig. 1.) High-performance

electrical servomotors drive the cab through a cable system. The simulator

cockpit, illustrated in figure 2, employed basic controls and instruments sim-

ilar to those installed in Jet transport aircraft. White light was used for instrument illumination. The occupant was seated on a cushion of the type used on Boeing 707 airplanes, and was restrained by a military-type lap belt and shoulder harness.

Computer program.- The computer program utilized aerodynamic and stability and control characteristics that were generalized to be typical for a medium- weight swept-wing Jet transport airplane at midcruise loading (about 175,000 lb). All stability and control derivatives other than lift, drag, pitching-momentj and longitudlnal-control gradients were linearized and were invariant with Mach number. The operating envelope provided by the computer program extended from 25,000 feet to 45,000 feet in altitude and allowed for speeds up to a Mach number of 1.0. Although the computational program was simplified in many respects, it did include the following qualitative repre- sentations of those characteristics that were believed to be significant to the flight tasks being simulated: (a) Performance reduction with altitude (b) Reduction in longitudinal control power at high indicated airspeeds and Mach numbers (c) Reduction in longitudinal stability at the stall (d) Speed instability, or "tuck," at high Mach numbers, together with a simulated Mach trim compensator (e) Cockpit vibrations at the stall and at high Mach numbers Simulation of structural vibration.- Accelerations measured in the cock- pits of several jet transport airplanes during flight in turbulence revealed the existence of a predominate frequency of vibration of about 4 cycles per second. This value is presumed to reflect the first bending mode of the fuse- lage. The upper portion of figure 3, which is a sample of the flight records 3 gives evidence of the 4-cycle-per-second cockpit vibration that appears to be constantly excited by the turbulence. This frequency can hardly be noticed at the center-of-gravity location. Measurements taken in smooth air in response to sharp elevator pulses defined the low value of damping inherent in this bending mode. The effects of this bending mode were adequately simulated by including in the computational circuitry for cockpit acceleration a simple resonant circult 3 tuned to 4 cycles per second and appropriately damped. The amplitude of accelerations at this frequency in relation to the general root- mean-square level of accelerations was adjusted to agree with the results of an analysis of the flight records. The lower portion of figure 3 presents for comparison the center-of-gravity and cockpit accelerations computed in the simulation program in response to simulated turbulence inputs.

Turbulence simulation.- Turbulence was introduced into the analog computa- tion as incremental angles of attack and sideslip resulting from vertical and lateral gusts. The turbulence inputs used in this initial phase of the study were derived by appropriately filtering the output of a Gaussian noise genera- tor. In subsequent phases of the program, extensive use was made of gust pro- files that had been recorded during actual penetrations of thunderstorms with a T-33 jet chase airplane, which was operating as part of the National Severe Storms Project of 1960 and 1961. These profiles contained large-scale draft velocities of up to 200 feet per second.

Simulator capabilities.- The drive system of the simulator cab is capable of reproducing the computed accelerations up to a frequency of 5 cycles per second_ and because of its large vertical travel is capable of reproducing acceleration frequencies as low as the airplane short-period frequency of about 1/4 cycle per second. Frequencies below this value are rapidly attenuated by the necessary "wash-out" circuitry.

The unique aspects of this jet-transport-airplane simulator_ particularly in comparison with training simulators_ are (a) Capability to reproduce a significant portion of the cockpit vertical- acceleration environment of flight in turbulence (b) Flexibility in programing of rough-air inputs (c) Representation of airplane characteristics beyond normal operating limits TESTS The observations discussed in this paper are based on several periods of operation of the simulator. The investigation was exploratory in nature, and a total of 26 NASA, FAA, and industry pilots were exposed to the simulator.

Research pilots made repeated runs in simulated heavy turbulence in order to assess the relative significance of the various factors that bear on the task of flying in turbulence. At the conclusion of the program, the simulation was used in a demonstration program for 16 pilots involved with the airline industry.

RESULTS AND DISCUSSION Response to Large-Scale Turbulence Because several of the serious turbulence incidents culminated in steep dives, concern has been expressed regarding the longitudinal response of the jet transport airplane to large vertical drafts and the adequacy of the control available to the pilot in this large-scale turbulence environment. The simula- tion showed no unusual characteristics, and longitudinal control was more than adequate if speeds were maintained within the normal operating boundaries.

Figure 4 illustrates the behavior of the aircraft in response to vertical drafts. The left-hand side of the figure illustrates the normal weather-vaning response of the longitudinally stable airplane to a very large (200 feet per second) sustained updraft. With no intervention on the part of the pilot, the aircraft is pitched nose down through an angle of ll °. For the rate of gust onset shown in figure 4, a maxlmum of about 50 feet per second per second, the acceleration transient is very small, but it does initiate a positive rate of climb. Of course, with the nose-down attitude, there is a rapid buildup in speed. In 20 seconds the aircraft has accelerated from a Mach number of 0.79 to a Mach number of 0.88. As the aircraft leaves the region of the updraft and progresses into a downdraft, the reverse behavior is indicated.

The time history on the right-hand side of figure 4 indicates the course of events if the pilot intervenes to return the pitch attitude to its original value. Substantial acceleration increments are required, and a rate of climb equal to the gust velocity is attained. This action by the pilot does, however, minimize speed variations. The point to be gained from this figure is that the energy imparted to the aircraft by such a large draft must show up as either a speed or an altitude increase. The pilot has that choice, but he has no means of rapidly dissipating the energy.

Figure 5 illustrates the longitudinal behavior of the aircraft, without pilot input, in response to a vertical gust profile that was recorded in an actual thunderstorm penetration. Although at several points in the exposure, incremental accelerations of nearly ±l g are shown, they are not sustained. In fact there is little evidence of acceleration frequencies lower than the natu- ral frequency in pitch - about 1/4 cps. Speed and altitude deviations are gradual, and except for the early portion of the encounter, where large sus- tained drafts were present, these changes could easily be accepted as the phugoid oscillation. Figure 5 is offered as additional evidence that a nor- mally stable aircraft will not be longitudinally "upset" to the point of flight- path divergence, even by very heavy turbulence.

14o Handling Qualities in Turbulence Assessments of handling qualities of the simulated aircraft in heavy tur- bulence indicated that there were no marked deficiencies within the normal operating boundaries and with the yaw damper and pitch trim compensator oper- ating. Dutch roll was a constant annoyance, but good lateral control mitigated its significance. Control characteristics were considered satisfactory to speeds as low as 230 knots at the aircraft loading conditions assumed for the tests. The changes in trim and control power above a Mach number of 0.85 were considered unsatisfactory in heavy turbulence. Because these changes are dif- ficult to recognize quickly in turbulence, they add confusion to an already demanding task.

Cockpit Accelerations The cockpit-acceleration environment in the heaviest turbulence was con- sidered to be detrimental to instrument flight proficiency. The pilots agreed that the instruments generally remained readable, but only with increased effort, and that this requirement for increased concentration tended to disturb the normal "scan" pattern that is the key to proficient instrument flight.

Several pilots were exposed to the simulation of heavy turbulence with the structural frequency removed - that is, without a 4-cycle-per-second resonance.

The resulting cockpit-acceleration environment was considered much more toler- able even though the root-mean-square level of accelerations was not signifi- cantly decreased. This observation, together with a desire to substantiate available physiological data, inspired tests to determine pilot tolerance to vertical vibrations as a function of frequency. In figure 6, acceleration measurements at a pilot's head are compared with cockpit accelerations for fre- quencies up to 5 cycles per second. For the pilot seated on a standard seat cushion, there is indicated an amplification factor of more than 2 at frequen- are amplifications cies between 3 and 4_2 cycles per second. Slightly lower noted at these frequencies with no cushion at all, but the attenuating effects was good of the cushion do become apparent above 4_ cycles per second. There correlation of a decrease in subjective tolerance to the vibrations with the increase in head accelerations. As indicated in the figure, the fuselage bending frequencies of the aircraft lie in a most sensitive range, and the present seat cushions are ineffective, at best, in reducing the stress on the pilot.

It was interesting to note that the level of physical discomfort and con- cern expressed at initial exposures to the highest turbulence levels tended to lower with subsequent exposures. These facts point to the benefits that might be obtained by providing a similar environment in training simulators.

Pilot Performance During the portion of the program in which research pilots were evaluating the rough-air flight task, there were no indications in their performances of

severe control difficulties; that is, there were no incidents or "upsets,"

even under the most severe conditions of turbulence and task. However 3 it must

be remembered that their familiarity with the objectives of the test, and their

background of test flying reduced the elements of surprise and distraction from

the environment. More significant variations of pilot performance becameevi-

dent during the demonstration program for the industry pilots. The primary

objectives of this phase of the program were to demonstrate the simulated rough-

air environment, to exchange ideas and opinions on the subject of operations in

turbulence, and to obtain professional assessments of the value of this type of

simulator in airline training.

Each pilot averaged about 2 hours in the simulator, with most of the first

hour devoted to familiarization and demonstration of the characteristics of the

simulated aircraft, including stalls and flight beyond a Machnumber of 0.9.

The rest of the time was devoted to simulated thunderstorm penetrations and

demonstrations pertinent to rough-air flight techniques.

Reactions of the visiting pilots were favorable. The vertical motion

appeared to minimize the tendency to overcontrol in pitch that bothers most

pilots in fixed-cockpit simulation. The stability and control characteristics

were accepted as typical for the aircraft category, except for the longitudinal

instability or "tuck" which was considered exaggerated. However, this charac-

teristic was demonstrated to be completely controllable. Many of the pilots

believed that the highest levels of simulated turbulence were within their

flight experiences, but that such encounters were very rare.

The most critical task posed for each pilot was introduced during his

third turbulence encounter. He was requested to descend 5,000 feet and

change heading simultaneously. Unknownto the pilot, his pitch trim compensa-

tor was rendered inoperative so that an unstable longitudinal trim change would

accompanyany acceleration past a Mach number of 0.84. With this task, five of

14 pilots experienced someform of control difficulty. Figures 7, 8, and 9, are examples of performances recorded in this task.

The performance illustrated in figure 7 is typical of that of most of the

pilots. With relatively low control forces, the pilot maintained a reasonably

steady rate of descent and good control of his speed. In comparison, the pilot

whose performance is illustrated in figure 8 demonstrated difficulties in his

control of the descending flight path. Although he did prevent _he airplane

from accelerating beyond a Machnumber of 0.84 and into the "tuck" region, his

attempts to stabilize at 33,000 feet resulted in large flight-path excursions.

Two momentarystalls were induced in attempts to arrest undesired rates of

descent. Note the control activity shown by figure 8 in comparison with that

shownby figure 7- In figure 9 is presented what might be considered an

"upset." An initial speed divergence was compounded by the "tuck," and recog-

nition of the seriousness of the situation apparently was delayed long enough

for the aircraft to accelerate into the region where elevator control was rela-

tively ineffective. Confidence in the validity of these performances was

heightened by the fact that no evidence of similar difficulties was noted during

the familiarization period, when each of the pilots was required to do a similar

task in the absence of simulated turbulence.

The upper portion of figure lO illustrates the performance, in the simu-

lator, of a research pilot who intentionally deprived himself of pitch-attitude

information and placed exaggerated emphasison control of airspeed. As shown

in figure 10, the pilot induced a flight-path oscillation with a period of

about 40 seconds. Several stalls occurred at the highest speeds as an effort

was being madeto reduce airspeed and rate of descent. This behavior may be

comparedwith that illustrated in the lowar portion of this figure, which is a

transcription of a portion of a record from a flight recorder of one of the

more celebrated flight incidents. It is interesting to note that the simulator

performance of figure 8 demonstrates very similar flight-path variations.

These similarities do not merit extensive and detailed interpretive efforts,

but they can support the contention that pilot techniques and cockpit environ-

ment are as significant to the problem of flying jet transport airplanes in

turbulence as are the mechanics of large-scale turbulence or the aerodynamic

characteristics of the aircraft.

CONCLUDING REMARKS

The experiences with the simulation, together with opinions offered by the

visiting airline personnel, lead to the primary recommendations resulting from

this program; that is 3 that the capabilities of training simulation be extended

to include the most significant cockpit environmental effects and the aircraft

response induced by heavy turbulence. In azldition, the training simulator

should have the capability of accurately representing the stability and control

characteristics of the airplane at and beyond the normal operating boundaries.

The demonstrations that the cockpit environment in heavy turbulence can

seriously degrade the capabilities of pilots in tasks demanding integration of

information from a number of instruments lead to these concluding

recommendations:

1. In heavy turbulence, the pilot should make every effort to minimize

deliberate flight-path changes so as to keep his task as simple as possible.

2. The pilot should avoid imposing large angular rates on the aircraft;

in other words, he should try to limit his job to that of a low-gain attitude

stabilizer.

3. Consideration should be given to modifying overspeed warning systems

to include rate of speed buildup. This modification could be effected by

including pitch-attitude information in the warning system.

4. Consideration should be given to the possibility of isolating the pilot

from the most distracting vibration frequencies through modification of the

seating and restraint systems.

5. Increased attention should be directed toward attitude presentations

that can be interpreted with the ease with which the view of the outside world

is used in VFRflight.

Figure 1 A-33492

SIMULATOR COCKPIT

Figure 2 A-33497

COMPARISON OF FLIGHT-MEASURED AND COMPUTED GUST-INDUCED ACCELERATIONS FLIGHT I C,G.

"E 0 COCKPIT i o o w ..J ILl C.G.

COCKPIT I I I I I I I I I I I 0 2 4 6 8 I0 12 14 16 18 20 TIME, sec Figure 3 COMPUTED RESPONSE TO VERTICAL DRAFTS Figure 4 COMPUTED RESPONSE TO THUNDERSTORM TURBULENCE 2O0 GUST VELOCITY, fps COLUMN p _" " FORCE, Ib -200

60!

ACCELERATION, PUSHI g units 60 LI 2 I ALTITUDE, ft :34000 36000 _ 0 MACHNUMBER 32000 .9 .8 .7 Figure 5 EFFECT OF VIBRATION FREQUENCY ON ACCELERATION AMPLIFICATION AT PILOT'S HEAD m tO N 4 -- 707 CUSHION ---- NO CUSHION LI.I _,3 LI.I - BELT__ _ LOOSE

ff

d 2

n- I i,i a JET TRANSPORTS' PREDOMINANT D ---_-////////,_ FUSELAGE BENDING _J I I I I I i I Q.

I 2 3 4 5 6 7 :E 0 <[ FREQUENCY, cps Figure 6 GOOD FLIGHT-PATH CONTROL DURING TURNING DESCENT IN SIMULATED TURBULENCE GUST VELOCITY, fps FORCE,Ib p -200 COLUMN 601 ACCELERATION, PUSHI g units 60 J I ALTITUDE, ft 55000 37000 33000 .9 .8 MACH NUMBER .7 0 I0 20 30 40 Figure 7 MARGINAL FLIGHT-PATH CONTROL DURING TURNING DESCENT IN SIMULATED TURBULENCE GUST VELOCITY, fps FORCE, Ib P -200- COLUMN 6U_LI PUSHI 60 J ACCELERATION, 2 g units I 37000 ALTITUDE, ft 35000 33000 .9 MACH NUMBER .8 .7 I I I I I I 0 I0 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 I00 I10 120 TIME, sec Figure 8 FLIGHT-PATH DIVERGENCE DURING TURNING DESCENT IN SIMULATED TURBULENCE 2OO GUST VELOCITY, fps 60- -200 PULL COLUMN FORCE, Ib O- PUSH 6O ACCELERATION, g units ALTITUDE, ft 35000 37000_ 35000 .9 .;i MACH NUMBER .8 _ iN .7 I_-- -T---- + I I I I 0 I0 20 30 40 50 60 TIME, sec Figure 9 FLIGHT-PATH OSCILLATIONS IN TURBULANCE IN THE SIMULATOR AND IN FLIGHT 3 Sl _PiTC_H+ i_I6iCATOR ACCELERATION, I g units 21 INOPERATIVE i i i i FT ALTITUDE, ft 37000 _ -I 32000 320 IAS, knots ACCELERATION, I g units 4 I000 -] -I ALTITUDE, ft

J

36000 300 IAS, knots _ + . .

I I I I I I I I I 0 I0 20 50 40 50 60 70 80 TIME, sec Figure lO 16. A SIMULATOR STUDY OF TAKE-0FF CHARACTERISTICS OF PROPOSED SUPERSONIC TRANSPORTS By Charles T. Jackson, Jr., and C. Thomas Snyder NASA Ames Research Center SUMMARY Fixed-cockpit piloted simulator studies of delta-planformand variable- wing-sweep supersonic transport configurations are being conducted at the Ames Research Center to investigate the handling qualities and certification require- ments related to the take-off maneuver.

Validation of the simulation was achieved by duplicating the take-off cer- tification program of a subsonic jet transport. Evaluation of the simulator was made by NASA pilots as well as company and FAApilots involved in the actual certification flights of the airplane. The present paper is limited to a dis- cussion of normal take-off, minimum control speed (ground), rotation character- istics_ and initial climbout.

Comparisons of the take-off characteristics are made between the supersonic transport and the current class of subsonic jet transports.

Results indicate that minimum control speed (ground) characteristics are a function of thrust-weight ratio, the time provided for SST rotation should be at least as long as that for the subsonic jet transports, abused take-offs are more likely to result in tail scrapes, and climbout below the minimum drag speed requires that the pilot carefully monitor airspeed.

INTRODUCTION In the interest of providing technical assistance for the National Supersonic Transport Program, fixed-cockpit simulator studies of delta-planform and variable-sweep-wing supersonic transports (SST) are being conducted at the Ames Research Center to investigate flying qualities and airworthiness criteria.

The first of these simulations is devoted to the study of take-off char- acteristics. At present only preliminary studies have been made; however_ cer- tain conclusions can be drawn at this time which apply to the SST program in general. This paper summarizes a few of the more interesting observations based on the delta SST studies.

SYMBOLS thrust-weight ratio lift-off speed, knots VL0 minimum control speed (ground), knots VMC G rotation speed, knots V R take-off safety speed, knots V2 wing loading, pounds per square foot

w/s

CL angle of attack, degrees climb angle, degrees pitch attitude, degrees A.N.D.

airplane nose down A.N.U.

airplane nose up AIRPLANES SIMULATED The basic characteristics of the two SST's under study as well as those of a reference subsonic transport used for simulator validation are given in table I. One SST has a variable-sweep wing with a horizontal tail} the other has a tailless delta planformwith a low wing loading.

Both SST's are larger than the subsonic jet transport and have greater maximum take-off gross weights. These characteristicsj in combination with a high-fineness-ratio fuselage 3 contribute to pitch and yaw inertias several times greater than those of the subsonic Jet. The low-aspect-ratio delta SST has a roll inertia less than that of the subsonic jet, and the variable-sweep SST has a roll inertia greater than that of the subsonic jet while in the high-aspect-ratio take-off configuration. Of particular interest in take-off are the larger thrust-weight ratios of the SST.

The center-of-gravity location of the SST permits only small static mar- gins because of supersonic cruise considerations that require low trim drag.

Both SST's are "geometry-limited" in that the maximum lift coefficient cannot be attained with the main wheels on the runway.

The SST values simulated are not necessarily representative of a final SST design.

SIMULATOR DESCRIPTION ANDFIDELITY

Figure 1 illustrates the basic arrangement of the simulator. The pilot is

seated in a fixed transport cockpit equipped to pick off electrical signals

proportional to his control movements. These signals, along with the geometric

and aerodynamic characteristics of the airplane, are processed by an analog

computer to produce voltages which represent airplane motion and to drive the

cockpit instruments, visual-system camera, and data recorders. Permanent

records of the visual scene as seen by the pilot are recorded on videotape.

The pilot's view from the cockpit is shown in figure 2. Instrumentation

includes angle-of-attack, sideslip, control-force_ sensitive airspeed, and tail-

clearance indicators. The five-digit counter is used for data correlation.

Fidelity of the simulator was checked with duplication of a large portion

of the take-off certification program of a subsonic jet transport by NASA

pilots as well as companyand FAApilots who were involved in the actual cer-

tification of the airplane.

Typical certification maneuvers flown during the investigation included

normal four-engine take-offs

three-engine take-offs

"mistri_' take-offs

accelerate-stops (rejected take-offs)

minimumunstick speed determination, VMU

minimumcontrol speed tests

Each maneuver involved realistic piloting techniques in order to achieve satis-

factory assessment of the task involved. Most maneuvers were accomplished with

an acceptable level of performance when comparedwith the maneuversof the sub-

sonic jet; increased margins of maneuvering capability 3 as well as certain per-

formance parameters 3 were evident. A few of the tasks involved, however, uncov-

ered characteristics which may indicate a need for changes in piloting technique

and training. The full implication of these characteristics warrants further

study. The present paper is limited to a discussion of normal take-off, mimimum

control speed (ground), rotation characteristics, and initial climbout.

DISCUSSION

Normal Take-0ff

Two types of normal rake-offs were conducted: One involved maximum avail-

able thrust and the other involved less than maximum thrust as maybe required

in order to minimize airport and/or communitynoise. Immediately obvious to

the pilot is the excellent performance of the SSTin comparison with the sub-

sonic jet, as indicated by the higher acceleration on the ground run_ shorter

time to accelerate through 100 knots_ shorter distance to lift-off, and larger

available climb gradient. Main gear lift-off was not obvious from the visual

scene alone due, in part, to the height of the cockpit in the rotated attitude.

Ground handling characteristics on the take-off run appeared to be good.

Ground MinimumControl Speed

The ground minimumcontrol speed was determined by plotting the results of

a number of take-off ground runs, each involving an outboard engine failure.

The pilot applied full corrective rudder upon recognition of the engine failure.

_ _11_nr results are shownin figure 3 where the maximum unavoidable

deviation from runway centerline is plotted against the corresponding airspeed

at which the engine was failed, both with and without rudder-pedal-actuated

nose wheel steering. For the reduced T_ directly comparable to that of

subsonic jet transports, the minimumcontrol speed is rather sharply defined_

in that a small decrease in the speed at which the engine failed causes a

significant increase in deviation from runway centerline. By comparison, the

curve obtained by using "normal" SST T_ indicates comparable controlla-

bility at lower airspeeds.

During certification of the subsonic jets, the speed at which an outboard

engine could be failed and at which the maximum lateral deviation from runway

centerline not exceed 15 feet was taken as VMC G. Figure 3 showslittle varia-

tion in VMC G (based on a 15-foot deviation) with T_ since the curves coin-

cide. But if, for example, a 40-foot deviation could be tolerated_ a signifi-

cant reduction in VMC G would be realized.

The benefits due to rudder-pedal-actuated nose wheel steering are indicated

by the curve labeled "nose wheel steering operatives" which showsthat devia-

tions from runway centerline maybe held to less than i0 feet with outboard

engine failures at speeds as low as 40 knots. This curve applies only for dry

runway tire friction coefficients.

Rotation Characteristics

The speed VR at which take-off rotation is initiated was varied over a

wide range during the simulator tests. Initially a 17-knot speed spread was

used between the rotation input and the target lift-off speed, a value compa-

rable with the i0- to 15-knot spread used with subsonic jets. Because of the

higher longitudinal acceleration of the SST, a rapid rotation was required to

reach the proper lift-off attitude before overshooting the designated lift-off

speed. As might be expected, this_ aided by the low static stability of the

airplane_ resulted in a tendency to either overrotate or "hunt" for the desired

attitude. As tests progressed the rotation speed was gradually reduced until

rotation time of 3_ to 4 seconds was used. (Values for the

a more satisfactory I subsonic jet averaged about 5_ seconds.) However, this slower rotation rate required that rotation be initiated 20 to 30 knots before lift-off.

Figure 4 shows a comparison between a time history for the subsonic jet simulation and one for the delta SST. Note the higher ground run acceleration, higher pitch attitude after lift-off, and shorter distance to a 35-foot altitude for the SST. Also note the longer duration elevator input for rotation, fol- lowed by an abrupt forward control column motion to arrest the rotation rate.

The 4-second rotation resulted in satisfactory and reasonably accurate rota- tions and more consistent take-off performance. Lift-off occurred 24 knots after rotation was started.

Frequent tail scraping occurred during initial familiarization tests with the SST simulation. In part, this resulted from the low margin of pitch atti- tude between normal lift-off and tail scrape, a margin which is less than that for the subsonic jet. Slower rotations and increased simulator experience minimized the tendency to strike the tail.

Figure 5 shows the effect of rotation attitude on longitudinal acceleration as determined from simulator take-offs. While the SST has more acceleration than the subsonic jet, its remaining acceleration after rotation drops off faster with pitch attitude. While the geometry limitation of the tail striking the runway prevents excessive attitudes before lift-off, nothing mechanically prevents the pilot from attaining excessive pitch attitude, with large attendant loss in acceleration, immediately after lift-off. Poor readability of the atti- tude indicator also contributed to difficulty in performing accurate rotation.

Initial Climbout Characteristics Normal take-offs of the delta SST followed by climbout at a four-engine V 2 speed of 180 knots were conducted by a number of different pilots. The flight path and airspeed were generally controlled in a satisfactory manner.

Some pilots reported increased difficulty inmaintaining the desired airspeed, while others reported no difficulty but admitted that increased attention was devoted to speed control. In figure 6 the characteristics are presented which contribute to this situation and which may suggest changes in the use of instru- ment information. Plotted against speed are climb angle, angle of attack, and pitch attitude for the subsonic Jet transport, the variable-sweep SST, the delta SST, and, for comparative purposes, the F5D, a small delta-wing airplane.

With the subsonic jet and the variable-sweep SST, the result of the pilot's holding a discrete pitch attitude is the attainment of a unique airspeed.

However, for the delta SST, pitch attitude remains constant over a wide range of airspeeds, and a single attitude can satisfy several combinations of and 7 and, therefore, will not guarantee a single speed. This suggests that pitch attitude is an insensitive indication of speed for the delta SST during initial climb. The curves for the F5D show a similar slope trend as those for the delta SST. A slight change in piloting technique with more attention given to airspeed may be all that is required. Additional benefits are indicated, however, by supplying the pilot with suitably processed angle-of-attack infor- mation, which, in turn, will define airspeed. Should a more sophisticated approach be desired it is possible to reshape the airplane's climb-angle and pltch-attitude curves through operation of a speed-controlled throttle, sacri- ficing excess gradient for speed stability. Alteration of obstacle clearance and noise abatement constraints which force initial climbout below the minimum drag speed would permit immediate acceleration to speeds where the airplane is "speed-stable" and higher aerodynamic efficiencies could be attained. Regard- less of the alternative chosen the attitude indicator still serves as a sensi- tive indicator of rate-of-speed change, and pilots familiar with backside oper- ation had no difficulty during climbout.

CONCLUSIONS The following conclusions are based on simulator studies of the delta- planformSST: 1. The SST displays good performance on normal take-off.

2. Ground minimum control speed characteristics are influenced by higher thrust-weight ratios.

3- The time provided for the rotation maneuver should be at least as long as that for the subsonic Jet transports.

4. The lift-off attitude tolerance is less than that of the subsonic jet.

5. Improved readability of attitude indicators may result in improved rotation accuracy.

6. The abused take-off results indicate a higher probability of tail scrapes with abrupt rotations than with the subsonic Jets.

7. There is an increased dependence on airspeed information during initial climbout of the delta SST.

TAHLE I

BASIC CHARACTERISTICS OF SIMULATED AIRCRAFT SUBSONIC TRANSPORT mox T/W WING LOG W/S, Ib/ftz ROLL INERTIA, 7 x I06 PITCH INERTIA, 22 x I06 slug - f12 PILOT'S VIEW FROM SIMULATOR COCKPIT FIXED -COCKPIT TRANSPORT SIMULATOR VISUAL SCENE IMAGE GENERATOR AERODYNAMIC AND GEOMETRIC CHARACTERISTICS OF SIMULATED

-L SIMULATOR CAB

AIRPI ANF ARF STORED IN COMPUTER

A-32732-5 1

Figure 1

Figure 2

EFFECT OF T/W AND RUDDER PEDAL STEERING ON GROUND MINIMUM CONTROL SPEED NOSE WHEEL STEERING INOPERATIVE

,2o NORm, T,W_ IRE'_UCEO

..-- _ l T/W • ///_///_ -- DATA POINTS ARE FROM _/_ _ k'/ v/× - PILOTEO RUNS _ / ___, so _ / ! ANALOG COMPUTERJ_//_ |fVMc G __a: NOSE WHEEL 3E STEERINGOPERATIVE_ "Tr"r2_7._f t ,o ° ,°,-_---_-_ , Q 0 40 80 120 160 AIRSPEEDAT ENGINEFAILURE, knots Figure 3 REPRESENTATIVE TAKE-OFF TIME HISTORIES DELTA SST SUBSONIC JET TRANSPORT (STATIC T/W =0.18) (STATIC T/W= 0.44) 200 r I ' EQUIVALENT _- _'=VLo" 165 kts AIRSPEED, // VLO =157 kts _- IOOIJ II II_VR=IItIktS I knots -I>_,, , [, L,, , i i I i t J I I ii J I ° II PITCH

ATTITUDE, f i '

deg I i I i I i I I i ELEVATOR -I0 >.N.U.t _ ,, Ij_ DEFLECTION, 0 I I I I I I I ' I-_1 I 1 t I L I I I I I deg IO :A.N.D._' I' la-_;L#T_OFF 8O

.OTAT,ON ,NPOT_

ALTITUDE, ft40 - ROTATION I ,_ INPUT_I I LIFT-OFF_ 35, ft-_jl/1 I 35 ft I I I I I i I ,r ' i _,,,'_.]jI 0 , I , !,V,'--_-_ If',

F

DISTANCE 8000 I FROM BRAKE RELEASE, ft 4000 4500 ft _ I I I J 0 I0 20 30 0 I0 20 :3(3 40 50 60 TIME FROM BRAKE RELEASE, sec Figure 4 ACCELERATrON REMAINING AFTER TAKE-OFF ROTATION TAKE-OFF T/W (4 ENGINES) FOR DELTA SST=0.35 (NOISE ABATEMENT) SUBSONIC JET=0.21 4 /-GEOMETRY UMIT (BOTH AIRPLANES) :3 LONGITUDINAL DELTA S!__I _ ACCELERATION, knofs/sec 2 m 4 ENGINES --- :5 ENGINES I _SU:SOIIC JET 0 I I I I I 8 I0 12 14 16 PITCN ATTITUDE AT LIFT-OFF, deg Figure 5 PITCH ATTITUDE DURING CLIMBOUT STEADY STATE 8=a+¥ a,8, ,_ AND 7", deg T/W: 0.21 I i I ._ I i I i -'----.4..

AND 7, deg MODIFIED DELTA F5D T/W=O,31 T/W=O.39 I I I I 0__ I I I

, IO0 150 200 250

25O IOO 150 200 V, kts V, kts Figure 6 i_7

17. INTRODUCTION TO SST-ATC STUDY PROGRAM

By Thomas A. Toll

NASALangley Research Center

The two papers to follow present results from a program being carried out

as a joint effort by the NASA Langley Research Center and the FAANational

Aviation Facilities Experimental Center (NAFEC)at Atlantic City 3 NewJersey.

The purpose of this brief introduction is to define the objectives of the pro-

gram and to describe the manner in which it is being pursued.

The study is directed toward problems anticipated with the introduction of

the supersonic transport into the air-traffic-control system. The primary

objectives are:

(1) The determination of the effects of the SST (supersonic transport) on

requirements of the ATC(air traffic control) system

(2) The determination of the effects of the ATC system on requirements for

the SSTdesign and for its equipment

Basically, the program is a simulation effort involving equipment both at

Langley and at the NAFEC facility. A block diagram illustrating the manner in

which the equipment of the two agencies has been integrated to carry out the

program is shown in figure 1. The blocks on the left represent NASA equipment

at the Langley Research Center, Hampton,Va., and those on the right indicate

the FAA equipment at Atlantic City. The Langley equipment includes a cockpit, or flight compartmentthat is generally representative of transport equipment,

and an analog computer for solving the six-degree-of-freedom motion equations

for an aircraft having the characteristics of the SSTdesign under study.

The Langley cockpit has been linked

SST-ATC SIMULATION METHOD ,,

through leased telephone lines to the

ATC simulator at Atlantic City. The tele-

SST l POSiTiON 1 AIR- SIMULATOR 1 OATA "ITRAFFIC-_ONTRO,=I

phone lines transmit SSTposition data to

FLIGHT | VOICE I FACILITY I COMPARTMENT

NAFEC and permit two-way voice communica-

i OMMUN,CAT,ON I S,MULATOR l

tion. Traffic simulation, consisting of a

variety of airplane types, also is provided

TI ]1

by NAFEC.

ANALOG- COMPUTER SAMPLE

The simulation program is expected

FACILITY AIR-TRAFFIC ] SIMULATION

eventually to cover many aspects of the

problem, including variations in design

NASA FAA

parameters and operating procedures for the

LANGLEY RESEARCH CENTER NATIONAL AVIATION FACILITIES EXPERIMENTAL CENTER

SST, as well as planned improvements in the

ATC system. The results reported in the

Figure i

following two papers have been derived only

from the early stages of the program so far

completed. Responsibility for interpreta-

tion of the results of the program is

divided between the two agencies involved_ with the FAAhaving responsibility for effects of the SST on the ATC system_ and NASA Langley having responsibil- ity for effects of the ATC system on SST design and operations.

18. EFFECTS OF THESUPERSONIC TRANSPORT ONTHE

AIR TRAFFICCONTROL SYSTEM

By Joseph P. 0'Brien and Andrew L. Sluka

Federal Aviation Agency

SUMMARY

The current joint NASA-FAA simulation program is designed to study prob-

lems anticipated in the integration of the supersonic transport (SST) into the

present and future Air Traffic Control (ATC) System. The initial tests con-

ducted consisted of simulated departure and arrival operations in the NewYork

terminal area under high-density traffic-flow conditions with as manyas six SST

operations per hour. Several types of radar and altitude-separation standards

and handling concepts were investigated with the present ATCSystem. Results

have shownthat for the ATCSystem, in operations in which the SSTwas given

priority, subsonic traffic incurred excessive radar vectors and excessive

holding and ground delays. Further_ airport acceptance rates were reduced sub-

stantially when the high separation standards and priority conditions were

applied. Present voice communications procedures appear to be adequate for SST

operations. Future studies will include other potential designs for the SST,

and updating of the ATCsystem concepts to those envisioned for the time period

1970-1975.

INTRODUCTION

In order to study problems anticipated in connection with the introduction

of the supersonic transport (SST) into the air traffic control (ATC) system,

the Federal Aviation Agency (FAA) and the National Aeronautics and Space

Administration (NASA) established a joint simulation program. The FAAprogram

is a three-phase program to develop new air traffic control procedures, tech-

niques, and concepts for handling (i) current and future supersonic military

aircraft, (2) the interim (Concorde) SST, and (3) the Mach 3 SST. (See fig. i.)

The program calls for a series of simulation studies which began in May 1963

and will continue through 1966.

The objective of the dynamic simulation studies conducted was the investi-

gation of problems anticipated in connection with the integration of the super-

sonic transport into the present air traffic control system. To aid in studying

the problems, a supersonic transport flight simulator located at NASA Langley

Research Center, Hampton, Va., and the ATCSimulator located at the FAANational

Aviation Facilities Experimental Center (NAFEC),Atlantic City, N.J., were uti-

lized. The ATCSimulator consists of 60 simplified pilot control consoles, each

capable of simulating aircraft performance that duplicates performance of fixed-

wing and supersonic aircraft. Each console generates primary and secondary

i6i radar returns which can be displayed on any of the current airport surveillance, long range, and precision approach radars. It is possible to duplicate authen- tically a system consisting of 1 to 4 radars, 20 control displays, and 40 con- trol positions. By means of telephone land_lines connecting these facilities, projected designs of the supersonic transport and various air traffic control concepts are being tested in a real-time air traffic control environment.

The objectives of the initial phase of the program are to study the super- sonic transport in the current air traffic control system to: (i) Determine the effects of the ATC system on SST design and equipment requirements (2) Determine the effects of the SST on ATC system requirements (3) Provide a comparison base for further tests and for possible improve- ments to the SST and the ATC system In this paper, results of studies of simulated departure and arrival operations of a variable-sweep SST configuration (NASA SCAT 16) from and to the John F. Kennedy International Airport are presented.

AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITIES The real-time simulated ATC environment is created by means of representa- tive air traffic control facilities. The facilities simulated consisted of portions of the New York, Cleveland, and Boston Air Route Traffic Control Centers, the New York Oceanic Control Sector, and the John F. Kennedy Approach Control and Tower complex. Figure 2 depicts the layout of the Air Traffic Control Facilities as used in these studies. These facilities were operated by 30 experienced air traffic controllers. The controllers were provided with modern TV type bright radar displays with video maps showing navigation aids, route structures, and holding pattern areas - as well as the usual flight prog- ress strips, interphone, and radio communication equipment.

TEST DESIGN Tests for the initial phase of the program were designed to study SST oceanic flights which arrived at and departed from John F. Kennedy International Airport. These flights traversed portions of the New York and Boston Air Route Traffic Control Centers and New York Oceanic Control Areas. Routes used by the supersonic transport are shown in figure 3. A mixed traffic sample representing conditions of hlgh-density traffic flow (148 per hour) including 6 supersonic transports, one of which is the NASA supersonic flight simulator, was used.

All traffic was under positive control of the respective facilities.

EXPERIMENTAL CONCEPTS

Tests were madein real time as follows:

(i) Concept I - High priority for supersonic transports (that is, clear

track, no restrictions, delays, or holding)

(2) Concept II - No priority for the supersonic transport (current ATC

system)

Concept I

Concept I was the investigation of experimental procedures for handling

supersonic transports on a priority basis. Basic changes in handling were in

radar and altitude-separation standards and the priority of sequencing with

respect to other aircraft. Present-day standards (fig. 4) are 1,000 feet

vertical or 3/5 nautical miles (N.Mi.) radar separation below flight level 290

(FL 290). Above FL 2903 aircraft are provided 2,000 feet vertical separation

(because of altimeter error) or 3/5 N.Mi. radar separation. Rules for applying

radar separation are as follows: 3 N.Mi. radar separation if aircraft are less

than 40 N.Mi. from the radar antenna site_ if more than 40 N.Mi., 5 N.Mi. radar

separation.

Two experimental standards tested (fig. 5) were 1,000 feet vertical or

5/10 N.Mi. radar separation to FL 230. FromFL 240 to FL 5403 2,000 feet ver-

tical or 5 N.Mi. radar separation and also 3,000 feet vertical or lO N.Mi.

radar separation were tested. At FL 550 and above, 5,000 feet vertical or

i0 N.MI. radar separation was tested.

For all ATCtests, a standard 1-mlnute separation standard for arrivals

and departures was employed because of vortices expected with the SST. The

1-minute separation was also applied to cross runway operations, until such

time as additional study may indicate a more reasonable standard.

It was assumedunder Concept I that the supersonic transports were parked

in a position for easy access to the runway and after "engine start" could taxi

unrestricted to a runway for an immediate take-off, and after landing could

proceed without delay to a parking area.

During the sim_ation of this concept, the following SSTground handling

procedures were used:

(i) Flight plans were filed i hour prior to estimated time of departure

(m_).

(2) SST requested ATCclearance 15 minutes prior to ETD.

(3) ATCclearances were delivered no later than 5 minutes prior to the

proposed take-off time.

(4) There was no ground delay in taxiing and no departures were released or arrivals sequenced l minute prior to the arrival of the SST. Departures were restricted when an SST was 8 N.Mi. out on final approach.

Arrival and departure priorities and handling under this concept were: (1) No en route or outer fix holding (2) Assured landings and programed departures (3) No altitude restrictions in climb or descent (4) Minimum radar vectoring unless to the advantage of the SST (5) No ground delays Concept II Normal ramp parking was assumed and taxiing to the active runway was accomplished by using the same taxiway as other aircraft. All procedures and separation standards used were as outlined in the Manual of Air Traffic Control Procedures (AT P 7110.1A) with the following exceptions: (i) The 1-minute standard separation for supersonic transports for vortex dissipation was used (2) The supersonic transports had to await their turn for take-off and abide by local departure restrictions but were not held longer than i0 minutes when at the runway and ready for departure (3) Arrival delays for supersonic transports did not exceed 30 minutes.

A 300-nautical-mile area was found to be adequate for the oceanic runs with SST arrivals entering the problem at cruise altitudes of 603000 to 7%000 feet and at Mach 3.

It was assumed that adequate radar and communications existed throughout the area_ that VORTAC facilities provided good navigational capability at all altltudes, that dual or parallel instrument landing system (ILS) approaches were authorized to permit simultaneous landings, and that an all-weather landing system existed_ the latter capability particularly for the later program phases.

GENERAL PROCEDURES Generally, departures operating under Concept I or Concept II were radar vectored to a radial of a departure route navigational aid and climbed to cruising altitude as soon as possible or as dictated by a programed profile.

Figure 6 depicts a typical supersonic transport departure profile.

Generally, as depicted in figure 7, an inbound SST contacted the appro- priate center sector, was identified and was decelerated to 340 knots indicated airspeed (KIAS). Then, subject to departing supersonic transports, descent was made to flight level 500 where the aircraft was decelerated to Mach 0.9 and usually occurred between Nantucket and Hampton. The supersonic transport was cleared to Deer Park (DPK) at altitudes from 15,000 to 25,000 feet. At or approaching Deer Park, a handoff was made to John F. Kennedy (JFK) Approach Control for a radar vector to the instrument landing system.

For obtaining air traffic control results, measurements were made of the following: (i) Airport movements per hour (2) Conmmnications (a) Number of contacts (b) Duration (3) Subsonic aircraft delays (a) Departures, ground (b) Arrivals, holding (4) Supersonic aircraft delays (a) Departures, ground (b) Arrivals, holding (5) Total SST time in system Concept II Controllers, with at least 8 years of ATC field experience, manned the control sectors and positions of operation. A sufficient number of exploratory runs with different teams of controllers were used to become familiar with the procedures to be used.

AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL RESULTS From the air traffic control measurements (figs. 8 and 9) and controllers' observations, the following results were obtained: (i) When supersonic transports were given priority (Concept I), subsonic traffic incurred excessive radar vectors and excessive holding and ground delays. Subsonic delays were 13 percent higher in priority system Concept I than in the current system Concept If.

(2) Delays incurred by supersonic transports in the current system Concept II resulted in increasing SST time in the system of approximately 7 per- cent over that incurred in priority system Concept I. Some of this increase can also be attributed to the wide range of fluctuations in adherence to climb and descent profiles by SST flight crews.

(3) Airport operations per hour were reduced in the priority system Concept I. Under this concept with a theoretical possibility of 60 operations and an average current system of 55 operations per hour, the operations rate ranged from a low of 48 operations to a high of 50 operations per hour. Under the current system Concept II and the same theoretical and average figures of 60 and 55 per hour, the operation rate ranged from a low of 53 to a high of 54 operations per hour.

(4) There was no appreciable difference in the number of communication contacts with supersonic transports although duration of contacts was longer under both concepts. This condition may be attributed to controller requests _n _ pilots for additional information. Voice communications appear to be adequate for SST operation.

(5) Increased airspace use and difficulty in predicting proper lateral spacing is encountered when a lead turn is not used by the supersonic trans- ports at supersonic speeds. This condition may result in a possible increase in lateral-separation standards_ an increased dependence on altitude separa- tion_ and possible changes in navigational procedures.

(6) More expeditious ATC handling of supersonic transports and subsonic traffic is possible through segregated approach and departure routes. Previous NAFEC simulation studies indicate that the combined use of an off-course com- puter and pictorial navigation display (PD) would provide a significant opera- tional advantage to supersonic transports.

(7) Controller subjective opinion was that radar and altitude-separation standards in Concept I were too high and could be reduced.

PLANNED AREAS OF INVESTIGATION There is a need for much study and research to introduce the SST into the Air Traffic Control System. The Jet Operational Requirements Panel (JORP) com- mittee work which preceded the introduction of the subsonic jets had an immeas- urable effect on the fairly smooth introduction of these aircraft. Similar early action With regard to the SST is needed to facilitate their introduction into the ATC system.

Transcontinental and overocean flights operating in the current ATC system are planned to investigate the following operational parameters: (i) SST holding and entry into holding patterns (2) Response time for radar vectors at various speeds (3) ILS turn-on distances

(4) Departure performance

Ib I Straight out or turns for noise abatement

Altitude restrictions or tunneling

(5) Pictorial displays

Ib I DiscreteRoute flexibilltyr°Utes for arrivals and departures

(6) Airspace blocks, military missions, and air refueling

Succeeding test series will examine the SSTin a 1970 ATCsystem having

radar and flight plan tracking, alphanumerics on the controllers display, partial sequencing, and computer-assisted final approach spacing.

In the 1975 ATCsystem series, in addition to the 1970 system capabilities,

full departure and arrival sequencing, automatic transfer of control data

between ATCfacilities, conflict prediction, and other sophistications will be

examined.

CONCLUSIONS

As a result of preliminary tests of the supersonic transport in the

present-day air traffic control (ATC) system, the following conclusions may

be made:

1. Limited preferential treatment can be provided the supersonic transport

(SST) without major adverse effects on the current ATCSystem.

2. More expeditious ATChandling for the SSTis possible by provisions of

segregated approach and departure routes through use of a pictorial navigation

display.

ATC $LIpERSONIC hARcRAFJ PROGRAI_ "Ft_LE'e 2 Ftgu.re 1 _Y' : !_'-_ _ %, J Figure _68 EXPERIMENTAL SEPARATION STANDARDS PRESENT-DAY SEPARATION STANDARDS FL 800 STANDARD I STANDARD H FL 800 I'_'}"70 N ' M L_w--" T L_I I I l _"_3-5 N Mi _"_ 5,000 FT I I 2poo FT FL 290 FL 550 FL540 2000 FT I I 3,0 ii FT'IO N MLII • _, I I I I Ipo0 FT _5 N ML _ :L 240 _,• __ _L 230 J I _GRD. GRD Figure 5 Figure 4 SST DEPARTURE PROFILE N.Y OCEANIC CONTROL JFK CONTROL NY ARTCC CONTROL M = (2.9 l,(:2 ZO i i 7O 6O 5O ALTITUDE, 40

FT /

2O I 0 5O I00 150 200 250 NAUTICAL MILES Figure 6 ATC RESULTS AVERAGE DELAY PER AIRCRAFT SST ARRIVAL PROFILE _PRIORITY _NONPRIORITY JFK CO.TRO, N_ARTOD _NTROLN__EANIC CONTROL SUBSONIC SUPERSONIC_ DELAY, DELAY, MIN MIN 1.6 7 Z L4 1.2 1.02 I.O A,T,T,,OF.._,,L_ k i ,.. ' ./ .8

PT ' ! .o/%,' "t i ,/

.6 l ,'/I ) i)_-Mr_ _ - 20 .... ........ _,, .4 .2 _f_p_ "bt2"1_J BEA I I I i I O_ 50 I00 150 200 250 300 O DEPARTURES ARRIVALS NAUTICAL MILES DEPARTURES ARRIVALS Figure 8 Figure 7 AIRCRAFT OPERATIONS PER HOUR PRIORITY NONPRIORITY AVERAGE 55 55 TODAY TODAY AVERAGE _'_53 TO 54 SST J SST TO 50 48 ,q N ¢1 Figure 9 17o 19. EFFECTS OF TEE AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL SYSTEM ON THE SUPERSONIC TRANSPORT By Norman S. Silsby, Milton D. McLaughlin, and Michael C. Fischer NASA Langley Research Center SUMMARY A study of the problems anticipated with the introduction of the super- sonic transport into the air traffic control system indicated that supersonic transport design allowances for time and fuel for maneuvering during climbouts may not be sufficient_ that there is a greater communications-navigation work- load for the supersonic transport than for the subsonic jet transport during descent, and that use of a flight director to command pitch control guidance for the pilot would be helpful.

INTRODUCTION In order to study the problems anticipated with the introduction of the supersonic transport (SST) into the air traffic control (ATC) system, the National Aeronautics and Space Administration and the Federal Aviation Agency have initiated a cooperative research program.

The objectives of the program are: (1) to determine the effects of the air traffic control system on the design and equipment requirements for the supersonic transport, and (2) to determine the effects of the supersonic trans- port on the requirements for the air traffic control system.

EQUIPMENT AND INSTRUMENTATION The physical layout of the simulation equipment is shown by the block diagram in figure 1. The blocks on the left represent the equipment at NASA Langley Research Center and those on the right represent the FAAequipment at the National Aviation Facilities Experimental Center (NAFEC)_ Atlantic City, N.J. The block at the upper left depicts the flight compartment of the SST sim- ulator which is similar to that for a current four-place subsonic jet transport aircraft as shown in the photograph in figure 2. The flight panel instrumenta- tion is similar to present-day displays, but with the ranges modified to cover the higher altitude and Mach number M of supersonic transport operations. The block at the lower left (fig. l) shows the analog computers which are used to solve the six-degree-of-freedom equations of motion for an aircraft having the characteristics of the SST design under study. A photograph of the analog com- puter is shown in figure 3. The block on the upper right (fig. l) depicts the ATC facility simulator which is manned by about 30 experienced traffic control- lers, as shown in the photograph in figure 4. The block at the lower right (fig. i) depicts the air traffic sample which is made up of a mixture of super- sonic transports and piston- and turbine-powered subsonic transports. This traffic sample is created by means of the radar target generators which are shown in figure 5. The purpose of the supersonic transport simulator at Langley Research Center was to provide a realistic cockpit environment for experienced airline crews and utilizing real controls and instrument displays.

This simulator permitted studies of the effects of ATC on fuel and time, crew workload, and instrumentation requirements.

TEST CONDITIONS _ND _URATION_'_ T., ^m T_ With regard to general conditions for the tests, the simulation was con- ducted in real time and utilized instrument flight rules for both departures and arrivals and for both oceanic and domestic (transcontinental) operations during present-day peak-traffic conditions in the New York area. Two aircraft configurations were simulated: configuration A used a variable-sweep wing with an afterburning turbojet engine, and configuration B utilized a fixed delta wing with a duct-heating turbofan engine.

Pertinent general characteristics, as well as longitudinal control charac- teristics, are given in table I for the two configurations. In tests conducted to date, there have been no significant differences in the results due to dif- ferences in performances of the two configurations.

CLIMB ANDDESCENTPROFILES The ascent and descent profiles utilized in the tests, together with some operational limitations are shown in figures 6 and 7 for configurations A and B, respectively. The engine limitation and structural limitation define a corridor through which the SST must operate. For configuration A (fig. 6) after take-off and initial acceleration, ascent is made at a constant indi- cated airspeed of 360 knots, then follows along the 2.0-pounds-per-square-foot ground overpressure sonic-boom profile, is followed by a further accelerated climb at constant indicated speed of 570 knots to cruise altitude. The descent profile consisted of deceleration at cruise altitude to an indicated speed of 340 knots which was maintained in descent to 50,000 feet_ at which altitude deceleration was continued down to a Mach number of 0.9. This Mach number was held constant in descent until indicated speed again reached about 360 knots.

For configuration B, the ascent profile followed was very similar to that for configuration A except that the indicated speeds were 325 knots and 500 knots for the lower and higher altitude ranges of the ascent, respectively. The descent profile differed in that initial descent speed was 300 knots and there was no intermediate level off at 50,000 feet altitude.

DEPARTURE AND ARRIVAL ROUTES Oceanic The oceanic arrival routes used in the present tests are shown in figure 8.

The solid straight lines are airways intersections, the circles are VORTAC radio navigational aids, and the triangles are navigational fixes. The dotted lines show two actual arrival tracks flown which were initiated at both South Bangor (SBG) and Cod (COD), with end-cruise points shown. The descents were made passing over Nantucket Island (ACK), then over Long Island, and descending into John F. Kennedy International Airport (JFK). The tracks shown were selected to illustrate that the maximum deviations from airway center lines experienced were of the order of 3 or 4 nautical miles.

Arrivals from Cod posed no significant problems.

Arrivals from South Bangor required a Mach 2.0 supersonic turn with a heading change of about 45 ° at Nantucket. This area at Nantucket, showing both a nonlead and a lead turn, is shown at a large scale for better detail in fig- ure 9- The turn labeled "nonlead turn" was initiated at the intersection, and resulted in considerable overshoot and difficulty in regaining the desired route outbound because of the large radius of turn existing at this speed.

Regular operation in this manner would require a wider buffer zone by ATC.

The upper track shows a lead turn (ref. i) in which the turn was initiated 15 to 20 nautical miles before the intersection in order to follow a track inside the corner and to become tangent to the desired track outbound. This lead turn is much more satisfactory from an ATC point of view. Either type of turn at supersonic speed, however, intensifies sonic booms. Tests with fighter- type aircraft have indicated amplification factors from 2 to 4. (See ref. 2.)

The alternative methods of ending cruise earlier to avoid the supersonic turn would be inefficient in both time and fuel for the SST. A solution that appears desirable, however, would be to provide special straight-in high- altitude routes for the SST, the present routes not being joined until some point close to Long Island where the subsonic speeds and altitudes of the present jet transports have been attained.

The oceanic departure routes are shown in figure i0. The upper route is the standard instrument departure route, which requires two substantial heading changes - one left and one right - at transonic speeds which compromise the climb-accelerate capability. This route is undesirable from a pilot's point of view because, at the speed attained, it is essentially an "S" turn. The lower route, which was utilized as a test route, eliminated one turn but the other turn still occurred at transonic speeds. Experience with these oceanic routes made it appear desirable, when setting up transcontinental or domestic routes, to provide some experimental, straight acceleration tracks for the SST from i00 to 170 nautical miles long and beginning as close as possible to the airport.

Domestic

The domestic departure and arrival routes are shown in figure ll. Arrival

routes start at Cleveland (CLE) and comein on airway J60 to Philipsburg (PSB),

then over either Allentown or Yardley (ARD)to Colts Neck (COL). Two standard

instrument departure routes were used: one to the north through Huguenot (RUO)

airway J70 to Erie (ERI), and one to the south which was a Dutch 7 to Coyle

(CYN) using the uppermost route which required a transonic turn at Coyle going

out either airway J80 or to Philipsburg. The two experimental routes are shown

to the south of the standard departure route on which speed was held to a Mach

number of 0.9 until turns were completed to the desired route heading along

which a 170-nautical-mile-long straight-accelerate track was available.

RESULTS

Maneuver Time and Fuel

Departures.- The results of maneuver time and maneuver fuel for departures for both domestic and oceanic routes are shown in figure 12. The ordinate, maneuver time_ is the difference in times between that required for a straight climbout and that required in operating in the ATC system and influenced by (a) following airways_ (b) radar vectoring by ATC_ and (c) ATC altitude restric- tions. The dotted line is the SST design ground rule currently specified in the national supersonic transport development program which provides for 5 min- utes operation at 250 knots at an altitude of 5000 feet. Application of the Air Transport Association (ATA) method of calculating direct operating costs for a subsonic jet would provide lO minutes for an aircraft of this weight and is shown by the solid line. The extent of the shading on the bar graphs repre- sents the range from minimum to maximum values for the test runs. No bar graph appears for the oceanic experimental route because of insufficient data.

Comparison of domestic and oceanic maneuver times shows substantially greater maneuver times for the domestic routes as a whole compared with the oceanic routes. The main reason for this result is that a substantial amount of flying to the east is required before turns can be made to head westward on the domestic routes. This figure also indicates that maneuver times for the domestic routes exceed the SST design ground rule for the greater portion of the test runs. The experimental runs evidenced consistently greater maneuver times, on the average, than those for the present-day routes - the price paid for restraining speed until the straight transonic acceleration track was available in order not to focus the boom in supersonic turns.

There was little difference in maneuver fuel for the domestic and oceanic present-day routes, whereas, for the experimental routesj the maneuver fuel was somewhat greater on the average. For all routes flown, maneuver fuel for many test runs exceeded that provided by the SST design ground rule. However, for the present-day routes, the average maneuver fuel used only slightly exceeded the design ground rule allowance. On this average basis, the design ground rule appears to be adequate if allowance for cases exceeding the aver- age is accounted for in reserve requirements.

Arrivals.- Arrival maneuver times were somewhat greater for the domestic routes than for the oceanic routes. (See fig. 13.) Part of this difference could be due to the use of different runways, but insufficient runs precluded isolating this effect. No holding times are contained in these maneuver times, but holding times varied from 0 to 14 minutes. There was little difference in maneuver fuel used between domestic and oceanic arrivals, the values averaging 5 to 4 percent of mission fuel. There appears to be no specific allowance for arrival maneuver fuel in the supersonic transport design study requirements against which to compare the measured values. Arrival maneuver fuel would, thus_ have to be accounted for in the reserve fuel.

Communications-Navigation Workload A comparison of the communications-navigation workload for the supersonic transport and for a subsonic transport for an arrival is shown in figure 14.

The lower portion of the figure shows, as the ordinate, the number of opera- tions which are defined in the upper part of the figure for various 10-minute intervals from touchdown. The bar heights indicate a substantially greater workload for the supersonic transport crew in both the 30- to 20-minute and 20- to lO-minute intervals before landing. At the lower altitude and speeds - comparable to those for the subsonic transport - the workload is, of course, about the same. Pilots' comments have been that the communications-navigation workload is high; it could be handled but continued effort toward its reduction is recommended. For departures, the communications-navigation workload for the supersonic transport was essentially the same as that for subsonic jet transports.

Operating Problems in Climb Profile An area in which there has been one of the more interesting operating prob- lems with the supersonic transport has been that of operation in the ascent along the 2.0-pounds-per-square-foot overpressure climb profile. (See figs. 6 and 7-) The task is made difficult with normal instrumentation displays because the pilot has no constant instrument indication to monitor in this region since Mach number, airspeed 3 and altitude are increasing and rate of climb is decreasing. For the initial guidance task with present instrumentation, the pilot was given about a dozen Mach number-altitude target points defining the profile. Because of the difficulty of flight-path control with this type of guidance, substantial excursions in altitude, penetrating the sonic-boombound- ary, occurred. Pilots' comments were that the workload for this task was too high for routine operations. As an aid to the pilot in performing thls task, the command bar of a flight director was programed to display the pitch trim required to return to the scheduled profile.

A comparison of the excursions in altitude of several SST simulator flights along the sonic-boom profile for a range of Mach numbers from about 1.2 to 2.0 utilizing the two methods described (with and without the flight director) is shown in figure 15. The figure shows that, with use of the flight director, altitude excursions are reduced from 1000 feet or more to ±300 feet on the average with an occasional excursion to _00 feet. What is not evident

from the figurej however_ and what is, perhaps, even more significant are the

pilots' commentsconcerning the difference in the difficulty of performing the

task by the two methods. Whereasthe pilots considered the task with basic

instrumentation to be unsatisfactory for routine daily operations 3 with the

flight director they considered the task much easier and satisfactory for daily

operations.

CONCLUDINGREMAEKS

In initial phases of simulation tests to determine the effects of air

traffic control on the supersonic transport, the following results have been

indicated:

i. Supersonic transport design allowances for time and fuel for maneu-

vering during climbouts may not be sufficient 3 based on results of operations

in the present-day air traffic control system in the NewYork area.

2. There was a somewhatgreater communications-navigation workload indi-

cated for the supersonic transport comparedwith that for the subsonic jet

transport during part of the descent.

3- Use of a flight director to command pitch-control guidance for the

pilot eased his task substantially in vertical flight-path control along the

sonic-boom boundary portion of the climbout and was considered to be accep-

table by the pilots for routine daily operations.

REFERENCES

i. Sawyer, Richard H.: A Simulator Study of Airspace Requirements for the

Supersonic Transport. NASA TN D-1964, 1963.

2. Maglieri, Domenic J.; and Lansing_ Donald L.: Sonic Boomsfrom Aircraft in

Maneuvers. NASA TN D-2370, 1964.

TABLEI.- SUPERSONIC TRANSPORT CONFIGURATIONS

Airplane B

Airplane A

General characteristics:

Thrust weight ratio at take-off

O. 32

with no afterburner, (T/W)TO ...... 0.32

Minimumtransonic acceleration, 1.4

ft/sec 2 ................. 1.6

Longitudinal control characteristics: o.4 3.o

N_ch number ................ 0.4 3.0

Longitudinal control force

9 27

Elevator deflection required

4 14 4.5

for lg, deg .............. 2.5

Longitudinal short-period

]5.5 4.2 6.3

oscillation, sec ............ 5.7

0.16 o. ll o. 37

Cycles to half-amplitude ......... 0.17

SST-ATC SIMULATION METHOD

1 S 1 t d F i . T ~ f A F ~ ; E ~ ; r R O k i AIR-

VOICE COMMUNICATIONS SIMULATOR COMPARTMENT AIR-TRAFFIC

1 1 ~ I SAMPLE I

FACILITY SIMULATION I NASA FAA

LANGLEY RESEARCHCENTER I NATIONAL AVIATION FACILITIES

I EXPERIMENTAL CENTER

Figure 1

ANALOG COMPUTER I

L-64-1743

Figure 3 L-64-2220

Figure 2

ATC FACILITY SIMULATOR

L-64-3 25 1

Figure 5

PROFILES AND LIMITATIONS PROFILES AND LIMITATIONS AIRPLANE A AIRPLANE B ALTITUDE, FT ALTITUDE. FT 8 0 ~ x 1 0 3 rDESCENT PROFILE 8 0 ~ x 1 0 ~ YESCENT PROFILE ENGINE LIMITATION A p = 2 0 LB/SQFT - ASCENT 20 PROFILE 0 .4 8 12 16 2 0 2 4 2 8 3 2 0 4 8 12 16 2 0 2 4 2 8 3 2 M M

Figure 6

Figure 7

oCEANIC ARRIVAL ROUTES SUPERSONIC TURNS

', ', '_'/ =Y

H_ \ _L---- BOSCh. r--. /END I 1" _ _\ COD I _ "_PV

, _-- ,=_.. ¢_cJ._/- "-=°

,-- H_o _ _u_ L.>,.._# _- \ c,...o. '_Y-_,_.._.o _" I J_"_/_/ a AIRWAYS INTERSECTION

. i'----, 7:/../ o _o ,oo

,' =" Y/.o_ ' ,.'=, '

NM_.

Figure 9 Figure 8 oCEANIC DEPARTURE ROUI F_.5 DOMESTIC DEPARTURE AND ARRIVAL ROUTES I i-.l I

, 1 -I I'

\ _, _ =,* y-'L.__ /// ,..... _t-- BOS _.. _ // CRUISE7 ;j-.f - _ - "',HUO..

I /dess, i" , --- _. /Lf../6-'/ CANADA .

_ _ r_

, _/_.-_/'/ovORTACS'A"O_

o_,o _--..:-)AC'.,_

t. I / /_// _ A4-RWAYS INTERSECTION __ :, t.g t L.,,D;_ __.% .; yR. _ \,-# ,..

=, -,/._;,_dA/ o ,o ,0o

# I / L _ J OI 50 IOO o VORTAC STATION _.AIRWAYS INTERSECTION NML Figure ii Figure LO EFFECT OFATC ON FUEL AND TIME DEPARTURES EFFECT OF ATC ON FUEL AND TIME -- ATA METHOD ARRIVALS .... DESIGN GROUND RULE Y///z PRESENT-DAy ROUTES MANEUVER FUEL, "///,,#/_ EXPERIMENTAL ROUTES PERCENT OF MANEUVER MANEUVER FUEL, MANEUVER MISSION TIME, PERCENT OF TIME, FUEL MINUTES MISSION FUEL MINUTES 15 15 DOMESTIC OCEANIC 12F 52FDOMEST_C OCEANIC I0 C OCEANIC DOMESTIC OCEANIC DOMESTIC Figure 13 Figure 12 COMMUNICATIONS-NAVIGATION WORKLOAD ARRIVAL ALTITUDE ERROR IN FOLLOWING SONIC-BOOM PROFILE ALTITUDE ERROR, FT • NAVIGATION FREQUENCY CHANGES I,OOOr WITHOUT FLIGHT DIRECTOR • COMMUNICATIONS FREQUENCY CHANGES • COMMUNICATION MESSAGE • TRANSPONDER SQUAWK CODE [_ SUBSONIC TRANSPORT .2,000 Lt I t I t _ i _ i _ SST t,O00[- WtTH FLIGHT _RECTOR OPERATIONS NUMBER OF 20 flO O "l'O00(_l!2 ' 1.4 ' l.; ' LIB ' 210 50 TO 20 20 TO IO I0 TO 0 M TIME FROM TOUCHDOWN, MIN Figure 14 Figure i_ 20. REVIEW OF THE XB-70 FLIGHT PROGRAM By Thomas R. Sisk, Kirk S. Irwin, and James M. McKay NASA Flight Research Center SUMMARY Although the major NASA research effort is directed toward XB-70-2 , which will not enter its flight program until the summer of 1965, a limited amount of information is available from the early flights of the XB-70-1 airplane.

Initial take-off and landing performance data have generally substantiated predictions and indicate no unforeseen problems for this class of vehicle.

Vertical velocities at impact are of the same order of magnitude as those being experienced by present-day subsonic jets. The XB-70 distances from brake release to lift-off graphically illustrate the advantage of the increased thrust-weight ratio of the supersonic cruise vehicle. The landing loads are well within the design limits up to the highest vertical velocities encountered to date, and recorded data show the response at the pilot station to be some- what greater than that recorded at the center of gravity. Persistent shaking has been encountered in flight at subsonic speed. The cause of the excitation is not known at present but the oscillation does not appear to be conventional buffeting. The oscillation occurrence drops off appreciably at supersonic speeds and can be correlated wlth atmospheric turbulence. The stability and control characteristics at subsonic speeds appear satisfactory with stability augmentation on and off. A longitudinal trim discrepancy from predictions has been noted in the transonic region which appears to be decreasing with increasing supersonic speed. The supersonic handling qualities are considered adequate with stability augmentation off; however, sensitive lateral control has resulted in small pilot-induced oscillations.

INTRODUCTION The XB-70 is a large, supersonic cruise vehicle with the performance and flexibility representative of the supersonic transport and, as such, can con- tribute information toward the design and development of the SST as well as other future supersonic and hypersonic cruise vehicles.

Because of the NASA role in technical support of the national supersonic- transport effort, and in recognition of the potential contributions of the XB-70 aircraft to development of the supersonic-cruise concept, the NASA began formulating a research program around this aircraft in 1962. A review of the military XB-70 program by NASA personnel at that time showed that it was desir- able to supplement the program in several areas to achieve maxlmumbenefits.

The NASA arranged to have instrumentation installed (primarily on XB-70-2) to augment the basic airplane instrumentation and permit investigation of these 18_

areas in somedetail. An outline of the NASAresearch program and the prime

vehicle for each investigation is shown in the following table:

Research area Investigation

Airplane

i and 2

Flight control General handling qualities

Stability derivatives

Control-system evaluation

i and 2

Performance Air-induction system

Induction-system_engine interaction

Performance and mission analysis

Operational margins

2 Skin-friction evaluation

Base pressure study

Structural loads

Landing loads

Panel response

i and 2

Flight loads

Boundary-layer noise

1 Sonic boom

Environmental

Take-off and landing noise

Vehicle internal environment

Crew biomedical

These investigations cover someof the fundamental flight-control, performance,

and structural-loads aspects of a large, Math 3 cruise vehicle. Definition of

the environmental problems, such as sonic boomand take-off and landing noise, will be obtained in the course of the other investigations.

Although the major NASAresearch effort is directed toward XB-70-2, which

will not enter its flight program until late in the summerof 1965, a limited

amount of information is available at this time from the program for XB-70-1.

It is the purpose of this paper to review the flight program to date and pre-

sent someof the preliminary results from the first nine flights. Amongthe

items to be discussed are handling qualities, take-off and landing performance,

and landing loads. The data on take-off and landing noise are presented in

paper no. i0 by Tanner and McLeod.

Before proceeding with the discussion of program results, some information regarding the size of the airplane would be helpful. Figure 1 illustrates the size of the _B-70 as compared with a • Boeing 707-320 airplane, referenced to a common main-gear location, and shows the fuselage to be 32 feet longer than the 707 whereas the wing span, because of the delta configuration, is some 40 feet

less. The XB-70 stands 20 feet to the pilot's eyeball as opposed to 14 feet

for the 707 with the airplanes in the three-point attitude. Note the cockpit

overhang distance ahead of the main and the nose gear of the XB-70 comparedwith

the conventional subsonic jet.

DISCUSSION

Program Status

The status of the program of the XB-70-1 airplane is summarizedin fig-

ure 2 which showsthe maxlmumpoints reached on each flight in terms of Mach

number and altitude. Lines of constant dynamic pressure and a typical subsonic

jet operating envelope are superimposed on this chart as points of reference.

Supersonic flight was achieved for the first time on flight 3- The highest

point reached to date is Mach2.43 at 64,_00 feet, attained during flight ll.

Flights 6 and 9 were terminated prematurely because of various systems diffi-

culties. The flight program to date has expanded the performance envelope as

rapidly as possible, consistent with flight safety. These early flights have

concentrated on flutter and vibration testing and basic airworthiness and sys-

tems evaluation. Considerable engine and inlet dynamics work is being per-

formed at the higher Machnumbers. In general, the airplane has performed well

and the program has progressed rapidly.

Take-0ff and Landing Performance

One area of interest in which the XB-70 is already shedding information

concerns the take-off and landing characteristics of supersonic cruise vehicles.

Figure 3 showsthe take-off performance obtained to date in terms of lift-

off velocity and distance from brake release. The velocity is plotted against

wing loading and the distance from brake release is presented as a function of

the thrust-weight ratio. Data for a Boeing 707-320C intercontinental are

included to provide a familiar point of reference. The XB-70 lift-off veloci-

ties are not unusually high when it is remembered that the airplane was designed

as a weapons system and did not take advantage of the most favorable wing

loadings for low-speed operation. Note that the heavier 3CB-70 rake-offs have

approached the operational wing loading of the swept-wing 707. The XB-70 dis-

tances from brake release, on the other hand, present the sameorder of magni-

tude as the 707 even though the XB-70 has very nearly twice the gross weight

of the 707- This plot graphically illustrates the advantage of the increased

thrust-weight ratio of the supersonic cruise vehicle. The initial XB-70 flights

indicate that take-off performance of a supersonic cruise vehicle poses no

unusual problems.

Several points concerning the landing performance are madein figure 4.

The upper portion of the figure showsthe touchdown velocity as a function of

wing loading and, again, Boeing 707-320Cdata. The XB-70 touchdownvelocities

are high, which is not surprising considering the newnessand experimental

nature of the aircraft. The second highest point represents a touchdown on

the dry lakebed where there was unlimited roll-out distance, whereas the minimum-speed touchdown was made at Palmdale Airport where the pilot made an effort to get the airplane on the runway as early as possible. This range of touchdown velocity at approximately the same wing loading indicates that, in general, the airplane is not landing at its minimum speed and, therefore, some decrease in the touchdown velocity can be anticipated as the landing operation becomes routine. The extreme right-hand point was achieved on flight 9 when systems difficulties forced an early landing. It is interesting to note that the touchdown velocity was not significantly higher than for the lower wing- loading landings; however, the pilot did bounce this one.

The fact that the XB-70 uses a drag chute in place of thrust reversers makes a roll-out-distance comparison meaningless and these data are not shown.

Instead, the vertical velocities at touchdown as a function of touchdown veloc- ity are shown in the lower portion of the figure. Included in this figure are the results of a statistical analysis for 331 landings of subsonic Jet trans- ports at New York International Airport as reported by Stickle in 1962 in ref- erence 1. The mean vertical velocity for these landings was found to be 1.8 feet per second while the maximum was 4.7 feet per second for touchdown airspeeds between 104 and 150 knots. These data show that a statistical bound- ary for 95 percent of all landings will be less than 3-5 feet per second.

Although the XB-70 data are extremely limited, it is interesting to note that they are about the same level as the data of reference 1. Also noteworthy is the fact that the landing studies in which the _B-70 fixed-base simulator was used produced appreciably higher vertical velocities than are actually being experienced in flight.

From the landings to date, it may be noted that the anticipated problems associated with pilot location at main-gear contact have not materialized. In the XB-70 , the pilot is 106 feet ahead of the main gear and approximately 38 feet in the air at main-gear contact for a landing at a l0 ° angle of attack.

These distances are nearly twice those of present-day subsonic Jets. The XB-70 pilot has stated that landing visibility is acceptable (about llke that for a B-58) and his location at main-gear contact has little detrimental effect on height Judgment. The pilot has commented that although the XB-70 is a rela- tively easy airplane to land, it appears that a great deal of practice will be required before precise touchdowns on the first 1000 feet of runway at pre- determined speeds can be made. It would be well to remember that the XB-70 pilot enjoyed the assistance of chase aircraft calling out height above the runway for these landings.

A look at the glide slopes of four early landings on the Edwards Air Force Base runway has shown them to average approximately 2°, slightly lower than the standard ILS glide slope. The altitude at runway threshold for these four landings was Just under 20 feet and the average touchdown distance was less than 1900 feet from the end of the runway. As mentioned for take-off, it would appear that the landing performance of the supersonic cruise vehicle is not likely to offer a problem.

Landing Loads It is appropriate at this point to summarize the results of the landing- loads investigation to date. The landlng-loads evaluation is limited to the XB-70-1 airplane because this aircraft has strain-gaged landing gear. The landing gear has been instrumented to measure loads, deflections, and accelera- tions, and accelerometers have been installed at the airplane center of gravity and the pilot station to measure the dynamic response at these fuselage loca- tions. Additional instrumentation for the NASA landing loads and dynamics investigation includes three cameras to record the behavior of the main and the nose gear during touchdown, a down-pointing camera for a measure of the drift angle, trailing-armdevices installed on each main and nose gear to measure the sinking velocity at landing, and magnetic pickups to measure the wheel rota- tional velocities and accelerations during the spin-up.

Figure 5 shows typical landing loads experienced for all landings where data have been recorded. The upper portion of the figure presents the ratio of measured peak gear loads to the design load as a function of vertical veloc- ity at touchdown. It is significant that up to the highest vertical velocities encountered, the loads are well within the design limits.

The solid symbols at the left of the figure indicate the magnitude of nose-gear loads at nose-gear impact. Note that nose-gear vertical velocities have been on the order of 1 foot per second or less, showing the excellent con- trol available after main-gear contact.

A consequence of the landing impact on the fuselage is shown in the lower portion of the figure. In this figure, normal acceleration at two fuselage stations, the center of gravity and the pilot station, is given as a function of vertical velocity. These data show the response at the pilot station to be somewhat greater than that recorded at the center_of gravity. It is interesting to note that even with average accelerations of lpl-gat main-gear impact, the pilots have indicated that they have not been sure of main-gear contact for a number of these landings. The solid symbols in this portion of the figure again represent nose-gear impact and show the pilot-station and center-of- gravity response to be of the same order of magnitude as the response to main- gear impact.

Landing loads on the XB-70 will be measured in a continuing effort to per- mat evaluation of gear loads and upper fuselage response for a complete range of gross weights. Special effort will be directed toward obtaining loads incurred during taxiing for comparison with predictions.

Oscillation Characteristics It has been emphasized in this paper that the XB-70 is a large, flexible aircraft and it is of interest to note that persistent shaking has been encoun- tered in flight at subsonic speed. Figure 6 presents a summary of accelera- tion data obtained during the first nine flights. Although the figure may

raise more questions than it answers3 it does provide a basis for commentson

a number of important points.

The lower portion of the figure presents the flight envelope covered to

date in terms of altitude and Mach number. The degree of shading indicates

the percentage of time that fluctuating normal-acceleration levels were meas-

ured with a recorder located near the center of gravity. (Similar amplitudes

were obtained at a location near the cockpit.) The upper portion of the figure

is a companionplot of half-amplitude of oscillating normal acceleration.

Note that the airplane experiences a persistent shake, or oscillation,

over the subsonic speed range to a Machnumber of approximately 0.85. This

oscillation varies from -+O.03gat the higner s_osonic Mach numbers to more than

twice that value at the lower speeds as shownby the curve in the upper portion

of the figure. Oscillations of larger amplitude than this level have been

measuredand are indicated by the symbols in this figure. The oscillation has

a predominant frequency of 12 cps at the center of gravity and 2.5 cps at the

cockpit. (The first bending modeof the fuselage is approximately 2.5 cps.)

The periodic nature of the oscillation, coupled with its failure to show sig-

buffeting. The cause of the excitation is not known at present. The pilot

has reported that these oscillatory conditions have not degraded airplane han-

dling qualities.

The oscillation occurrence drops off to 25 percent above a Mach number of

0.85 and, above 1.6, it is reduced to the point that disturbances are recorded

in less than l0 percent of the total flight time for flight conditions of mild

turbulence. It has been noted that the XB-70 crew report a significantly

greater turbulence severity than is reported for the B-58 and other chase

planes flying through the sameair mass.

Additional emphasis is being placed on this study to determine the cause

of the subsonic vibration. Later studies will also determine the conventional

buffet boundary as well as examine response to turbulence in somedetail.

Handling Qualities

The primary objective of the program to date has been to expand the per-

formance envelope as rapidly as possible, and a minimumamount of time has

been spent in obtaining systematic stability and control data. A gross picture

is beginning to emerge_however.

Neither take-off nor landing with stability augmentation off presents a

problem_ and trim changes with canard-flap and gear actuation are small. Low-

speed handling qualities are satisfactory with stability augmentation off.

Pitch and yaw control are both excellent whereas the initial roll control

appeared sensitive. The pilot reported that lateral control was lighter than

on most large airplanes. This lateral-control sensitivity has been improved on

the later flights by doubling the bungee force.

The transition from subsonic to supersonic flight has shown two interesting points. The first concerns the somewhat surprising amount of trailing-edge- down elevon deflection required for trim in this flight region. This trim requirement is noted on figure 7 which shows the variation of trim elevon deflection with Mach number. It may be seen that almost 8 ° of increasing trailing-edge-down elevon deflection is required as the Mach number increases from 0.9 to i.i. The fact that model tests did not predict this magnitude of pitching-moment change is shown by the dashed "Predictions" curve. The large trailing-edge-down trim requirement is most pronounced in the transonic and low supersonic regions as shown in figure 8. This figure presents the differ- ence between the actual longitudinal trim requirement and the predicted values _SeTRI M over the supersonic Mach number range and shows the actual values to be approaching predictions at the higher speeds.

The exact cause of the trim discrepancy is not known at this time. It is expected that stability-derivative investigation during the flight-control research (shown in table in introduction) will shed additional light in this area.

The second point concerns the low static lateral directional stability characteristics with the 0 ° tip deflection where sluggish airplane response to corrective rudder results in an apparent rudder reversal. This marginal sta- bility is attributed to the large adverse yawing moment produced by the ailerons which is magnified by the trailing-edge-down trim requirements discussed.

Drooping the tips to 25 ° improved this characteristic and fixed the initial tip-droop schedule at a Mach number of 0.95.

The wing tips are deflected to the full-down position at a Mach number of 1.4. Longitudinal and lateral trim changes with wing fold are small and easily controllable.

The supersonic handling qualities are considered adequate with stability augmentation off_ however, the initial sensitive lateral control characteris- tics resulted in small pilot-lnduced oscillations. The pilot reports less tendency to overcontrol in roll with the increased lateral-control force gradients.

The XB-70 presents satisfactory characteristics with stability augmenta- tion on. There are insufficient data at this point to evaluate the benefits of stability augmentation properly but, on the basis of limited flight data, it would appear that the requirements would be dictated by crew comfort rather than flight safety.

The handling-qualities program will get underway in earnest on airplane XB-70-2, where all facets of the stability and control picture - including the effects of flexibility on the control system characteristics and derivatives - will be studied.

CONCLUDING REMARKS

A review of the initial flight results available from the XB-70-1 shows

that, in general_ the airplane has performed well, achieving a _ch number of

2.43 at 64,500 feet in ii flights in less than four calendar months of flight

time.

The results obtained to date on the XB-70-1 airplane are providing pre-

liminary information pertinent to a number of research areas of interest to

designers of supersonic cruise vehicles. Moreover, these limited data have

been sufficient to assure the United States Governmentof the research poten-

tiai of the X_-70 flight program whlch will be expanded ±n _i_ next several

years.

REFERENCE

i. Stickle, Joseph W.: An Investigation of Landing-Contact Conditions for

Several Turbojet Transports During Routine Daylight Operations at New

York International Airport. NASA TND-1483, 1962.

19o

XB-70-1 FLIGHT-PERFORMANCE SUMMARY NUMBER OF FLIGHTS 11 TOTAL TIME 14 HR 39 MIN SUPERSONIC TIME 5 HR 59 MIN 185 FT 60x103 OYNAMJ C pRESSURE,200 400PsF i_ (_ I COMPARISON OF 4O XB-70 WITH 707-320 ALTITUDE, 30 FT 50 _60o 2C REFERENCED TO MAIN GEAR 0 018 112 1!6 21.0 214 MACH NUMBER Figure 2 Figure 1 XB-70-1 XB-70-1 TAKEOFF PERFORMANCE LANDING PERFORMANCE STANDARD SEA-LEVEL CONDITIONS 200 t- o o LtFT-OFE 200 o o _ VELOCITY, °°% VELOCITY, 150 KIAS 150 _7o7-32oc TOUCHDOWN _ 250 1 o KIAS /,_ 7o7-32oc lO0_J _ WING LOADING, PSF WING LOADING, PSF 12x103 VERTICAL MAXIMUM VELOCITY AT 4 \ o BRAKE RELEASE, °° FT 707-32 O_ o TOUCHDOWN, NASA TN9-1483 o o FT/$EC . o o oJ MEANI I ,, A I I 100 120 140 160 180 200 THRUST-WEIGHT RATIO TOUCHDOWN VELOCITY, KIAS Figure Figure 3 XB-70-1 ANALYSIS OF OSCILLATION DATA XB-70- I LANDING-LOADS DATA AT MAIN-GEAR o MAXIMUM AND NOSE-GEAR IMPACT BASIC OSCiLLAtiON AMPLITUDE, "_g 0 r 60×10 _ PEAK MEASURED LOAD 1"I I IF'** _o o o o

/

DESIGN LOAD '0 i _ i i i 4C o CENIER OF GRAVtTY _ii_ _ a PItOt STATION ALTITUDE, 30 FT pERCEN_ 2O PEAK NORMAL i IO0 ACCELERATION, g 2S '__ 10

.',: .'o: _o o

_! ilia' 112 ,O,A_ ,,ME !J =" o ° h J I J 04 08 1.6 2.0 2.4 MACH NUMBER VERTICAL VELOCITY, FT/SEC Figure 6 Figure XB-70-1 XBo70-1 DIFFERENCE BETWEEN ACTUAL AND TRANSONIC TRIM CHARACTERISTICS PREDICTED LONGITUDINAL TRIM ALTITUDE = 35,000 FT ALTITUDE = 35,000 TO 55,000 FT TIPS = 0 ° J

FO,CT,O_S

f TRIM ELEVON, DEG

f

FLIGHT T E ST -_..<>_ I l I l

;12 ;!4 ,!6 ;'._ _.o 2.2

T.E.DOWN 12 T.E. DOWN 12. 1.0 0.9 1.0 1.1 0.8 1.2 MACH NUMBER MACH NUMBER Figure 8 Figure 7 21.

CONSIDERATION OF FUEL REQUIREMENTS FOR SUPERSONIC TRANSPORT OPERATION By Joseph W. Stickle NASA Langley Research Center SUMMARY An analysis of the interaction of operational environment and aircraft characteristics of the supersonic transport (SST) in the areas of deslgn-range and reserve-fuel requirements has been made. Design-range requirements are con- sidered in relation to the effects of wind, temperature, flight-level assign- ment, and payload variation. An approach toward combining en route and holding reserve requirements while maintaining protection equivalent to that provided subsonic jet transport operations by the present civil air regulation en route plus holding reserves is given. This approach results in a savings in reserve fuel over that required by separate requirements.

INTRODUCTION There are a number of factors, both environmental and operational, which will affect the fuel requirements of the supersonic transport. A complete understanding of the effects of these factors will not be attained until the aircraft has been in service for some time. Nevertheless, it is necessary to anticipate and account for these factors to the fullest extent possible where they may have an important bearing on the design and ultimate capabilities of the aircraft.

The purpose of this paper is to examine_ by using a statistical approach, the interaction of operational environment and aircraft characteristics in the areas of deaign range and fuel reserves.

The design range is considered in relation to the effects of wind, temper- ature, flight assignment, and payload variation. Reserve-fuel considerations include en route reserves (accounting for various uncertainty factors in plan- ning mission fuel), holding reserves, and fuel for diversion to an alternate airport. Fuel allowance for en route engine failure is also discussed in rela- tion to the more normal operational reserve requirements.

DESIGN RANGE The design range, or fuel-carrying capability, of the supersonic transport should provide a rational margin to allow for likely variations of those factors which a dispatcher must account for in planning mission fuel. Here, mission

fuel is considered to be only the fuel required to fly to and land at the des-

tination. Because design range of an aircraft is normally based on standard-

day no-wind conditions, the effects of weather and operational factors are

expressed in terms of the additional standard-day range increment required over

and above the basic trip range. For this analysis, the basic range is taken to

be from NewYork to Paris or 3160 nautical miles.

Atmospheric Effects

One of the primary factors to be accounted for in determining mission fuel

is the expected atmospheric conditions en route, that is, winds and tempera-

tures. The statistical characteristics of the east-west effective wind com-

ponent and temperature differences from the 1962 standard atmosphere are shown

for the winter season, Decemberto February, and the summerseason, June to

August, in table I. The effective meansand standard deviations are shown sep-

arately for climb and descent and for cruise. The winds and the variability

are considerably greater in the winter, particularly at cruise altitudes, than

in summer. The summermeantemperatures are warmer, as could be expected, but

the standard deviations are somewhatless than in winter.

The increment of still-air range required to account for the effect of

wind is, of course, the product of the wind velocity and the flight time. Pri-

mary consideration is given to the westbound flights to account for the adverse

effects of prevailing head winds.

The effects of temperature were calculated for a Mach 3 supersonic trans-

port configuration having representative climb and cruise performance. In the

cruise condition, when the temperature varied above standard, the cruise Mach

number was reduced to maintain a constant standard-day Mach 3.0 stagnation

temperature.

Both the wind and temperature variations have approximately Gaussian, or

normal, distributions. Since the effects of wind and temperature on the incre-

mental range required are nearly linear throughout the range of conditions of

interest, the corresponding distributions of incremental range required are

also normal. Therefore 3 the combined effects of wind and temperature were

incorporated in the probabilities of requiring given range increments by the

usual methods applicable to normal frequency distribution.

Figure i gives a comparison between summerand winter of the combined

effects of wind and temperature on the design-range requirement. The results

indicate that a greater range increment will be required in summerth_n in

winter (the primary reason being the reduced cruise Mach number associated with

above-standard temperatures). For example, under summerconditions, about

390 nautical miles is required to compensate for wind and temperature for all

but i percent of the westbound flights. Under winter conditions, the range

increment for the sameprobability level would be about 320 nautical miles.

Therefore, the summercondition is assumedin the following discussion of the

effects of other factors. The 1-percent probability level will also be

retained, but only for purposes of illustration. It is not within the scope

of this analysis to suggest the probability level that should ultimately be

selected for design.

Altitude Assignment

The next factor to be considered is that of altitude assignment. Thus far,

it has been assumedthat all flights would be madeat the optimum cruise alti-

tude. It is very likely, however, that the supersonic transport, as is the

case with present jet transports, will, at times, be assigned to flight levels

other than optimum. For the purposes of this analysis, three assumptions were

madeconcerning the supersonic transport traffic flow and the effect of off-

optimum flight-level performance. These assumptions were:

(i) Three flight levels would accommodate all the one-direction SST

traffic, separated, as at present, by 4_000-foot increments.

(2) One-half of the westbound flights would be madeat the optimum flight

level and the remaining flights distributed 4,000 feet above and below optimum.

(3) The range increment required to compensatefor deviations from optimum

is the samefor flights above optimum as for flights below optimum.

Figure 2 shows the effect of requiring three flight levels to accommodate

the westbound SSTtraffic under summerconditions. The corresponding curve for

all flights at optimum from the previous figure is shown for comparison. Again,

with the 1-percent probability level_ the results indicate that, if three

flight levels are required, the increment in design range over and above the

basic trip distance should be about 550 nautical miles or about 160 nautical

miles greater than if all flights could cruise at optimum.

Payload Variation

The last factor considered in design-range requirements is that of payload

variation. In the preceding discussion of the effects of weather and flight-

level assignments, it was assumedthat a full payload was carried on all

flights. However, a lO0-percent load factor, for passenger payload at least, is not a practical goal because of the variability in demandfor accommodations.

Therefore 3 unless the assumption can be madethat the variability in passenger

payload can be compensatedfor by providing excess cargo capacity in the air-

plane and standby cargo at the airport, the overall load factor will,, at times,

be substantially less than i00 percent. Average load factors for the SSThave

been variously estimated between 5_ and 70 percent. In this analysis, a mean

load factor of 60 percent with a 12-percent standard deviation was chosen. The

effects on range capability of the variations of take-off gross weight resulting

from this varying payload were computed and combined statistically with the

effects of summerwind and temperature conditions and variation in flight-level

assignment discussed previously.

The overall effect of these factors on the probability of requiring addi- tional range capability is shown in figure 3. For comparison, the probability curve from figure 2 for the corresponding full payload case is given. For the 60-percent mean load factor, a design range increment of approximately 395 nau- tical miles should be sufficient for all but i percent of the summer westbound flights; whereas, with lO0-percent load factor, the range requirement would be about 550 nautical miles at the same probability level.

RESERVE-FUEL REQUIREMENTS There are a number of factors which introduce some uncertainty in the determination o_ en route or mission fuel. These factors, together with esti- mated standard deviations from their predicted values and the corresponding variabilities calculated for en route fuel requirements, are listed in table II.

The standard deviation of incremental fuel requirement due to each factor is shown as a percentage of the planned mission fuel. It is indicated that the effect of variations between forecast and actual wind velocity is relatively small for the supersonic transport; whereas, for the subsonic jet, uncertainty in accounting for wind effects has been indicated to be the primary factor con- tributing to en route reserve requirements. The largest factor for the super- sonic transport indicated in table II is the variability in specific fuel con- sumption. The estimate of 4-percent standard deviation for each engine is one- third greater than values that have been used for subsonic jet engines. This estimate allows for the possibility of more variability with the more complex supersonic engines. With four engines, the overall standard deviation in fuel consumption (hence, the fuel consumed) reduces to 2 percent. The second largest factor indicated in table II is drag variation. This variation is assumed to have a standard deviation of 1.5 percent and is based on observations of speed variations for subsonic transports. The last three factors under the label of en route deviations include deviations from a planned flight profile resulting from air traffic control (ATC), weather avoidance, navigation error, and, in the case of deviations during climb, include the pilot's ability to adhere to a given speed-altitude climb schedule. The climb deviations were recorded devia- tions in climb fuel as experienced on the Langley fixed-base SST simulator while operating in the joint NASA-FAA supersonic-transport--air-traffic-control program. The vertical cruise deviations are considered as being deviations from the flight-plan cruise altitudes. However, because these deviations nor- mally occur in discrete altitude changes rather than as continuous deviations, it is necessary to treat them separately from the en route factors. The inclu- sion of vertical cruise deviations in the reserve requirement will be discussed in the section on combined en route and holding requirements. The combined standard deviation of the en route reserve factors amounts to 2.73 percent of the planned mission fuel.

Combined En Route and Holding Requirement It is apparent that protection in the form of en route reserves is required to allow for those occasions in which the actual en route fuel exceeds the planned en route fuel. On other flights, however, this added fuel would not be

required and would be available as holding fuel at the destination. It would

appear logical, therefore_ to consider these two reserve requirements together_

with the ultimate objective of limiting to a reasonable frequency the need for

diversion to an alternate airport because of fuel-limited holding time. To

this end, holding-time statistics have been obtained for arriving flights into

John F. Kennedy International Airport during the month of May 1963. These data

indicate that approximately 37 percent of the arriving flights during this

period were delayed - with meandelay of just over 7 minutes. The frequency

distribution of these delays was fitted as nearly as possible with the positive

half of a normal distribution and the fuel consumption corresponding to these

holding times was calculated for two SST configurations. These data were then

combined with the previous en route statistics to form probability distributions

of exhausting given amounts of reserve fuel.

In the previous discussion of en route reserve factors_ the vertical cruise

deviations were not included in the combined standard deviation of en route fac-

tors. To account for the vertical cruise deviations_ the following assumptions

were made:

(i) Three flight levels were considered sufficient to accommodatethe one-

direction SSTtraffic.

(2) One-half of the flights would be flight planned at the optimum flight

level and the remaining half, 4,000 feet above and below optimum.

(3) The maximum deviation from the optimumflight level would be

±6,000 feet.

(4) The frequency distribution of deviations from flight-plan altitudes

for subsonic transports operating over the North Atlantic Oceanwould be repre-

sentative of the deviations to be experienced on SSTaircraft.

By considering these assumptions, a frequency distribution of deviations

from flight-plan altitudes obtained for 417 flights of commercial jet trans-

ports operating over the North Atlantic was applied to the three flight levels

to obtain the percentage of total flights flown at the optimum altitude and at

each 2000-foot increment from optimum. Fromthese percentages and the corre-

sponding added fuel required for each altitude increment_ the aforementioned

combined en route and holding probability distributions were plotted for each

altitude increment and the probabilities were summed together for given values

of combined reserve fuel. The total probability distributions of exhausting

given amounts of combined en route and holding reserve_ including the vertical

cruise deviations_ is shown in figure 4 where AWF/WMF is the ratio of the

increment in fuel to the total mission fuel. The shaded area represents the

spread obtained by including two SSTconfigurations; the dashed curve repre-

sents the probability distribution calculated for a subsonic transport and is

used in establishing a fix on a probability level suitable for the SSTreserve

requirement; the vertical dashed line is the calculated civil air regulation

en route plus holding reserve for the subsonic transport. It is the intersec-

tion of the vertical line with the probability distribution for the subsonic

transport that indicates the probability of equaling or exceeding the civil air

regulation reserve. This level (on the order of 1 flight in 800 being required

to deviate to an alternate because of fuel-limited holding time) is assumed to

be acceptable. The percentage of mission fuel corresponding to the same prob- ability level for the SST aircraft, ranges from 13.25 percent to 14 percent, depending upon the configuration. The total reserve fuel would then be the sum of the combined en route and holding fuel and the fuel required to divert to an alternate airport.

Two-Engine Failure The final consideration given to reser_c fuel is the fuel allowance for a two-engine failure. According to present regulations_ should two engines fail simultaneously anywhere along the flight path, sufficient fuel must be pro- vided to proceed to an adequate alternate. If the remaining mission fuel at the time of failure plus the reserve fuel is not sufficient to meet this requirement_ the reserve fuel would, in effect, be determined by the two-engine failure cone.

In figure 5, the two-engine subsonic range remaining for a supersonic transport is shown plotted against distance from take-off. In these calcula- tions, a 260-nautical-mile alternate, in combination with an en route and holding reserve of 13.25 percent, was used.

The two dashed 45 ° lines represent the distance for either returning to the origin or proceeding to the destination. The lower boundary indicates the distance to the nearest adequate alternate airport along the route from New York to Paris. Inasmuch as the range remaining for the SST is above the two dashed lines, it would, in fact, remain within range of either the origin or the destination in the event of a two-engine failure. Therefore, the reserve fuel provided is shown to be sufficient for this requirement.

CONCLUSIONS The analysis of operational factors in relation to fuel requirements for the supersonic transport has indicated the probabilities of requiring additional design-range capability above the basic trip distance to allow for the effects of atmospheric variations, flight-level assignments, and. payload variation.

It is shown, for example, that, with all the factors considered and the assumptions used, an addition of about 395 nautical miles to the basio trip distance from New York to Paris would be sufficient to permit acceptance of all payloads offered except for i percent of the flights.

In the area of fuel reserves, it was found that, depending upon the config- uration, between 13.25 and 14 percent of the mission fuel would provide equiva- lent protection to that given subsonic jet transport operations by the combined civil air regulation en route and holding requirements.

It was also found that these reserves, in combination with a planned 260-

nautical-mile alternate, would provide ample fuel to proceed at subsonic speeds

to an adequate airport in the event of a two-engine failure anywhere en route

from NewYork to Paris.

TABLE I VARIATION OF ATMOSPHERIC CONDITIONS FROM 1962 STANDARD WIND VELOCITY, KNOTS TEMPERATURE, °F SEASON FLIGHT STANDARD STANDARD PHASE MEAN DEVIAT ON MEAN DEVIATION I CLIMB AND 37 W "1"22 -4.3 -I-10,6 DESCENT I WINTER CRUISE -2.6 4- 9.0 31 W :1:22.6 CLIMB AND 26 W :E 19 4.5 ..* 8.9 DESCENT SUMMER CRUISE 4W 4-7.7 fl.O 4- 3.5 TABLE II EN ROUTE RESERVE-FUEL FACTORS STANDARD STANDARD DEVIATION FACTOR DEVIATION IN PERCENT OF PLANNED MISSION FUEL WIND ERROR I0 KNOTS 0,57 TEMPERATURE ERROR 5 ° F 0.86 DRAG (.5% 1.33 SPECIFIC FUEL CONSUMPTION 4% (EACH ENGINE) ';'.00 FUEL GAGE ERROR 0.5% 0.50 EN ROUTE DEVIATIONS: L CLIMB 1,000 L8 FUEL FROM PREDICTED 0.56 2, CRUISE (LATERAL) 90 N,MI. 0.24 5, CRUISE (VERTICAL) CONSIDERED AS SEPARATE FACTOR I COMBfNED STANDARD DEVIATION OF MISS/ON FUEL: 2.73 % EFFECT OF FLIGHT-LEVEL ASSIGNMENT COMBINED EFFECT OF WIND AND TEMPERATURE ON DESIGN-RANGE REQUIREMENT ON DESIGN-RANGE REQUIREMENT I.O SUMMER CONDITIONS FLIGHT LEVELS I.O _SUMMER .IC .IO PROB- ALL FLIGHTS AT ABILITY OPTIMUM ALTITU .01 P-,o, .001 _ _ I _, _ I .001 I L 0 I00 200 $00 400 500 0 I00 200 300 400 500 600 700 RANGE INCREMENT, N. Mi.

RANGE INCREMENT, N.Mi Figure 1 Figure 2 EFFECT OF PAYLOAD VARIATION ON DESIGN-RANGE REQUIREMENT 3 FLIGHT LEVELS ; SUMMER CONDITIONS I0 R, 100% I0 PROBABILITY .01 001 I O I00 200 300 400 500 600 700 RANGE INCREMENT, N MI Figure 3 PROBABILITY OF RESERVE-FUEL REQUIREMENT EN ROUTE AND HOLDING FUEL .10 '" "x SUBSONIC ,JET TRANSPORT PRO BAB I LI TY I _.'._- SUPERSONIC .olI- "_&, TRANSPORT .0011 I I _qF_ \ I 0 .05 .10 .15 .20 AWF/WMF Figure 4 SUBSONIC RANGE REMAINING AFTER TWO-ENGINE FAILURE 3,000 2,00C RANGE TRANSPORT _ REMAINING, N Mi 111/111 / "\\\\\ \ / .

I,OOC // \_#-- DISTANCE TO NEAREST // _'. ALTERNATE AIRPORT , 1,000 2,000 3,000 4,000 DISTANCE FROM TAKE-OFF WHEN FAILURE OCCURS, NMi Figure .5 22.

THE EFFECT OF YAW COUPLING IN TURNING MANEUVERS OF LARGE TRANSPORT AIRCRAFT By Walter E. McNeill and Robert C. Innis NASA Ames Research Center SUMMARY A study has been made, using a piloted moving simulator, of the effects of the yaw-coupling parameters Np and NSa on the lateral-directional handling qualities of a large transport airplane at landing-approach airspeed.

It is shown that the desirable combinations of these parameters tend to be more proverse when compared with values typical of current aircraft. Results of flight tests in a large variable-stability Jet transport showed trends which were similar to those of the simulator data. Areas of minor disagreement 3 which were traced to differences in airplane geometry, indicate that pilot conscious- ness of side acceleration forces can be an important factor in handling quali- ties of future long-nosed transport aircraft.

INTRODUCTI ON It is generally recognized that, all else being favorable, an airplane with good handling qualities is a safe airplane from the standpoint of not adding unnecessarily to the pilot's workload during the critical flight tasks.

Improved airplane handling qualities have been the subject of much flight and simulator research by various agencies. More recently, emphasis in NASA piloted-simulator work has been directed toward the lateral-directiona2 char- acteristics of large aircraft, such as the supersonic transport in the landing approach and take-off.

These studies, as well as past work, have pointed out some of the factors which determine that an airplane will handle well in a lateral-directional sense during such critical situations as an instrument landing approach. These factors are: (1) There should be minimum excitation of the lateral-directional, or Dutch roll, oscillation either by pilot control inputs or in rough air. (2) Roll-control power and damping should provide reasonably quick attainment of desired bank angles without overshoot. (3) The spiral stability should be nearly neutral so that the pilot need not hold excessive aileron into or against an established turn. (4) Dihedral effect should be positive but mild in amount. (5) There should be a minimum of sideslip developed in rolling maneuvers, such as turn entries and reversals_ so that negligible rudder coor- dination is required by the pilot; in other words_ the airplane should be "two control." It has long been known that during turn entries made with ailerons alone the yaw rate is likely to remain zero momentarily or even to vary in the wrong direction before eventually continuing in the proper direction. In 20.5 either case, sideslip angles build up and, in addition to subjecting passengers and crew to uncomfortable side forces, much greater roll-control effort is required if the airplane has an appreciably large dihedral effect. The recent NASA simulator work has shown up this tendency to a degree that can even lead to lateral instability, or a pilot-induced oscillation, when the pilot is maneuvering at low speeds.

The tendency to build up sideslip in the manner just described is accen- tuated in large airplanes designed for supersonic cruise because of their char- acteristically long slender configuration having an unusually high yawing moment of inertia; that is, the mass is mostly distributed along the fuselage.

For these reasons, the last area of interest (factor (5)) was chosen for further detailed study. It is the purpose of this paper to present some of the results of this study and to show how certain factors influence the yaw coupling and how optlmumbehavior may be obtained.

SYMBOLS wing span, feet Rolling moment rolling-moment coefficient, qSb Yawing moment Cn yawing-moment coefficient, qSb roll moment of inertia, slug-foot 2 IX yaw moment of inertia, slug-foot 2 IZ P rolling angular Velocity, radians per second q dynamic pressure, pounds per square foot S wing reference area, square feet V true airspeed, feet per second amplitude of first sideslip excursion during sidestep maneuver, degrees _a aileron deflection, degrees or radians Dutch roll damping ratio maximum bank angle during first turn of sidestep maneuver, degrees

¢1

LSa = ix C_5 a qSb Cnsa NSa = iz qSb 2 Np = _zzCnp P.R. pilot rating TESTS Motion Simulator The simulator used in the present study was the Ames 5-degree-of-freedom motion simulator. A photograph of this device is presented in figure 1. In the cockpi% the pilot was subjected to pitch and yaw angular motions dupli- cating those which would be encountered in the airplane being simulated. (Roll motions were attenuated to 25 percent of the computed values to avoid unrealis- tic side forces on the pilot due to cab tilt.) Advantage was also taken of the ability of the device to impose side motions on the pilot during lateral- directional maneuvers by facing the cockpit outward. Large rates of travel around the track, with the attendant noise and extraneous longitudinal forces 3 were avoided by washing out the acceleration commands to the simulator arm.

The resulting maximum lateral excursions of the cab were about 15 to 20 feet.

Cockpit controls and instrumentation typical of those in conventional transport aircraft were available to the pilot. Motion and instrument drive signals were obtained from a 6-degree-of-freedom analog simulation.

Example Airplane The example airplane chosen for the simulator study was one of the final versions of the SCAT 16 in the landing configuration. The SCAT 16 was origi- nated by the NASA as a possible variable-sweep supersonic transport. Some of the features of the airplane which relate to the study are shown in figure 2.

The characteristics which were especially pertinent to the study were the long distance of the pilot ahead of the center of gravity (100 feet) and the large ratio of yawing to rolling moment of inertia (about 6). Most current Jet transports have values from approximately 50 to 60 feet for the distance between the center of gravity and the cockpit and of about 2 or 3 for the inertia ratio. This ratio is important since it can be considered as a measure of the resistance of the airplane to applied yawing moments for a given response to roll-control input.

Test Maneuvers Tasks were chosen for evaluation in the simulator of the lateral- directional behavior of the airplane which would represent the most critical low-speed operating conditions. The instrument landing approach was selected as the main condition upon which to base the study. This condition requires possibly the most concentrated effort by the pilot and is certainly one of the situations in which good handling qualities are needed to help assure safe operation.

There are four of these evaluation tasks. First, the pilot became familiar with the airplane at approach speed in maneuvers such as entries to steady turns, recoveriesj roll reversals, steady sideslips, and Dutch roll oscilla- tions. Second, straight instrument landing approaches were made by using deviation information derived from an instrument landing system. Third, the pilot was required, shortly after beginning an approach, to correct an abrupt offset, introduced in the localizer needle, that corresponded to a lateral deviation between 150 and 200 feet. This correction was made by executing a sidestep, or S-turn, maneuver without use of rudder for coordination. Fourth, the sidesteps were repeated by use of coordinating rudder. Figure 3 provides a closer look at the sidestep maneuver. The flight path is shown in plan view, and the variations with time of bank angle and roll rate in response to the pilot's roll-control input during the maneuver are also indicated. The side- step was chosen as the primary evaluation maneuver because it was readily per- formed in the simulator and it placed the greatest demand on the pilot for proper phasing of rudder when coordination was desired.

Some flight work reported in reference i indicated that the mini_mzm time to perform a sidestep maneuver without exceeding reasonable bank angles was about lO seconds, which is close to the Dutch roll oscillation periods pre- dicted for most supersonic transports at approach speeds. In order that any possible effects of resonant coupling between the sidestep and the Dutch roll mode be revealed, three nominal DUtch roll periods of lO, 7, and 5 seconds were investigated. (Additional theoretical studies of the sidestep maneuver pertaining to advanced airplane configurations have been reported in ref. 2.)

co6 RESULTS AND DISCUSSION Simulator Study The results of the simulator study are presented in figure 4. Plotted one against the other are the aerodymamic derivatives which were chosen as the major variables in the study; they are the yaw due to rolling angular velocity Np and the yaw due to pilot's aileron-control input for a given roll effort NSa/LGa. These parameters were selected on the basis of their strong influence on the amount of self-coordination inherent in an airplane and on the amount of sideslip developed when it is not well coordinated. The ranges of values covered are indicated approximately by the overall shaded areas in the figure.

The positive values are called "proverse_" indicating a tendency to yaw into the turn, and the negative values of both parameters are termed "adverse," indicating a tendency to yaw away from the turn. These parameters were varied at the three values of Dutch roll period previously mentioned. The Dutch roll damping ratio was set at 0.153 which corresponds to about 7/10 of a cycle to damp to half-amplitude.

Each of the various combinations of these variables was assigned, on the basis of the test maneuvers_ a rating according to the widely used pilot- opinion rating scale. (See table I and ref. 3.) It was possible, then, to arrive at boundaries of constant pilot opinion corresponding to ratings of 3-5, which separated satisfactory and unsatisfactory characteristics for normal operation, and of 6.5, which separated acceptable and unacceptable character- istics for emergency operation. (See fig. 4.)

For each value of Dutch roll period# an area of satisfactory combinations of Np and NSa/LSa was observed to be oriented diagonally and indicated a "trade-off" between these two parameters. The results further indicated that a proverse value (within limits) for either or both of these parameters was desirable. Pilot comments indicate that these satisfactory areas occurred when sideslip excursions were near a minimum without use of coordinating rudder.

Essential agreement with the pilot comments is indicated in figure 4 by the dashed lines in the middle of the satisfactory areas inasmuch as they are close to lines of minimum sideslip measured from the sidestep data.

Although it is not customary to design a value of Np into an airplane (it is a difficult quantity even to measure in a wind tunnel or in flight)3 the value is somewhat negative for most swept-wing airplanes in the flight con- dition presently discussed. The value of Np predicted for the basic SCAT 16 used as the example airplane was -0.1176 in body axes, as indicated in fig- ure 4. The satisfactory areas shown in figure 4, then, represent a significant change from the usual negative value of Np.

A widening of the satisfactory area is observed at the intermediate period of 7 seconds, indicating a wider latitude or tolerance of variations of Np or NSa. At first glance, this apparent tolerance might tend to confirm the 2o7 existence of a resonant coupling effect between the sidestep maneuver and the Dutch roll mode at the periods of lO and 5 seconds. Comments by the pilots indicate, however_ that any resonant coupling which might have been present was nearly undetectable. Measurements of sideslip occurring in uncoordinated side- step maneuvers in the simulator confirm these pilot comments. The pilots felt that whenever large sideslip excursions were expected, adjustments of pilot- control technique were made which automatically minimized coupling with the Dutch roll oscillation. It should be noted that the boundaries of figure 4 show a similarity to those resulting from work performed on a V/STOL air- craft using a fixed piloted simulator. (See ref. 4.)

Flight Evaluation In addition to the simulator work discussed in the section entitled "Simulator Stu&ys" certain combinations of Np and NSa_8 a were evaluated by the same pilots in flight under contract with The Boeing Company in their large four-engined jet transport especially adapted for variable-stabillty testing. Although it would have been desirable to make the flight evaluations by using an airplane similar in geometry to the SCAT 163 the choice of airplane for this purpose was based on availability of a large jet transport capable of artificial variation of the aerodynamic parameters which were of interest (i.e., the yawing-moment derivatives). The flight results, from test maneuvers which were essentially the same as those employed in the simulator, are shown in com- parison with the simulator results in figure 5- The bounded areas indicated as satlsfactory_ acceptable, and unacceptable are from the simulator, and the plotted points represent the combinations evaluated in flight with the resulting pilot ratings. Data are presented for the three Dutch roll periods of lO, 7, and 5 seconds.

It can be seen that, for the period of i0 seconds 3 agreement was very good in the area of the lower unacceptable boundary (P.R. = 6.5). In the region in which the simulator results were satisfactory, the flight results showed a slight preference for more proverse values of Np or NSa/LSa. The solid data symbols are for a much higher damping ratio (_ = 0.40), and a corresponding improvement in rating is noted. For the period of 7 seconds, agreement between simulator and flight is still good, with somewhat more pilot leniency with respect to adverse values of the main variables. For the period of seconds, the limited number of flight data points obtained show an even more generous acceptance of adverse values.

Undoubtedly, some of the apparent leniency shown in flight in certain areas was due to the differences in airplane geometry (for example, the dis- tance from the center of gravity to the cockpit). Another cause for the minor discrepancies might be a lack of precise definition of the stability and con- trol parameters of the basic airplane used in the flight simulation.

The comparison between pilot ratings obtained in the simulator and in flight is shown in a different way in figure 6. Here pilot ratings are plotted as functions of _i/_i, which is the ratio of the amplitude of the first side- slip excursion to the maximum bank angle in the first turn of a sidestep maneu- ver. The simulator results and the flight results are both indicated. The data for all three values of Dutch roll period are lumped together in this fig- ure. A somewhat lower sensitivity of pilot opinion to _i/_i in flight than in the simulator is readily apparent. The pilots felt that this lower sensitiv- ity of pilot rating to sideslip in flight was mostly due to the absence of sig- nificant side acceleration forces at the pilot's cockpit. In the simulator these forces were very noticeable and even became objectionable at the shorter Dutch roll periods. Although the pilots, in establishing their ratings, paid particular attention to the magnitude of the sideslip-angle disturbances in turn entries and reversals, the side acceleration forces undoubtedly had a strong adverse effect on pilot opinion. This effect would be expected when one con- siders the 2-to-i ratio which existed between the distance from the center of gravity to the cockpit in the simulation and that of the subsonic jet airplane used in the flight evaluations. As a result of the longer nose length assumed in the simulation, the pilots apparently were more aware of the effects of yawing angular accelerations than they were in the airplane.

These impressions were verified by actual measurement of side accelerations imposed on the pilots during sidestep maneuvers in the simulator and in flight.

In the simulator, these side accelerations (for a given amount of sideslip) increased markedly at the short Dutch roll periods, whereas in flight the meas- ured accelerations remained at a low level for all periods tested.

When _I/_i was negative, an indication of excessive yawing into turns, a crossed-control technique was necessary if any rudder coordination at all was attempted. This was considered impractical and therefore was not advocated by the pilots as a normal technique. The proverse characteristics associated with some of the extreme negative values of _i/_i also tended to create objection- able pilot-coupling effects which gave the impression of lateral instability or a decrease in roll damping. These objectionable characteristics are reflected by the extremely steep rise of numerical pilot rating for the negative values of _i/_i in figure 6. Therefore, one should not proceed too far in the positive direction (by design or by artificial stability augmentation) with either of the yaw-coupling parameters Np or NSa.

CONCLUDING REMARKS A study has been made, through the use of a ground-based piloted simulator and a variable-stability airplane, of the effects of the aerodynamic yaw- coupling parameters on the lateral-directional handling qualities of a large transport airplane at landing-approach airspeed. It has been shown that combi- nations of these parameters that influence yaw coupling can be found which result in minimal requirements for pilot rudder coordination in turning maneuvers, thus decreasing pilot workload. In order that "two-control" qualities be built into large airplane designs, including the supersonic transport, it has been shown 2o9 that the yaw-coupling parameters should be tailored in the proverse direction when compared with those of past and present aircraft. The trends shown in this study agreed in general with results published by other investigators. The trend toward increased nose length should make the pilot more aware of devia- tions from optimum yaw coupling.

Although it is difficult to control the value of yaw due to rolling in a given configuration, it may be possible during the course of the design to assure that this parameter does not become overly adverse (or even excessively proverse).

If it should prove that even careful aerodynamic design of the airplane cannot result in desirable combinations of these parameters, the alteration of the basic airplane characteristics by means of artificial stability augmentation is an obvious solution.

REFERENCES 1. Perry, D. H.; Port, W. G. A.; and Morrall, J. C.: A Flight Study of the Sidestep Manoeuvre During Landing. R. & M. No. 3347, Brit. A.R.C., 1964.

2. Tomlinson, B. N.: An Extensive Theoretical Study of the Ability of Slender- Wing Aircraft To Perform Sidestep Manoeuvres at Approach Speeds. R. & M.

No. 3359, Brit. A.R.C., 1964.

3. Cooper, George E.: Understanding and Interpreting Pilot Opinion. Aeron. Eng.

Rev., vol. 16, no. 3, Mar. 1957, PP. 47-51, 56.

4. Dolbin, Benjamin H., Jr.; and Eckhart, Franklin F.: Investigation of Lateral- Directional Handling Qualities of V/STOL Airplanes in Cruising Flight.

Rept. No. TB-1794-F-3 (Contract No. P. O. 78839-CAP), Cornell Aeron. Lab., Inc., Dec. 15, 1963.

Or-4 o

o

0 0 0 o tt_ o o +_ 0 0 % %-I-_ .rq o t_ _+_ 0 _ 0 0 0 0 0 • r--I % I-q !

.,q b-- CO0_ 0 !

-0 0 0 ,-I 4_ .r-I -r-I 4_ ,-t .r-I

A-31542

Figure 1

SIDESTEP MANEUVER CHARACTERISTICS OF BASIC AIRPLANE (SCAT 16)

BANK ANGLE, ': [ - . j

deg -20 deglsec RATE' -10

TOTAL deg AILERON, 3 p = - + $

Y A W MOM. OF INERTIA . 13.4 X IO6 S l U g - f 1 *

~ 6,0 -30 ROLL M O M OF INERTIA 2.24X IO6 S1Ug-f12 TIME- APPROACH SPEED 130 knots

Figure 2 Figure 3

FLIGHT COMPARED W)TH SIMULATOR PILOT--OPINION BOUNDARIES FROM SIMULATOR PERIOD = I0 sec PERIOD = [0 sec .3 i .3 i i i i PR, PROVERSE PROVERSE .2 .2 o {=0.15 _FLIGHT ¢3.0 Np=YAW DUE TO • { =0.40J

iiiiiiii!!ili i i i i iiiii!iiiiiiiiii!i!iii!iiiii!iiiiiiii ROLLING VELOCITY

.I .I Nt =YAW DUE TO ua AILERON CONTROL 0 1 t _ ._il;r.: r_p :,:.:+.... ::!::::: :::::::::: :::::: _:::::::::::::: i_ Np O s_ts ii_iiii!iiiig_ "-.2

-,2 ®

ADVERSE ADVERSE i i i I t t t -.02 0 .02 .04 .06 .08 -'_06 -.04 -_2 0 .02 .04 .06 ADVERSE NSa/'Lsa PROVERSE ADVERSE N_/L_ PROVERSE PERIOD = 7sec PERIOD • 5 sec PERIOD = 7 sec PERIOD = 5 sec .3 r .3 i f i i J .2 .2_ \\- .... \ 5.5\.

3.5 .I ,\_.

Np Np O :: _? ........

................

-.i :ii:i:i:i:i.6,5 : : :::i: -._. , -'-04 -.02 0 .02 .04 04 -.02 0 .0_ .04 .08 ,10 -.04 -,02 0 ,02 .04 ,06 -.04 -.02 0 .02 .04 NSo,/L_ a N_c//L_ a N_o//L_ O Nso/L_o Figure Figure 4- EFFECT OF SIDESLIP ON PILOT RATING Figure 6 2:].._ 23. AN ASSESSMENT OF A TITANIUM ALLOY FOR SUPERSONIC TRANSPORT OPERATIONS By George J. Heimerl and Herbert F. Hardrath NASA Langley Research Center SUMMARY An assessment is given of the materials problems and implications regarding the use of Ti-8A_-lMo-lV alloy sheet for the skin of a supersonic transport.

Although the assessment of this alloy in the duplex annealed condition is gener- ally favorable, several questions remain unanswered and new ones continue to arise. The seriousness of the salt stress corrosion problem at 500 ° F and above under flight conditions cannot be predicted on the basis of current laboratory corrosion tests. A new potential stress corrosion problem at ambient tempera- tures in the presence of cracks and salt water requires investigation. The ability to withstand a 50,000-hour exposure at 550 ° F without undue degradation of the material or welds will remain doubtful until more long-time data are available. The substitution of a more corrosion-resistant and stable titanium alloy in the tension critical areas of the structure may prove advisable.

INTRODUCTION Although a number of titanium alloys have been under consideration for the skin material for a supersonic transport, Ti-8AZ-1Mo-IV alloy sheet has been favored for this application because of its relatively high stiffness and strength. This paper will attempt to assess some of the structural materials problems and implications regarding the use of this titanium alloy in terms of current research and knowledge of present-day aircraft materials.

SYMBOLS stress concentration factor

KT

M Mach number N number of cycles to failure S stress nominal lg stress for level flight at take-off gross weight S1 g maximum stress during load cycle SMAX mean stress Sm shortening for salt-coated specimen 50 shortening for uncoated specimen Abbreviations: SA single anneal DA duplex anneal TA triplex anneal SPECIFIC MATERIALS PROBLEMS Flight conditions dictate the choice of materials and point to specific materials problems. The general features of the loading and temperature history for a point on the lower surface of the wing in a supersonic flight are shown in figure 1. In this schematic, loads are indicated in terms of the ratio of the stress S during flight to the nominal 1 g stress Slg for level undisturbed flight at take-off gross weight. Most of the significant stress cycles occur during the climb portion of the flight while the aircraft is still at ambient temperature. As gust activity is reduced at high altitudes, few dynamic stress cycles of any consequence are encountered during cruise. During cruise, how- ever, the average temperature of the skin material near the leading edges will vary from about 275 ° F to 550 ° F for Mach 2.2 to Mach 5 operation with the max- imum running up to about 600 ° F except in engine areas. Dynamic stresses encountered during descent are less severe because of the reduced fuel load. A significant ground-air-ground cycle also occurs at stations outboard of the landing gear. With the assumption that the material is unaffected by exposure to elevated temperature, fatigue damage will be independent of flight length to a first approximation.

A flight history such as that Just discussed involves considerations of material strength, behavior, and life at ambient and elevated temperatures.

In the first place, the properties of a new structural material such as Ti-8AZ-1Mo-IV alloy need to be established over the temperature range. The principal materials problems resulting from supersonic transport operation are as follows: (i) Fatigue strength (2) Fatigue crack propagation (5) Residual strength

(4) Stability of material and welds

(5) Salt stress corrosion

The properties which require the most consideration from the standpoint of ser-

viceability in the tension critical portion of the structure are the fatigue

strength, fatigue crack propagation, and the residual strength. The metallur-

gical stability of the material and welds must also be known for exposures up

to at least 30,000 hours at temperatures up to about 550° F if there is to be

any assurance that the structure will be durable. The possibility of salt

stress corrosion cracking occurring during cruise must likewise be considered,

as this titanium alloy is susceptible to this type of corrosion even for only

a slight amount of salt. Creep is not considered to be a problem, except in

highly stressed regions such as joints, and is not listed here because it is

inconsequential under nominal load and temperature conditions.

STRENGTH ANDSTABILITYCHARACTERISTICS

Fatigue Strength

Current fatigue data (refs. i and 2) for Ti-8AI-IMo-IV alloy are summarized

in figure 2. The bar graphs give the fatigue strength of various specimen con-

figurations and joints at a life of 106 cycles for a meanstress of 25 ksi.

Data are shown for three temperatures and for the single, duplex, and triplex

annealed conditions. No attempt is madeto discuss these results in detail.

The results can be summarizedby saying that the duplex annealed (DA) condition

gives the best material and fusion-weld strengths, and elevated temperatures

are not detrimental. The relative reduction in strength due to spot-welding

and joints is no more than that due to stress raisers in current aircraft struc-

tures. This brief look implies that the fatigue characteristics of the new

material in the duplex annealed condition do not pose any unusual problems.

Fatigue Crack Propagation

One of the most important considerations in assessing the fail-safe char-

acteristics of a structure is the rate of fatigue crack propagation. Some

results (ref. 3) from axial-load fatigue tests of 8-inch-wide specimens with

zero to tension loading are shown for Ti-8Al-lMo-lV alloy sheet (duplex anneal)

in figure 3. Crack growth rates are plotted logarithmically in terms of Crack

lengths. On the left the comparative crack growth at 80° F is shownfor the

titanium alloy and two common aluminum alloys. The meanstress was 25 ksi for

the titanium alloy and 15 ksi for the aluminum alloys. All the curves have

approximately the sameslope so that the change in crack rate with crack length

is about the samefor these materials. Crack growth rates for the titanium

alloy and the aluminum alloys are also comparable in magnitude. On the right, the effect of temperature on crack growth is shown for the titanium alloy.

Crack propagation rates decrease with increase in temperature. Consequently,

fatigue crack progagation does not appear to be any more of a problem at normal

and elevated temperatures for this titanium alloy than in present aircraft, unless the material is degraded by long-time elevated-temperature exposure.

Residual Static Tensile Strength

The residual static tensile strength is another important consideration

with regard to fail-safe characteristics of a part containing a crack or other

damage. Someresults (ref. 4) for Ti-8AZ-1Mo-IV (duplex anneal) for 8-inch-

wide specimenswhich had been precracked by fatigue loading are shown in fig-

ure 4. The ordinate is the ratio of the gross stress at fracture to the ulti-

mate tensile strength at 80° F and the abscissa is the ratio of the initial

crack length to the specimen width. On the left, comparisons are shownwith

two common aluminumalloys at 80° F. The straight dashed line represents the

result which would be obtained if the crack had no effect beyond that of

removing material. In this comparison, .the titanium alloy exhibits slightly

better residual strength characteristics than the best of the two aluminum

alloys. In addition, the titanium alloy has desirable slow crack growth charac-

teristics; thus, the residual strength at 80° F is no cause for special concern.

Onthe right is shown the effect of low and elevated temperatures on the resid-

ual strength of the titanium alloy. The effect of temperature is rather small,

although somedecrease in strength is indicated at 550° F and -ll0 ° F. Cruising

conditions should not affect the residual strength appreciably unless the mate-

rial is changedby long exposure to elevated temperature.

Stability of Material and Welds

One of the main concerns regarding materials for a supersonic transport is

their ability to withstand 30,000 hours or more of exposure at elevated temper-

atures. To answer this question, selected titanium-alloy and stainless-steel

sheet specimens of various types were exposed at 550 ° F, removed from the ovens

at intervals, and tested at room temperature (ref. 5). Figure 5 shows the effect of unstressed exposure at 550 ° F on the notch, tensile, and tensile spot- weld strengths of Ti-8A_-lMo-lV alloy sheet (single anneal) at 80 ° F. The effect is shown by a change from unity of the relative strength - the ratio of the strength after exposure to that before exposure. The notch strength (sharp ASTM type edge notch, ref. 6) and the tensile strength are relatively unaffected by exposures up to 22,000 hours at 550 ° F. The tensile spotweld strength, how- ever, decreases about 15 percent for this exposure. Some deterioration of weld strength may therefore be anticipated.

Recent results (fig. 6) of an investigation at the Langley Research Center show the effect of a 24,000-hour unstressed exposure at 550 ° F on the axial-load fatigue strength at 80 ° F of Ti-8A_-lMo-lV alloy sheet (single anneal) for a mean stress of 25 ksi. This figure is a conventional S-N plot in which SMAX is the maximum stress during a load cycle and N is the life in cycles. The data for the unexposed and exposed material (circles and squares, respectively) are given for both unnotched and edge notched (K T = 4) specimens. Examination of these results shows no significant effects of the 24,000-hour exposure on the fatigue strength for either the notched or unnotched material. These results and those in the previous figure indicate that Ti-8AZ-IMo-IV alloy sheet in the single annealed condition is relatively unaffected by exposure at 550 ° F, except in the case of the spotwelds. Of concern at the present time, however, is recent evidence at the Langley Research Center of instability of this alloy in the favored duplex annealed condition after exposure for 2000 to 4000 hours at 550 ° F. More time is required to assess this development.

SALT STRESS CORROSION AT ELEVATED TEMPERA_W/RES The remainder of this paper discusses the problem of salt stress corro- sion of titanium alloys at elevated temperatures, a problem which is receiving considerable attention from the aircraft industry, materials producers, and research laboratories. The information which follows presents some results of an investigation at the Langley Research Center of the severity of the problem, of the effect of various environmental factors, and of the effectiveness of several protective treatments.

Relative Susceptibility and Thresholds In order to carry out the investigations, many small elastically and resid- ually stressed specimens were salt coated and placed in ovens for exposures up to 20,000 hours at 400 ° F to 600 ° F. The amount of stress corrosion damage is determined from room-temperature compression or bending tests of specimens taken from the ovens at regular intervals.

A schematic is included to provide some background on one of the corrosion tests at the Langley Research Center. (See fig. 7.) The self-stressed specimen (on the right) consists of two strips of sheet material which are bent and spot- welded together at the ends in such a way as to induce uniform bending stresses of the desired amount in the curved portions. When an uncoated specimen is loaded in compression (see dashed curve), it develops the maximum shortening 5o possible without fracturing. On the other hand, if the specimen is salt coated, exposed at elevated temperature until stress corrosion cracking occurs, and then loaded in compression at room temperature (see solid lines), the specimen will fracture and the shortening 8 is reduced - the longer the exposure, the less the shortening, and the greater the embrittlement. The shortening and bend ductility of the uncoated specimen are unaffected by the exposure time if the material is stable. In any case, the relative shortening 8/8o is a measure of the stress corrosion damage - the smaller the ratio, the more severe the corro- sion. A description of the specimen and test and a correlation of the short- ening measurements to the crack penetration are given in reference 7.

The severity and extent of this salt stress corrosion problem for Ti-8A_-lMo-lV alloy sheet is illustrated in figure 8. The relative suscepti- bility of three titanium alloys at 550 ° F (ref. 8) is shown on the left. Severe stress corrosion cracking develops within 2000 hours for Ti-8Al-lMo-lV. Suscep- tibility is less for Ti-6AI-4V, and Ti-4A_-3Mo-IV is completely resistant up to 7000 hours and more exposure. Thus, Ti-8AZ-IMo-IV is a poor selection as far as elevated-temperature salt stress corrosion is concerned. 0nly a very thin salt coating is necessary to cause severe damage. On the right, stress and tempera- ture thresholds are shown for Ti-8AI-IMo-IV alloy for exposures of 400 hours (solid lines) and 1600 hours (dashed lines) for temperatures in the 400 ° F to 600 ° F range. For a 400-hour exposure, no stress corrosion occurs until about 500 ° F is reached, regardless of the stress level. Above this temperature, Row- ever, the effect of both temperature and stress becomes critical. The 1600-hour exposure (dashed line) lowers the temperature threshold to about 475 ° F.

Investigation is continuing at the Langley Research Center and some stress cor- rosion is now being found at 450 ° F after 5000 hours exposure with a stress of 50 ksi. The seriousness of this problem in supersonic transports is difficult to assess_ however, because the flight environment is radically different fz'om laboratory test conditions. With the assumption that laboratory test results apply to flight conditions, a temperature threshold criterion of 500 ° F at the leading edges would limit transport operation to about Mach 2.7 for unprotected material in order to avoid stress corrosion.

The preceding results are for steady temperature conditions. Under cyclic heating conditions, the situation seems more encouraging. In an investigation in which the total cycle is 180 minutes, maximum temperature is 550 ° F, and immersion period in 3_ percent salt solution is i0 minutes, no stress corrosion was obtained after 2000 hours at a stress of 25 ksi (information from the Boeing Aircraft Company). On the other hand_ some very recent data from the U.S.

Naval Research Laboratory, for example_ indicate that some titanium alloys may be subject to stress corrosion and embrittlement at ambient temperatures in the presence of cracks and a salt-water environment. This development requires further investigation.

Effect of Environmental Factors Attempts have been made to determine the effects of some important environ- mental factors which might provide a clue to the severity of the problem and throw some light on the stress corrosion mechanism. (See ref. 9-) Figure 9 shows preliminary results on the effects of oxygen, pressure_ moisture, and sur- face condition on the salt stress corrosion of Ti-8A%-IMo-IV alloy (duplex annealed) at 550 ° F. In these tests the specimens were encapsulated in glass tubes with the desired environment. The effect of oxygen is pronounced. Tests with nitrogen (containing O.i percen_ oxygen) show much less corrosion than with i00 percent oxygen. Moist chlorine is very corrosive, as the specimens failed before they could be removed from the furnace for testing (the curve is illustrative only). The effect of pressure is marked. Tests at 34 mmHg (equiv- alent to a 70,000-foot altitude) show much less corrosion than at atmospheric pressure. Tests at 3 × 10-5 mm Hg (378,000-foot altitude) show still less cor- rosion. The effect of altitude corresponds to a decrease in oxygen and is beneficial. Tests with moist and dry air (dewpoints of 60 ° F and -40 ° F, respectively) seemed to show little effect of moisture. The effect of the sur- face condition_ whether polished, in the as-received condition, or anodized (300 to 600 _ thick), likewise seemed to make little difference. Unless an unexpected potent environmental factor such as ozone should change the picture,

these experiments indicate that salt stress corrosion in flight would be less

severe than that in most laboratory tests.

Protective Treatments

Elevated-temperature salt stress corrosion cracking can be eliminated by

keeping temperatures sufficiently low or by utilizing protective treatments or

coatings. Figure i0 showspreliminary results for several protective treatments

for Ti-SAZ-IMo-IV alloy sheet (duplex anneal) at 550° F. The specimen shown is

a formed 90-degree-bend type with a i/8-inch radius which develops residual ten-

sile stresses on the inside of the bend. (See ref. i0.) In this case, the

relative deflection is a measure of the stress corrosion cracking. The lower

curve is the base or reference curve for salt-coated specimens which have not

been given any protective treatment. Fine-shot-peening, nickel-plating, and

vibratory-cleaning methods all proved effective. The downwardslope of the

lines does not meanthat stress corrosion cracking has occurred, but only that

the formed specimen is embrittled somewhat by the exposure - more evidence of

the instability of this alloy in the duplex condition. The fine shot peening

consisted of a lO-second treatment using O.002-inch-diameter glass spheres and

a pressure of 60 psi. Although the thin nickel plating (i/3 to 1/2 mil) was

effective, it tended to peel off when the specimen was bent to any considerable

extent. The vibratory cleaning treatment after forming is a conventional

cleaning and deburring process. The treatment consisted of placing the formed

specimens in a bath containing aluminumoxide prisms and a cleaning solution.

The bath was vibrated at 1450 cpmfor 8 hours. The reason for the effective-

ness of this treatment is not known. Preliminary results for polyimide coatings

(1/2 to i mil thick) indicate that they are effective to begin with but show

signs of degradation after i000 hours at 600° F. Considerable work needs to be

done in this area in order to determine the practicability and durability of

various possible treatments.

CONCLUDING REMARKS

The assessment of the serviceability of Ti-8AZ-IMo-IV alloy sheet in the

duplex annealed condition for a supersonic transport is generally favorable,

although new problems continue to arise, and time may showthat someother alloy

or condition may prove a better choice, at least for someportions of the struc-

ture. This assessment can be summarizedas follows:

i. The seriousness of the salt stress corrosion problem at 500° F and above

under flight conditions cannot be predicted at present on the basis of current

laboratory tests. Until more is knownabout environmental effects and the

stress corrosion mechanism, the possibility of stress corrosion cracking occur-

ring at temperatures above 450° F should be guarded against, particularly in

joints and highly stressed parts. Thermal control methods, protective treat-

ments or coatings, or the substitution of a more corrosion resistant alloy are

advisable in tension-critical areas in the high-temperature regions near the

leading edges and engines.

2. Only qualitative preliminary information is available on the stress cor-

rosion of titanium alloys at ambient temperatures in the presence of cracks and

a salt-water environment. An investigation of this new problem is required

before any assessmentcan be made.

3. The ability to withstand 30,000 hours exposure at 550° F has yet to be

established for this alloy in the duplex annealed condition. Present indica-

tions are that it is not completely stable, and somedegradation in material

properties and in welds may be expected. Additional time and research are

needed for this evaluation.

4. Properties which are important in tension-critical areas - fatigue

...... _ ...... , and residual _agtn - do not _pp_ar to pose any

strength_ .... _ ....... +_............

new problems at normal and elevated temperatures except for possible long-time

temperature and corrosion effects which have yet to be established.

REFERENCES i. Gideon, D. N.; Marschall, C. W.; Holden, F. C.; and Hyler, W. S.: Explora- tory Studies of Mechanical Cycling Fatigue Behavior of Materials for the Supersonic Transport. NASA CR-28, 1964.

2. Peterson, John J. : Fatigue Behavior of AM-350 Stainless Steel and Titanium- 8Al-lMo-lV Sheet at Room Temperature, 550 ° F and 800 ° F. NASA CR-23, 1964.

3. Hudson, C. Michael: Fatigue-Crack Propagation in Several Titanium and Stainless-Steel Alloys and One Superalloy. NASA TN D-2331, 1964.

4. Figge, I. E. : Residual Strength of Alloys Potentially Useful in Supersonic Aircraft. NASA TN D-2613, 1965.

5. Heimerl, George J.; Baucom, Robert M.; Manning, Charles R., Jr.; and Braski, David N.: Stability of Four Titanium-Alloy and Four Stainless-Steel Sheet Materials After Exposures up to 22 000 Hours at 550 ° F (561 ° K). NASA TN D-2607, 1965.

6. Anon.: Fracture Testing of High-Strength Sheet Materials: A Report of a SpeclalASTMCommittee. ASTMBull.

Ch. l, no. 243, Jan. Jan. 1960, pp. 29-40.

Chs. 2 and 3, no. 244, Feb. 1960, pp. 18-28.

7. Heimerl, G. J.; and Braski, D. N.: A Stress Corrosion Test for Structural Sheet Materials. Mater. Res. Std., vol. 5, no. l, Jan. 1965, pp. 18-22.

8. Braski, David N.; and Heimerl, George J.: The Relative Susceptibility of Four Commercial Titanium Alloys to Salt Stress Corrosion at 550 ° F. NASA TN D-2Oll, 1963.

9. Braski, David N.: Preliminary Investigation of Effect of Environmental Factors on Salt Stress Corrosion Cracking of Ti-8Al-lMo-lV at Elevated Temperatures. NASA TM X-1048, 1964.

10. Pride, Richard A.; and Woodard, John M.: Salt-Stress-Corrosion Cracking of Residually Stressed Ti-8Al-lMo-lV Brake-Formed Sheet at 550 ° F (561 ° K). NASA TM X-1082, 1965.

FATIGUE STRENGTH OF Ti-8AI-1Mo-lV FLIGHT LOADS AND TEMPERATURES N = 106 CYCLES; Sm= 25 ksi SA DA UNNOTCHED

,.5[ "///HH/////HHHI/III////////ZZJ

SA • TEME, FUSION WELD OF DA m 80 TA_

s '1

wTzT_ 800 UNLOADED TA _NHJ SPOTWELD SPOTWELDED ANNEAL SAm STRAP JOINT SA SINGLE OPEN HOLE DA DUPLEX m 275°F AT M=2.2 ( KT= 2.5) TA TRIPLEX

c usE DESCENT\

550°F AT M=3 DAm NOTCHED TA_ (KT= 4) TIME 0 , 410 a 8no FATIGUE STRENGTH, ksi Figure 2 Figure i RESIDUAL TENSILE STRENGTH Ti- 8A'L- 1Mo-lV (DUPLEX) FATIGUE CRACK PROPAGATION EFFECT OF TEMPERATURE COMPARATIVE STRENGTH AT 80 = F Ti- 8At-IMo-IV (DUPLEX) 2xlO -4 GROSS STRESS EFFECT OF TEMPERATURE COMPARATIVE CRACK TENS. STR. AT 80 ° F GROWTH AT 80°F 1.0 \\ 10 -4 7075-T6_/// \ CRACK F GROWTH k\ _-_ Ti-8 A'I.-1Mo-IV TI-8A'L-1Mo-I_/_/ RATE, \\'_/ "\ 2024- T 3_./ / / INCH CYCLE _110 o F_/_550= FJ _ _"_ 550 ° F-_ //--2024-T:5 (CLAD) \\ 075-T6 (CLAD) \ i 0 5 -_ 0 .5 • I.O j n I __--. L 10-5 CRACK LENGTH CRACK LENGTH 1.0 .I .5 1.0 .5 SPEC.WIDTH CRACK LENGTH, IN. SPEC.WIDTH CRACK LENGTH, IN.

Figure 4 Figure 5 FATIGUE STRENGTH AFTER 550 ° F EXPOSURE EFFECT OF EXPOSURE AT 550 = F ON NOTCH, TENSILE, Ti- BAt- 1Mo-lV (SINGLE); 24,000 HR EXPOSURE; Sin= 25ksi AND SPOTWELD STRENGTHS AT 80°F 120 Ti-8A'L-1Mo- 1V (SINGLE) oo ._NEO_O_ _ ....___......_....TC H STRENGTH oO o 0 UNNOTCHED o (13 (III> (l) _TENSILE STRENGTH o oo 0 0 0 LO 80 0 [30 0 13 O_ 000 00 0 0 0 Oq_ TE_/_-_NSIL E SPOT- SMAX, RELATIVE ksi STRENGTH WELD STRENGTH EDGE NOTCHED KT :4 °_ o_ 40 [:33 o o_oO co@ w 0 UNEXPOSED o EXPOSED i I 106 107 o _ ,6 2_,x,o3 I04 I05 N, CYCLES EXPOSURE, HR Figure 6 Figure 5 SALT STRESS CORROSION OF Ti-8A'I,-1Mo-IV EFFECT OF EXPOSURE AT 550 ° F ON SHORTENING OF SALT-COATED SELF-STRESSED SPECIMENS RELATIVE SUSCEPTIBILITY STRESS AND TEMP THRESHOLDS AT 550°F REL ATIVE _ UNCOATED SHORTENING STRESS, ksi

'.o

LOAD s\

15, 25 .6 \ 5O \ EXPOSURE, HR SALT SALT AFTER BEFORE COATED COATED TEST TEST --_1600 UNCOATED .2 LT i _ 8 A.i,_ 1M"_ _--._V I ._ ,.'o '_ ; SxllO 3 3;0 460 560 66o RELATIVE SHORTENING, BIB o EXPOSURE, HR TEMPERATURE,°F Figure 7 Figure 8 EFFECT OF ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS ON SALT STRESS CORROSION Ti-SAI-IMo-IV (DUPLEX); 550°F OXYGEN PRESSURE MM -5 MM .1% REL SHORT.

(_-/-GLASS I _'2 I I I I I I I [1_,.. TUBE MO I STURE SURFACE CONDITION i_ PECIMEN I I_,/-POLISHED REL. _rDRY AIR I _\ /-AS RECEIVED IZED I I I I 3 0 I 2 3xlO 0 I 2 3xlO 3 EXPOSURE, HR EXPOSURE, HR Figure 9 SALT STRESS CORROSION PROTECTIVE TREATMENTS Ti-8 A!.- 1Mo-IV (DUPLEX) 1.0 _-____ _ FINE SHOT PEENED .B _'_ "_NICKEL PLATED "_.-...

VIBRATORY _.'_ .6 RELATIVE DEFLECTION D,EANEO_ .4 NO PROTECTION .2 _o ,60 360 ' ' Looo 3,ooo EXPOSURE AT550°F, HR Figure i0 24.

IMPLICATIONS OF THEEFFECTS OF SURFACE TEMPERATURE AND IMPEEFECTIONS ON SUPERSONIC OPERATIONS By John B. Peterson_ Jr., and Albert L. Braslow NASA Langley Research Center SUMMARY The effects of surface temperature and imperfections on the drag of the supersonic transport are discussed. The relationships among surface tempera- ture, emissivity, and skin friction are reviewed and the importance of manu- facturing and maintenance imperfections is indicated.

INTRODUCTION In the operation of a supersonic transport, considerably more attention should be given to factors that affect drag than has been the case in the operation of present-day subsonic transports because a given increment in drag will produce a larger performance penalty for the supersonic transport than for the present-day subsonic transports. Two factors affecting the drag of the supersonic transport that aircraft operators should be aware of are the effects of surface temperature and surface imperfections.

SYMBOLS DCRUISE total cruise drag of supersonic transport AD drag increment due to imperfections Df skin-friction drag increment in skin-friction drag due to roughness ADf h aircraft altitude k height of imperfection wavelength of bump L/D lift-drag ratio of supersonic transport M Mach number

T surface temperature

v_ free-stream velocity average cruise weight of supersonic transport WCRUISE X distance from leading edge in streamwise direction E surface emissivity Subscripts: ad adiabatic wall conditions SMOOTH smooth surface conditions DISCUSSION Surface Temperature Figure i shows how surface temperature affects the skin-friction drag for conditions typical of a supersonic transport. In figure i_ the ratio of the skin-friction drag at a given temperature to the skin-friction drag at the adiabatic temperature is plotted against the surface temperature. Adiabatic surface temperature is shown at 430 ° F. This value represents the temperature that a perfectly insulated surface reaches because of the frictional heating by the air. The figure shows that a decrease in temperature causes an increase in skin-friction drag. In fact, the skin friction increases about 4 percent for each i00 ° decrease in temperature because the air density near the surface increases as the temperature decreases and the air_ therefore_ behaves as though the dynamic pressure were higher and scrubs the surface harder. Since skin friction comprises about one-third of the total drag of a supersonic transport_ this effect can be important.

During cruise_ the wall temperature of the supersonic transport will be somewhat below the adiabatic value of 430°_ since heat is dissipated from the surface both by conduction into the structure and by radiation away from the surface. Figure 2 shows the effect of radiation on the surface temperature.

The ability of a surface to radiate heat is determined by a property called emissivity (shown on the figure as _). Surfaces with high emissivity can radi- ate large amounts of heat and surfaces with low emissivity cannot. Surfaces with an emissivity of i are called black bodies and surfaces with an emissivity of 0 are called perfect reflectors. This figure was prepared from the charts of reference 1 in which the interdependence of surface emissivity, surface tem- perature, and skin friction over a wide range of conditions is presented. It shows that the temperature is reduced by about 90 ° by a change in emissivity from 0 to i. This lower temperature in turn causes a higher skin friction.

Therefore_ an increase in emissivity has the favorable effect of reducing the temperature and the unfavorable effect of increasing the skin friction.

When aerodynamic heating is a problem_ a reduction in temperature obtained with high emissivities is generally more important than the increase in skin friction. For this reason_ aircraft_ such as the X-15 and A-If, have high emissivities to reduce the surface temperature. When heating is less severe and when materials that can withstand the higher temperatures are used_ the reduction in skin friction may be more desirable. In these cases_ insulation as well as low emissivity may be required to obtain high surface temperatures_ although the weight of insulation; of course, must be taken into consideration.

The surface emissivity that is chosen for the supersonic transport, there- fore_ will be dependent on such factors as Mach number and structural materials selected. In any event, whether the supersonic transport is designed with a low or a high emissivity 3 it will be important for the aircraft operators to maintain this value within design limits; otherwis% either the surface temper- ature or the skin friction will be above the design value.

Surface Imperfections Surface imperfections of the same size will have a higher drag on the supersonic transport than on current subsonic aircraft. This difference occurs because they produce wave drag at supersonic speeds and the supersonic trans- port operates at higher dynamic pressures. Examples of the drag penalties obtained in experiments at supersonic speeds are shown in figures 3_ 4, and 5.

These figures were prepared for a typical supersonic transport cruising at Mach 2.7 and an altitude of 65;000 feet with a lift-drag ratio of 8.5 and a cruise weight of 375,000 pounds. Figure 3 shows the drag penalty of i00 linear feet of a sine-wave type of bump on the surface oriented perpendicular to the airstream. This type of surface imperfection can be caused by such factors as aerodynamic heating and loading. In figure 3, the increment of drag increase_ as a fraction of the total cruise drag, is plotted against the height of the bump in inches. Two curves are shown for two different wavelengths (i0 inches and 20 inches). Although the drag increments are small, these increments can become important, as will be shown later.

Figures 4 and 5 give the drag penalties associated with i00 linear feet of forward- and rearward-facing steps; the types of surface imperfections which occur at skin joints and at the edges of access panels and doors. It should be noted that the supersonic transport will have about 2500 feet of drag-producing steps at skin joints and about 500 feet at access panels and doors. It is seen that a O.08-inch-high forward-facing step located i0 feet from the leading edge increases the cruise drag by about 0.i percent. At i00 feet from the leading edge; the drag penalty is, of cours% smaller. The step heights considered here are small with respect to the boundary-layer thickness under these flight conditions. Therefore; the drag of rearward-facing steps shown in figure 5 is almost the same as that for forward-facing steps; and the O.08-inch-high step at the lO-foot station in this case increases the drag a little less than 0.i percent. These figures indicate why the manufacturer intends to keep close tolerances on surface imperfections due to construction. The aircraft opera- tors should maintain these specifications during operation if the maximum per- formance is to be retained.

Besides manufacturing imperfections such as shown in figures 5, 4_ and 5_ general three-dimensional-type surface roughness_ such as accumulated dirt, can cause significant increases in the skin-friction drag. In figure 6, the increase in aircraft skin-friction drag, as a fraction of the smooth skin- friction drag_ is shown plotted against the grain size of the roughness for closely packed grains distributed over all surfaces. It is seen that there is no drag increase for roughness particles up to a size of 0.'007 inch. For larger roughness sizes 3 there is a rapid increase in skin friction. Similar increases in drag would result from scratches and gouges in the skin surface.

These increases are not as easily illustrated, but the information necessary to estimate their drag is available. (See ref. 2.)

Taoie i was prepared to provide a better feel for the degree of care required in the manufacture and maintenance of the surfaces of the supersonic transport. The drag contributions of various types of surface imperfections are shown for a hypothetical supersonic transport. This transport was assumed to have been constructed and maintained in a manner similar to present-day aluminum fighter airplanes, and the surface imperfections were scaled up from the sizes actually measured on such an airplane in military service. It should be noted that the scale factors used were not equal to the ratio of the sizes of the two airplanes, but were carefully chosen for each type of imperfection to represent a realistic estimate of the imperfections that might be expected on the supersonic transport. As can be seen, even though the drag increment of each of these items is individually small, the total can be a significant part of the cruise drag.

It should be realized, that for each 1-percent increase in drag, the supersonic transport burns about lO00 pounds more fuel during its 5000-mile cruise (the initial cruise weight being assumed as 431,000 pounds and the final cruise weight as 317,000 pounds), and the payload, therefore, is decreased by the same amount. The 3.63-percent increase in drag shown in table I is then equivalent to about a 5500-pound loss in payload capacity as compared with a transport with no imperfections.

The actual transport, of course, will have some degree of both construc- tion and maintenance imperfections. The manufacturer expects to be able to keep the drag of construction imperfections down to slightly more than i per- cent of the cruise drag by use of more advanced construction techniques as compared with present-day practices. They have included this amount of penalty in their performance estimates. The drag increment will increase during ser- vice, however, if imperfections from servicing and maintenance procedures are allowed to accumulate. It would probably be to the aircraft operators' advan- tage, therefore 3 to review present-day servicing and maintenance procedures for possible improvements in order to minimize this increase in drag.

CONCLUDING REMARKS It has been shown that surface emissivity has an important effect on sur- face temperature and skin-friction drag. Therefore, it will be important for the aircraft operators to maintain the surface emissivity within the design limits; otherwise, either the surface temperature or the skin-friction drag will be higher than the design value. It has also been shown that the drag increments of typical surface imperfections 3 although individually small 3 can be very significant when taken together. This condition is especially true of the supersonic transport because small increases in overall drag can have impor- tant effects on the payload. It would probably be to the aircraft operators' advantage 3 therefore, to review their maintenance procedures for the supersonic transport as compared with present-day good practice.

REFERENCES i. Allen_ Jerry M.; and Czarnecki, K. R. : Effects of Surface Emittance on Turbulent Skin Friction at Supersonic and Low Hypersonic Speeds. NASA TN D-2706, i%5.

2. Horton, Elmer A. ; and Tetervin, Neal: Measured Surface Defects on Typical Transonic Airplanes and Analysis of Their Drag Contribution. NASA TN D-1024, 1962.

TAB_ I ESTIMATED SURFACE DEFECT DRAG CONTRIBUTION FOR SST M=2.7 &D TYPE OF IMPERFECTION DCRUmSE SCRATCHES 0.12% GOUGES .01 BUTT JOINTS AND ACCESS DOORS .2i SURFACE WAVES .78 RIVETS .62 SCREWS .15 PROJECTIONS .33 HOLES 1.00 CONTROL-SURFACE GAPS .38 HINGES .05 AD 3.63% TOTAL DCRUtSE PAYLOAD CHANGE -],,500 LB EFFECT OF SURFACE TEMPERATURE ON SKIN FRICTION EFFECT OF EMISSIVITY ON SURFACE TEMPERATURE AND SKIN FRICTION M = 2.7; h = 65, OOO FT i.lC 1.10 .,--BLACK BODY, e-=1.0 / _/ /-_ =0.5 I.O5 Of P-PERFEC;c,oR, Of 1.0_ Df, ad Df, od I,OE IOC 9_ = .95 L 1- OL3oLo_ 400 0 300 400 500 SURFACE TEMPERATURE, °F SURFACE TEMPERATURE, OF Figure i Figure 2 DRAG OF I00 FEET OF WAVE-TYPE ROUGHNESS DRAG OF I00 FEET OF A FORWARD-FACING STEP M = 2.7; h = 65,000 FT; L/D = 8.5; WCRUISE = 575,000 LB M=2.7; h =65,000 FT; L/D=8.5; WCRUlSE = 375,000 LB V_ .0015 x=lO FT -010 _ _=I0 IN.

.0010 _D DCRUISE l= 20 I N.

DCRUISE .005 O0 FT I o _ o'5 .,6 0 .25 .50 k, IN.

k, IN.

Figure 3 Figure 4 DRAG OF I00 FEET OF A REARWARD-FACING STEP M=2.7; h =65,000 FT; L/D= 8.5; WCRUISE = 375,000 LB DRAG OF DISTRIBUTED THREE-DIMENSIONAL ROUGHNESS M=2.7; h=65,000 FT

oo

x=IOFT .001( .1( ADf AD Of, SMOOTH DCRUISE 00 FT .0005 .0. = 0 .05 .10 0 .0_)4 .008 .012 k, IN.

GRAIN SIZE, IN Figure 6 Figure 5 PREDICTION OF AIRPLANE SONIC-BOOM PRESSURE FIELDS 25.

By Harry W. Carlson, F. Edward McLean, and Wilbur D. Middleton NASA Langley Research Center SUMMARY This paper presents a discussion of the sensitivity of supersonic-transport design and operation to sonic-boom considerations and shows the necessity for a study of these problems early in the development program. Methods of predicting pressure signatures are outlined and examples of the correlation of these esti- mates with wind-tunnel and flight measurements are shown. Estimates of sonic- boom characteristics for a representative supersonic transport show that in the critical transonic acceleration portion of the flight_ overpressures somewhat lower than estimated by the use of far-field assumptions may be expected. Prom- ising design possibilities for the achievement of further overpressure reduc- tions are explored.

INTRODUCTION Successful development of a supersonic transport in a national program and subsequent economical operation of the transport on the world's airlines is critically dependent on sonic-boom considerations_ a factor completely new to commercial aviation and one, as yet, not fully understood. In the belief that those concerned with the future of air transport have need of a basic under- standing of the sonic-boom phenomena, this paper is presented to outline the present status of sonic-boom research concerned with the formation and propaga- tion of airplane pressure fields. The paper indicates the sensitivity of trans- port design and operation to sonic-boom considerations, reviews the state of knowledge regarding the prediction of overpressure levels for steady-level flight in still air_ and explores the possibilities for sonic-boom minimization.

SYMBOLS AE airplane effective cross-sectional area due to a combination of vol- tune and lift, sq ft llft coefficient CL h airplane altitude above sea level, ft Ab airplane altitude above terrain, ft 23_ I positive impulse of pressure signature, Ap dr, ib sec/sq ft Mach number M incremental pressure due to airplane flow field, Ib/sq ft maximum positive value of Ap, Ib/sq ft APmax t time _ sec W airplane weight, ib x distance measured along or parallel to airplane longitudinal axis, ft Mach angle DISCUSSION Influence of Sonic Boom on Supersonic-Transport Design and Operation The influence of the sonic boom on the design and operation of the super- sonic transport (SST) is shown in figure i. The figure represents the sonic- boom problem in climb or in cruise depending on the scales assigned. In the plot at the left, it is seen that there is a wide variation in airplane weight for various airframe-engine configurations designed to meet a given set of mis- sion specifications of range_ payload, and speed; these weights are critically dependent on allowable design overpressure. Within the shaded area, character- istics for specific design concepts would form a crisscrossing network of curved lines. The large increases in weight necessary to meet the more stringent sonlc-boom limitations are the result of the increased engine and wing size required for efficient flight at altitudes permitting lower overpressures.

Since the current goals of the national SST program (2.0 psf in acceleration and 1.5 psf in cruise) fall within the vertical leg of the shaded area, careful design is required to achieve overpressures equal to or less than the goals without encountering excessive weight penalties.

When an airplane is developed and delivery is made to the airlines, the operator is faced with the problem illustrated at the right of figure i. The airplane range (or payload since the two are related) is very sensitive to operational overpressure limitations. The maximum sensitivity falls near the current overpressure design goals. If adverse reaction encountered in opera- tion proves to be greater than anticipated, altering operational procedures to reduce sonic-boom levels could result in serious and even disastrous reductions in supersonic range. On the other hand, if higher overpressures prove toler- able, there is the hazard that the airplane may have been unnecessarily com- promised by the size and weight increases required to meet arbitrary sonic-boom limitations. Since the characteristics shown in this plot are dependent on the

airframe-engine design, it is evident that the operators' interest in this area

must precede the establishment of design requirements.

Airplane Pressure Field

With sonic-boom considerations playing such a large part in SSTdevelop-

ment_ it is important to review theoretical methods for estimating nominal

ground overpressures and to establish their general applicability. Much of the

remainder of the paper will be devoted to this purpose_ and, finally_ theory

will be used to study sonic-boom pressure-signature characteristics for a

representative SST.

The development of the pressure field about airplanes in supersonic flight

is illustrated in figure 2. The flow field is_ for the most part, concentrated

between a bow shock and a tail shock fanning out from the airplane. Near the

airplane, as in the upper pressure signature, there are separate shocks from

the individual airplane componentssuch as the fuselage_ the wing_ and the

engine nacelles. This portion of the flow field where the shape of the signa-

ture is dependent on the airplane shape is termed the "near field." At larger

distances the many shocks evident in the near field have merged and a two-shock

system has formed. The "N" wave shownin the lower signature is characteristic

of the so-called "far field." Usually_ ground measurementsof sonic-boom sig-

natures created by airplanes flying at altitudes associated with supersonic

speeds resemble the simple N wave. It is this pressure field traveling with

the airplane and passing over the ground that creates the sonic-boom problem.

In somemanner, not completely understood3 community acceptance is related to

the characteristics of this signature.

Present-day pressure-signature estimation techniques are based on the solu-

tion for the flow about bodies of revolution presented in reference i and on

theoretical work pres@ntedin reference 2, which relates airplane geometry and

lifting effects to equivalent bodies. With the proper equivalent body used to

represent the airplane_ the method of reference i may be used to describe the

flow field at all distances from the airplane. However 3 in many cases it is

convenient and justifiable to makethe assumption that a far-field N wave has

formed and thus simplify the required calculations. This simplification appears

to be valid for all current operational supersonic airplanes except for low-

level missions of supersonic fighters.

Development of Airplane Equivalent Body

An outline of the methods used to develop the shape of the equivalent body

is shown in figure 3. The area distribution is determined by the projected

frontal areas intercepted by Mach planes passing through all airplane compo-

nents. To this area is added directly an equivalent cross-sectional area due

to lift found through a summationof local lifting forces along the airplane

axis. Pronounced increases in the rate of growth of this effective area such

as those that occur at the airplane nose, the wing-body juncture, and the body

closure give rise to high local-flow-field pressures with the resultant

formation of flow-field shocks or pressure jumps. A more detailed discussion

of the determination of effective area distributions and the subsequent evalua-

tion of far-fleld pressure signatures madeby using machine-computing techniques

is given in reference 3. Machine-computing methods for evaluating near-field

signatures have been developed, but have not as yet been published.

Comparison of Theory With Tunnel Signatures

An illustration of the use of the equivalent-body concept in estimating

pressure signatures is given in the correlations with wind-tunnel measurements

shown in figure 4. Wind-tunnel studies are particularly useful in the evalua-

tion uf lift effects --_-_ are _co_ to _^ ^_ ......... _ _.... _.... _ _

planes as large as the SSTbut which have not been covered to any large extent

through flight tests of present airplanes. Data obtained at a Machnumber of

1.41 at a distance of 25 inches below a 1-inch model of a delta-canard transport

is shownin figure 4 for three values of lift coefficient. Inset sketches cor-

responding to each of the three signatures showthe effective areas used in the

estimates. Although tunnel vibration and boundary-layer effects cause consid-

erable rounding of the measured signatures_ it may be seen that there is a gen-

eral agreement with the near-field calculations, and that the increasing influ-

ence of wing lift is well accounted for by the theory.

Comparison of Theory With Flight Signatures

The variation of shock strength and signature shape with airplane altitude

is shown in figure 5. Measured signatures for the fighter airplane were

obtained from three separate flight-test programs (refs. 4, 5, and 6). At an

altitude of 60 feet 3 the signature has a maximum overpressure of nearly i00 psf

and has obvious near-field characteristics with separate shocks from the nose_

inlet_ wing_ and fuselage closure. At 48,000 feet, a characteristic far-field

N wave has formed with a maximum overpressure less than i psf. The theory is

seen to give, in general_ the shape and magnitude of the signatures. It is not

known whether those discrepancies shownare due to an inadequacy of the theory

or to distortions in the signatures from unsteady flight and atmospheric

effects.

Comparison of Theoretical and Flight Data

Fighter airplane.- Measurements of ground overpressure and signature impulse for this same fighter airplane obtained in the Oklahoma City tests (ref. 7) are shown in figure 6. The measured overpressure is the maximum posi- tive value recorded, and the impulse is the area under the positive portion of the curve. Both overpressure and impulse are used in this figure to indicate that the correlation with theory covers all signature characteristics_ and not maximum overpressure only. The data shown here apply to the flight-track sta- tion and represent averaged values for all flights within a l,O00-foot altitude band. The theory was determined from the most accurate information available from the airframe manufacturer and employed supersonic area distributions

rather than normal area distributions; thus, it is expected to be somewhatmore

precise than the theory used in previous correlations. Atmospheric effects for

a standard atmosphere have been evaluated by using the method of reference 8.

A reflection factor of 1.9 has been assumed. It will be noticed that measured

values of both pressure and impulse tend to fall somewhatbelow the estimates.

However it was also noticed during these tests that pressures 5 miles off track

tended to be slightly above the theoretical estimates and indicated the possi-

bility of an unexpected and unexplained atmospheric effect.

Bomber airplane.- Flight data for a larger airplane, the B-58 bomber, shown in figure 7 were obtained from the tests conducted at Edwards Air Force Base (ref. 6). A particular effort was made in these tests to insure precise tracking of the airplane; atmospheric disturbances were minimized by performing the tests in the relatively quiet morning air. The data points represent aver- aged values of overpressure and impulse measured by the flight-track microphone array during a given overpass. The theory which includes both volume and lift effects is shown in the form of a band in order to cover the range of Mach num- bers and airplane weights encountered at a given altitude. As can be seen the agreement of experiment and theoretical data is good. An interesting feature of these data is that, although increasing altitude continues to have a beneficial effect on overpressure, there is a minimum impulse reached at about 60,000 feet - an altitude somewhat above that for the most efficient supersonic cruise of this airplane. The increase in impulse beyond 60,000 feet appears to be due to the high angle of attack necessary for sustained flight at the higher altitudes.

Estimated Sonic Boom for a Supersonic Transport The supersonic transport will be a large airplane; the example considered in this section is larger than the B-58 by about the same factors that the B-58 is larger than the F-104. In each case the length has approximately doubled, and the weight has increased by a factor of about four. Theoretical methods must be relied on for estimates of the sonic-boom characteristics of this air- plane. In view of the previously documented correlations of theory with wind- tunnel and flight measurements, it would seem that estimates of nominal steady- flight overpressures may be made with some confidence.

Estimated overpressure characteristics for a representative supersonic- transport configuration are shown in figure 8. A weight of 400,000 pounds and a Mach number of 1.4 were chosen to be representative of conditions at the critical climb portion of the flight; a weight of 350,000 pounds and a Mach number of 2.7 represent conditions in cruise. It has been found (ref. 9) that this and other supersonic-transport designs are long enough and slender enough for near-field flow characteristics to persist to quite large distances from the airplane. Thus, the calculated signatures and maximum overpressures shown here are based on the complete near-field theory. For reference, calculations made by using the assumptions of far-field theory are also shown. Inset sketches show the shape of the pressure signature for a representative M = 1.4 climb altitude and a representative M = 2. 7 cruise altitude. It can be seen that somewhat lower overpressures (about lO percent) are indicated by the more exact (near-field) theory in the climb or acceleration case. Perhaps more significant is the fact that in this situation, the shape of the signature is controlled by the shape of the airplane, and thus there exists the possibility of modifying the airplane shape to modify and further reduce maximum overpres- sures. In effect the modification consists of the creation of a smooth effec- tive area distribution in such a manner as to replace the two shocks shown in the inset sketch by a single bow shock with a succession of very weak shocks behind it.

Estimated Sonic Boom for a Modified Supersonic Transport Applications of airplane design modifications suggested by near-field con- siderations are estimated to produce the results shown in figure 9. Theoretical estimates from near-fi_id theoi'y m_v_ been r_ade for an __o _._j_ modified and enlarged forward fuselage section and are compared with estimates for the original configuration repeated from figure 8. The change in the shape of the signature is shown in the inset sketch. It will be noted that for a design altitude of 40_000 feet, the maximum overpressure in the critical tran- sonic acceleration portion of the flight has been reduced from about 2.2 to about 1.3 psf. Note that although the pressure signature in the vicinity of the tail shock has not been altered appreciably, its pressure jump is less than the modified bow-shock rise. Benefits for the Mach number 2. 7 condi- tion, however, do not extend to the altitudes normally associated with cruise, and pressures remain near the 1.5 psf level. Present studies indicate that the required modifications my have little or no detrimental influences on other aspects of airplane performance.

These possibilities are being studied not only by the NASA_ but also by the competitors in the national supersonic transport program. Since the modi- fications do little to alter the total energy content of the pressure-field system but serve mainly to redistribute the energy_ an assessment of the result- ant benefits in reducing the sonic-boom problem are critically dependent on a knowledge of those characteristics of the pressure signatures which govern the response of people and buildings. Studies of boom minimization directed toward a reduction of the energy content (ref. i0) have shown that in this case, too_ configuration effects are important and design requirements for minimization of signature impulse and far-field overpressures have been outlined. The effec- tiveness of design modifications in minimizing impulse is limited by compromises with other aspects of airplane design.

CONCLUDING REMARKS This paper has presented a discussion of the sensitivity of supersonic- transport design and operation to sonic-boom considerations and has shown the necessity for a study of these problems early in the development program.

Methods of predicting pressure signatures have been outlined and examples of the correlation of these estimates with wind-tunnel and flight measurements have sho_n good agreement. Estimates of sonic-boom characteristics for a repre- sentative supersonic transport have shown that in the critical transonic accel- eration portion of the flight, overpressures somewhat lower than estimated by 24o the use of far-field assumptions may be expected. Promising design possibili- ties for the achievement of further overpressure reductions have been explored.

REFERENCES i. Whitham, G. B.: The Flow Pattern of a Supersonic Projectile. Commun. Pure Appl. Math., vol_ V, no. 3, Aug. 1952, pp. 301-348.

2. Hayes, Wallace D.: Linearized Supersonic Flow. Rept. No. AL-222, North Am. Aviation, Inc., June 18, 1947.

3. Carlson, Harry W.: Correlation of Sonic-Boom Theory With Wind-Tunnel and Flight Measurements. NASA TR R-213, 1964.

4. Maglieri, Domenic J.; Huckel, Vera; and Parrott, Tony L.: Ground Measure- ments of Shock-Wave Pressure for Fighter Airplanes Flying at Very Low Altitudes and Comments on Associated Response Phenomena. NASA TMX-611, 1961.

5. Maglieri, Domenic J.; and Morris, Garland J.: Measurements of the Response of Two Light Airplanes to Sonic Booms. NASA TN D-1941, 1963.

6. Hubbard, Harvey H.; Maglieri, Domenic J.; Huckel, Vera; and Hilton, David A.

(With appendix by Harry W. Carlson): Ground Measurements of Sonic-Boom Pressures for the Altitude Range of i0,000 to 75,000 Feet. NASA TR R-198, 1964. (Supersedes NASA TMX-633.)

7. Hilton, David A.; Huckel_ Vera; Steiner, Roy; and Maglieri, Domenic J.: Sonic-Boom Exposures During FAA Community-Response Studies Over a 6-Month Period in the Oklahoma City Area. NASA TN D-2539, 1964.

8. Friedman, Manfred P.; Kane, Edward J.; and Sigalla, Armand: Effects of Atmosphere and Aircraft Motion on the Location and Intensity of a Sonic Boom. AIAA J., vol. i, no. 6, June 1963, pp. 1327-1335.

9. McLean, F. Edward: Some Nonasymptotic Effects on the Sonic Boom of Large Airplanes. NASA TN D-2877, 1965.

i0. Carlson, Harry W.: Influence of Airplane Configuration on Sonic-Boom Char- acteristics. J. Aircraft, vol. i, no. 2, Mar.-Apr. 1964, pp. 82-86.

(Also available as NASA RP-208.)

24z INFLUENCE OF SONIC BOOM ON SUPERSONIC TRANSPORT DESIGN AND OPERATION '_"_ _ PE #j:_ ENVELO OF AIRFRAME-ENGINE CONFIGURATIONS SUPERSONIC AIRPLANE WEIGHT RANGE --_--_,N,MUM RANGE REQUIRED OPERATIONAL OVERPRESSURE DESIGN OVERPRESSURE Figure 1 AIRPLANE PRESSURE FIELD _F_NEA% FIELD Figure 2 DEVELOPMENT OF AIRPLANE EQUIVALENT BODY

\

Figure 3 COMPARISON OF THEORY WITH TUNNEL SIGNATURES COMPARISON OF THEORY WITH FLIGHT SIGNATURES FOO[- _ [ "4h, MACH &P' FT Oil _t"_" _ FT NO O EXPERIMENT --THEORY LBISQ L _'_r " GO 1.12 -I00 30_ EXPERIMENT ..... THEORY C L =0.0_ C L =018 LB/ 590 Z 06 C L = 0.33 _' FT 3:_ _ 8F LB/SQ FT 0 _540 1.18 Ap, -8 LB/SQ FT 48,000 L93 0 .04 .08 .I2 l, SEC Figure Figure 5 COMPARISON OF THEORETICAL AND FLIGHT DATA COMPARISON OF THEORETICAL AND FLIGHT DATA FIGHTER AIRPLANE BOMBER AIRPLANE '__ o EXPERIMENT _//_ THEORY o EXPERIMENT .; ;;;._ TH EORY OVERPRESSURE IMPULSE OVERPRESSURE IMPULSE Z_p MA-_-X _.....,." .. _p dt 1 "'4 4 2 _ _ z, .lel '"_s LB-SEC/ _,- A LB X'2 PMA LB-SEC" m.....

o_._..._ _ | _.,.

...... _ _5-Tf- | %,& "_'*'_;) 081 %_. _ " °"C,, , ............ , , , ........... ,

0 I0 20 30 40 50x1030 IO 20 30 40 50xlO 3 I i I I L ,,, l I J

ALTITUDE, h, ET 0 20 40 60 80XlO 3 0 20 40 60 80xlO 3 ALTITUDE, h, FT Figure 6 Figure 7 ESTIMATED OVERPRESSURES FOR ESTIMATED OVERPRESSURES FOR A A SUPERSONIC TRANSPORT MODIFIED SUPERSONIC TRANSPORT --NEAR FIELD THEORY ..... FAR FIELD THEORY --ORIGINAL ..... MODIFIED CL/MS, M=/.4; CRUtSE, M=2.7; CLIMB, M=I,4; CRUISE, M=2.7; W= 400,000 LB W =550,000 LB W = 400,000 LB W : 550,000 LB Ap.

Ap \ ,, ,/-CLIMB CRUISE LL I ',.,_ IFCLIMB \ SQ FT 2_" \._TITUDE \'_- IF-CRUISE ITUDE . ( _ "_ITUDE , ., ,o 1 20 40 6 Buxl03/ 0 20 40 60 80XlO 3 0 0 20 40 BO 80xlO 0 20 40 60 80xlO 3 ALTITUDE, h, FT ALTITUDE, h, FT Figure 8 Figure 9 26. SIGNIFICANCE OF THE ATMOSPH_KE AND AIRCRAFT OPERATIONS ON SONIC-BOOM EXPOSURES By Domenic J. Maglieri and David A. Hilton NASA Langley Research Center SUMMARY The information of the paper is in the form of a status report on the state of knowledge of sonic-boom phenomena, dealing first with the pressure buildups in the transonic speed range and with the lateral extent of the pattern in steady flight for quiescent atmospheric conditions. There are also discussions of recent data from flight-test studies relating to atmospheric dynamic effects on the sonic-boom signatures, and finally, brief discussions of the signifi- cance of signature shape on the response of people and structures. The accel- eration and lateral-spread phenomena appear to be fairly well understood and predictable for current and future aircraft. Variations in the sonic-boom sig- nature as a result of the effects of the atmosphere can be expected during rou- tine operations. From the data evaluated to date, very similar variations in pressure signatures are noted for both fighter and bomber aircraft. The greatest questions still exist in the area of community acceptance of sonic booms. A more definitive answer to the community-acceptance problem will have to await adequate flight experience with larger aircraft.

INTRODUCTION The scope of the material to be discussed in this paper is illustrated by the sketches of figure i. Shown schematically in the figure is an airplane flight track extending from subsonic to supersonic speeds. Beneath the flight track are shown sketches of the shock-wave impingement patterns and the asso- ciated distributions of N-wave pressures, both along the track and perpendicu- lar to it. The information of the paper is in the form of a status report on the state of knowledge of sonic-boom phenomena, dealing first with the pressure buildups in the transonic speed range (see refs. i to I0) and with the lateral extent of the pattern in steady flight for quiescent atmospheric conditions (see refs. ii to 14). Also, there are discussions of recent data from flight- test studies relating to atmospheric dynamic effects on the sonic-boom signa- tures (refs. 9, i0, and 14 to 18), and finally, brief discussions of the sig- nificance of signature shape on the response of people and structures (see refs. iO, 17, and 19 to 24).

24_ SYMBOLS M Mach number sonic-boom overpressure, ib/sq ft Ap sonic-boom overpressure at ground level, ib/sq ft APo calculated maximum sonic-boom overpressure on ground track, APo_ calc max ib/sq ft period of input, see T period of structure, sec EFFECTS OF ACCELERATED FLIGHT The perspective-view sketches of figure 2 illustrate an aircraft in accel- erated, transonic flight and the associated overpressure patterns at the ground.

Although the aircraft and shock wave are moving, the ground-exposure pattern is fixed and does not move with the aircraft. For simplicity and clarity, only the bow-wave shock patterns are shown on one side of the ground track. As the aircraft speed increases, the shock waves extend in length until they reach the ground and then extend laterally from the ground track as the aircraft speed further increases. The exposure areas on the ground are defined by the so- called focus and graze lines. Upstream of the focus line, only noise is observed. Pressure buildups occur along the focus line_ with the maximum buildup on the ground track. In the region between the focus line and the graze line, multiple booms are observed as a result of the arrival at differ- ent times of disturbances from different points along the flight track. The graze line is the line along which the second signature ceases to exist because of atmospheric refraction. Downstream of the graze line, only conventional boom signatures are observed.

An extensive series of ground-pressure measurements has been made for longitudinal aircraft accelerations from Mach 0.9 to about Mach 1.5 at a con- stant altitude of 37,200 feet with a special array of microphones extending about 23 miles along the ground track. The measured data points from three such acceleration flights are shown at the bottom of figure 3. The data at the zero position represent the so-called superboom condition where pressure buildups occur. The data for the three separate flights were normalized by plotting the highest measured overpressure values at this zero position. The direction of the aircraft is from left to right, as indicated by the sketches at the top along with corresponding tracings of measured signatures. The data points in the figure represent peak overpressures as defined in the sketch.

The low-value points to the left of the figure represent noise and are observed as rumbles. The high-value points near the center of the figure correspond to measurements that are very close to the focus point, and thus represent what are conventionally described as superbooms. To the right of the focus point are two distinct sets of measurements which relate to the region of multiple booms. For convenience in illustrating the trends of the data, solid and dashed lines are faired through the data points. The data points that cluster about the solid curve relate to the first signature to arrive, in all cases, and this eventually develops into the steady-state signature. The data points that cluster about the dashed curve relate, in all cases, to the second signa- ture to arrive. These values generally decrease as distance increases, and eventually this second wave ceases to exist because of the refraction effects of the atmosphere.

The highest overpressures are measured in a very localized region. These values are as high as 2.5 times the maximum value observed in the multiple- boom region and are thus in general agreement with the measured results for lower altitude tests of reference 9. The main multiple-boom overpressure values are of the same order of magnitude as those predicted for comparable steady-state flight conditions. Available overpressure prediction methods (see refs. 2, 3, and 15) give good agreement in the multiple-boom region, but are not considered reliable in the superboom region.

The locations of the superboom and multiple-boom regions are readily pre- dictable (see refs. 3 and 15) provided such information as flight path, alti- tude, and acceleration rate of the aircraft is available. Based on the experi- ence presented in figure 3, it is believed that the superboom can be placed at a position on the ground to within about i5 miles of the desired location. The prediction of the location of the superboom can be improved if more detailed weather information is available.

As a matter of further information, it has been suggested that pressure buildups might occur for the graze condition. (See ref. 13.) Such a graze condition is associated with the lower branch of the multiple-boom curve of figure 3 (along the graze line of fig. 2). Based on these results and those of other special graze-condition flights, the possible buildups for the accel- eration case are judged not to be significant.

LATERAL-SPREAD PATTERNS With regard to the steady-flight conditions, some recent experiments have also been conducted in an effort to define more exactly the pressure distribu- tion near the extremity of the shock-wave pattern on the ground. Some sample data are shown in figure 4. Particular emphasis was placed on the region where a grazing condition exists because of atmospheric refraction, as suggested by the ray-path sketch at the top of the figure. Flights were made at altitudes of _2,200 and 37,200 feet and Mach numbers of 2.0 and 1.5_ respectively, during quiescent atmospheric conditions_ and the results are compared with theory in the data plots at the bottom. The results from the flight at 52,200 feet and a Mach number of 2.0 show that the pressures are generally highest on the track as predicted by theory (ref. 15), and decrease generally as distance increases.

The fact that measurements were obtained beyond the theoretically predicted cutoff distance by the method of reference 13 led to more definitive studies

at 37_200feet and a Machnumber of 1.5. (Solid symbols indicate that no boom

was observed.) These data_ which were obtained from four flights involving

various displacement distances of the aircraft from the overhead position_ are

similar and_ in fact, indicate measured signals as muchas 15 miles beyond the

predicted cutoff distance.

A better understanding of this phenomenon may be obtained from examination

of somesample waveforms based on measurementsat various distances. Sharply

defined shock-wave-type signatures exist generally for the region predicted by

the calculations. Near the predicted lateral cutoff 3 there was no evidence of

pressure buildups due to grazing. At distances beyond the predicted cutoff_

the signatures lose their identity and associated observations indicate the

exist_mce of r_nbles, as described previously. Again, it is believed that

these rumbles are noise radiated from the extremity of the shock wave as it

propagates through the air in the vicinity of the measuring stations.

OTHER EFFECTS OF THEATMOSPKERE

The propagation of shock waves through the atmosphere may involve the

dynamics of the atmosphere as well as the gross refraction effects just

described. The data of figure 5 were derived from an accurately calibrated and

oriented array of matched microphones along the ground track of the aircraft

(ref. 18). The variations in the wave shapes measuredduring one steady flight

of a fighter aircraft are sketched in for the appropriate measurementloca-

tions. A wide variation in wave shape occurs even over a distance on the

ground of a few hundred feet. This variation in wave shape resulted in sub-

stantial variations in the peak ground overpressure 3 the larger values being

associated with the sharply peaked waves and the lower values with the rounded-

off waves. Recent studies madeunder contract have suggested that the effects

of the higher altitude disturbances are much less important than those of the

lower altitudes (refs. i0, 14, 15, and 17). Recent flight experiments have

pointed to the fact that disturbances in the first few thousand feet of the

atmosphere maybe most significant in affecting the shapes of the sonic-boom

signatures measuredat the ground. (See refs. 9 and 16.)

Measurementssimilar in nature to those of figure 5 have been madeat

specific measuring points for a large number of supersonic flights, and the

results are in good qualitative agreement. Somesamples of these latter data

are shown in figure 6. Sonic-boom signatures for a fighter aircraft are shown

at the left. (See ref. 18.) These signatures vary widely from sharply peaked

waves at the top to rounded-off waves of sinusoidal appearance at the bottom.

Such results are very similar to those shown in figure 5 for conditions of

highly turbulent air in the lower atmosphere. The signatures on the right-hand

side of the figure have been recently obtained for bomber aircraft and have a

noticeably longer wavelength or time duration. The main distortions of the

waves in each case are associated with the rapid compression phases, and these

distortions are of the samegeneral nature for both short and long wavelengths.

The data of figure 6 relate to specific measuring stations for several differ-

ent aircraft flyovers.

Because of the large number of data points available for a range of flight conditions, it was possible to make statistical analyses of the variations of overpressure. Samples of the overpressure variation data are given in figure 7.

In the left-hand plot of the figure are shown overpressure distributions for a fighter aircraft, and in the right-hand plot are similar data for a bomber air- craft. The probability of equaling or exceeding a given ratio of the measured overpressure value to the maximum predicted value for the respective flight conditions (which occurs on the ground track) is shown. All the data have been plotted on log-normal scales, and straight lines have been faired through the data points as an aid in interpretation. For this type of presentation, all the data points would fall on a straight line if the logarithms of the data fitted a normal distribution. For the fighter aircraft 3 data were obtained on the ground track and at distances up to lO miles from it; a wider variation in the overpressures occurred for the more remote stations. The probability of encountering high values of pressure was somewhat greater for the lateral sta- tions. In the case of the bomber aircraft, fewer data points were available for analysis and, hence, the statistical sample is not as reliable. Based on the data available, the variation in overpressures for the bomber data_ which have markedly longer wavelengths, is noted to be only slightly less than that for the fighter aircraft. Some of the pressure buildups due to atmospheric effects are of the same order of magnitude as those associated with the super- boom phenomena. (See fig. 3. ) Although not shown in any of the figures of this paper_ the variations in the values of the impulse function, which may be important in response phe- nomena, were markedly less than the pressure variations illustrated. (See ref. 18.)

RESPONSE PHENOMENA _umans With regard to the manner in which the sonic boom affects a communityj the point is made that two types of sonic-boom exposures are involved as indicated in figure 8. The first of these is characterized as an outside exposure where the sonic-boom pressure wave impinges directly on the observer. The other is characterized as an inside-exposure situation in which case the sonlc-boom pressure loading is first imposed on the exterior surfaces of the building.

The observer is then exposed to a rather complex series of stimuli including auditory, vibratoryj and visual inputs. The nature of the acoustic inputs for both of these exposure situations (see ref. 18) is summarized in figure 9.

The top trace represents the outside-exposure situation, whereas the bot- tom two traces represent the inside-exposure situation. The basic question which arises isj What are the significant features of the wave with regard to community response? In general_ the ear is sensitive to the rapid changes in pressure associated with the two compressions and is not sensitive to the slowly varying pressure in between. Studies conducted by E. J. Richards at the University of Southampton which relate directly to the outside situation have shown that the overpressure values and the initial rise time were both impor- tant with regard to loudness judgments. Of these two factors, the rise time was dominant.

A microphone inside a room records a pressure variation in that room similar to that of the middle trace. This record has the gross features of a damped sine wave, the frequencies of which correspond to the fundamental vibration-mode frequencies of the main framing members of the building.

Although this inside pressure variation is of large amplitude, it usually occurs at a characteristic frequency at which the human ear is not very sensi- tive. Superposed on this middle trace is an audible acoustic input. In order to better define the audible acoustic input to an inside observer, simultaneous measurements were made with a microphone system having a response similar to that of the human ear. The objective was to eliminate the dominant low- frequency components that the ear does not normally respond to in order to better define the high-frequency components to which the ear is much more sen- sitive. Such audible acoustic signals are believed to be associated with the vibration of small building components and miscellaneous items of furnishings and equipment. The exposure for the inside observer is strongly shaped by the response of the building. The results of studies to date (refs. 19, 20, and 23) have suggested strongly that building vibrations play a dominant role in deter- mining the Judgments of community observers in sonic-boom exposure situations.

Buildings The significant factors in the response of structures to sonic-boom signa- tures are illustated in figure 10. Represented by the sketches at the top of the figure are such features of the input as the overpressure, the impulse_ and the period. In the case of the structure_ the most significant feature is the period of its first natural vibration mode as indicated by the sketch on the right. Analytical studies presented in reference 21 and some additional studies conducted by David H. Cheng at the Langley Research Center have sug- gested that the ratio of the period of the input to the natural-vibration period of the structure determines the manner in which the structure responds and that maximum response occurs when this ratio is approximately unity. The plot at the bottom of the figure represents a brief summary of the situation for various combinations of the period of the input and the natural-vibration period of the structure; for instance, for a short period input, as in the case of a fighter aircraft, and a long period response, such as for a large struc- ture, the impulse is believed to be the significant feature of the input. On the other hand, for a long period input or for a very large airplane and a short period of the structure as in the case of small components of a building, the overpressure is believed to be the significant feature of the input. Many of the structures which are of concern in a community are of such a nature that they do not clearly fall into either of the two categories shown in figure 10, and hence it must be concluded that both the overpressure and impulse are significant.

CONCLUDING REMARKS In conclusion 3 some recent results obtained with the aid of fighter and bomber aircraft have been presented in an attempt to show the significance of the atmosphere and aircraft operation on sonic-boom exposures. The accelera- tion and lateral-spread phenomena appear to be fairly well understood and pre- dictable for current and future aircraft. Variations in the sonic-boom signa- ture as a result of the effects of the atmosphere can be expected during routine operations. From the data evaluated to date 3 very similar variations in pressure signatures are noted for both fighter and bomber aircraft.

The greatest questions still exist in the area of community acceptance of sonic booms. A more definitive answer to the community-acceptance problem will have to await adequate flight experience with larger aircraft.

REFERENCES I. Maglierij Domenic J.; and Lansing, Donald L. : Sonic Booms From Aircraft in Maneuvers. NASA TN D-2370, 1964.

2. Lansing, Donald L. : Application of Acoustic Theory to Prediction of Sonic- Boom Ground Patterns From Maneuvering Aircraft. NASA TN D-1860, 1964.

3. Lansing, Donald L. _ and Maglieri, Domenic J. : Comparison of Measured and Calculated Sonic-Boom Ground Patterns Due to Several Different Aircraft Maneuvers. NASA TN D-2730, 1965.

4. Lina, Lindsay J._ and Maglieri, Domenic J.: Ground Measurements of Airplane Shock-Wave Noise at Mach Numbers to 2.0 and at Altitudes to 60,000 Feet.

NASA TN D-235, 1960.

5- Warren3 C. H. E.: The Propagation of Sonic Bangs in a Nonhomogeneous Still Atmosphere. Paper No. 64-547, Intern. Council Aeron. Sci., Aug. 1964.

6. Lilley, G. M.; Westley, R.; Yates, A. H.; and Busing, J. R.: Some Aspects of Noise From Supersonic Aircraft. J. Roy. Aeron. Soc., vol. 57, no. 510, June 1953, PP. 396-414.

7. Rao, P. Sambasiva: Supersonic Bangs. Aeron. Quart., vol. VII.

Part i. pt. I, Feb. 1956, pp. 21-44.

Part 2. pt. II, May 1956, pp. 135-155.

8. Kerr, T.H.: Experience of Supersonic Flying Over Land in the United Kingdom. Rept. 250, AGARD, North Atlantic Treaty Organization (Paris), Sept. 1959.

9. Hubbard, Harvey H.; Maglieri, Domenic J.; Huckel, Vera; and Hilton, David A.: Ground Measurements of Sonic-Boom Pressures for the Altitude Range of 10, O00 to 75,000 Feet. NASA TR R-198, 1964.

I0. Anon.: Proceedings of NASA Conference on Supersonic-Transport Feasibility Studies and Supporting Research - September 17-19, 1963. NASA TMX-905, 1963.

ii. Lina, Lindsay J.; Maglieri, Domenic J.; and Hubbard, Harvey H.: Supersonic Transports - Noise Aspects With Emphasis on Sonic Boom. 2nd Supersonic Transports (Proceedings). S.M.F. Fund Paper No. FF-26, Inst. Aeron. Sci., Jan. 25-27, 1960, pp. 2-12.

12. Maglieri, Domenic J.; Parrott, Tony L.; Hilton, David A.; and Copeland, William L.: Lateral-Spread Sonic-Boom Ground-Pressure Measurements From Airplanes at Altitudes to 753000 Feet and at Mach Numbers to 2.0. NASA TN D-2021, 1963.

13. Randall, D. G.: Methods for Estimating Distributions and Intensities of Sonic Bangs. R. & M. No. 3113, British A.R.C., 1959.

14. Kane, Edward J. ; and Palmer, Thomas Y. : Meteorological Aspects of the Sonic Boom. SRDS Rept. No. RD64-160 (AD 610 463), FAA, Sept. 1964.

15. Friedman, Manfred P. : A Description of a Computer Program for the Study of Atmospheric Effects on Sonic Booms. NASA CR-157, 1965.

16. Maglieri, Domenic J.; and Parrott, Tony L. : Atmospheric Effects on Sonic- Boom Pressure Signatures. Sound, vol. 2, no. 4, July-Aug. 1963, pp. ll-14.

17. Hubbard, Harvey H.; and Maglieri, Domenic J.: Noise and Sonic Boom Consid- erations in the Operation of Supersonic Aircraft. Paper No. 64-548, Am.

Inst. Aeron. Astronaut., Aug. 1964.

18. Hilton, David A.; Huckel, Vera; Steiner, Roy; and Maglieri, Domenic J.: Sonic-Boom Exposures During FAA Community-Response Studies Over a 6-Month Period in the Oklahoma City Area. NASA TN D-2539, 1964.

19. Pearsons, K. S.; and Kryter, K. D.: Laboratory Tests of Subjective Reac- tions to Sonic Boom. NASA CR-187, 1965.

20. Borsky, Paul N.: Community Reactions to Sonic Booms in the Oklahoma City Area. AMRL-TR-65-37, U.S. Air Force, Feb. 1965.

21. Arde Associates: Response of Structures to Aircraft Generated Shock Waves.

WADC Tech. Rept. 58-169, U.S. Air Force, Apr. 1959.

22. Mayes, William H.; _nd Edge, Philip M., Jr.: Effects of Sonic Boom and Other Shock Waves on Buildings. Mater. Res. Std., vol. 4, no. i% Nov.

1964, pp. 588-593. (Available also as NASA RP-385.)

23. Nixon, Charles W.; and Hubbard, Harvey H.: Results of USAF-NASA-FAA Flight Program to Study Community Responses to Sonic Booms in the Greater St. Louis Area. NASA TN D-2705, 1965.

24. Parrott_ T. L.: Experimental Studies of Glass Breakage Due to Sonic Booms.

Sound, vol. l, no. 3, May-June 1962, pp. 18-21.

GROUND PRESSURE PATTERNS GROUND PRESSURE PATTERNS FOR ACCELERATED FLIGHT L i.. +.-" _ .,.WAV_ 5 _01_ I"wON Figure i Figure 2 LATERAL SPREAD OF PRESSURE PATTERNS GROUND PRESSURES FOR ACCELERATED FLIGHT Ap o, LB/SQ FT K> I. THEORY _I_

Z __T__ _ _L

0 '_ il I I I _ Ii _ Po _ M = 1,5 AT 37,200 FT7

:F L_

1.0 AP°' /--Ist N-WAVE

LBISO FT,_ P'_ _-l'_I _' f_'/ e. 2o I THEORYr_ 8 __________j__

:e I I ', I 4O 30 20 I0 I0 20 30 DISTANCE ALONG GROUND TRACK, STATUTE MILES LATERAL DISTANCE FROM TRACK, STATUTE MILES Figure 3 Figure 4 VARIATIONS IN SONIC-BOOM SIGNATURES EFFECTS OF ATMOSPHERE ON MEASURED SIGNATURES F404 B-5____8 _%_PEAKED_"

,L__-_,_ _"_-_,s_

_ROUNDED Figure 6 Figure 5 NATURE OF EXPOSURES PROBABILITY OF EQUALING OR EXCEEDING OVERPRESSURE LATERAL DISTANCE F-104 B-58 FROM TRACK, MILES .999 oo o o 0 _, OTO 5 .99 .90 PROBABILITY .5 .I .01 .0011 I I ,2 .5 I 2 5 .

Apo/Apo, CALC MAX Figure 8 Figure 7 2_5 SONIC-BOOM SIGNATURES &p, LB/SQ FT TIME_ 1.5 t_ OUTSIDE SIGNATURE [ I x/ INSIDE SIGNATURE .014 INSIDE SIGNATURE (AUDIBLE) Figure 9 FACTORS IN THE RESPONSE OF STRUCTURES TO SONIC-BOOM SIGNATURES INPUT STRUCTURE OVERPRESSURi _PULSE r : _(N41r-IcANT PERIOD OF STRUCTURE r OVERMIESSUIE SlGNIFI_ PERIOD OF INPUT, t Figure i0 27.

OPERATIONAL EXPERIENCES OF GENERAL AVIATION AIRCRAI_ By Joseph W. Jewel, Jr., and Walter G. Walker NASA Langley Research Center SUMMARY An investigation is currently under way to determine the operational prac- tices and load experiences of general aviation aircraft performing five basic types of operations: twin-engine executive, single-engine executive, personal, instructional, and commercial survey. Limited data obtained to date from air- craft engaged in these operations indicate that aircraft are generally being operated within the limits to which they were designed.

INTRODUCTION The National Aeronautics and Space Administration, at the request of the Federal Aviation Agency, has recently undertaken an extensive V-G/VGH program on a variety of general aviation aircraft to obtain current information on the operating practices and the flight loads experienced by these aircraft during normal operations. Information being obtained from this program is handled in a manner similar to that obtained from the V-G/VGH transport programs in that the specific data are treated as proprietary between the operators and NASA.

0nly the generalized results are made available to organizations outside of NASA. Since conclusive, or statistically significant_ results are not avail- able at this early stage of the program, the purpose of this paper is to pre- sent the scope of the program and to illustrate the type of data that are being obtained.

SYMBOLS design maneuver speed, knots

VA

design cruise speed, knots

VC

VD design dive speed, knots

placard never-exceed speed, knots VNE design stall speed, knots

Vs

design gross weight, pounds WMAX minimum design weight, pounds WMIN

DISCUSSION

Program Description

The scope of the program is indicated in table I. Five basic types of

operations are included in the program: twln-englne executive, single-engine

executive, personal, instructional, and commercial survey. Business and per-

sonnel transport operations are covered by the first two categories; flying

club and general flying by the third; instructional and student flying by the

fourth; and forest patrol, pipeline survey, and commercial fish spotting by the

last operation.

The number of aircraft in each operation which are instrumented with

either an NASA V-G or an NASA VGHrecorder are listed in the columns on the

right of table I. Generally, three VGHand nine V-G recorders were assigned to

each type of operation. However, since most of the high-performance, or

turbine-powered, planes fall in the twln-engine executive class, an additional

five VGHrecorders were assigned to this operation. The eight V-G recorders in

this category were assigned to two types of twin-englne piston-powered aircraft.

The total program will involve 64 aircraft - 20 instrumented with VGHrecorders

and 44 with V-G recorders - from which it is expected that 64,000 hours of data

will be obtained in a period of from 4 to 6 years. As the program now stands,

2225 hours of data from VGHrecorders and 3904 hours of data from V-G recorders

have been collected for a total of 6129 recorded hours.

Figure 1 showsthe location of the 46 aircraft instrumented to date with

20 VGHrecorders and 26 V-G recorders. These aircraft are based throughout the

continental United States to avoid biasing the data as coming from any one geo-

graphical area. The aircraft chosen for the program range in size from small, light, training planes weighing less than 1500 pounds to twin, jet-powered,

executive transports weighing about 20,000 pounds. Ownersof these aircraft

were personally contacted, briefed on the purpose and aims of the program, and

asked to participate in the program until i000 hours of flight data were

obtained over a period that at least covered the four seasons. Normally, an

attempt was madeto instrument planes that were flown a minimumof 300 hours

per year.

VGHData

The largest data sample - 888 hours - obtained to date from a single air-

craft camefrom an airplane used in commercial fish-spotting operations. This

paper, therefore, deals primarily with VGHdata from the commercial fish-

spotting operation. A limited amount of V-G data from each of the other four

types of operations is also shown.

The airplane used for the fish-spotting operation was a small, high-wing

monoplane having a take-off gross weight of about l_DO pounds. The data sample

contained 211 flights having an average length of 4 hours and 13 minutes. Most

of the flights were over water, extending out over the Atlantic Ocean from the Eastern Seaboard between New Jersey and South Carolina.

The percent time that the aircraft was flown in various altitudes and air- speed intervals is shown in figure 2. Most of the flights were below altitudes of 3000 feet, with the majority of the time being spent between altitudes of 500 and 2500 feet. The distribution of airspeeds shows that the largest number of flights were flown between 50 and 70knots.

Although the airspeed distribution shown in figure 2 indicates the percent time flown in various airspeed intervals, it does not give the relationship between the speeds actually flown and the design limit speeds. This informa- tion is given in figure 3 which shows the percent time flown above given speeds and indicates the design cruise speed, the design dive speed, and the placard never-exceed speed. For this operation, neither the design dive speed nor the never-exceed speed was reached. The design cruise speed was equaled, or exceeded, only one hundredth of 1 percent of the flight time.

The maneuver acceleration experience for the fish-spotting operation is given in figure 4. The outline of the shaded area represents the maximum posi- tive and negative maneuver accelerations recorded by the instrumented aircraft in lO-knot speed intervals. The solid outline defines the design positive and negative maneuver accelerations required by Federal Aviation Regulations (ref. l) for this particular airplane. This outline is designated the design maneuver envelope and was constructed assuming the aircraft was flying at its maximum gross weight. The dashed line represents a section of the positive design maneuver envelope based on the aircraft minimum design weight. The curved sections of the envelopes are stall lines computed from the maximum static lift coefficients. The vertical lines represent the design stall speed, the design maneuver speed, the design cruise speed, the design dive speed, and the placard never-exceed speed. In general, the instrumented airplane maneuver accelerations were well within the design limits. The figure does show, as would be expected_ that positive maneuver accelerations were larger than nega- tive maneuver accelerations.

The gust acceleration experience of the fish-spotting airplane is shown in figure 5- The outline of the shaded area in the center of the figure indicates the maximum positive and negative gust acceleration encountered in 5-knot speed intervals and the solid outline defines the design gust envelope based on the maximum gross weight of the aircraft. This envelope was constructed in accord- ance with Federal Aviation Regulations (ref. i) which require that the aircraft be designed to withstand positive and negative 30-foot-per-second effective gusts U e at speeds up to the design cruise speed and positive and negative 15-foot-per-second effective gusts at the design dive speed. The dashed curve is the positive limit for the design gust envelope based on the aircraft mini- mum design weight. None of the gust accelerations experienced by the instru- mented aircraft exceeded the design gust limits.

Figure 6 shows the percent time the aircraft was flown in rough air in each lO00-foot-altitude interval. Rough air is defined here as turbulent areas containing gust velocities on the order of 2 feet per second. Data from altl- tudes above 3000 feet are not shown since the sample size was considered too small to yield valid results. The solid line shows the predicted rough air based on transport operations defined in reference 2. The variation in rough air encountered by the fish-spotting operation is in good agreement with that predicted by reference 2.

V-G Data Examples of V-G data taken from aircraft engaged in the remaining four types of operations are shown in figure 7. One thousand four hundred and ninety-six hours were recorded by three aircraft of the same type engaged in twin-engine executive operations, 341 hours were recorded by two aircraft of the same type engaged in single-engine executive operations, 315 hours were recorded by one airplane engaged in personal operation, and 453 hours were recorded by two aircraft of the same type engaged in instructional operations.

In each plot, the load factor is plotted against the indicated airspeed in knots. The design flight envelopes, based on the composite gust and maneuver design envelopes for the maximum gross weight, are shown in each plot by the solid lines. Portions of the positive flight envelope, based on the minimum design weight, are indicated by the dashed lines. Design stall, maneuver, cruise, and dive speeds and the placard never-exceed speeds are designated by the vertical lines. The outlines of the shaded areas show the maximum normal accelerations and the associated airspeeds recorded by the instrumented airplanes.

An examination of figure 7 shows that, although the design cruise speed was exceeded by aircraft in all four types of operations, the placard never- exceed speed was equaled or exceeded only during instructional-type operations.

In general_ most of the loads experienced by aircraft in the four operations were contained within the design flight envelopes. One airplane in the twin- engine executive operations did experience an acceleration that exceeded the design flight envelope; however, this acceleration was below the ultimate load factor. The exceedance of the positive stall line between 60 and 80 knots by aircraft in instructional operations probably resulted from dynamic overshoot during accelerated maneuvers made in training operations.

CONCLUDING _S An investigation is currently under way to determine the operational prac- tices and load experiences of general aviation aircraft performing five basic types of operations: twin-engine executive, single-engine executive, personal, instructional, and commercial survey. Limited data obtained to date from air- craft engaged in these operations indicate.that aircraft are generally being operated within the limits to which they were designed.

REFERENCES , Anon. : Airworthiness Standards: Normal, Utility, and Acrobatic Category Airplanes. Federal Aviation Regulation Part 23, Rules Service Co.

(Washington, D.C.), Feb. i, 1965, pp. C-74 - C-77.

, Press, Harry; and Steiner, Roy: An Approach to the Problem of Estimating Severe and Repeated Gust Loads for Missile Operations. NACATN 4332, 1958.

TABLE I SCOPE OF GENERAL AVIATION PROGRAM NUMBER OF AIRCRAFT WITH- TYPE OF OPERATION VGH RECORDER V-G RECORDER TWIN-ENGINE EXECUTIVE B B SINGLE-ENGINE EXECUTIVE 3 9 PERSONAL 3 9 INSTRUCTIONAL 3 9 COMMERCIAL SURVEY 3 9 • DESIRED TOTAL: 64,000 FLIGHT HOURS • RECORDED TO DATE: VGH RECORDS: 2,225 FLIGHT HOURS V-G RECORDS: 3,904 FLIGHT HOURS TOTAL: 6,129 FLIGHT HOURS LOCATION OF AIRCRAFT INSTRUMENTED TO DATE ;Q;j ,, v-G INSTALLATIONS "'"_o c x, N A _VGH INSTALLATIONS Figure 1 PERCENT OF TIME FLOWN AT OR ABOVE VARIOUS AIRSPEEDS I0O ALTITUDE AND _RSPEED DISTRIBUTION FOR FISH-SPOTTING OPERATIONS I0 AIRSPEEE ALTITUDE, KNOT_ FT II0 VNE VD 7[-x I03 PERCENT I00 OF TIME 9O 8O 70 ] .O1 5o I 0 20 40 60 2O 4O 6O PERCENT OF TIME PERCENT OF TIME I I I I I I I "OOlo 40 60 80 I00 120 140 160 AIRSPEED, KNOTS Figure 2 Figure 3 MANEUVER ACCELERATION EXPERIENCE FOR FISH-SPOTTING OPERATIONS GUST ACCELERATION EXPERIENCE FOR FISH-SPOTTING OPERATIONS LOAD FACTOR vA Vc VNE VO VC I I Y_, VNE VO LOAD FACTOR I

-, [

-2 I I

_2 I I , _ LI I I I l I 410 I 3(_ 20 40 60 80 I00 120 I 160

' ,_o ,_o ,4o ,,,o

% ,_ # 8o

AIRSPEED, KNOTS AIRSPEED, KNOTS Figure 4 Figure 5 V-n DIAGRAMS FOR FOUR TYPES OF OPERATIONS --- WMIN -- WMAx ROUGH AIR EXPOSURE IN FISH-SPOTTING OPERATIONS TWIN-ENGINE EXECUTIVE OPERATION PERSONAL OPERATION VNEVD Vs vA Vc _EVD VS VA '_ I0 I I

:,o_

9 H /'_t _ I/--:5 AIRPLANES 2_.;. '''_''_'4iinb"'_Z 11496 HRJ B i 0 FIS H- STI_DT TIENI_oFsLj_HTS FACTOR 0 LOAD __ i1___ _ ALTITUDE, -2H i l I I I I I I I FT 6 INSTRUCTIONAL OPERATION S_NGLE-ENGINE EXECUTIVE OPERATION VA VC VNE VD VA=Vc VNEVD I I I I I I HR LOAD 2 FACTOR O I o -2 , , , I , , , I I i i J i i i I i i i ] i i i I, ,, I , , , ] 0 8 16 24 32 40 48 56 64 60 120 IOO 6O ILK) 180 240 PERCENT OF TIME FLOWN IN ROUGH AIR INDICATED AIRSPEED, KNOTS INDICATED AIRSPEED, _<NOTS Figure 6 FiB ure 7 26.5 28. AIRPLANE SPINNING By James S. Bowman NASA Langley Research Center SUMMAEY A summary on spinning is presented to point out the state of the art and the most important parameters_ and to show the effects of these parameters on the spin and spin-recovery characteristics. The discussion presented applies to the fully developed spin. The principal factors in spinning are mass distri- bution, which is by far the most important single parameter, and tail design, which is particularly important for conditions of zero or near-zero loading.

By knowing the mass distribution and tail design, it is possible in many cases to predict whether an airplane has satisfactory spin-recovery characteristics.

In other cases, however, it is necessary to make spin tests to assure satis- factory recovery.

INTRODUCTION The purpose of this paper is to present a summary on spinning which will indicate the state of the art, point out the most important parameters, and show the effects of these parameters on the spin and spin-recovery character- istics. The discussion presented applies to the fully developed spin.

Spinning is a subject that has not been very amenable to theoretical analysis, and consequently most spin studies have been conducted by experimental procedures. At the NASA Langley Research Center much experience has been gained from spin-tunnel tests. In this connection_ spin tests have been made of models of nearly 400 different airplane designs over a period of 30 years, and very good correlation between the model tests and full-scale spin tests has been established (refs. i to 3).

SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS S wing area 3 sq ft b wing span, ft P air density_ slugs/cu ft airplane relative-density factor, pSb m mass of airplane, slugs moments of inertia about X and Y body axes, respectively, Ix, Iy slug-ft 2 W weight, lb TDR tail damping ratio URVC unshielded rotor volume coefficient TDPF tail damping power factor, (TDR)(URVC) DISCUSSION Mass Distribution The airplane mass distribution has an almost overriding effect on the spin and spin recovery. The mass distribution is the way in which the mass of an airplane is distributed along the fuselage and wings. The aerodynamic factors are also important; however, the effects of the aerodynamic factors on the spin and recovery depend on the mass distribution.

The developed spin involves a balance between the aerodynamic forces and moments and the inertia forces and moments acting on an airplane; an illustra- tion is presented in figure 1 to show the balance of moments in pitch. The sketch on the left indicates that in a spin, an airplane has a nose-down aero- dynamic moment. The sketch on the right shows a system of weights representing an airplane from a mass standpoint. As this system of weights rotates about the spin axis, the weights cause a nose-up inertia pitching moment; this nose-up inertia moment balances out the aerodynamic nose-down pitching moment. There are corresponding balances of aerodynamic and inertia moments about the other _xes.

Since the moments in a spin depend on the inertia as well as the aero- dynamic characteristics of the airplane, the effectiveness of any control in terminating a spin depends not only on the aerodynamic moments the control creates, but also on the inertia moments it induces. These inertia moments are a function of the mass distribution of the airplane; and, in this way, the mass distribution is directly related to the airplane spinning.

The mass distribution of airplanes can be grouped into three general loading categories, as indicated in figure 2. Shown on the right is the case of an airplane that has more of its weight distributed along the wings than along the fuselage by virtue of having wing fuel, wing-mounted engines, wing- tip tanks, wing-mounted military stores, and so forth. This type of weight distribution is referred to as a wing-heavy loading; and in this case, the roll

momentof inertia is greater than the pitch momentof inertia. Shownon the

left is the case of an airplane that has most of its weight distributed along

the fuselage. This type of weight distribution is referred to as a fuselage-

heavy loading; and in this case, the roll momentof inertia is less than the

pitch momentof inertia. Shownin the middle of the figure is the case of an

airplane that has roll and pitch momentsof inertia which are about equal; this

condition is referred to as a zero loading.

The loading of the airplane can dictate what controls are required for

recovery (ref. 4). The deflection of the rudder against the spin is always

loading, down elevator is the primary recovery control; whereas, for the

fuselage-heavy loading_ the aileron is the primary recovery control. In the

latter case, the aileron needs to be deflected with the spin - for example,

stick right for a spin to the right. The zero loading is an uncertain condi-

tion as far as recovery is concerned. It is difficult to tell exactly what

the effect of the control might be, but almost invariably the proper recovery

procedure is to movethe rudder against the spin and, then, at a short time

later movethe elevator down.

Figure 2 might be taken to indicate that the prediction of spin recov-

eries is simple; however, for two reasons_ it is not quite so simple. First_

the exact range of loading for each category shown in figure 2 cannot be pre-

dicted; and second, although the controls that should be movedfor recovery and

the direction that they should be movedcan be predicted from the mass distri-

bution, whether the controls will have enough aerodynamic effectiveness to give

a satisfactory recovery cannot be predicted in many cases.

Tail Design

Figure 2 showsthat mass distribution is a critically important factor.

Another very important factor is tail design3 which is particularly important

for airplanes in the zero or near-zero loading condition, where the rudder is

a primary recovery control. The factors entering into tail design from spin

considerations are illustrated in figure 3. The sketches showan airplane in

the spinning attitude. There is a dead-air region over much of the vertical

tail caused by the stalled wake of the horizontal tail. It is obvious that in

order to have good rudder effectiveness for recovery, there must be a substan-

tial amount of rudder area outside this dead-air region. This rudder area may

be either above or below the dead-air region. Another factor which enters into

tail design from the spin standpoint is that there should be a substantial

amount of fixed area beneath the horizontal tall to provide damping of the

spinning motion. It is important to have both of these factors - rudder power

and damping. The sketch at the left in figure 3 illustrates a good tail

design; whereas, the sketch at the right illustrates a poor tail design with

the rudder entirely within the dead-air region and with very little fixed area

beneath the horizontal tail.

A criterion for tail design was determined empirically manyyears ago

(refs. 5 and 6) on the basis of spin-tunnel tests with about 100 different

designs. This criterion is called the tail-damping power factor, which is a

measure of the damping provided by the fixed area beneath the horizontal tail

and the control power provided by the unshielded part of the rudder. The

formula for determining the tail-damping power factor is given in figure 4.

The tail-damping power factor required to insure satisfactory recovery is

given in figure 5. Figure 5 showsthe tail-damping power factor plotted against

mass distribution. All of the data are in the area of zero or near-zero

loading, where the rudder is a primary recovery control and the tall design is

of particular importance. The scale on the abscissa was chosen to point out

the fact that in this discussion of tail design, only a limited part of the

total range of mass distributions that have been found to exist for all air-

planes _l_

The plot shows boundaries indicating the minimumvalues of the tail-

damping power factor required to insure satisfactory recovery. The hatched

side of the boundaries is the unsatisfactory side. The solid lines are for

recovery by rudder alone, and the broken line showsthe boundary for recovery

by rudder and elevator. The boundaries are presented in terms of the param-

eter _ which is the airplane relative-density factor. This factor is a com-

mon parameter used in airplane stability work and is a measure of the density

of the airplane relative to the density of the air in which it is flying. The

airplane density is expressed as the mass of the airplane divided by an arbi-

trary volume obtained by multiplying the wing area by the span. The value of

_, then, is the ratio of this arbitrary measure of airplane density to the

actual air density.

Figure 5 presents boundaries for values of the relative-density factor of

35, 15, and 6. The value of 6 is representative of that for light single-

engine personal-owner airplanes, and the value of 35 is representative of that

for executive jets and jet trainers. This group of boundaries, then indicate

that the tail-damping power factor required for satisfactory recovery is depend-

ent on both t_e mass distribution and the airplane relative-density factor.

These boundaries can be used as design charts to determine whether a particular

tail design will insure satisfactory recovery for the range of variables shown

on the chart.

Use of the data presented in figure 5 will be made in a discussion on how

the satisfactory spin-recovery characteristics of an airplane may deteriorate

as the airplane weight is increased. The data in figure 5 for _ = 15 are

replotted in figure 6; however, in figure 6_ the scales have been expanded.

Boundaries for satisfactory spin recovery are shown for values of the airplane

relative-density factor of 15 and 20. Point 1 in figure 6 is representative

of an airplane originally designed to have a relative-density factor of 15. In

other words, the airplane was designed so that the tail was Just barely satis-

factory from a spin-recovery standpoint. Then, over the years the airplane

gross weight is increased by one-third because of design changes or changes

in operating practices. This increase in weight increases the value of _ to

20, and the airplane characteristics would then be on the unsatisfactory side

of the boundary. If someof this weight increase were in the form of wing-tip

tanks or heavier engines on the wing, the airplane characteristics would be

even more unsatisfactory, as shownby point 2. Such changes in spin-recovery

characteristics from satisfactory to unsatisfactory have actually happened in

the past as a result of a weight increase over that of the basic airplane

design.

Figure 7 gives a summaryof the most important factors in spinning and

indicates the state of the art at the present time. The mass-distribution

scale at the bottom of the figure applies to both the plot at the bottom and

the table at the top. The extent of the mass-distributlon scale is intended

to include the loading of all aircraft of any type which have been encountered

to date. The table at the top of the figure shows again that from the mass

distribution, the primary recovery controls and the way they should be moved

can be predicted.

A small range of mass distribution for which spin-recovery characteristics

can be predicted is shown at the bottom of figure 7. For the zero or near-

zero loading condition_ tail-design criteria are available for assuring satis-

factory recovery for values of the relative-density factor up to about 35.

Actually, heavily loaded fighter aircraft can have a relative-density factor

as high as "100, but values up to 35 include manytypes of airplanes in the

lightweight military or general aviation category. For the extreme loadings

on both ends of the scale, no criteria have been developed for predicting the

effectiveness of the controls for satisfactory recovery. Predictions can be

madeoccasionally in these areas, but in most cases of fuselage-heavy or wing-

heavy loadingsj full-scale spin tests or model spin-tunnel tests must be made

to determine whether the controls are powerful enough to give a satisfactory

recovery.

CONCLUDING REMARKS

For the fully developed spin, the principal factors are mass distribution,

which is by far the most important single parameter, and tail design, which is

particularly important for conditions of zero or near-zero loading. Other

factors such as general aerodynamic configuration and high-liftdevices have

someeffect, but these effects are only minor perturbations. If the mass dis-

tribution and tail design are known, it is possible in many cases to predict

whether an airplane will have satisfactory spin-recovery characteristics. In

other cases, however, it is necessary to make spin tests to assure satisfactory

recovery.

REFERENCES 1. Seiaman, Oscar; and Neihouse, A. I.: Comparison of Free-Spinning Wind- Tunnel Results With Corresponding Full-Scale Spin Results. NACAWR L-737, 1938. (Formerly NACA MR, Dec. 7, 1938. ) 2. Berman, Theodore: Comparison of Model and Full-Scale Spin Test Results for 60 Airplane Designs. NACA TN 2134, 1950.

3- Neihous% Anshal I.; Klinar, Walter J.; and Scher, Stanley H.: Status of Spin Research for Recent Airplane Designs. NASA TR R-57, 1960. (Super- sedes _CARML57FI2.)

4. Neihous% A. I.: AMass-Distribution Criterion for Predicting the Effect of Control Manipulation on the Recovery From a Spin. NACAWR L-168, 1942.

(Formerly NACA ARR, Aug. 1942. ) 5. Neihous% A. I.: Tail-Design Requirements for Satisfactory Spin Recovery for PeTsonal-Owner-Type Light Airplanes. NACA TN 1329, 1947.

6. Neihouse, Anshal I.; Lichtenstein, Jacob H.; and Pepoon, Philip W.: Tail- Design Requirements for Satisfactory Spin Recovery. NACA TN 1045, 1946.

PRIMARY RECOVERY CONTROLS AS DETERMINED BY MASS DISTRIBUTION BALANCE OF AERODYNAMIC AND INERTIA PITCHING MOMENTS IN A SPIN ELEVATORS RUDDER AGAINST AILERONS WITH PLUS FOLLOWED BY ELEVATORS DOWN RUDDER AGAINST AERODYNAM MOMENTS = I_NERTI A MOMENTS SPIN SPIN AXIS AXIS ' INERTIA PITCHING _._:J .,,_ MnM'_" _ MOMENT A] 7#" _ _6-SL-'_,= _[ J" "" .NOSE _ "_ FUSELAGE HEAVY LOADING ZERO LOADING WINGS HEAVY LOADING (ROLL INERTIA > (ROLL INERTIA < (ROLL INERTIA_ A I RFLOW PITCH INERTIA) PITCH INERTIA) PITCH INERTIA) Figure i Figure 2 TAIL DESIGN CHARACTERISTICS FOR SPIN RECOVERY DEAD AIR REGION SPIN SPIN ....

AXIS _ AXIS _ RUDDER / I_'v-RUDDER NOT _ /_ SHIELDED

SH'ELDED / /s-'/

AIRFLOW Figure 3

METHODOF COMPUTING TAIL-DAMPINGPOWERFACTOR

RILI + R2 L2 FL 2 TDPF - x S (b/2) S (b/2) 2 - _1 / F-STABILIZER L I--_ /_%,/ WAKE

-'-

r..,_L2.__ _ </RELATIVE WIND TDR < 0.019 TDR > 0.0i9 ANGLE OF ANGLE OF RELATIVE WIND (,',) RELATIVE WIND (e) ASSUMED TO BE 45 ° ASSUMED TO BE 50 ° TO C.G. "-,t--LI---" OF AIRPLANE OF AIRPLANE Rr-: TO C.G. "_--- LI R1_45 @ @ TO C.G. _ L_ TO C.G. -'_ L_'_ OF AIRPLANE RELATIVE OF AIRPLANE _RELATIVE WIND WIND Figure 4 TAIL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS AIRPLANE DENSITY m/Sb F, = AIR DENSITY p XlO-6 1,600 1,200 TAIL

F

DAMPING 800 - POWER FACTOR ff=35 ,--_-'k--_--'_'_ I /-RECOVERY BY

400 " RUDDER AND

15 _"_] ._ ELEVATOR ¢ L-.e, ' I I 6 __-_-4, I - 2,0O0 - 800 -400 0 400 x I0- 4 FUSELAGE WING HEAVY HEAVY MASS DISTRIBUTION ,(I x- Iy)/mb 2 Figure 9 EFFECT OF GROWTH ON RECOVERY 10-6 LO00 TAIL DAMPING POWER FACTOR -500 -400 -300 -200 -I00 0 I00 200xlO -4 FUSELAGE WING HEAVY MASS DISTRIBUTION, (I x - Iy)/mb 2 HEAVY Figure 6 SU M MARY RECOVERY CONTROL

T

_! _ RUDDER :'_i !:,!: '!;_ AGAINST _iri ELEVATOR AILERONS WITH

FOLLOWED

PLUS .-_ BY _!.', LUS RUDDER AGAINST ;_._,..-VAT^R RUDDER ii_ _: =L_w_ ._ij! AGAINST --x 10-6 1,600 TAIL 1,200 DAMPING POWER FACTOR 800 400- 0---_ I -400 0 400 x 10-4 -8O0 -2DOO WING FUSELAGE HEAVY MASS DISTRIBUTION,(:[ x- Iy)/mb 2 HEAVY Figure 7 29. OPERATING PROBLEMS PECULIAR TO V/STOL AND STOL AIRCRAFT By John P. Campbell NASA Langley Research Center SUMMARY This paper covers the unique features and different modes of operation of V/STOL and STOL aircraft which result in new operating problems and serves to introduce the papers which deal in more detail with some of the more important V/STOL and STOL operating problems.

INTRODUCTION Byway of introduction, some definitions should be given in order to avoid the confusion which sometimes has arisen in the use of the terms VTOL, STOL, and V/STOL. VTOL, of course, means vertical take-off and landing. STOL refers to short take-off and landing, where there is no VTOL capability and some take- off and landing run is always required. The term V/STOL indicates the capa- bility to perform either vertical or short take-offs and landings. An airplane of this type has VTOL capability but may operate much of the time as an STOL airplane for improved economy and a greater margin of safety in event of engine failure. Actually, the terms VTOL and V/STOL can be used interchangeably since all VTOL configurations currently under consideration can perform running take- offs and landings.

DISCUSSION Some fundamental relationships between lift and power required for con- ventional and V/STOL aircraft are illustrated in figure i. The lift, in percent of weight, and the power required for level flight are plotted against airspeed for both types of aircraft. In the lower plot, the solid-llne curve represents a typical variation of power required for a conventional airplane, extending from the stalling speed to the top speed of the airplane. The upper plot shows that, for this speed range, the airplane is supported entirely by aerodynamic lift provided by the wing. On the other hand, for the V/STOL aircraft which can operate below conventional wing stalling speeds on down to hovering flight, the aerodynamic lift is gradually replaced by powered lift as hovering is approached. In this speed range where powered lift must be used - the so-called transition speed range - the power required for the V/STOL airplane, indicated by the dashed-line curve, rises rapidly to a maximum for the hovering flight condition. The STOL, or short take-off and landing, aircraft only go part of

the way up the power-required curve to obtain a modest reduction in stalling

speed from a modest increase in power.

The high power required by the V/STOLaircraft in hovering flight is one

of the basic characteristics leading to new operating problems. Other important

characteristics of V/STOLaircraft in hovering and transition flight are the

vertical slipstream for hovering flight, the special provisions madefor per-

forming the conversion from the hovering to the cruise configuration, and the

inherent deficiencies in aerodynamic stability and control in hovering and low-

lems will nowbe considered.

High Power Required

The high power required in hovering flight results in higher fuel consump-

tion, greater noise, and greater slipstream effects. The magnitude of the

increases dependsupon the type of propulsion system as illustrated in figure 2.

Fuel consumption is shown plotted against slipstream velocity for hovering and cruising fl_ght for various types of V/STOL aircraft having the same gross weight (W = 40,000 pounds). It is apparent that the fuel consumption for hov- ering is very high for the higher performance V/STOL types, particularly for the turbojet configurations. The significance of this characteristic in terms of operating procedures is that the hovering times of these aircraft must be kept to an absolute minimum, and it is not realistic to consider long periods of vertical climb or descent during take-off and landing operations.

In general, the noise associated with the various V/STOL propulsion systems varies in roughly the same manner as power required and fuel consumption. That is, helicopters are generally the quietest and Jet aircraft, the noisiest. Some of the operational considerations involved with the noise problem will be dis- cussed subsequently.

Vertical Slipstream for Hovering Slipstream effects are greater with V/STOL aircraft both because of the higher power required and the vertical direction of the slipstream for hovering flight. As illustrated in figure 3, there can be important effects on the sur- roundings in the take-off and landing areas as the high-velocity vertical slip- streams impinge and flow outward in all directions. There are also important effects on the aircraft itself as the slipstreams come together and recirculate about the airframe and propulsion system. Slipstream flows are never as steady and symmetrical as those in the simple and idealized illustration of figure 3.

The problems resulting from slipstream impingement and recirculation are covered in detail in paper no. 31 by Kuhn and paper no. 52 by Rolls.

Provisions for Conversion V/STOL aircraft must_ of course, be designed so that the slipstream or jet exhaust can be directed downward for hovering and rearward for cruising flight.

There are a number of methods of accomplishing this conversion of configuration in order to perform the transition, as illustrated in figure 4. There are V/STOL types, such as the helicopter, which merely tilt forward to fly forward.

There are some in which only the thrust unit itself tilts, with the fuselage remaining essentially horizontal at all times, and others which have swiveling nozzles to direct the Jet exhaust downward for hovering or rearward for cruising flight. In addition, there are types which have one propulsion system for hov- ering and another for cruising flight.

The significant point here in terms of operating problems is that the addi- tional operations to be carried out in accomplishing the conversion maneuver make the piloting task more difficult in the transition flight range and increase the time required in the landing approach pattern. In paper no. 30, Reeder shows that the degree of complexity of the conversion maneuver has a direct bearing on the difficulty of the piloting task.

Aerodynamic Stability and Control Deficiencies The inherent aerodynamic stability and control deficiencies of V/STOL air- craft are illustrated in figure 5 which shows typical variations of aerodynamic stability and control with airspeed from hovering through the transition to cruising flight. In this illustration the V/STOL airplane is assumed to have satisfactory aerodynamic stability and control in cruising flight and at the upper end of the transition range represented by the end points of the curves.

Since all these parameters vary with the dynamic pressure in the airstream, they drop off rapidly as the airspeed is decreased in the transition. There is no aerodynamic control effectiveness at all in hovering unless the control surface is in a high-velocity slipstream. It is usually necessary, therefore, to pro- vide an additional control system for V/STOL aircraft specially for the hovering and low-speed flight conditions. In hovering flight, all V/STOL aircraft have neutral static stability - that is 3 there is no stability of attitude. As for dynamic stability, Jet V/STOL types are about neutrally stable in hovering but other V/STOL types usually have dynamic instability in the form of unstable pitching and rolling oscillations. This lack of static and dynamic stability does not prevent V/STOL aircraft from being flown under visual flight condi- tions, but it does lead to certain undesirable handling characteristics which must be improved by stability augmentation to insure satisfactory operation during instrument flight. Paper no. 30 by Reeder and paper no. 33 by Anderson, Quigley, and Innis cover some of the operating problems associated with these characteristics for both V/STOL and STOL aircraft.

Noise One approach to alleviating the V/STOL noise problem is to get the air- craft to and from altitude in a shorter distance by using steeper take-off and landing profiles as pointed out in paper no. 4 by Hall, Champine, and McGinley and paper no. 9 by Hubbard, Cawthorn, and Copeland. Figure 6 shows typical take-off and landing profiles for conventional and V/STOL aircraft. For the conventional airplane, a 3 ° approach and a 6 ° climbout are considered normal.

V/STOL aircraft_ with their slower approach speeds and greater power available for climbou% will be able to operate on much steeper flight paths - at 6 ° or more on the approach and lO ° or more in the climbout. These steeper flight pro- files are expected to be used by STOL as well as V/STOL aircraft.

Comparisons of the noise levels of conventional and V/STOL transports using these take-off profiles are shown in figure 7. Values are shown of perceived noise level in decibels (PNdB) which would be noted by observers on the ground directly below the airplane - that is, at various points along the ground track.

These PNdB values are plotted as a function of distance from the start of the take-off roll. The horizontal dashed line at ll2 PNdB represents what has been Judged an acceptable noise level in some communities for daylight and early evening take-off operations. The solid lines represent the calculated noise of 40-passenger turboprop and turbofan V/STOL transports from lift-off and through the climbout to an altitude of about 2000 feet. At distances beyond about 1 mile from the start of take-off roll their noise appears to become acceptable.

In order to relate this to the conventional transport noise with which most people are familiar today, the shaded bands have been added to represent meas- ured PNdB levels for large conventional turbojet, turbofan, and turboprop trans- ports. These bands start at the point of lift-off for the conventional trans- ports tha_ is, at about l_miles from the start of take-off roll. On the basis of this plot, it would appear that, in operations from a conventional air- port, V/STOL transports would produce less community noise problems than present-day transports. That is, their noise would be less at any given dis- tance from the start of take-off roll. But, of course, to justify their use, V/STOL transports will have to operate from small close-in airports or heliports which are likely to be closely surrounded by noise-sensltive areas of the commu- nity. In such operations, the airport boundary will be reached at distances less than a mile from the start of the take-off roll, so it is going to be dif- ficult to avoid unacceptable PNdB levels in approaches and climbouts over the surrounding community. In addition to the community noise problem in the gen- eral vicinity of the airport, the noise levels will also be higher on the air- port itself, especially during vertical take-off and landing operations, and this may well lead to requirements for some new approach to the airport noise problem.

CONCLUDING REMARKS This paper has brought out some of the unique features and different modes of operation of V/STOL and STOL aircraft which result in additional operating problems. Subsequent papers bring out some of the important factors to be con- sidered in dealing with these problems.

V/STOL LIFT AND POWER REQUIRED FUEL CONSUMPTION w = 4o, ooo LB HOVERING I(% .... CRUISE PERCENT I00 OF WEIGHT LIFT, TURBOJET C HOVERING I 80 _ TRANSITION i'_-"-- CONVENTIONAL FUGHT-- AND TURB_ _\_, _-- STALLING SPEED FUEL x\ CONSUMPTION, GAL/MIN 4( POWER /\ i REQUIRED / \\\ ,I //--CONVENTIONALAIRPLANE //_I'_ /-- V/STOL . I / ......... / 2C AIRPLANE I ROTOR I I [ I I 500 I,(300 1,500 2,000 AIRSPEED SLIPSTREAM VELOCITY, FT/SEC Figure I Figure 2 CONVERSION METHODS SLIPSTREAM IMPINGEMENT .__ HELICOPTER TILT WING • • - :...

......:;:,_ VECTORED THRUST LIFT ENGINE Figure 3 Figure 4 AERODYNAMIC STABILITY AND CONTROL '----_ TRANSITION -I- CRUISE-- TAKE-OFF AND LANDING PROFILES CONTROL / STABLE _CONVENTIONAL STABILITY \_ AV STOL , \ A,RCRAy .

__L STATIC STABLE --._J & _ / io. /'_,

C

DYNAMIC STABILITY /I//////////_ i/I/////////t I////////////I I/////i///////////t/////////i/i////I//2//////////1/I////////////////////i I// APPROACH CLIMBOUT O AIRSPEED Figure 9 Figure 6 TAKE-OFF AND CLIMBOUT NOISE V/STOL TRANSPORTS CONVENTIONAL TRANSPORTS AND TURBOFAN }RBOPROP -112 PNdB LEVEL PNdB II( I 2 3 DISTANCE FROM START OF TAKE-OFF ROLL, ST. Mi.

Figure 7 28O 30.

V/STOL AIRCRAFT OPERATION IN THE TERMINAL AREA By John P. Reeder NASA Langley Research Center SUMMARY Some aspects of V/STOL operation in a terminal area have been presented.

A V/STOL instrument approach with present-day displays and guidance systems requires about 5 minutes at low speeds, but this ti_e could be cut to l_ to 2 minutes if the displays and guidance systems were improved. In order to keep approach-pattern time to a minimum, the conversion process should be simplified by interconnecting as many operations as possible with one control. Adequate vectoring for the lifting system, attitude stabilization to prevent excessive wandering, and automatic glide-path control for approaches over 6 ° will prob- ably be required also.

INTRODUCTION V/STOL aircraft have the potential for: (a) operating safely to lower weather minimums than conventional airplanes, and (b) permitting better utili- zation of airspace in a terminal area and, thus, a greater volume of traffic at any one time. To realize this potential_ V/STOL aircraft must utilize their low-speed capability. This paper is a discussion of some aspects of this ter- minal area operation. Additional discussion may be found in reference i.

THE ENVIRONMENT The V/STOL environment considered is illustrated in figure i which shows possible routings of V/STOL aircraft into a terminal airport such as the John F.

Kennedy International Airport. Note the scale of miles in the lower right cor- ner. The shaded areas are the present major airport control and approach zones.

The arrowed lines are the V/STOL aircraft inbound routes. They lie generally underneath conventional airplane traffic. The V/STOL traffic slows to below airplane speeds, maneuvers into approaches into the wind and generally parallel to airplane traffic, and uses its own guidance and landing facilities. Two landing facilities are indicated on opposite sides of the airport. Vertical approaches are not considered feasible for the near future. The patterns are, therefore, drawn to scale for an approach speed of about 50 knots. The half circles represent the intercept of 6 ° glide paths at an altitude of i_000 feet.

Figures 2 and 3 show the V/STOL instrument approach pattern and profiles, necessitated by presently available pilot displays and guidance systems_ in more detail and compared with that for an airplane. The patterns illustrated in fig- ure 2 are not optimum ones but are the least advantageous ones as dictated by winds 3 direction of arrival, local restrictions 3 or limitations of guidance equipment.

V/STOL instrument-flight experience to date, primarily with helicopters, has emphasized that the pilot must perform one task at a time and keep vari- ables to a minimum during the alinement stages of the instrument approach. The alinement legs are thus straight, as shown in figures 2 and 3, and flight is at essentially constant speed. Time is the important factor in establishing aline- ment. The size of the pattern compared with that for an airplane thus varies directly as the approach speed. The pattern size is further reduced by the use of the steeper glide path.

During the downwind leg of the pattern, the V/STOL aircraft converts to a speed as near the final approach speed as possible which is adequate for maneu- vering. This leg is long enough to allow adequate time on the inbound leg. A cross-wind leg of 1/2 minute is allowed for unknown wind effects. Flight expe- rience has shown that about lminute is required to establish alinement with the inbound track before acquiring the glide path. The glide path requires about a 1½minutes to stabilize before breakout, after which a visual deceleration to vertical landing is performed.

The important thing to be noted from this pattern is that the V/STOL air- craft will be spending about _ minutes at low speeds. This fact is very sig- nificant for the Jet type, particularly, as it requires operation for this length of time at 8_ to 95 percent of hovering thrust at a very high rate of fuel consumption. In fact, one such approach will reduce the range of a jet type by about one-third. Consequentlyj missed approaches cannot be tolerated.

Propeller types would not suffer as much since the power required at 50 knots is reduced to about one-half that for hover.

Since the pilot can convert to a vertical landing in perhaps l_minutes in visual flight, the solution to reducing the time in the approach lies in the development of improved pilot displays and guidance systems.

PILOTING PROBLEMS IN SLOW FLIGHT The V/STOL aircraft has been assumed to have simple conversion procedures and good handling qualities so that these factors do not influence the time required or the speeds chosen. In actual practice, however, it is very possible that piloting problems associated with slow flight will result in increased times and airspace required or in increased risk of missed approaches, despite the benefits of improved displays. This condition must be avoided through ade- quate design. Some piloting problems of concern are (a) complexity of the con- version, (b) handling qualities, and (c) effect of winds.

Complexity With regard to the first of these problems, the time required for conver- sion and the safety in performing it depend heavily on the degree of complexity or the number of factors the pilot must be concerned with during the process.

Conversion by simply tilting a lift-thrust system to select any speed between hover and airplane flight has proved to be acceptably simple, at least in vis- ual flight. As an example of increased complexity for a jet type, the addition of separate lifting engines adds the tasks of opening doors, starting and checking numerous engines, and adjusting a second set of throttles when pre- paring for landing or low-speedmaneuvering. Figure 4 illustrates the methods of controlling a descent with a simple lift-engine configuration compared with a pure vectored-thrust type. For the former, the rate of descent is controlled with lift-engine throttles, and the speed is controlled by attitude and cruise engine thrust, if the engine is not at idle. There is a danger in this case of stalling the wing or encountering pitch-up conditions. In the case of the pure vectored-thrust type, the descent can be controlled primarily by vectoring the thrust as required and keeping the angle of attack _ at any value desired.

In addition, some throttle adjustments will be required.

To reduce complexity, the lift-engine configurations must be simplified in the number of operations required by having a single control for opening inlet doors and starting all engines for instance. Also, control of aircraft speed and descent will be improved and simplified by provision of vectoringon the lift engines in both forward and rearward directions. The objective should be to approach the inherent simplicity and flexibility in operation of the pure vectored-thrust arrangement.

Handling Qualities When handling qualities are considered, the characteristic of slow flight which has caused the greatest problem during precision instrument approaches is illustrated in figure 5 which shows the effect of speed on heading control during a 6 ° approach with a helicopter. The increased wandering at 2} knots compared with 65 knots is very apparentj despite the fact that the helicopter was stabilized with a moderate amount of rate damping about all axes. The pilot's workload was very high at 2_ knots because of the high rate of instru- ment scanning required. His rate of eye motion was found to be four times higher than that for a similar approach performed visually. Because the pilot was working at maximum capacity, it was not unusual for the aircraft to "get ahead of the pilot" and for the course-indicating needles to go off scale, the pilot having become "lost."

The wandering in heading illustrated in figure _ results from the increased rate at which the flight-path direction changes at low speed for a given change in aircraft attitude. This effect is illustrated in figure 6 by the rate of turn which develops from a _o bank upset as a function of speed and by assuming that the aircraft weathercocks into the relative wind. Note that below 30 knots the rate of turn due to this upset is higher than the standard rate of turn generally used for maneuvering during instrument flight.

The only satisfactory solution to this general low-speed instrument-flight problem seems to lie in attitude stabilization with maneuvering capability pro- vided through the normal controls.

Effect of Winds Winds have a large effect on V/STOL aircraft during low-speed operation, particularly during an instrument approach. One significant effect is that of wind gradients and gusts on glide-path control when the glide path is steeper than 3 ° . Figure 7 shows approaches in a gusty wind at 25 knots on glide paths of 7 ° and 18 ° with a helicopter. The larger power corrections required for the 18 ° approach are apparent. Pilot comments indicate that the power corrections required for 7 ° were noticeably increased over those for 3 ° , and that the greatly increased corrective action required at 18 ° was very troublesome. In the case of a jet V/STOL, the problem may be exaggerated by the lack of damping along the vertical axis at low speed.

One solution to this problem is to limit glide-path angles to about 6 ° for operations of the first generation of V/STOL aircraft. For steeper angles in the future, automatic control of the glide path will probably be required.

C 0NC LUS IONS A study of the problems involved with V/STOL aircraft operation in a ter- minal area has indicated the following conclusions: (i) A V/STOL instrument approach with presently available pilot displays and guidance systems requires about 5 minutes at low speed, an ideal aircraft being assumed. Vastly improved pilot displays and guidance systems could cut the time required to i_ to 2 minutes.

(2) To insure that the approach pattern time is the minimum possible and that there will be no missed approaches, the following must be considered: (a) The conversion process.must be kept simple by interconnecting as many operations as possible through one control, and by providing adequate vectoring capability for the lifting system.

(b) Attitude stabilization probably will be required to insure against excessive wandering of V/STOL aircraft in the instrument approach.

(c) Automatic glide-path control will probably be required for approaches over 6°.

REFERENCE i. Reeder, John P. : The Impact of V/STOL Aircraft on Instrument Weather Operations. NASA TN D-2702, 196.5.

CONVENTIONAL APPROACH LANES Figure i NOMINAL INSTRUMENT APPROACH PATTERNS CRUISE SPEED NOMINAL INSTRUMENT APPROACH PROFILES 150kn =_ 2.5 MIN ENTRY FIX t,)/LOW M_EWER FLAPS ALTITUDE, FT ENTRY FIX 2,000_- AIRPLANE AIRPLANE t ,500_- / FINAL APPROACH 140 kn .5 M_ FLAPS; LANDING FLANDING FLAP'3 I,O00_- _ GEAR DOWN 50 : ° • I _RUNWAY 140 kn 125 kn I MtN 1.5 MIN /MIN. AIRPLANE RUNWAY ALTITUDE, FT 180kn_ I'SMINI J SPEED /, 1,500[" V/STOL 80 kn 1.5 MIN V/STOL !.000 L -- ENTRY FIX TCONVERT HOVER L J__ .5 MIN 500 t GLI DE- PATH M_ VSSkn AV.- qSkn I MIN 15 MIN O_ " . .

Figure 2 Figure 3 DESCENT CONTROL WITH TWO LI FT- PROPULSION CONFIGURATIONS SIMPLE L{FT AND CRUISE VECTORED THRUST ENGINE ARRANGEMENT EFFECT OF FLI GHT SPEED ON HEADING CONTROL FOR A HELICOPTER APPROACH ANGLE, 6 ° ULTANT HEADING VARIATION, OEG SPEED, KNOTS FLIpAGTH T//_..iW.

" 20_,,.,_ __ __ O' -_...____ _'_= -- ---- 65

- ot , = , _

i i PATH 0 5 I0 15 20 25 30 TIME, SEC Figure 4 Figure RATE OF TURN RESULTING FROM 5 ° BANK UPSET POWER CHANGES DUE TO WIND GUSTS FOR A HELICOPTER AIRSPEED, 25 KNOTS ; GUSTY WIND GLIDE SLOPE, OEG RATE OF TURN, 80 7 DEG/SEC 60 .....

PERCENT OF E OF TURN TOTAL POWER 40 --- r.,.._ __ ---- 18 • L.

L I I l I I I I 2O 40 80 120 160 l t i i I I 0 5 I0 t5 20 25 VELOCITY, KNOTS TIME, SEC Figure 6 Figure 7 31.

GROUND EFFECTS 0NV/STOLAND STOL AIRCRAFT By Richard E. Kuhn NASA Langley Research Center SUMMARY Ground effects on V/STOL and STOL aircraft arise from the fact that these aircraft support themselves by deflecting air downward. The presence of the ground interrupts this downward flow_ith attendant effects on both the ground and the aircraft.

In general, ground effects on transport aircraft in the _O,O00-pound class will not be significant at heights above about 20 to 30 feet and velocities above about 40 to _0 knots. At lower heights and velocities, the aircraft will experience self-induced disturbances and hot-gas ingestion due to the recircu- lated slipstreams, and lift losses and trim changes in STOL operations.

The effects of self-generated turbulence will not be serious if adequate control is provided, and this annoyance to the pilot can be reduced by providing artificial damping. The avoidance of ground-erosion damage involves proper preparation and housekeeping of the landing site for high-disk-loadlng vehicles and proper operating procedures to avoid running into debris. Research is still in progress to obtain a better understanding of hot-gas ingestion and means of reducing it; its effects can be minimized by vectoring the exhaust rearward and using a short running take-off. The llft losses and trim changes in STOL operations will require an extra margin of power and velocity to com- pensate for this problem. Ground effects may preclude some operations such as hovering over loose sand with jet aircraft, but, in general, operational pro- cedures can be devised to minimize adverse ground effects.

INTRODUCTION The ground effects on V/STOL aircraft are associated with the fact that a hovering aircraft supports itself by accelerating air vertically downward.

An STOL aircraft, if it achieves its low speed by means of power, deflects air downward at a large angle to the direction of flight. When either air- craft is close to the ground, the impingement of this downward flowing stream of air has effects on the ground and personnel as well as on objects in the vicinity, and the deflection of these downflows by the ground alters the aero- dynamic forces on the aircraft.

This paper will review both the effects of the slipstream on the ground and the effects of the ground on the aircraft. (Refs. 1 and 2 present related discussions.) For the purpose of this discussion, the types of flow involved can be divided into three classes as shown in figure i: (a) Single slipstream (b) Multiple slipstreams (c) STOL aircraft In the case of the single-slipstream configuration (as shown in the upper left-hand corner), the flow impinges on the ground and flows radially outward in all directions. So long as the ground remains reasonably smooth, the flow adheres to the ground and is not reflected onto the aircraft. The outward flowing sheet of air entrains the stationary air above it and this entrainment of air causes the characteristic lift loss frequently discussed in connection with ground effects (refs. 3 to _). The lift-loss problem, however, is not discussed in this paper.

In the case of multiple slipstreams (shown in the upper right-hand corner of fig. i), the flows from the slipstream are deflected upward where they meet after flowing along the ground. The problems of self-generated turbulence, hot-gas ingestion, and debris damage are associated with this upflow.

In the STOL aircraft case (as shown in the sketch at the bottom of fig. i), the presence of the ground deflects part of the flow that would normally pro- ceed downward at a large angle to the stream, forward along the ground, and thereby causes a loss in lift. Also, the flow direction at the tail of the aircraft is altered by the presence of the ground and causes a change in lon- gitudinal trim of the aircraft.

SYMBOI_ d diameter, ft h height above ground, ft q dynamic pressure, ib/sq ft T exhaust temperature, OF _T inlet-temperature rise, OF V velocity, knots AVv increase in sinking speed, fps W gross weight, lb vector angle, deg DISCUSSION Surface Erosion and Debris Damage One of the most significant problems of V/STOL aircraft hovering in ground effect is that of the effects of disk loading on the ground erosion and effects of the outward flowing air on personnel, objects, and other aircraft in close proximity to the hovering aircraft. Ground erosion and the forces on objects in the vicinity are proportional to the dynamic pressure of the outward flow of air along the ground. The outflow from a helicopter-type configuration with a disk loading of i0 ib/sq ft and from a buried-fan configuration with a very high disk loading (500 ib/sq ft) are compared in figure 2. The dynamic pressure of this outward flowing sheet of air is a maximum very near the surface of the ground at any particular radial station. In the lower part of the figure, this maximum dynamic pressure is plotted as a function of radial distance from the center line of the aircraft (calculated from the data of refs. 6 and 7.) For both configurations, the dynamic pressure reaches a maximum near the edge of the slipstream and falls off rapidly outboard. Immediately under the aircraft, the configuration with the higher disk loading produces the higher dynamic pres- sure. In this region the effects of disk loading predominate. However, out- board of the extremities of the aircraft, both configurations produce essen- tially the same dynamic pressure. In this region, the problems of the downwash from the hovering aircraft are a function of the gross weight of the aircraft only and are independent of disk loading. It can also be noted in the sketches at the top of figure 2 that the outward flowing sheet of air from the high-disk- loading configuration is appreciably thinner than that for the low-disk-loading configuration. This result is due to the fact that the high-disk-loading vehi- cle achieves its lift by accelerating downward a much smaller mass of air to a much higher velocity. This smaller mass of air produces a thinner sheet along the surface.

The effects of high disk loadings then are confined to the immediate area of impingement of the slipstream, and it is in this area that the problems of ground erosion are most serious. The flow paths of the debris created by the erosion of the ground surface by a hovering VTOL aircraft are shown schemat- ically in figure 3. When the sublayer is not eroded, the loose particles on the surface of a hard ground are blown radially outward from the point of impingement. If, however, the dynamic pressure is higher or the ground surface is softer_ erosion of the surface can take place, and_ after a short period of time_ a depression is created which results in particles being projected upward into the air where they may be drawn back into the lifting system. This prob- lem was experienced by the X-14 aircraft hovering over wet sod and is discussed in more detail in paper no. 32 by Rolls. In both cases (with penetration and without penetration) the lighter particles are carried aloft by the turbulent eddy currents above the primary outward flowing sheet of air along the surface.

The question of whether the ground will be eroded depends on the disk loading of the vehicle as well as on the type of terrain over which the air- craft is operating. Figures 4 and 5 show the tolerance of various types of terrain to the temperature and to the dynamic pressure of the jet or slipstream from the hovering aircraft (refs. 6, 8, and 9). Sand and loose dirt begin to erode at dynamic-pressure levels of the order of only 3 lb/sq ft. Even heli- copters have a problem when hovering over loose dirt and sand, and those with the higher disk loadings will soon dig a hole in this type of surface. The primary concern in the case of crushed rock is with loose particles over the top of a hard sublayer and, in this situation, the tolerance to dynamic pres- sure is a function of the mass of the rock. The tolerance of sod to dynamic pressure depends upon the moisture content and root structure. Dry sod has been known to withstand the blast from turbojet engines for relatively long periods of time; however, wet sod will erode after very short exposure.

The exposure time is of considerable importance in the question of erosion of the ground. Some work on this has been done by Rolls-Royce, Ltd., using a vertically mounted lift engine installed in a Meteor aircraft by taxiing the aircraft over various types of terrain. Very few of these data are published but results indicate that the problems of ground erosion can be reduced appre- ciably by using a very short running take-off - that is, by accelerating the aircraft forward with Jets pointed aft and deflecting the jets down for lift- off after the aircraft has started moving.

The effects of temperature on the problems of erosion are shown in fig- ure _. Road asphalt will melt at relatively low temperatures and is not a suitable surface for hot-jet configurations. Normal concrete will also erode under the action of turbojet engines after a short period of time. Apparently the hot exhaust expands the moisture within the concrete causing it to crack and chip. Special water-cured concrete can be produced which will withstand the full exhaust temperature of nonafterburning turbojet engines. There are, in addition, some newer materials such as epoxy and polyester resin-bonded glass fibers being investigated by the U.S. Air Force (ref. i0) and industry that can withstand considerably higher temperatures for prolonged periods of time. Some experience with these newer materials has been obtained from tests with the X-14 airplane as discussed in paper no. 32 by Rolls.

So far, the present discussion has considered only the problems of erosion from the single-jet case. Additional problems can be created by the upflows created where the spreading flows from multiple slipstreams meet on the ground.

Both the VZ-2 propeller-driven tilt-wing aircraft shown in figure 6 and the X100 tilt-propeller configuration have experienced debris damage associated with these flows (refs. ll and 12). For both configurations, with the thrust axis nearly vertical, the slipstreams impinge on the ground and meet along the center line of the aircraft producing a fairly large volume of flow in the fore- and-aft direction near the center line of the aircraft. When aircraft damage was encountered, this airflow was carrying with it rocks and debris which were thrown up into the path of the aircraft due to random collisions with other debris. Because of the forward motion the aircraft ran into this debris. This occurred at hlgh-power conditions with an incidence of about 70 ° and a speed of about 20 knots. This problem was not encountered at zero airspeed with the thrust line vertical because the debris was thrown away from the aircraft. The problem would also not be encountered for very low thrust incidences, as in a conventional configuration, where all the slipstreams would be directed behind the aircraft and there would be no debris projected forward for the aircraft 29o to encounter. The problems of ground erosion and debris damage will sometimes require special site preparation and will require operational procedures to avoid running into debris.

Hot-Gas Ingestion The problem of hot-gas ingestion can also be aggravated by the upflows created by two impinging slipstreams. Figure 7 shows data obtained on a full- scale model of the XV-SA fan-in-wlng configuration in the Ames 40- by 80-foot tunnel (ref. 13). The fans in the wing are powered by the exhaust from turbo- jet engines which drive the fans through tip turbines9 thus, the hot gases from the turbines are on the outer edges of the slipstreams from the fans. After the flows impinge on the ground, the hot gases are on the upper surface of the outward flowing sheet of air. The model was fitted with a nose fan as well as two wing fans and at the point where the nose-fan and main-fan slipstreams meet, air is projected vertically upward carrying with it the hot exhaust gases.

Also, with a forward velocity in the tunnel, the air that flows forward past the nose fan is also returned to the inlets to both the engines and the fans.

The inlet-temperature rise reaches a maximum at wind speeds of the order of 40 knots. These data apply to the aircraft either hovering in a head wind or decelerating for a landing. In these flight conditions, the slipstream would be nearly vertical. One method of minimizing this problem, at least for the take-off condition, is to use a running take-off by accelerating the aircraft forward with the slipstream from the fans vectored rearward. In this case, the point of mixing of the two slipstreams is moved farther aft and the general rearward flow of air pulls most of the hot gas under the wing.

Because of the turbulences of the flow, the temperature at any point in the inlet fluctuates greatly and is not easy to measure. The data shown in figure 7 and presented in reference 13 represent the peak temperatures measured.

The average temperature rise would be considerably lower, perhaps less than one-half of the values shown. In some jet VTOL investigations, however, even higher temperature rises (up to 50 ° F) have been encountered. Good data on inlet-temperature increase due to hot-gas ingestion are required because an average rise of lO ° F will cause a thrust loss of 2_ to 3 percent on a jet llft engine and 7 to 8 percent on a lift fan. Research is continuing on oper- ational techniques and on methods of designing the aircraft, such as shielding the inlets, to minimize hot-gas ingestion.

Self-Induced Disturbances Another problem arising due to the impingement of multiple slipstreams on the ground and their reflection to the aircraft is that of self-induced tur- bulence. (See refs. 14 and 15.) Some flight records illustrating this for the VZ-2 tilt-wing aircraft are shown in figure 8, which presents the aircraft motion in terms of angular velocity about the three axes and the pilot's work load in terms of control travel, as a function of time for the aircraft hovering in and out of ground effect. In ground effect the aircraft motions are much greater than out of ground effect and the pilot is forced to use almost full control about all three axes in maintaining control of the aircraft.

Self-induced disturbances have been experienced by several aircraft including three of the four shown in figure 9, which also shows the flow pat- tern on the ground. For the VZ-2 airplane, the meeting of the two slipstreams creates an upflow along the center line of the aircraft. For the XV-5A airplane with three fans, the upflow lines form a Y-pattern. For the P.I127 airplane with four jets, the upflow lines form an X-pattern. The self-induced disturb- ances arise because these upflow lines do not stay fixed but move in response to control inputs and motions of the aircraft, thus altering the circulation of flow onto the aircraft causing a further disturbance which, in turn, causes further motion. All these aircraft experienced self-induced turbulence, the P.I127 being least affected because of its higher wing loading. The X-14 air- craft, although having a lower wing loading than either the P.I127 or the xV-SA aircraft, suffered least from the problems of self-induced turbulence primarily because the two jets involved were very close together and essen- tially acted as one. The Jets, therefore, did not create any significant upflow that would disturb the aircraft.

One problem that can aggravate the effects of self-induced turbulence is that of reduction of control effectiveness in close proximity to the ground.

This problem has been encountered on tilt-wing aircraft such as the VZ-2 where the trailing-edge ailerons, with the wing in the vertical position, are deflected differentially to produce yawing moments on the aircraft in hovering flight. (See fig. i0.) Plain ailerons suffer a significant loss in control effectiveness below a height of about i diameter. Recent data, however, have indicated that the control effectiveness in proximity to the ground can be increased appreciably by using a slotted aileron. This configuration allows air to flow through the slot to control the flow on the upper surface of the flap; thus, much higher flap deflections can be used with the slotted aileron than with the plain ailerons.

Ground Effects in STOL Operation Both the VZ-3RY deflected-slipstream aircraft (ref. 16) and the VZ-2 tilt- wing aircraft (ref. 17) have experienced significant losses in lift in ground proximity in short landings.

Figure ii shows schematically the flow around the wing and the impingement of the flow on the ground. Part of the air is projected forward along the ground, and this forward flowing sheet of air tends to lower the pressure under the wing and to cause a loss in lift and a forward inclination of the lift vec- tor. The loss in lift has created problems for the pilots) however, the for- ward component of force has not been troublesome. For the VZ-2 aircraft, ade- quate power was available to compensate for the loss in lift. In order to investigate this problem, however, some special flights were made in which the aircraft was set up in a trimmed condition out of ground effect at a low rate of sinking speed. Power and attitude were maintained constant to ground con- tact. The increase in sinking speed at the point of ground contact is shown in figure ii as a function of the approach speed. The ground effect did not become significant until speeds below about 30 knots were reached and only became critical at speeds below about 20 knots.

These losses in lift have been attributed to the recirculation of flow through the propellers (ref. 16)_ however, experience from wind-tunnel tests has shown that it is not the loss in propeller thrust due to this recirculation that is important in this loss in lift. The propeller forces are affected by the recirculating flow but the loss in lift has been encountered on blowing- flap and jet configurations as well. In fact, wind-tunnel data have shown that blowing-flap configurations may experience even larger losses in lift than the propeller-driven configurations for which flight experience is available.

A change in trim due to the proximity to the ground may also be encoun- tered in STOL operation. The angle of flow with respect to the horizontal tail is changed by the presence of the ground giving rise to a nose-up trim change as the aircraft leaves the ground on a take-off. This trim change was encoun- tered on the VZ-2 tilt-wing aircraft at about the same tilt angles and speeds at which the loss in lift was experienced. The pilots reported that under nor- mal conditions both the lift loss and trim change could be controlled. These two problems may be more serious in rough air or during instrument operations.

CONCLUDING B]gi&RKS Figure 12 presents the approximate height and airspeed conditions under which ground effects may be encountered by transport V/STOL and STOL aircraft in the 5%000-pound class. In general_ ground effects should not be signif- icant at heights above about 20 to 30 feet and at airspeeds above about 40 to 50 knots.

The effects of self-generated turbulence will not be serious if adequate control is provided, and this annoyance to the pilot can be reduced by pro- viding artificial damping. The avoidance of ground-erosion damage involves proper preparation and housekeeping of the landing site for high-disk-loading vehicles and proper operating procedures to avoid running into debris. Research is still in progress to obtain a better understanding of hot-gas ingestion and means of reducing it; its effects ca_ be minimized by vectoring the exhaust rearward and using a short running take-off. The lift losses and trim changes in STOL operations will require the pilot to hold an extra margin of power and velocity in the landing approach to compensate for this problem. Ground effects may preclude some operations such ashovering over loose sand with jet aircraft, but, in general, operational procedures can be devised to minimize adverse ground effects.

REFERENCES 1. Campbell, John P.: Ground Proximity Effects Associated With V/STOL Air- craft. NASA paper presented at the Eighth Anglo-American Aeronautical Conference (London, England), Sept. 3-14, 1961.

2. Schade, Robert 0.: Ground Interference Effects. NASA TN D-727, 1961.

3- Spreemann, Kenneth P.; and Sherman, Irving R.: Effects of Ground Proximity on the Thrust of a Simple Downward-Directed Jet Beneath a Flat Surface.

NACATN 4407, 1958.

4. Wyatt, L. A.: Static Tests of Ground Effect on Planforms Fitted With a Centrally-Located Round Lifting Jet. C.P. No. 749, Brit. A.R.C., 1964.

5. Vogler, Raymond D.: Interference Effects of Single and Multiple Round or Slotted Jets on a VTOL Model in Transition. NASA TN D-2380, 1964.

6. Kuhn, Richard E.: An Investigation To Determine Conditions Under Which Downwash From VTOL Aircraft Will Start Surface Erosion From Various Types of Terrain. NASA TN D-56, 1959.

7- 0'Bryan, Thomas C.: An Investigation of the Effect of Downwash From a VTOL Aircraft and a Helicopter in the Ground Environment. NASA TN D-977, 1961.

8. Vesigot, J. P.; and Gire, E.: Terrain de decollage ou atterrissage pour avion VSTOL. Symposium on Vertical/Short Takeoff and Landing Aircraft.

Pt. II. AGAEDograph 46, June 1960, pp. 355-370.

9_ Grotz, C. A.: Simulated VTOL Exhaust Impingement on Ground Surfaces.

Symposium on Vertical/Short Takeoff and Landing Aircraft. Pt. II.

AGARDograph 46, June 1960, pp. 419-426.

10. Vasiloff, A.: Test Results of Research for Rapid Site Preparation for VTOL Aircraft. APL-TDR-64-104, U.S. Air Force, Nov. 1964.

ii. Pegg, Robert J.: Damage Incurred on a Tilt-Wing Multipropeller VTOL/STOL Aircraft Operating Over a Level, Gravel-Covered Surface. NASA TN D-535, 1960.

12. 0'Bryan, Thomas C.: An Experimental Study of the Effect of Downwash From a Twln-Propeller VTOL Aircraft on Several Types of Ground Surfaces. NASA TN D-1239, 1962.

13. Kirk, Jerry V.; Hickey, David H._ and Hall, Leo P.: Aerodynamic Character- istics of a Full-Scale Fan-In-Wing Model Including Results in Ground Effect With Nose-Fan Pitch Control. NASA TN D-2368, 1964.

14. Reeder, John P.: Handling Qualities Experience With Several VTOL Research Aircraft. NASA TND-7353 1961.

I 15. Gustafson3 F. B.; Pegg, Robert J.; and Kelley# Henry L.: Aerodynamic Obser- vations From Flight Tests of Two VTOL Aircraft. NASA Conference on V/STOL Aircraft - A Compilation of the Papers Presented. NASA, Nov. 1960, pp. 149-169.

].6. Turner, Howard L.; and Drinkwater, Fred J. III.: Some Flight Characteris- tics of a Deflected Slipstream V/STOL Aircraft. NASA TN D-1891, 1963.

17. Pegg, Robert J. ; Kelley3 Henry L. ; and Reeder 3 John P. : Flight Investiga- tion of the VZ-2 Tilt-Wing Aircraft With Full-Span Flap. NASA TN D-26803 1965.

DECAY OF DYNAMIC PRESSURE ALONG GROUND w = 40,000 LB FLOWS AROUND V/STOL AIRCRAFT IN GROUND EFFECT d=72FT_ VTOL AIRCRAFT IN HOVERING SINGLE SLIPSTREAM MULTIPLE SLIPSTREAMS 250[/_d=10 FT STOL AIRCRAFT

ooi \

q, I0 =72FT LB/SQ FT 20[ _"'_'_ 0 410 810 120' "_760 DISTANCE FROM CENTER LINE, FT Figure 2 Figure 1 DEBRIS PATH S WITHOUT PENETRATION Figure 3 RESISTANCE OF VARIOUS SURFACES TO EROSION DYNAMIC PRESSURE RESISTANCE OF VARIOUS SURFACES TO EROSION TEMPERATURE q,LB/SOFT T_OF _0,000 IOOOO 8,O00 _: B_OO ¢000 I- AFTERBURNER _ 4,000 TURBOJET F- 2po0 I- FAN ': TURBOJET C 2_00 : i - .:.

I000 BUR,EoF r _-_",¢_-%_T" FAN JET E '800 FANL 400 E ',,_Z.."t:_,_'_' 4O0 DUCTED IOO "_"_._._ '""_ I00 PROPELLER ,,, HELICOPTER I LOOSE SAND CRUSHgO SOD AND DIRT ROCK EXOTIC CONCRETE ROAD MATERIALS ASPHALT Figure 4 Figure 9 HOT-GAS INGESTION DEBRIS DAMAGE EXPERIENCED BY RESEARCH AIRCRAFT vz-2 AND XIO0 .... _. _ - - - .

PROPELLER [ J_ _- INCIDENCE, ........ _.._ _.z_-_ _ ---i k H J DEG HOVERING, RUNNING TAKE-OFF, 0 e VECTORING VECTORING -- -r__ __ 90[)DEBRIS BLOWN AWAY _I__-__ C: _i I AIRCRAFT RAN _,Or HEIGHT ABOVE 30 r HEIGHT, 5 FT -: -_" _- _::_j: I '#//////', INTO DEBRIS | GROUND, FT - ( _I _- - I OE_R,S \ II /. - / _ THROWN ' "'_. - / I. BEHIND AT, °F 2C i Al#ql_'_h _.t_ __, ,_ KNOTS AT, °F 201 //yn _ " "_ "_""- I j AIRCRAFT IO IC

i \

,_ V, KNOTS 0 20 40 60 0 I0 20 50 40 WINDSPEED, KNOTS VECTOR ANGLE, e,OEG Figure 7 Figure 6 PATTERN OF GROUND-REFLECTED DISTURBANCES XV-5A EFFECT OF SELF-INDUCED TURBULENCE HOVERING OUT OF GROUND EFFECT IN GROUND EFFECT ANGULAR _L YAW VELOCITY, 20 ROLL DEG/SEC _F , i i _--_i _ PITCH i I'-*-'T_*"T i L i J_ 34 YAW CONTROL j..T TRAVEL.IN. -_ _ ROLL ]_i I PITCH _" /i TIME, SEC TIME,SEC Figure 8 Figure 9 YAW CONTROL IN GROUND EFFECT '_ SLOTTED AILERONS EFFECT OF GROUND ON LIFT IN STOL OPERATION PERCENT OF _ -- k LIFT OUT OF I00 _=_ GROUND EFFECT I INCREASE IN SINKING SPEED VZ-2 LANDINGS _----=_PLAI N AILERONS AV v , O f ,"'_'_ I h _'_,_ FPS NORMAL GEAR .................. _ ....

! 'iO 20 3() 4() !

HEIGHT I I L I I 0 .4 .B 1.2 1.6 2.0 APPROACH SPEED, KNOTS h/d Figure i0 Figure ii REGION OF SIGNIFICANT GROUND EFFECT 3C SELF-GENERATED TURBULENCE . • : ;: % !-"_!ii'i_'_:i':!'. GROUND-EROSION DAMAGE 2C _i:'_;(_",_ii!'_'-"_:i_'_:':,!'):;!':;' HOT-GAS INGEST ON '._2.-_::',::]':_'_!_,i;,_'.'.:_;:i STOL LIFT LOSS AND TRIM ALTITUDE, FT IC • " "LX'C_,_',L- .; _.'._,....

20 40 60 80 AIRSPEED, KNOTS Figure 12

32. OPERATIONAL EXPERIENCES WITHTHE

X-14A DEFLECTED-JET VTOLAIRCRAFT

By L. Stewart Rolls

NASA AmesResearch Center

SUMMARY

1 years of flight research with a deflected-jet VTOLaircraftj a

During 5[

number of operational problems were experienced and investigated. These experi-

ences can be grouped into two general categories: (1) the effects of the jet

engine and its operation and (2) the restrictions imposed upon the pilot's

operation due to reduced visual reference. This report is an examination of

these problems and3 in somecases3 presents possible solutions to these

problems.

INTRODUCTION

Since the late 1950's3 numerousagencies both in this country and abroad

have been flying various forms of vertical take-off and landing aircraft. The

majority of these flight activities were directed toward developing satisfactory

pilot control and handling qualities. Whereasthese quantities are extremely

impoztant 3 the extension of the VTOLaircraft beyond an experimental oddity to

an operational aircraft requires an examination of the operational problems

associated with this class of aircraft and of the solutions found to these

problems.

_]

the

During

9_2years of research flying of a deflected-Jet VTOLresearch

vehicle (the X-14A) at the AmesResearch Center, there were certain areas of

operation in which difficulties were encountered that might limit the opera-

tional utility of the concept. These experiences have shownthat the environ-

mental surroundings have a significant influence on both the operation of a

VTOLaircraft and the ability of the pilot to complete a prescribed mission.

The factors discussed in this report which influence the operation of the air-

craft include hot-gas ingestion 3 suck-down#and ground erosion. The factors

affecting the pilot are exemplified by his loss in orientation through the lack

of sideward oz backward velocity indications while hovering at altitude and_

at night, by his poor judgment of vertical velocity while hovering.

DESCRIPTION OF EQUIPMENT

The X-14A research aircraft used in this investigation was constructed by

the Bell Aircraft Company(now a part of Bell Aerosystems Company)under

contract to the U.S. Air Force and had successfully completed hovering and

transitional flight prior to its transfer to the NASAin late 1959. Following

a brief initial flight program at the AmesResearch Center, the aircraft was

extensively modified to improve its performance and enlarge its research cap-

ability. The information in this report was obtained from flight tests of the

modified aircraftj which is shown in hovering flight in figure 1. The X-14A

VTOLaircraft utilizes the vectored-thrust principle of vertical lift. The

exhaust gas from two horizontally mounted General Electric J85-5 turbojet

engines is directed through a cascade system of exit diverters_ as shown in fig-

ure 2. The exhaust gas may be directed vertically or horizontally by the posl-

tioning of the outer set of cascades. During hover and slow-speed flight3

control of the aircraft attitude is maintained by the use of reaction jets at

the -'_-_w_ tips and +_i._, air _........ +_o_ contr_]_ _ _l_a _ the c_pressor of

the turbojet engines. A set of servo-operated valves in conjunction with a

pilot's control panel provides a variable stability and control capability in

the aircraft. A more detailed description of the test vehicle and the test

procedures is presented in references i to 3-

RESULTS ANDDISCUSSION

The experience of operating a deflected-jet VTOLaircraft has indicated

that the operational difficulties can be grouped into two general categories;

the first is primarily the effects of the jet engine and its operation, and

the second is the results from the restrictions imposed upon the pilot's

operation due to the environment in which he is flying.

Engine Jet Effects

Hot-_as ingestion.- The susceptibility of a turbojet-engine thrust output to inlet-alr temperature can result in a critical operation of a Jet-lift VTOL aircraft. The large quantities of hot exhaust gases which circulate around the aircraft during hover can, under certain conditions, be ingested into the inlets with a corresponding loss in thrust. The flow of these exhaust gases about the vehicle and the effect of wind on this flow is illustrated in fig- ure 3. Also, if the distribution of hot gases across the inlet is nonuniform_ it could cause the temperature sensor to signal erroneous commands to the fuel control and increase the probability of compressor stall. In addition, a non- uniform temperature variation could impose an additional stress problem for the compressor blades. The effect of ingesting hot gases into the engines on the thrust is shown in figure 4. The thrust reduction with temperature increase is shown in the left side of this figure. The dashed llne represents the thrust required from each engine to lift the aircraft off the ground. The data indicate that for inlet temperatures greater than 80 ° F the aircraft will not become airborne. The right side of the figure shows that a headwind causes an increase in the hot-gas ingestion, as indicated by the increase in inlet temperature. When this increase in inlet temperature results in a thrust available - that is 3 less than the thrust required for lift-off - the pilot must decide whether (1) to operate the engines momentarily above the tempera- ture limit, knowing that the thrust requirements decrease with height, (2) to 3OO burn off fuel until a sufficient weight reduction is madeto allow lift-off,

but with a reduced flight capability, or (3) to llft off with a cross wind or

tail wind even though difficulty in attitude control is increased.

Ground effect.- The air entrained by the engine exhaust flows across and around the surfaces of the aircraft so that a negative pressure field is created 3 resulting in a suck-down when the aircraft is less than about 20 feet above the ground. Therefore 3 a thrust greater than the weight of the aircraft is required to lift the aircraft vertically off the ground. The magnitude of this effect in the X-14A is illustrated in figure 5_ in which the thrust required to hover at various fixed heights is shown. The rapid increase in the thrust-required curve as the aircraft approaches the ground is a severe problem for this type of vehicle because it dictates a greater installed thrust and also accounts for the long landing gear on the X-14A. In order that there be a better understanding of this effect_ the wing-root fairings were removed from the X-14A; thus 3 a more direct inflow of the entrained air was permitted_ with the possibility of a corresponding decrease in the negative pressure field.

Flight tests for this condition did not show any change in the suck-down magni- tude. The removable fairings were near the trailing edge of the wing and a considerable distance from the jet.

Also, the instability resulting from this condition makes the pilot's task of learning the take-off and landing maneuvers more difficult. In the X-14A the instability is symmetrical, and no attitude-control problem is induced; however 3 in some aircraft in which the lifting units are dispersed from the center, an unstable rolling moment is experienced.

The ground effects of jet-lift aircraft have been studied in various facil- ities. (See ref. 4.) A comparison of the X-14A data and the computed require- ments based upon these tunnel tests is shown in figure 6. The data near the ground are in fair agreement 3 but the effect of the ground is felt to a much greater height in the airplane than the model tests would indicate. Because of this difference_ the actual penalty in operating a VTOL airplane may be small, since only a limited amount of time would be spent in this altitude range.

Ground erosion.- Extreme difficulty may be encountered when operating a VTOL aircraft near an unprepared surface. The downwash velocities associated with these hovering vehicles are usually high enough to cause ground erosion and to cause debris to be thrown in all directions about the aircraft. The jet-lift aircraft is most critical in this regard because of the extremely high jet velocities which are directed toward the ground. When the X-14A approaches an unprepared surface_ a dust cloud similar to that of figure 7 results. In this particular view_ the X-14A is hovering alongside the runway at a height of about 45 feet above a barren field of loose dirt, and the dust cloud extends to a height of about 35 feet. It is obvious that a landing on this type of surface is undesirable and probably could not be made without severe damage to the aircraft or the engine compressors.

Ground erosion also occurred when the aircraft has hovered at low alti- tude over a grass-covered field. On this occasion the aircraft was hovered at various heights over a moist field of native rye type of grass. No

sign of ground erosion or browning of the grass was observed as long as the

airplane was at a height greater than about 15 feet. Whenthe hovering height

was lowered to a jet-exhaust height of about 6 feet and held for about 5 sec-

onds, a large section of the soll exploded into the air and a sizable amount

was ingested into the jet engines. Figure 8 illustrates the magnitude of the

crater caused by the rapid hurling of earth into the air. Inasmuch as this

event occurred during an interval of 1 or 2 seconds, it was impossible for the

pilot to removethe aircraft from this position prior to the ingestion of the

dirt and subsequent compressor damage. The P.1127 in England has operated from

turf fields 3 but in the X-14A incident, the roots of the grass did not stabil-

ize the soll sufficiently to withstand the jet.

_._ u_.... at .... of '_ T aircraft will require that the vehicle can be

operated from other than hard concrete landing surfaces. Thus, either a method

to reduce the Jet-exhaust velocities or a meansof quickly preparing a suitable

surface for landing is required. Both these approaches are being pursued in

an attempt to free the Jet VTOLfrom the restriction of operating only over a

concrete surface. To examine methods to minimize the ground-erosion effect of

the jet exhaust, the NASA has contracted for a study of several nozzle shapes

designed to increase the mixing between the Jet exhaust and the surrounding

air. (See ref. 5.) Someof these nozzles are shown in figure 9. The experi-

mental results obtained with these nozzles are shown in figure l0 in terms of

the variation of the maximum dynamic pressure in the Jet qx/qN with distance

downstream from the nozzle x/D. These data also showthe nozzle velocity coef-

ficients, which are the ratios of the actual to the ideal nozzle thrust. The

jet dynamic pressure has been shown in the past to be a determining factor in

ground erosion. The achievement of values less than 0.3 is a desirable goal

and should permit VTOLoperation with pure Jet aircraft from a wide variety

of sod conditions. To relate these distance ratios to an aircraft, it is felt

that values of x/D from 2 to 3 will be the range used in fighters, whereas

values up to 8 will be used on high-wlng transports with llft engines in pods

on the wing. Figure lO indicates that a dynamic pressure ratio of 0.3 is pos-

sible within this x/D range for someof these nozzles. Studies of these

nozzles in the presence of a wing and fuselage, however, indicate that the

rapid mixing of the jet and surrounding air might increase the thrust loss of

the alrplane-engine combination. Further studies of these nozzles are neces-

sary to document their usefulness more fully and to weigh the beneficial and

undesirable characteristics. Inasmuch as these nozzle shapes are similar to

those studied in the past for noise reduction, somebeneficial noise reduction

may also result from their use.

The X-14A was used as a test vehicle during a field test of a method for

rapid preparation of a landing area for VTOLaircraft. The method used in this

test was developed by the U.S. Air Force and Ling-Temco-Vought and consisted

of spraying alternate layers of flber-glass yarn and a chlorinated polyester

resin. Test samples of this pad were successfully evaluated in a laboratory

rig and withstood afterburning temperatures and exhaust velocities. Figure ll

shows the pad under construction on a test site alongside the taxiway at

Moffett Field. This figure illustrates the two separate operations used to

build up the landing pad: (I) spraying the fiber-glass yarn and (2) covering

it with the polyester resin. The pad was first prepared to cover a

25-foot-dlameter area; however, an attempted landing on this pad indicated

that a larger pad would be required. An additional surface, 18 feet wide but

thinner, was lald around the original pad to serve as a dust cover. The pad

was prepared on the samebarren dirt field which resulted in the dust cloud

shown in figure 7. Four hours after the pad preparation commenced, the pad

was ready for the aircraft. The X-14A madea series of approaches, landings#

and take-offs from the prepared surface. (See fig. 12.) This method of pre-

paring a landing area for Jet VTOLaircraft shows somemerit, and further field

tests are planned by the U.S. Air Force. A complete description of the field

tests with the X-14A is contained in reference 6.

Environmental Restrictions

The second major category is associated with the hovering of a VTOLair-

craft under varied visibility conditions. For this discussion, the vehicle

is assumedto have satisfactory control power and damping characteristics. In

order to operate a hovering vehicle successfully, the pilot must be able to

assay his situation rapidly and accurately. Consequently, until newhovering

flights have been restricted to situations in which the pilot has good visual

reference to supply his muchneeded attitude information. This problem has

been demonstrated during flight tests of the X-14A when, for safety reasons,

the vehicle was hovered at an altitude from 2500 to 3000 feet during check

flights of control-system changes or for early indoctrination flights for new

pilots. The lack of visual reference at altitude makes it extremely difficult

for the pilot to determine sideward or backward motion. The pilots who are

more familiar with the X-14A use other inputs, such as the position of the

angle-of-attack vane or the reversal of elevator control force, to supply

information concerning the motion of the aircraft. The difficulty of this task

has been illustrated by the unscheduled maneuverswhich have been performed by

pilots during their check flights because of their inability to detect airplane

motion. These maneuvershave included attitude changes along the pitch or roll

axis of greater than 180o. Fortunately, with its light wing loading, recovery

can be executed in the X-14A with only a nominal loss in altitude.

Onetest objective required that a flight be madeat night. A lighted

area around the landing spot and a lighted hangar with the door open was pro-

vided to serve as an attitude reference. The pilot reported difficulty in

judging height and height rate. It was not until he was high enoughto llne

up distant lights that he was confident about height control. This problem

may be more severe on the X-14A because of the low value of vertical damping

which intensifies the height-control problem. During normal hovering periods

when there are good visual references, the pilot has no difficulty maintaining

his height. However, when the references are reduced# the control of height

becomesmore difficult and it is harder for the pilot to maintain the vehicle

at the desired altitude. Helicopters can hover at night# but with their high

vertical damping the task of controlling height is not as critical as that for

the X-14A; however, helicopters experience problems during sonar operations

over the sea on dark nights when the pilot loses orientation due to the lack

of references. Thus, the experiences in the X-14A have shownthat sensitive

displays of high resolution will have to be developed if a VTOLis to hover

successfully durlngperiods of reduced visibility.

3o3 CONCLUDING REMARKS Examination of the experiences in flight testing a deflected-jet VTOL air- craft_ the X-14A_ has indicated possible operating problems. Hot-gas ingestion and suck-down are problems which will cause difficulties for some VTOL con- cepts. Test results have indicated possible approaches for minimizing the ground erosion by using either special nozzle shapes to reduce downwash veloc- ities at ground level or by preparing the ground surface to withstand the velocities. Operation during periods of reduced visual references demonstrated the need for sensitive pilot displays of high resolution for VTOL operation.

REFERENCES i. Rolls_ L. Stewart; and Drinkwater, Fred J., llI: A Flight Determination of the Attitude Control Power and Damping Requirements for a Visual Hovering Task in the Variable Stability and Control X-14A Research Vehicle. NASA TN D-1328, 1962.

2. Rolls_ L. Stewart; Drinkwater, Fred J., llI; and Innis, Robert C.: Effects of Lateral Control Characteristics on Hovering a Jet Lift VTOL Aircraft.

NASA TN D-2701, 1965.

3. Pauli, Frank A.; Hegarty, Daniel M.; and Walsh, Thomas M.: A System for Varying the Stability and Control of a Deflected-Jet, Fixed-Wing VTOL Aircraft. NASA TN D-2700, 1965.

4. Schade, Robert 0.: Ground Interference Effects. NASA TN D-727, 1961.

5. Higgins_ C. C.; and Wainwright, T. W.: Dynamic Pressure and Thrust Charac- teristics of Cold Jets Discharging From Several Exhaust Nozzles Designed for VTOL Downwash Suppression. NASA TN D-2263, 1964.

6. Vasiloff, A.: Test Results of Research for Rapid Site Preparation for VTOL Aircraft. APL-TDR-64-104_ U.S. Air Force_ Nov. 1964.

X-14A VTOL TEST VEHICLE - -

A-28473-9

A- 34% 2- 2

Figure 1

Figure 2

EFFECTS OF WIND NO WIND EFFECT OF HEADWINDS ON REINGESTION ~ 6 0 0 5 ~ 0 0 2 4 6 8 1 0 1 2 1 4 HEADWIND VELOCITIES. knots A I R TEMPERATURE."F

Figure 3

Figure 4

30 5

GROUND-EFFECT COMPARISON SUCK-DOWN EFFECT ON X-14A -

1.16 - FLIGHT TEST

---- MODEL TEST

(REF 4 ) - ; 1.12 1.12 r U a - 5 1.08

2 I O 8 \

- 1.04 2 1.0- I I- WHEELS TOUCH I I I I .96 0 4 8 12 1 6 2 0 DISTANCE ABOVE GROUNDlJET DIAMETER

Figure 6

Figure 5

DUST CLOUD EROSION CRATER

A-30386

A- 32780-27

Figure 8

Figure 7

EFFECT OF NOZZLE SHAPE ON VELOCITY DECAY N O Z Z L E SHAPES 98NOZZLE VELOCITY CONVERGENT CIRCULAR NOZZLE SLOT NOZZLE 0 2 4 6 8 IO 12 14 1 6 FOUR SEGMENT TWELVE SEGMENl x I D NOZZLE NOZZLE

Figure 9

Figure 10

X - 1 4 A LANDING ON PLASTIC PAD . .

. . - ..

A-3 278 0- 28

Figure 11

Figure 12 A-3 2780-8

SOME PERFORMANCE AND HANDLING-QUALITIES CONSIDERATIONS 33.

FOR OPERATION OF STOL AIRC_ By Seth B. Anderson, Hervey C. Quigley, and Robert C. Innis NASA Ames Research Center SUMMARY Studies of a number of STOL aircraft show that relatively high maximum lift-coefficients and large increases in lift due to power are within the pres- ent state of the art. With these lift characteristics, approach speeds of the order of 60 knots for aircraft of moderate wing loading can be realized_ Full advantage of the STOL performance of aircraft such as those discussed herein may not be realized on a routine operational basis, however, without some form of damping augmentation system because of lateral-directional handling consid- erations 3 particularly for large aircraft operating under instrument flight conditions. Satisfactory characteristics can be obtained by use of only a servodriven rudder. Additional experience is needed to determine how the STOL aircraft is to be operated before more firm requirements for augmenta- tion systems can be established.

INTRODUCTION The requirement for STOL airplanes which can operate out of small fields and yet retain high cruise performance has continued with increased emphasis for both military and commercial operation. Aircraft requiring STOL operation are (i) COIN (counter-insurgency) fighter (2) Short-haul transport (3) HI_ (heavy logistics) transport Short-field landing distance depends on approach speed as indicated in figure 1.

Shown are the approximate approach speeds and landing distances for the afore- mentioned aircraft. Although each of these aircraft has been identified as an STOL type, the landing distance ranges from 800 feet for the COIN aircraft to 4,000 feet for the HIS transport. Since approach speed is dependent on wing loading and lift coefficient_ and since these aircraft require high wing loading for efficient cruise_ the expected short-field requirements can be met 3o9 only by operation at high lift coefficients. In addition, to realize maximum STOL performance, engine power must be used to augment aerodynamic lift. The amount of engine power used is a measure of the degree of STOL operation, the ultimate being VTOL. As a result, the STOL aircraft must operate in an envi- ronment of low dynamic pressure which results in reduced control and damping and where engine power effects on stability are more important.

SYMBOLS lift coefficient CL maximum lift coefficient CLmax yawing moment due to roll rate yawing moment due to aileron deflection N8 a P period, sec r rate of turn, rad/sec t time, sec V velocity, knots angle of sideslip, deg rate of sideslip, deg/sec aileron deflection angle, deg 8a rudder deflection angle, deg 8r angle of bank, deg

¢

DESCRIPTION OF TEST AIRCRAFY For a number of years NASA has investigated STOL aircraft to obtain information on performance, handling qualities, and operational characteristics.

Because of very high lift systems and controls designed for low-speed opera- tion, it was possible with the test aircraft to probe further into STOL flight than heretofore had been possible. (See refs. 1 to 6.) Once the problems and limitations of these aircraft are understood, the possibility of further expanding the low-speed envelope for the HLS or any future STOL aircraft may be realized. In addition, if good handling qualities are provided, the 31o

performance of the skilled test pilot can becomeroutine for the operator of

STOLaircraft.

RESULTS ANDDISCUSSION

The main points learned from the operating experience with the test air-

craft that may apply to the three previously mentioned aircraft fall in the

following three areas:

(1) Lift performance

(2) Limitations in low-speed operation

(3) Solutions to handling-qualities problems

Lift Performance

Lift performance of the STOLaircraft is shown in figure 2 in terms of lift

coefficient and speed. The values of CLmax corresponding to maximum power,

approach power, and idle power as well as the values of C L for approach are

shown. Relatively high values of maximum llft have been obtained with these

STOLaircraft 3 and the use of engine power is primarily responsible for the

large increase from the basic lift. The 367-80 Jet aircraft had little direct

lift due to power. The immediate question that comesto mind is_ Howmuch of

this available lift is actually usable to the pilot not only under ideal test

flying conditions, but also for routine day-to-day operation? The selected

values of C L for approach, although far removed from maximum lift, are above

the value of CLmax at minimumpower for the slipstream configurations. For

STOLoperation these approach lift coefficients represent a marked reduction in

approach speeds over those used by conventional aircraft for which the approach

C L is based on the idle-power stall speed multiplied by 1.3. For example, the

conventional approach speed would be about 80 knots for the 941 aircraft.

Operational Envelope

One major reason for limiting the amount of lift used (flying slower) is

that of obtaining desirable descent rates or steep fllghtpath angles. Figure 3

shows the flight path angle plotted against speed for the 941 aircraft at vari-

ous engine powers. The shapes of the curves are representative of all the test

aircraft. All the aircraft had adequate descent capability, that is, 800 feet

per minute or 6° flight path angles provided that low engine power was used in

approach. As soon as engine power is increased above idle to reduce speed, the

values of L/D increase and the approach path becomes shallower. The point to

be emphasized is that if improvements beyond the values shownare required for

the deflected-slipstream aircraft, they must be obtained either by increasing

the basic or Idle-power lift capability or by increasing the slipstream turning

and the engine power as is the case for the VZ-3RYor the tilt-wing aircraft

such as the XC-142. In these cases the stall or minimum-speedline would be

displaced towards the lower speed region.

Handling Qualities

Assuming that the existing landing performance of the test aircraft is

satisfactory_ another reason for limiting the amount of llft used is the fact

that the aircraft must have satisfactory handling characteristics so that it

can be controlled precisely along its intended flight path. Unsatisfactory

hand.ling qualities which would compromiseperfo_mance in a day-to-day operation

were common to all the aircraft to somedegree. In general, it was possible

for test purposes to approach at a speed slower than the minimumspeed dictated

by stability and control considerations. Of the various handling qualities_ the

lateral-directional characteristics were the most troublesome and, therefore,

were considered to require immediate attention particularly for instrument

flight operation.

Sideslip Control

The item of primary concern common in varying degrees to all aircraft

tested was control of sideslip angle. Shownin figure 4 is the effect of air-

speed on the variation of the sideslip-bank ratio _/2_ with directional

period for rudder-fixed turn entries. These curves were determined by using the

characteristics of the basic 367-80 aircraft. Large sideslip angles are easily

generated at the low speeds of STOLoperation because of low values of direc-

tional stability. Since the yawing momentneeded to turn the aircraft must be

generated by sideslip if the rudder is not used, a large part of the increase

in sideslip is due to the increased turn rate associated with flight at lower

airspeeds. The pilot is concerned about controlling sideslip angle for a num-

ber of reasons: (i) Sideslip excursions occurring during turn maneuvers result

in heading errors. (2) Precise control of sideslip is needed during decrab for

cross-wind landings. (3) Fin stalling may occur at large angles of sideslip.

During turn entries at low speeds_ large yawing momentscan be generated

by (i) aileron deflection and (2) roll velocity. Since these yawing moments

can be large and adverse at high lift coefficients_ their influence is greater

in STOLaircraft because they increase the requirement to use the rudder to

reduce sideslip during turning. A time history of the rudder requirements for

a coordinated (sideslip equals zero) turn maneuver of the C-130B aircraft at

70 knots is presented in figure 5. The difficulty of (i) applying the correct

amount of rudder deflection and (2) properly phasing the rudder and aileron is

illustrated by these data. Even for a small-turn entry at a bank angle of only

-iO°_ appreciable amounts of rudder deflection at different times are required

to maintain zero sideslip.

Lateral-Directional Period

Rudder coordination becomesmore difficult as the lateral-directional

period becomeslonger since the aircraft behavior will be slow or sluggish and

the rise time of the response will appear as lag to the pilot. The lag makes

it difficult for the pilot to predict the final response of the aircraft to his

input. The relationship of pilot rating to period for two aircraft configura-

tions obtained from simulator tests and verified by flight results in the speed

range of 55 to 85 knots is shown in figure 6. Pilot rating deteriorated with

increasing period; the poorest rating was obtained with the swept-wing config-

uration_ primarily because of the inherently larger adverse yawing momentdue

to roll rate and because of other characteristics such as poor Dutch-roll

damping associated with this planform. In general 3 the unaugmentedaircraft

were rated unsatisfactory for periods greater than 7 seconds. Marked improve-

ments were obtained for both the swept-wing and the straight-wing configura-

tions by using damping augmentation. The lateral-directional period of an air-

craft is a function of both its size and the airspeed at which it is operated.

Thus for the CS-A type aircraft, the period can be as long as 15 seconds if

operated at speeds of the order of 85 to 90 knots.

DampingAugmentation Systems

Solutions to the lateral-directional problem involving the use of damping

augmentation which obviously would be needed for operation of the larger air-

craft, particularly under IFR conditions, are examined. Since the primary

problem previously discussed has been identified as that of controlling large

sideslip excursions which accompaniedlanding-approach maneuvers, consideration

was given to a damping system which would utilize the rudder to counteract the

yawing momentsproduced by aileron deflection, roll rate_ and yaw rate. Simu-

lator studies and flight tests of stability and damping systems were madein the

UF-XS, NC-13OB,and 367-80 aircraft. These studies showedthat reducing adverse

yaw due to aileron deflection did not by itself improve pilot rating, nor did

a conventional yaw damper improve the pilot rating sufficiently. Sideslip-rate

damping, referred to a 8 damping_was more successful as a meansof con-

trolling sideslip as shownin figure 7 for the NC-130Baircraft. For a turn at

a bank angle of lO°, _ damping markedly reduced the peak sideslip angle; the

final steady-state value of _ was less_ and a greater turn rate resulted.

The basic deficiency in applying a yaw damper to the sideslip problem of STOL

aircraft is that in a turn entry the yaw damper applies a rudder deflection

opposite to that required in the turn and thereby increases sideslip. A wash-

out type of yaw damper would, of cours% reduce the steady-state sideslip, but

would have little or no effect on the peak value of sideslip.

In addition, there is a need to offset the unfavorable (negative) yawing

momentdue to roll velocity since inherent values of Np for most aircraft are

unfavorable. Both flight and simulator tests have shownthat with low direc-

tional stability (periods greater than lO seconds) the desired gain of a yawing-

momentaugmenter is quite critical.

The results of a damping augmentation system, which considered all the

points learned from the operating experience with STOLaircraft_ are shownin

figure 8. These results for the NC-130Baircraft showthat large reductions

in peak sideslip angle for a given bank angle were obtained by the use of the

augmentation system which provided _ damping, a favorable value of Np, and

compensation for adverse values of NSa. In the NC-130Bairplane, the maximum

authority (that is, percent of total rudder deflection) was 25 percent and was

limited by the characteristics of the servosystem used. Even with the augmenta-

tion system, maneuvering had to be limited to a 15° bank angle if sideslip was

to be restricted to 5° . Further reduction in sideslip could be achieved pro-

vided increased rudder authority is acceptable.

CONCLUDING RE_d<S

_n summary 3 relatively high maximum lift coefficients and large increases

in lift due to power, which are within the present state of the art, result in

approach speeds of the order of 60 knots for aircraft of moderate wing loading.

Full advantage of the STOLperformance of aircraft such as those discussed

herein may not be realized on a routine operational basis, however, without

someformof damping augmentation system because of lateral-directional handling

considerations, particularly for large aircraft operating under instrument

flight conditions.

Satisfactory characteristics can be obtained by use of only a servodriven

rudder.

Additional experience is needed to determine how the STOLaircraft is to

be operated before more firm requirements for augmentation systems can be

established.

REFERENCES I. Turner 3 Howard L.; and Drinkwater, Fred J., III.: Some Flight Characteris- tics of a Deflected Slipstream V/STOL Aircraft. NASA TN D-1891, 1963.

2. Innis, Robert C.; and Quigley_ Hervey C. : A Flight Examination of Operating Problems of V/STOL Aircraft in STOL-Type Landing and Approach. NASA • N 0-862, 1961.

3- Quigley, Hervey C.; and Innis_ Robert C.: Handling Qualities and Operational Problems of a Large Four-Propeller STOL Transport Airplane. NASA TN D-1647, 1963.

4. Quigley_ Hervey C.; Innis_ Robert C.; anct_ Holzhauser_ Curt A.: A Flight Investigation of the Performance, Handling Qualities 3 and Operational Char- acteristics of a Deflected Slipstream STOL Transport Airplane Having Four Interconnected Propellers. NASA TN D-2231, 1964.

5. Booda_ Larry: Japan Seeks Farkets for New Projects. Aviation Week and Space Technol., vol. 8% no. ll, Mar. 163 1964j pp. 276-283.

6. Gratzer, L. B.; and O'Donnell 3 T. J.: The Development of a BLC High-Lift System for High-Speed Airplanes. Paper No. 64-589_ Am. Inst. Aeron.

Astronaut._ Aug. 1964.

EFFECT OF APPROACH SPEED ON LANDING DISTANCE LIFT CHARACTERISTICS OF TEST AIRCRAFT 14o ¢, CLmox _= ¢) 7.0_.(. CLmox AT MAX POWER _.loo I \- &\_ &'_ c AT APPROACH POWER >< d HLS uJ 80 40! \ \ C AT APPROACH POWER m Lmex AT IDLE POWER _ Bo

:ol r

._ 4o T:ANSPORT a'°F 2o

"°o'_o5'0 ;o ;o Go ,o

I000 2O00 500O 4OO0 5OOO V, knots TOTAL LANDING DISTANCE, ft Figure i Figure 2 EFFECT OF AIRSPEED ON SIDESLIP PERFORMANCE OPERATIONAL ENVELOPE BREGUET 941 AIRCRAFT 1.0 rJ APPROACH SPEEDS

'l

e& _.B o" , o, ,/'_.3. ' ' z

/

< -4 / // _ /800 ft/min -6 .2 u. -IO

/ ,GTALL , _,_LEPOWER

DECREASING DIRECTIONAL STABILITY -12 I L [ , I L I 40 4B 56 64 72 80 co 20 12 IO 8 6 4 V, knots P, sec Figure 3 Figure RUDDER REQUIREMENTS IN A COORDINATED TURN (/3=0 °) EFFECT OF PERIOD ON PILOT RATING I0 o BASIC / _T -- SIMULATOR • AUGMENTED _FLIGHT UNACCEPTABLE I _o 367-80 -I0 , i , o NC- 130B i, T _- SWEPT-WING JET ._AILERON ADVERSE YAW ACCEPTABLE _ 941_ . -_._, _--;--- , , _-4 " I NC~ I30B_ 0 .STRAIGHT-WING _r,deg I_ "J'/_._. "YAW RATE DAMPING _='_..._ XS_------_ LECTED SLIPSTEAM -tO _-_k._// "_ROLL RATE 2 SATISFACTORY 3_ MENTED I- "TOTAL -20 L i , I _ , ¢, 20 12 IO B 6 4 0 2 4 6 8 _0 TIME, sec P, sec Figure 5 Figure 6 EFFECT OF AUGMENTATION ON PEAK SIDESLIP ANGLE IN TURN ENTRIES COMPARISON OF YAW DAMPING AND _ DAMPING NC-130B AIRCRAFT O, @, deg -I0 NC- 130 B -o <[ BASIC AUGMENTED I0 -B --YAW RATE DAMPING ------,8 DAMPING 0 _ -... , , , , r,radlsec -.04 1 "_ iiO I 1 2O 30 _, , i i i -'080 4 6 8 IO BANK ANGLE, deg t, sec Figure 8 Figure 7

3zT

34. LOW-SPEED FLIGHT CHARACTERISTICS OF A POWERED-LI_T JET TRANSPORT DURING THE LANDING APPROACH By Robert O. Schade and Harold L. Crane NASA Langley Research Center SUMMARY A flight-test program to determine the flight characteristics of large jet transports equipped with powered-lift systems indicated the following results: Speed margins appear to be primarily related to power-on stall speeds. At these speed margins, the maneuver margins were adequate and did not appear to be a problem or limiting factor during powered-lift operation. No large detrimental effects on handling qualities were apparent but in some areas stability augmen- tation would be required to obtain satisfactory flight characteristics. Use of the powered-lift airplane would result in a sizable increase in the noise levels; these increases are primarily the result of higher engine power settings in the approach.

INTRODUCTION In recent years, the development of the high-speed jet transport has emphasized the need for high lift to reduce the approach and landing speeds.

Lower approach and landing speeds are desirable from the standpoint of reducing landing distance, lowering weather minimums, and obtaining greater safety.

One method of improving the lift capabilities of these aircraft is to use a powered-lift system such as boundary-layer control or "blown flaps." Before such systems can be considered for future application or operational use, how- ever, a considerable amount of research will be required in the areas of perform- ance margins, handling qualities, and engine noise. In order to obtain some information in these three areas, the Langley Research Center has recently com- pleted a flight-test program to determine the flight characteristics of a large powered-lift jet transport in the landing approach.

AIRPLANE AND EQUIPMENT The airplane used in the investigation was the original Boeing 707 proto- type_ modified to provide high-lift capability and to improve flying qualities at low speeds. (See ref. i.) The general arrangement of the airplane is shown in the photograph of figure i.

The 35 ° swept wing was modified with leading-edge devices which included a fixed slat from the wing tip to the inboard engine pylon and a fixed cam- bered Kreuger type of flap from the inboard pylon halfway to the fuselage. A simple hinged_ trailing-edge flap was used that extended from the fuselage to 68 percent of the wing semispan. The average ratio of flap chord to wing chord was 22.2 percent and the maximum flap deflection was 85 ° .

The powered-lift system is illustrated in figure 2. In operation_ the boundary-layer-control air was bled from each of the four JT3D engine compres- sors into two separate ducting systems. Each ducting system covered the full span of the flaps. The blowing nozzles alternated between these two distribu- tion ducts to minimize the loss of lift in the event of failure of one of the systems. These nozzles blew through an ejector at the knee of the flap, and entrained secondary air; thereby the blowing momentum was increased by approxi- mately 30 percent.

In order to operate the engines at the high powers required for the powered-lift system and still obtain the low thrust settings required for the landing-approach condition, a thrust modulation system was used. The normal clamshell-type thrust reversers located in each of the four engine primary tailpipes were modified to be continuously variable through their entire opera- tion range from maximum thrust to essentially zero thrust by a set of four levers located on the pilot's console. This thrust modulation system offered a very fast-acting speed control during the landing approach when compared with the response of the normal throttle control. The system was used in place of the normal throttle control during all powered-lift conditions.

TEST PROCEDURES Configurations The configurations tested in the investigation included the basic airplane and the airplane with various amounts of powered lift. This paper includes only two of the configurations - the basic airplane without the powered-lift system in operation for a base line to determine the effects of powered lift and a configuration with full powered lift to obtain indications of the maxi- mum changes in flight characteristics.

Evaluation Tasks Preliminary evaluation tests were made under conditions of Visual Flight Rules (VFR) at a safe altitude to insure safety of procedures and to define the desired flight conditions for the final landing-approach evaluation tests.

After these tests, final pilot evaluation was obtained under conditions of simulated (hooded) Instrument Flight Rules (IFR) during approach to landing.

Hooded approaches were used in order to provide a precision pilot task repre- sentative of those that are used during actual operations.

For the basic task, an intercept of the localizer was made approximately 8 miles from the runway at an altitude of 1500 feet. The airspeed and flight conditions were then stabilized. At the intercept of the glide slope, 32O

approximately 5 miles from the runway, the descent was initiated and the pilot

attempted to fly the prescribed flight path as closely as possible down to

approximately 200 feet and, if conditions were favorable, to continue visually

to touchdown. Sometests were madewith the localizer offset 200 feet from the

runway center llne. After the simulated IFR breakout at 200 feet of altitude_

the pilot performed a visual sidestep maneuverin order to line up with the

runway.

All final evaluations were madewith the minimum safe approach speeds at

which the pilots felt they could makeconsistent approaches and landings.

These selected minimumsafe approach speeds enabled the pilots to evaluate the

study handling-qualities characteristics in the speed area where problems were

likely to be most severe. Flight tests were conducted under good ceiling and

visibility weather conditions with light to moderate winds of i0 knots or less

and gusts below 5 knots.

RESULTS ANDDISCUSSION

Criteria for Performance Margins

The performance margins established by the Federal Aviation Agency (FAA)

for present-day commercial transport airplanes (see ref. 2) are illustrated in

figure 3. The requirements specify a minimumapproach speed of 1.3 times the

power-off stall speed VSTAL L. By using this minimumapproach speed, the

resulting maneuvermargin - which is the difference between the lift required

and the maximum lift available - is 0.44g. This difference meansthat the air-

plane, when flying at 1.3 times the power-off stall_ has a maximum pull-up

maneuver capability of 0.44g from level flight. These speed and maneuvermar-

gins have proven to be adequate for conventional aircraft.

For powered-lift airplanes_ the use of speed and maneuvermargins based on

power-off stall speeds may no longer be applicable because powered-lift systems

require essentially full power to operate. Another factor which also must be

considered is that the maximum lift coefficient CL,MA X for powered-lift air-

planes is no longer constant over the speed range because of the variation in

blowing momentum with forward speed (as forward speed decreases with a given

power setting 3 the sameamountof blowing becomeseffectively larger in relation

to the airspeed).

It may be noted that the designated stall speed shown in figure 3 is a

minimum, steady-flight speed which is actually beyond the stall or below the

lift coefficient C L required for i g flight. In this condition, the airplane

is not capable of ig flight and is experiencing a normal acceleration close to

0.i g downward. In this low-speed flight investigation, all stall speeds were

referred to the i g stall or the minimumspeed at which the airplane can develop

lift equal to the weight of the airplane.

Powered-lift speed and maneuver margins.- The results of the flight tests to establish criteria for speed and maneuver margins are shown in figure 4 where the minimum safe approach speeds selected by the three test pilots (the shaded area) is given for the range of gross weights flown during the flight tests.

For comparison, similar data are shown for the basic airplane. The data for the basic airplane are shown in relation to the normal lg stall speed, and the data for the powered-lift airplane are shown in relation to the power-on i g stall speed. The pilots' selected minimum safe approach speeds for the basic airplane were at, or just below, 1.2 times the stall speed for the range of gross weights flown and indicated a close relationship between the minimum approach speeds and the stall. If the difference between the FAA stall speed and the stall speed used in this investigation is taken into account, this relationship becomes essentially the same as the FAA specified minimum-approach- speed criteria of 1.3 times the stall speed. Except for the power-on stall speed being used, the relationship for the powered-lift airplane was the same as that for the basic airplane_ that is, the pilots' selected minimum safe approach speeds were about 1.2 times the power-on stall speed.

The minimum safe approach speeds for the powered-lift airplane resulted in maneuver margins of 1.42g. This maneuver margin, which was essentially the same as that obtained for present-day airplanes, was adequate and, as would be expected, did not appear to be a problem or limiting factor.

Pitch attitude.- Although the stall speed was apparently the most signifi- cant single factor in establishing the minimum approach speed for the powered- lift airplane, there was another factor that was of concern to the pilots - the pitch attitude of the airplane during powered-lift operation. During approach and landing, the nose-down attitude caused the pilots concern that, during the landing flare, the airplane would touch down nose wheel first with a resulting rebounding of the aircraft.

Illustrated in figure 5 are typical test results showing the body attitude for the basic airplane and the airplane with powered lift. Shown as the shaded area is the pilots' established_ desired pitch attitude range for operation of the aircraft. This attitude range represents an area in which the airplane would not inadvertently touch down nose wheel first nor tail skid first during the landing flare. From the flight-test data shown in figure 5, it can be seen that the airplane body pitch attitude varied from the high side of the desirable range for the basic airplane to below, or outside, the desirable range for the powered-lift airplane. The nose-down pitch attitude during powered-lift opera- tion was of sufficient concern to the pilots that they would have preferred lower approach speeds in order to raise the nose. However_ the lower approach speed could not be utilized because of the close proximity to stall.

Handling Qualities A considerable portion of the flight-test time of this investigation was used to determine the effects of powered-lift operation on the handling qualities of the airplane. Shown in figure 6 are some typical flight-test results which indicate that there were no large detrimental effects on the flight characteris- tics of the airplane resulting from use of powered lift. It appears from this figure that the task of flying the simulated IFR approach could be done just as well, or perhaps even better, with powered lift. This tendency was further indicated by the more accurate landings that were made during powered-lift oper- ation. Illustrated in figure 7 are the results for the actual airplane touch- down points in relation to a runway target touchdown point on the runway 1500 feet from the runway threshold. Zero indicates the target touchdown point, negative values are for landings that undershot the target, and positive values are for landings that overshot the target. It can be seen that, at the lower approach speeds with the powered-lift airplane, the dispersion from the target tends to be less. It appears that this was the result of the considerably lower approach speeds of the powered-lift airplane which gave the pilot more time to make corrections and to aline the airplane with the target before touchdown.

Handling-Qualities Problem Areas Although there were no large detrimental effects on flight characteristics resulting from the use of powered lift, there were some areas in which the handling qualities did noticeably deteriorate. These areas were related to Dutch roll, lateral directional cross coupling, and longitudinal trim changes in ground effect. It is felt that the deterioration of the handling qualities in these three areas was not a function of the particular test airplane but rather inherent problem areas which must be considered during the operation of jet transports with blown-flap powered-lift systems.

Dutch roll.- In the flight tests_ the Dutch roll oscillations, which were lightly damped for the basic airplane_ become unstable for the powered-lift air- plane. Since the unstable Dutch roll motion was undesirable from the standpoint of obtaining good pilot evaluation, a series of tests were conducted to estab- lish what stability augmentation would be required to stabilize this motion satisfactorily. These results indicated that a Cn_ sideslip rate damper, which gave yawing moment in response to rate of sideslip, adequately damped the Dutch roll motion. The function of this sideslip rate damper is very similar to that of a normal yaw damper except that it measures the rate of change of sideslip angle rather than the rate of change of azimuth heading.

Cross coupling.- During powered-lift operation, it became apparent that there was a large amount of adverse lateral directional cross coupling (adverse yaw due to roll); this was particularly true at the lowest speeds that were flown. A combination of two stability augmentation systems was used to mini- mize the cross-coupling effects: a Cn5 a turn coordinator which gave yawing moment in response to aileron control to counteract the adverse yaw due to aileron deflection; and a Cn_ roll decoupler which gave yawing moment in response to rolling to counteract adverse yaw due to rolling.

With these augmentation systems operating, the adverse sideslip due to roll was essentially eliminated at the minimum approach speeds used for powered-llft configurations.

Ground effects.- The airplane also exhibited a large nose-down longitudinal trim change in ground effect. This change resulted in considerably larger elevator deflections being required by the pilot during the landing flare than those normally used for the basic airplane. This trim change appears to be the result of the large change in downwash angle at the tail. It is believed that, because of the relatively large angles of downwash associated with the high-lift operation of powered-lift systems, this trim change will be an inherent problem with aircraft of this type.

Engine Noise Engine noise is considered a problem with conventional jet aircraft during the landing approach. With the powered-lift airplane, the noise problem becomes more acute since high engine power is required during the landing approach for operation of the powered-lift system.

Some indications of the magnitude of this engine noise problem were obtained during the flight program. The results of these tests are shown in figure 8 as a comparison of the relative perceived noise levels (PNdB) for the basic airplane and the powered-lift airplane. The noise values were measured approximately 0.8 mile from touchdown during 3° glide-slope landing approaches.

Zero time indicates the airplane is overhead; plus values indicate airplane noise before it is overhead; and minus values indicate airplane noise after it has passed overhead. It can be seen that the use of powered lift with its high power settings increased the maximum peak noise level approximately i0 PNdB.

Basically, this increase in noise is the result of the high engine power set- ting, and the methods of reducing the noise levels on the landing approach would be the same as those used during the take-off. Two possible methods would be lower thrust levels (by better blowing efficiency) and use of steeper approach paths above the normal 2.5 ° or 3.0 °.

In addition, figure 8 shows that the duration of the higher intensity noise is much longer for the airplane with powered lift than that for the basic airplane. The results of reference 5 indicate that, if this increased duration were taken into consideration, it would tend to increase the ratings of per- ceived noise level in decibels (PNdB) further. For example, doubling the dura- tion of the same noise level would increase the I=NdB ratings by approximately 4.5. The apparent increase in noise level with longer duration was very notice- able to the people located below the powered-lift airplane during the landing approaches.

CONCLUDING REMARKS An investigation has been conducted to provide some preliminary information concerning the low-speed flight characteristics of large jet transports equipped with powered-lift systems.

In relation to possible criteria for performance margins for powered-lift airplanes, the speed margins appear to be primarily related to power-on stall speeds. At these speed margins_ the maneuver margins were adequate and did not appear to be a problem or a limiting factor during powered-lift operation.

Although there were no large detrimental effects on handling qualities resulting from the use of powered lift, there were some areas in which the handling qualities had deteriorated sufficiently that they needed stability aug- mentation to obtain satisfactory flight characteristics.

The powered-lift airplane showed sizable increases in noise levels which were primarily the result of the higher engine power settings in the approach.

REFERENCES i. Gratzer, L. B.; and O'Donnell, T. J.: The Development of a BLC High-Lift System for High Speed Airplanes. Paper No. 64-589, Am. Inst. Aeron.

Astronaut., Aug. 1964.

2. Anon.: Airworthiness Standards: Transport Category Airplanes. Federal Aviation Regulation Part 25, Rules Service Co. (Washington, D.C.), Feb. i, 1965.

3. Kryter_ Karl D.; and Pearsons, Karl S.: Some Effects of Spectral Content and Duration on Perceived Noise Level. NASA TN D-1873, 1963.

BLC FLAP INSTALLATION TEST AIRPLANE

L-2431-1

Figure 2

Figure 1

ILLUSTRATION OF SPEED AND MANEUVER MARGINS POSSIBLE CRITERIA RELATED TO SPEED AND MANEUVER MARGINS I30 1 0 0 LIFT COEFFICIENT SPEED, KNOTS

Figure 3

AIRPLANE PITCH ATTITUDE LIMITATIONS APPROACHES WITH AND WITHOUT POWERED LIFT I_NOSE-DOWN LIMIT /-NOSE~UP LIMIT 4rxlO3 --BASIC AIRPLANE, AT 120 KNOTS ,' f/ "_J_ ...... POWERED-LIFT AIRPLANE, AT 90 KNOTS D ISTANCE, .... __ _ ......... _ .

i .,,,_/LPOWERED+LIFT i _\\_'_\\_'_l / i AIRPLANE FT ;_- RUNWAY v V --- _'_LOCALIZER .4LxI03 I I LIFT I i -xlO 3 COEFFICIENT _ I ' E "I _%_LJ +

"+t DE

i _\_ t OMm_MUM SAFE SPEED ALTITUDE, #- i _ I TEST CONDITIONS / I I 1.2 - ___ _ _ SLOPE I I I I FT _ _UNWAY --IDESIRED RANGE I I I l I I • _\\\\\\\\\\\\_ I 0 .5 1.0 1.5 2+0 2+5 3.0 x 103 BODY PITCH ATTITUDE HORIZONTAL DISTANCE, FT Ftgu.re ,5 Figure 6 NOISE LEVELS FOR AIRPLANES WITH AND WITHOUT EFFECT OF APPROACH SPEED ON LANDING DISPERSION POWERED LIFT I0 13o / \./- POWERED-LFT / o o o o / \ c - l _ o o o BASIC AIRPLANE IlO, RELATNE - APPROACH --FO@ERE_ PERCEIVEDNOISE IC SPEED, LI FT <3 LEVEL, KNOTS AIRPLANE -0 0 0 PNdB |OC

1 ° ° -2(

o o g 9D o -_+ _ _},, 80 I I I I I TIME SEC -400 -200 0 ZOO 400 +O0 BOO DISPERSION FROM RUNWAY TARGET, FT Figure 8 Figure 7 NASA-Langley, 1965 327

Source & rights

Source: ntrs.nasa.gov. Public-domain U.S. Government work (17 USC §105) — freely reproducible.

Permanent URL — we don’t break links.

Report a problem or request removal

Document details

Doc number
19650021499
Publisher
NASA
Year
1965
Pages
315
File size
27 MB